veterinary clinic caribbean primate research …€¦ · veterinary clinic caribbean primate...

VETERINARY CLINIC CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER

UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO SABANA SECA, PUERTO RICO

SPECIFICATIONS

VOL. 2

VETERINARY CLINIC CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER

UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO SABANA SECA, PUERTO RICO

SPECIFICATIONS

PREPARED BY:

1700 EAST GUDE DRIVE

ROCKVILLE, MARYLAND 20850 TEL: (301) 424-1934 FAX: (301) 424-3028

NOVEMBER 11, 2011

VETERINARY CLINIC CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO

TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 010000 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 011000 SUMMARY 012500 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012600 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 013100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013200 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013233 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 014000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014200 REFERENCES 015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 017300 EXECUTION 017419 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017839 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017900 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 018113 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 019113 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE 033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE DIVISION 04 - MASONRY 042000 UNIT MASONRY DIVISION 05 - METALS 055000 METAL FABRICATIONS 055213 PIPE AND TUBE RAILING 055300 METAL GRATINGS DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 061053 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 064023 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 072100 THERMAL INSULATION 075323 ETHYLENE-PROPYLENE-DIENE-MONOMER (EPDM) ROOFING 077100 ROOF SPECIALTIES 077200 ROOF ACCESSORIES 078413 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

VETERINARY CLINIC CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 079200 JOINT SEALANTS DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS 082200 FRP DOORS AND FRAMES 083113 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 083513 FOLDING DOORS 085113 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 087100 DOOR HARDWARE 088000 GLAZING 088300 MIRRORS 089000 LOUVERS AND VENTS DIVISION 09 - FINISHES 092216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092300 GYPSUM PLASTERING 092400 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING 092900 GYPSUM BOARD 093000 TILING 095113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 096513 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096516 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING 096723 RESINOUS MATRIX EPOXY FLOORING099113 EXTERIOR PAINTING 099123 INTERIOR PAINTING 099600 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 101400 SIGNAGE 102600 WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION 102800 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 104413 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 104416 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT 115315 LABORATORY BIOSAFETY CABINET115320 CAGE AND RACK WASHER DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS 123553 LABORATORY CASEWORK DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT 142400 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING 220500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 220517 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

VETERINARY CLINIC CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 220518 ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220519 METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220553 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220700 PLUMBING INSULATION 220716 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT INSULATION 220800 COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING 221113 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 221116 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221119 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221123 DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS 221124 DOMESTIC-WATER PACKAGE BOOSTER PUMPS 221216 FACILITY POTABLE-WATER STORAGE TANKS 221313 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS 221316 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221319 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221429 SUMP PUMPS221513 GENERAL-SERVICE COMPRESSED-AIR PIPING 222213 STEAM AND CONDENSATE-PIPING 223100 DOMESTIC WATER SOFTENERS 223400 FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS 224000 PLUMBING FIXTURES 224300 HEALTHCARE PLUMBING FIXTURES224500 EMERGENCY PLUMBING FIXTURES 225100 BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS 225239 FUEL-FIRE TUBELESS STEAM BOILERS DIVISION 23 - HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 230500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 230519 METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230593 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 230594 CONSTANT VOLUME FUME HOODS ON SITE TESTING 230700 HVAC INSULATION 230800 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC 230900 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230995 LABORATORY AIR-FLOW VENTURI AIR TERMINAL VALVES 231126 FACILITY LIQUEFIED-PETROLEUM GAS PIPING 232113 HYDRONIC PIPING 232500 HVAC AND STEAM BOILERS WATER TREATMENT 233113 METAL DUCTS

VETERINARY CLINIC CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 233300 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233416 CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS 233423 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 233713 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 236423 SCROLL WATER CHILLERS 237313 MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS 238216 AIR COILS DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL 260500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260923 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 262416 PANELBOARDS 262726 WIRING DEVICES 262816 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262913 ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 262923 VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS 263213 ENGINE GENERATORS 263600 TRANSFER SWITCHES 264113 LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR STRUCTURES 265100 INTERIOR LIGHTING 265200 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS 270500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 283111 DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK 311000 SITE CLEARING 312000 EARTH MOVING DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 321216 ASPHALT PAVING 321313 CONCRETE PAVING 329200 TURF AND GRASSES

VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO

SECTION 220500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems. 2. Transition fittings. 3. Dielectric fittings. 4. Sleeves. 5. Escutcheons. 6. Grout. 7. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections. 8. Painting and finishing. 9. Supports and anchorages.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.

B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.

C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.

D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in chases.

E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.

F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:

1. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic. 2. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic.

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 1


3. PE: Polyethylene plastic. 4. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

G. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:

1. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber. 2. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Transition fittings. 2. Dielectric fittings. 3. Escutcheons.

B. Welding certificates.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."

B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping." 2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes

involved and that certification is current.

C. Electrical Characteristics for Plumbing Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.


VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 1.7 COORDINATION

A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for plumbing installations.

B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.

C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for plumbing items requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified.

2.2 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS

A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods.

B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.

2.3 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.

B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents.

1. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.



F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

H. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:

1. ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235. 2. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493. 3. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656. 4. PVC to ABS Piping Transition: ASTM D 3138.

I. Fiberglass Pipe Adhesive: As furnished or recommended by pipe manufacturer.

2.4 TRANSITION FITTINGS

A. AWWA Transition Couplings: Same size as, and with pressure rating at least equal to and with ends compatible with, piping to be joined.

1. Available Manufacturers:

a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co. b. Dresser Industries, Inc.; DMD Div. c. Ford Meter Box Company, Incorporated (The); Pipe Products Div. d. JCM Industries. e. Smith-Blair, Inc. f. Viking Johnson.

2. Underground Piping NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Manufactured fitting or coupling. 3. Underground Piping NPS 2 and Larger: AWWA C219, metal sleeve-type coupling. 4. Aboveground Pressure Piping: Pipe fitting.

B. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings: PVC one-piece fitting with manufacturer's Schedule 80 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-cement-joint end.


a. Eslon Thermoplastics.

C. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Adaptors: One-piece fitting with manufacturer's SDR 11 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-cement-joint end.


a. Thompson Plastics, Inc.



D. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Unions: MSS SP-107, PVC four-part union. Include brass end, solvent-cement-joint end, rubber O-ring, and union nut.


a. NIBCO INC. b. NIBCO, Inc.; Chemtrol Div.

E. Flexible Transition Couplings for Underground Nonpressure Drainage Piping: ASTM C 1173 with elastomeric sleeve, ends same size as piping to be joined, and corrosion-resistant metal band on each end.


a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co. b. Fernco, Inc. c. Mission Rubber Company. d. Plastic Oddities, Inc.

2.5 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder-joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.

B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.

C. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure at 180 deg F.


a. Capitol Manufacturing Co. b. Central Plastics Company. c. Eclipse, Inc. d. Epco Sales, Inc. e. Hart Industries, International, Inc. f. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. g. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div.

D. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.


a. Calpico, Inc. b. Lochinvar Corp.

E. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.




a. Perfection Corp. b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co., Inc.

2.6 SLEEVES

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.

B. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.

1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.

2.7 ESCUTCHEONS

A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening.

B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-plated finish.

C. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw.

1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated.

D. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw.

1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated.

E. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With spring clips and chrome-plated finish.

F. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With concealed or exposed-rivet hinge, , and chrome-plated finish.

G. One-Piece, Floor-Plate Type: Cast-iron floor plate.

2.8 GROUT

A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.

1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.



2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. 3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

G. Install piping at indicated slopes.

H. Install piping free of sags and bends.

I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

J. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following:

1. New Piping:

a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type. b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated

finish. c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type with spring clips. d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-

brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.



e. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece or split-casting, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.

f. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished rough-brass finish.

g. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, floor-plate type.

M. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

N. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor and roof slabs.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.

2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed. 3. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between

sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:

a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6. b. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing.

Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level. Refer to Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing.

1) Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with grout.

4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Refer to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation.

O. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter.

P. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

Q. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

R. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in requirements.


VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 3.2 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.

E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.

F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

G. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:

1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements.

2. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.

3. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.

H. Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139.

I. Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212.

3.3 PIPING CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

2. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals.



3. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals.

3.4 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are not indicated.

B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install plumbing equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.

D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.

3.5 PAINTING

A. Painting of plumbing systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 09 Sections "Interior Painting" and "Exterior Painting."

B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish.

3.6 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES

A. Refer to Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor plumbing materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.

3.7 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES

A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support, and anchor plumbing materials and equipment.

B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood members.

C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.


VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 3.8 GROUTING

A. Mix and install grout for plumbing equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors.

B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.

C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.

D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.

E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.

F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.

G. Place grout around anchors.

H. Cure placed grout.

END OF SECTION 220500



SECTION 220513 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose, horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on ac power systems up to 600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment manufacturer for field installation.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the following:

1. Motor controllers. 2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load. 3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence. 4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with requirements in this Section except when stricter requirements are specified in plumbing equipment schedules or Sections.

B. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.

C. Comply with IEEE 841 for severe-duty motors.

2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS

A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet above sea level. Power factor at rated duty minimum 90%.

COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 220513 - 1


B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.

2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS

A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.

B. Efficiency: Energy efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1- 1998 Table 12-12.

C. Service Factor: 1.15.

D. Multispeed Motors: Variable torque.

1. For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding. 2. For motors with other than 2:1 speed ratio, separate winding for each speed.

E. Multispeed Motors: Separate winding for each speed.

F. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage.

G. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.

H. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating.

I. Insulation: Class F.

J. Code Letter Designation: 1. Motors Smaller than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.

K. Enclosure Material: Rolled steel for motor frame sizes smaller than 324T.

2.4 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS

A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor application:

1. Permanent-split capacitor.

B. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type.

C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.

D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type.

E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor



insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)




SECTION 220517 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Sleeves. 2. Stack-sleeve fittings. 3. Sleeve-seal systems. 4. Grout.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES

A. Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated, with plain ends.

B. PVC-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.

2.2 STACK-SLEEVE FITTINGS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co. 2. Zurn Specification Drainage Operation; Zurn Plumbing Products Group.

B. Description: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping ring, bolts, and nuts for membrane flashing.

1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with setscrews.

SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220517 - 1

VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 2.3 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS


1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. 2. CALPICO, Inc. 3. Metraflex Company (The). 4. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. 5. Proco Products, Inc.

B. Description: Modular sealing-element unit, designed for field assembly, for filling annular space between piping and sleeve.

1. Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

2. Pressure Plates: Plastic. 3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to

sealing elements.

2.4 GROUT

A. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.

B. Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.

C. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.

B. For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed, select sleeves of size large enough to provide 1-inch annular clear space between piping and concrete slabs and walls.

1. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

C. Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls as new slabs and walls are constructed.

1. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes in slabs formed by molded-PE or -PP sleeves.




a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level.

3. Using grout, seal the space outside of sleeves in slabs and walls without sleeve-seal system.

D. Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. 2. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between

sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. 3. Seal annular space between sleeve and piping or piping insulation; use joint sealants

appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements for sealants specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

E. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements for firestopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

3.2 STACK-SLEEVE-FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install stack-sleeve fittings in new slabs as slabs are constructed.

1. Install fittings that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation.

2. Secure flashing between clamping flanges for pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing. Comply with requirements for flashing specified in Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

3. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level.

4. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.

5. Using grout, seal the space around outside of stack-sleeve fittings.

B. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements for firestopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at service piping entries into building.

B. Select type, size, and number of sealing elements required for piping material and size and for sleeve ID or hole size. Position piping in center of sleeve. Center piping in penetration, assemble sleeve-seal system components, and install in annular space between piping and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make a watertight seal.


VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 3.4 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL SCHEDULE

A. Use sleeves and sleeve seals for the following piping-penetration applications:

1. Exterior Concrete Walls above Grade:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Cast-iron wall sleeves Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves.

2. Exterior Concrete Walls below Grade:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Cast-iron wall sleeves with sleeve-seal system Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system.

1) Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.


3. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves with sleeve-seal system .


4. Concrete Slabs above Grade:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: PVC-pipe sleeves .

5. Interior Partitions:

a. Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: PVC-pipe sleeves.




SECTION 220518 - ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Escutcheons. 2. Floor plates.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ESCUTCHEONS

A. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With polished, chrome-plated and rough-brass finish and setscrew fastener.

B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners.

C. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish and spring-clip fasteners.

2.2 FLOOR PLATES

A. One-Piece Floor Plates: Cast-iron flange with holes for fasteners.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and finished floors.

ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220518 - 1


B. Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and with OD that completely covers opening.

1. Escutcheons for New Piping:

a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type. b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass or split-casting brass type with

polished, chrome-plated finish. c. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type or split-plate, stamped-steel or

split-plate, stamped-steel type with exposed-rivet hinge. d. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-

brass or split-casting brass type with polished, chrome-plated finish. e. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel

type or split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge. f. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass or split-casting

brass type with finish. g. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass or split-casting brass type

with rough-brass finish.

C. I=nstall floor plates for piping penetrations of equipment-room floors.

D. Install floor plates with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with OD that completely covers opening.

1. New Piping: One-piece, floor-plate type. 2. Existing Piping: Split-casting, floor-plate type.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Replace broken and damaged escutcheons and floor plates using new materials.


ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220518 - 2


SECTION 220519 - METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Liquid-in-glass thermometers. 2. Thermowells. 3. Dial-type pressure gages. 4. Gage attachments.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Certificates: For each type of meter and gage, from manufacturer.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For meters and gages to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

1.4 LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS

A. Metal-Case, Compact-Style, Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Trerice, H. O. Co.

b. Ashcroft Inc. c. Ametex, Inc; US Gauge.

2. Standard: ASME B40.200. 3. Case: Cast aluminum; 6-inch nominal size. 4. Case Form: Straight unless otherwise indicated. 5. Tube: Glass with magnifying lens and blue or red organic liquid. 6. Tube Background: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings

graduated in deg F and deg C.

METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220519 - 1


7. Window: Glass or plastic. 8. Stem: Aluminum or brass and of length to suit installation.

a. Design for Thermowell Installation: Bare stem.

9. Connector: 3/4 inch, with ASME B1.1 screw threads. 10. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range or one scale division, to a maximum of

1.5 percent of scale range.

1.5 THERMOWELLS

A. Thermowells:

1. Standard: ASME B40.200. 2. Description: Pressure-tight, socket-type fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting. 3. Material for Use with Copper Tubing: CNR or CUNI. 4. Type: Stepped shank unless straight or tapered shank is indicated. 5. External Threads: NPS 3/4. 6. Internal Threads: 3/4 inch, with ASME B1.1 screw threads. 7. Bore: Diameter required to match thermometer bulb or stem. 8. Insertion Length: Length required to match thermometer bulb or stem. 9. Lagging Extension: Include on thermowells for insulated piping and tubing. 10. Bushings: For converting size of thermowell's internal screw thread to size of

thermometer connection.

B. Heat-Transfer Medium: Mixture of graphite and glycerin.

1.6 PRESSURE GAGES

A. Direct-Mounted, Metal-Case, Dial-Type Pressure Gages:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. AMETEK, Inc.; U.S. Gauge.

b. Ashcroft Inc. c. Ernst Flow Industries. d. Marsh Bellofram. e. Palmer Wahl Instrumentation Group. f. Trerice, H. O. Co. g. Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. h. Weiss Instruments, Inc.

2. Standard: ASME B40.100.

3. Case: Liquid-filled type(s); cast aluminum or drawn steel; 4-1/2-inch nominal diameter. 4. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube unless otherwise indicated.



5. Pressure Connection: Brass, with NPS 1/4, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and bottom-outlet type unless back-outlet type is indicated.

6. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer. 7. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in psi

and kPa. 8. Pointer: Dark-colored metal. 9. Window: Glass. 10. Ring: Brass. 11. Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle half of scale range.

1.7 GAGE ATTACHMENTS

A. Snubbers: ASME B40.100, brass; with NPS 1/4, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and piston -type surge-dampening device. Include extension for use on insulated piping.

B. Valves: Brass or stainless-steel needle, with NPS 1/4, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.

PART 2 - EXECUTION

2.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install thermowells with socket extending a minimum of 2 inches into fluid one-third of pipe

B.

VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 2.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and maintenance of meters, gages, machines, and equipment.

2.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.

2.4 THERMOMETER SCHEDULE

A. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each domestic water heater shall be the following:

1. Compact -style, liquid-in-glass type.

B. Thermometer stems shall be of length to match thermowell insertion length.

2.5 THERMOMETER SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE

A. Scale Range for Domestic Hot-Water Piping: 0 to 250 deg F.

B. Scale Range for Steam Piping: 50 to 500 deg F.

2.6 PRESSURE-GAGE SCHEDULE

A. Pressure gages at discharge of each water service into building shall be the following:

1. Liquid-filled, direct -mounted, metal case.

B. Pressure gages at inlet and outlet of each water pressure-reducing valve shall be the following:

1. Liquid-filled direct-mounted, metal case.

2.7 PRESSURE-GAGE SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE

A. Scale Range for Domestic Water Piping: 0 to 100 psi.

B. Scale Range for Steam Piping: 0 to 160 deg F.




SECTION 220523 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Bronze ball valves. 2. Bronze swing check valves. 3. Bronze gate valves. 4. Bronze globe valves.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 22 plumbing piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections only.

2. Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for valve tags and schedules.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CWP: Cold working pressure.

B. EPDM: Ethylene propylene copolymer rubber.

C. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber.

D. NRS: Nonrising stem.

E. RS: Rising stem.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated.

GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 - 1

VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single manufacturer.

B. ASME Compliance:

1. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria. 2. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.

C. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable-water service.


A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:

1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends. 3. Set angle, gate, and globe valves closed to prevent rattling. 4. Set ball and valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces. 5. Block check valves in either closed or open position.

B. Use the following precautions during storage:

1. Maintain valve end protection. 2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew point temperature. If

outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.

C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES

A. Refer to valve schedule articles for applications of valves.

B. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures.

C. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.

D. Valve Actuator Types: 1. Handwheel: For valves other than quarter-turn types.

E. Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch stem extensions and the following features:

1. Gate Valves: With rising stem.



2. Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material, and protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or disturbing insulation.

F. Valve-End Connections: 1. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18. 2. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.

G. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.

H. Three-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Stainless-Steel Trim:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. b. Grinnell c. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves. d. Hammond Valve. e. Milwaukee Valve Company. f. NIBCO INC.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-110. b. SWP Rating: 150 psig. c. CWP Rating: 600 psig. d. Body Design: Three piece. e. Body Material: Bronze. f. Ends: Threaded. g. Seats: PTFE or TFE. h. Stem: Stainless steel. i. Ball: Stainless steel, vented. j. Port: Full.

2.2 BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Class 125, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Bronze Disc:


a. Grinnell b. American Valve, Inc. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. d. Hammond Valve. e. Milwaukee Valve Company.



f. NIBCO INC. g. Powell Valves. h. Red-White Valve Corporation. i. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 3. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Design: Horizontal flow. d. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze. e. Ends: Threaded. f. Disc: Bronze.

3. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-125. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron. d. Style: Globe, spring loaded. e. Ends: Flanged. f. Seat: EPDM.

2.3 BRONZE GATE VALVES

A. Class 125, RS Bronze Gate Valves:


a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. b. Grinnell c. Hammond Valve. d. Milwaukee Valve Company. e. NIBCO INC. f. Powell Valves. g. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 2. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet. d. Ends: Threaded or solder joint. e. Stem: Bronze. f. Disc: Solid wedge; bronze. g. Packing: Asbestos free. h. Handwheel: Malleable iron, bronze.


VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 2.4 BRONZE GLOBE VALVES

A. Class 125, Bronze Globe Valves with Bronze Disc:


a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; JenkinsValves. b. Grinnell c. Hammond Valve. d. Milwaukee Valve Company. e. NIBCO INC. f. Powell Valves. g. Red-White Valve Corporation. h. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 1. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet. d. Ends: Threaded or solder joint. e. Stem and Disc: Bronze. f. Packing: Asbestos free. g. Handwheel: Malleable iron, bronze.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling.

B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations.

C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.

D. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.

3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install valves with unions at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.



B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.

D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.

E. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows:

1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.

3.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following:

1. Shutoff Service: Ball, , or gate valves. 2. Throttling Service: Globe valves.

B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted.

C. Select valves, except wafer types, with the following end connections:

1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder-joint valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below.

2. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends.




SECTION 220529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following hangers and supports for plumbing system piping and equipment:

1. Steel pipe hangers and supports. 2. Trapeze pipe hangers. 3. Fastener systems. 4. Equipment supports.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural-steel shapes and plates for trapeze hangers for pipe and equipment supports.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.

B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and Supports."

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.

B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


1. Steel pipe hangers and supports.

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 1


2. Powder-actuated fastener systems.

B. Welding certificates.


A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel." .

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.

2.2 STEEL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. Refer to Part 3 "Hanger and Support Applications" Article for where to use specific hanger and support types.

B. Available Manufacturers:

1. AAA Technology & Specialties Co., Inc. 2. Bergen-Power Pipe Supports. 3. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 4. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc. 5. Empire Industries, Inc. 6. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co. 7. Globe Pipe Hanger Products, Inc. 8. Grinnell Corp.

C. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.

D. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.

E. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion for support of bearing surface of piping.


VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 2.3 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS

A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from structural-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.

2.4 FASTENER SYSTEMS

A. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.


a. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. b. Empire Industries, Inc. c. Hilti, Inc. d. ITW Ramset/Red Head. e. MKT Fastening, LLC. f. Powers Fasteners.

2.5 PIPE POSITIONING SYSTEMS

A. Description: IAPMO PS 42, system of metal brackets, clips, and straps for positioning piping in pipe spaces for plumbing fixtures for commercial applications.


1. C & S Mfg. Corp. 2. HOLDRITE Corp.; Hubbard Enterprises. 3. Samco Stamping, Inc.

2.6 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural-steel shapes.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.

1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.


VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS

A. Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment.

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish.

D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.

E. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.

F. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated stationary pipes, NPS 4.

2. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, if little or no insulation is required.

3. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 4.

G. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 4.

2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 4, if longer ends are required for riser clamps.

H. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads. 2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.

I. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.

2. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.



G. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

H. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.

I. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

J. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

K. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 (for building services piping) are not exceeded.

L. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees.

3. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:

a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick. b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.

4. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield.


A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment above floor.

B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.

C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.

3.4 METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports.



B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours

of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.

B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.

3.6 PAINTING

A. Touch Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

B. Touch Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 09 painting Sections.

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.




SECTION 220548 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Isolation pads. 2. Elastomeric hangers. 3. Spring hangers. 4. Pipe riser resilient supports. 5. Resilient pipe guides. 6. Seismic snubbers. 7. Restraining braces and cables. 8. Steel , vibration isolation equipment bases.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. IBC: International Building Code.

B. ICC-ES: ICC-Evaluation Service.

C. OSHPD: Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development for the State of California.


A. Wind-Restaring Loading:

1. Basic Wind Speed: 150 mph. 2. Building Classification Category: II 3. Minimum 10 lb/sq ft multiplied by the maximum area of the plumbing component

projected on a vertical plane that is normal to the wind direction, and 45 degrees either side of normal.

B. Seismic-Restraint Loading:

1. Site Class as Defined in the IBC: B . 2. Assigned Seismic Use Group or Building Category as Defined in the IBC: II.

VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

220548 - 1


a. Component Importance Factor: 1.0 . b. Component Response Modification Factor: 1.5. c. Component Amplification Factor: 1.0 .

3. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at Short Periods (0.2 Second): 0.167 g< 0.33g. 4. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at 1-Second Period: 0.067g < 0.133g .

1.5 SUBMITTALS


1. Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration isolation device.

2. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each type and size of seismic-restraint component used.

3. Interlocking Snubbers: Include ratings for horizontal, vertical, and combined loads.

B. Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of seismic bracing for plumbing piping and equipment with other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports and seismic restraints.

C. Welding certificates.

D. Field quality-control test reports.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air-mounting systems to include in operation and maintenance manuals.


A. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this Section are more stringent.

B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Ace Mountings Co., Inc. 2. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. 3. California Dynamics Corporation.


220548 - 2


4. Isolation Technology, Inc. 5. Kinetics Noise Control. 6. Mason Industries. 7. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. 8. Vibration Isolation. 9. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.

B. Pads: Arranged in single or multiple layers of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad area, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized-steel baseplates, and factory cut to sizes that match requirements of supported equipment.

1. Resilient Material: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene and/or rubber.

C. Elastomeric Hangers: Single or double-deflection type, fitted with molded, oil-resistant elastomeric isolator elements bonded to steel housings with threaded connections for hanger rods. Color-code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range.

D. Spring Hangers: Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert hanger with spring and insert in compression.

1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.

2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load.

3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without

deformation or failure. 6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washer-reinforced

cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame. 7. Self-centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support

spring coil.

E. Pipe Riser Resilient Support: All-directional, acoustical pipe anchor consisting of 2 steel tubes separated by a minimum of 1/2-inchthick neoprene. Include steel and neoprene vertical-limit stops arranged to prevent vertical travel in both directions. Design support for a maximum load on the isolation material of 500 psig and for equal resistance in all directions.

F. Resilient Pipe Guides: Telescopic arrangement of 2 steel tubes or post and sleeve arrangement separated by a minimum of 1/2-inchthick neoprene. Where clearances are not readily visible, a factory-set guide height with a shear pin to allow vertical motion due to pipe expansion and contraction shall be fitted. Shear pin shall be removable and reinsertable to allow for selection of pipe movement. Guides shall be capable of motion to meet location requirements.

2.2 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICES



220548 - 3

VETERINARY CLINIC CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic-control devices for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations before installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 APPLICATIONS

A. Multiple Pipe Supports: Secure pipes to trapeze member with clamps approved for application by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled on Drawings to receive them and where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods due to seismic forces.

C. Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads within specified loading limits.

3.3 VIBRATION-CONTROL AND SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. Equipment Restraints:

1. Install seismic snubbers on plumbing equipment mounted on vibration isolators. Locate snubbers as close as possible to vibration isolators and bolt to equipment base and supporting structure.

2. Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inches.

3. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction providing required submittals for component.

B. Piping Restraints:

1. Comply with requirements in MSS SP-127. 2. Space lateral supports a maximum of 40 feet o.c., and longitudinal supports a maximum

of 80 feet o.c. 3. Brace a change of direction longer than 12 feet.

C. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.


220548 - 5


D. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction providing required submittals for component.

E. Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media between anchor bolt and mounting hole in concrete base.

F. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall.

G. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.

H. Drilled-in Anchors:

1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.

2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design strength.

3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor is to be fastened.

4. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench. 5. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless steel anchors for exterior

applications.

3.4 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION

A. Install flexible connections in piping where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent sections or branches are supported by different structural elements, and where the connections terminate with connection to equipment that is anchored to a different structural element from the one supporting the connections as they approach equipment. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping" for piping flexible connections.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Perform tests and inspections.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.


220548 - 6


2. Schedule test with Owner, through Architect, before connecting anchorage device to restrained component (unless postconnection testing has been approved), and with at least seven days' advance notice.

3. Obtain Architect's approval before transmitting test loads to structure. Provide temporary load-spreading members.

4. Test at least four of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners selected by Architect.

5. Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device. 6. Measure isolator restraint clearance. 7. Measure isolator deflection. 8. Verify snubber minimum clearances. 9. If a device fails test, modify all installations of same type and retest until satisfactory

results are achieved.

D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust isolators after piping system is at operating weight.

B. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during normal operation.

C. Adjust active height of sprint isolators.

D. Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation.

3.7 PLUMBING VIBRATION-CONTROL AND SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE SCHEDULE

A. Supported or Suspended Equipment:

1. Domestic Water Package Booster Pumps and Package Boiler with accessories:

1) Seismic snubbers attached to skid base

2. Water Heaters

1) Stainless steel straps attached to wall..

3. Air Compressors.

1) Neoprene pads, 0.25 in minimum static detection.

4. Autoclave.

1) Seismic snubbers attached to autoclave base.


220548 - 7


5. Water Softener and Brine Tank.

1) Stainless steel strap attached to wall.

6. Elevate Outdoor Potable Water Storage Tank.

1) Per manufacturer recommendations as shown on installation detail.

7. Boiler Chimney.

1) Restrain cables.



220548 - 8


SECTION 220553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Equipment labels. 2. Pipe labels. 3. Stencils. 4. Valve tags. 5. Warning tags.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification material and device.

C. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed content for each label.

D. Valve numbering scheme.

E. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.

C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220553 - 1

VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS

A. Metal Labels for Equipment:

1. Material and Thickness: Stainless steel, 0.025-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.

2. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.

3. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

4. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws. 5. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

B. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.

C. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

2.2 PIPE LABELS

A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction.

B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.

C. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.

D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.

2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches high.


VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 2.3 VALVE TAGS

A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-inch numbers.

1. Tag Material: Brass, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.

2. Fasteners: Brass wire-link or beaded chain; or S-hook

B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses.

1. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants.

3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.

B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.

3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Piping Color-Coding: Painting of piping is specified in Division 09 Section "Interior Painting."

B. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:

1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.

Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch. 3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures. 4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed

piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.



6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in areas of congested piping and equipment.

7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.

C. Pipe Label Color Schedule:

1. Domestic Water Piping:

a. Background Color: Green. b. Letter Color: White.

2. Domestic Hot Water pIPING

a. Background Color; Yellow. b. Color: Black.

3. Sanitary Waste and Storm Drainage Piping:

a. Background Color: Green. b. Letter Color: White.

3.4 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within factory-fabricated equipment units; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience and lawn-watering hose connections; and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.

B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs:

1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape:

a. Cold Water: 1-1/2 inches round. b. Hot Water: 1-1/2 inches round. c. Low-Pressure Compressed Air: 1-1/2 inches round.

2. Valve-Tag Color:

a. Cold Water: Natural Green. b. Hot Water: Natural. c. Low-Pressure Compressed Air: Natural.

3. Letter Color:

a. Cold Water: Black. b. Hot Water: Black.


VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 3.5 WARNING-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Write required message on, and attach warning tags to, equipment and other items where required.




SECTION 220700 - PLUMBING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Insulation Materials:

a. Cellular glass. b. Mineral fiber.

2. Adhesives. 3. Sealants. 4. Factory-applied jackets.


1. Division 23 Section "HVAC Insulation."

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any).

B. LEED Submittal:

1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives and sealants, including printed statement of VOC content.

C. Samples: For each type of insulation and jacket indicated. Identify each Sample, describing product and intended use. Sample sizes are as follows:

1. Sample Sizes:

a. Preformed Pipe Insulation Materials: 12 inches long by NPS 2.

D. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 - 1


E. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests and test methods employed.


A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less.


A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application.

1.7 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results.

B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction.



2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in Part 3 schedule articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.

B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.

D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795.

E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process.

F. Cellular Glass: Inorganic, incombustible, foamed or cellulated glass with annealed, rigid, hermetically sealed cells. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Cell-U-Foam Corporation; Ultra-CUF. b. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Foamglas Super K.

2. Block Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type I. 3. Special-Shaped Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type III. 4. Board Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type IV. 5. Preformed Pipe Insulation without Jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 1. 6. Preformed Pipe Insulation with Factory-Applied ASJ-SSL: Comply with ASTM C 552,

Type II, Class 2. 7. Factory fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585.

G. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:


a. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; Coreplus 1200. b. Johns Manville; Micro-Lok. c. Knauf Insulation; 1000(Pipe Insulation. d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley-K. e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation.



2. Type I, 850 deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ-SSL. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS

A. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 195.


a. Insulco, Division of MFS, Inc.; Triple I. b. P. K. Insulation Mfg. Co., Inc.; Super-Stik.

2.3 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Cellular-Glass, Phenolic, Polyisocyanurate, and Polystyrene Adhesive: Solvent-based resin adhesive, with a service temperature range of minus 75 to plus 300 deg F.


a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-96. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 81-33.

2. For indoor applications, use adhesive that has a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

C. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-82. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-20. c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; S-90/80. d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225. e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.


D. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.






2.4 MASTICS

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL-C-19565C, Type II.

1. For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below ambient services.


a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-35. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-90. c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB-50. d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 590.

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film thickness.

3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F. 4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 59 percent by volume and 71 percent by weight. 5. Color: White.

2.5 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:

1. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

2.6 TAPES

A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136.




a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0835. b. Compac Corp.; 104 and 105. c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 428 AWF ASJ. d. Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus/SQ.

2. Width: 3 inches. 3. Thickness: 11.5 mils. 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width. 7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.

1. Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects.

2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry. 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.

3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of equipment and piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.

B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of equipment and pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.

C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.

D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.



E. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

F. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

G. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

H. Apply adhesives at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.

I. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as insulation

jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches o.c.

J. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.

K. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.

L. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.

M. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following: 1. Testing agency labels and stamps. 2. Nameplates and data plates.

3.4 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install cellular glass insulation continuously only through roof penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface

and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing.

4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.



B. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install cellular glass insulation continuously only through walls and partitions.

C. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:

1. Pipe: Install cellular glass insulation continuously only through floor penetrations.

3.5 CELLULAR-GLASS INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:

1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.

2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.

3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient services, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.

4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient services, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.

3.6 MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION INSTALLATION


1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.

2. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient surfaces, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.

3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:

1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available.

2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.

C. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:


2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve body.



3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.

4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.

3.7 FINISHES

A. Equipment and Pipe Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Division 09 painting Sections.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.


C. Tests and Inspections: 1. Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Architect, by removing

field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to three locations of straight pipe and three locations of threaded fittings.

D. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements.

3.9 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:

1. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces. 2. Underground piping. 3. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.

3.10 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Domestic Cold Water:

1. NPS 2 ½ and Smaller: Insulation shall be the following:

a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1/2 inch thick.

B. Domestic Hot, Recirculated Hot Water, and Autoclave Chamber Drain:



1. NPS 1 ½ and Smaller: Insulation shall be the following:

a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1 inch thick.

C. Condensate and Equipment Drain Water below 60 Deg F:

1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following:


D. Steam and Steam Condensate, 350 Deg F and below:

1. NPS 3/4 Insert pipe size and Smaller: Insulation shall be the following:

a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I or II: 1-1/2 inches thick.

2. NPS 1 and Larger: Insulation shall be the following:

a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I or II: 3 inches thick.

E. Steam and Steam Condensate, above 350 Deg F:

1. NPS 3/4 and Smaller: Insulation shall be the following:

a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I or II: 1-1/2 inches thick.


a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I or II: 3 inches thick. 3.11 INDOOR WALLS, FLOOR AND BEAMS PIPING PENETRATIONS INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Domestic Cold Water:

1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Insulation shall be the following:

a. Cellular Glass: 1/2 inch thick.

B. Domestic Hot and Recirculated Hot Water:

1. NPS 1-1/4 and Smaller: Insulation shall be the following:

a. Cellular Glass: 1 inch thick.

C. Condensate and Equipment Drain Water below 60 Deg F:


a. Cellular Glass: 1/2 inch thick.



D. Steam and Steam Condensate, 350 Deg F and below:

1. NPS 3/4 Insert pipe size and Smaller: Insulation shall be the following:

a. Cellular Glass: 1-1/2 inches thick.


a. Cellular Glass: 3 inches thick.

E. Steam and Steam Condensate, above 350 Deg F:

1. NPS 3/4 and Smaller: Insulation shall be the following:

a. Cellular Glass: 1-1/2 inches thick.






SECTION 220716 - PLUMBING EQUIPMENT INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes insulating the following plumbing equipment:

1. Domestic water storage tanks. 2. Steam condensate tank and receiver. 3. Steam flash tank. 4. Steam blow-off tank. 5. Hot service vents.


1. Division 22 Section "Plumbing Piping Insulation."

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any).

B. Samples: For each type of insulation and jacket indicated. Identify each Sample, describing product and intended use. Sample sizes are as follows:

1. Sheet Form Insulation Materials: 12 inches square. 2. Sheet Jacket Materials: 12 inches square. 3. Manufacturer's Color Charts: For products where color is specified, show the full range

of colors available for each type of finish material.

C. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

D. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests and test methods employed.

E. Field quality-control reports.

PLUMBING EQUIPMENT INSULATION 220716 - 1



B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.


2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index of 150 or less.



1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with equipment Installer for equipment insulation application.

C. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing.

1.7 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Comply with requirements in "Domestic Water Boiler Breeching Insulation Schedule" and "Equipment Insulation Schedule" articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.





D. Mineral-Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Semirigid board material with factory-applied ASJ complying with ASTM C 1393, Type II or Type IIIA Category 2, or with properties similar to ASTM C 612, Type IB. Nominal density is 2.5 lb/cu. ft. or more. Thermal conductivity (k-value) at 100 deg F is 0.29 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F or less. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. CertainTeed Corp.; CrimpWrap. b. Johns Manville; MicroFlex. c. Knauf Insulation; Pipe and Tank Insulation. d. Manson Insulation Inc.; AK Flex. e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe and Tank Insulation.


A. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C 449.


a. Ramco Insulation, Inc.; Ramcote 1200 and Quik-Cote.

2.3 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated.

B. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.


a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP-127.

b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 225. c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller

Company; 85-60/85-70. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.




3. Use adhesive that complies with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers," including 2004 Addenda.

C. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.




Company; 85-50. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.


3. Use adhesive that complies with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers," including 2004 Addenda.

2.4 MASTICS

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II.

1. For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

B. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient services.




Company; 46-50. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-50. e. Vimasco Corporation; WC-1/WC-5.

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 1.8 perms at 0.0625-inch dry film thickness.



3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F. 4. Solids Content: 60 percent by volume and 66 percent by weight. 5. Color: White.

2.5 SEALANTS

A. FSK Flashing Sealants:




Company; 95-44. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05.

2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 5. Color: Aluminum. 6. For indoor applications, use sealants that have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when

calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 7. Use sealants that comply with the testing and product requirements of the California

Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers," including 2004 Addenda.

B. ASJ Flashing Sealants:



2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 5. Color: White. 6. For indoor applications, use sealants that have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when

calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 7. Use sealants that comply with the testing and product requirements of the California

Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers," including 2004 Addenda.


VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 2.8 SECUREMENTS

A. Bands:


a. ITW Insulation Systems; Gerrard Strapping and Seals. b. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate Strapping, Seals, and Springs.

2. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or Type 316; 0.015 inch thick, 3/4 inch wide with wing seal.

3. Springs: Twin spring set constructed of stainless steel with ends flat and slotted to accept metal bands. Spring size determined by manufacturer for application.

B. Insulation Pins and Hangers:

1. Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.135-inch diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1) AGM Industries, Inc.; CWP-1. 2) GEMCO; CD. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; CD. 4) Nelson Stud Welding; TPA, TPC, and TPS.

2. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.135-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch galvanized carbon-steel washer.


1) AGM Industries, Inc.; CHP-1. 2) GEMCO; Cupped Head Weld Pin. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Cupped Head. 4) Nelson Stud Welding; CHP.

3. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inchthick, stainless-steel sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.


1) AGM Industries, Inc.; RC 150. 2) GEMCO; R-150.



3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; WA-150. 4) Nelson Stud Welding; Speed Clips.

b. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations.

C. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- wide, stainless steel or Monel.

2.9 CORNER ANGLES

A. PVC Corner Angles: 30 mils thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, PVC according to ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C. White or color-coded to match adjacent surface.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.


2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION


B. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated. Before insulating, apply a corrosion coating to insulated surfaces as follows:

1. Carbon Steel: Coat carbon steel operating at a service temperature between 32 and 300 deg F with an epoxy coating. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range.

3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of equipment.

B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item as specified in insulation system schedules.





E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

G. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

H. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

I. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.

1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor

legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.

3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.

J. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.

K. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:




4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written instructions, to maintain vapor seal.

L. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.

M. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.



N. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.

O. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:

1. Vibration-control devices. 2. Testing agency labels and stamps. 3. Nameplates and data plates. 4. Manholes. 5. Handholes. 6. Cleanouts.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT, TANK, AND VESSEL INSULATION

A. Mineral-Fiber, Pipe, and Tank Insulation Installation for Tanks and Vessels: Secure insulation with adhesive and anchor pins and speed washers.

1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of tank surfaces.

2. Groove and score insulation materials to fit as closely as possible to equipment, including contours. Bevel insulation edges for cylindrical surfaces for tight joints. Stagger end joints.

3. Protect exposed corners with secured corner angles. 4. Install adhesively attached or self-sticking insulation hangers and speed washers on sides

of tanks and vessels as follows:

a. Do not weld anchor pins to ASME-labeled pressure vessels. b. Select insulation hangers and adhesive that are compatible with service

temperature and with substrate. c. On tanks and vessels, maximum anchor-pin spacing is 3 inches from insulation end

joints, and 16 inches o.c. in both directions. d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. e. Cut and miter insulation segments to fit curved sides and domed heads of tanks

and vessels. f. Impale insulation over anchor pins and attach speed washers. g. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with

insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing.

5. Secure each layer of insulation with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation materials.

6. Where insulation hangers on equipment and vessels are not permitted or practical and where insulation support rings are not provided, install a girdle network for securing insulation. Stretch prestressed aircraft cable around the diameter of vessel and make taut with clamps, turnbuckles, or breather springs. Place one circumferential girdle around equipment approximately 6 inches from each end. Install wire or cable between two circumferential girdles 12 inches o.c. Install a wire ring around each end and around outer periphery of center openings, and stretch prestressed aircraft cable radially from the



wire ring to nearest circumferential girdle. Install additional circumferential girdles along the body of equipment or tank at a minimum spacing of 48 inches o.c. Use this network for securing insulation with tie wire or bands.

7. Stagger joints between insulation layers at least 3 inches. 8. Install insulation in removable segments on equipment access doors, manholes,

handholes, and other elements that require frequent removal for service and inspection. 9. Bevel and seal insulation ends around manholes, handholes, ASME stamps, and

nameplates. 10. For equipment with surface temperatures below ambient, apply mastic to open ends,

joints, seams, breaks, and punctures in insulation.

3.5 FINISHES

A. Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Division 09 painting Sections.

1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof.

a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size.

B. Color: Final color as selected by Owner. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed Work.

3.6 EQUIPMENT INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are identified below. If more than one material is listed for a type of equipment, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

B. Insulate indoor and outdoor equipment that is not factory insulated.

C. Domestic hot-water storage tank insulation shall be one the following, of thickness to provide an R-value of 12.5:

1. Mineral-fiber pipe and tank.

D. Steam Condensate Tank and receiver installation shall be:

1. Mineral-Fiber Board: 3 inches thick and 2 Lbs/cu.ft nominal density.

E. Steam Flash Tank and Blow-Off Tank Insulation shall be:

1. Mineral-Fiber Board: 3 inches thick and 2 Lbs/cu.ft nominal density.

F. Hot Service Vents:

1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be one of the following:



a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I or II: 1 ½ inch thick.




SECTION 220800 - COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes commissioning process requirements for plumbing systems, assemblies, and equipment.


1. Division 01 Section "General Commissioning Requirements" for general commissioning process requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Commissioning Plan: A document that outlines the organization, schedule, allocation of resources, and documentation requirements of the commissioning process.

B. CxA: Commissioning Authority.

C. Plumbing: The practice materials and fixtures utilized in the installation, maintenance, extension and alteration of all piping, fixtures, plumbing appliances and plumbing appurtenances, within or adjacent to any structure, in connection with sanitary drainage or storm drainage facilities; venting system; and public or private water supply system.

D. Systems, Subsystems, Equipment, and Components: Where these terms are used together or separately, they shall mean "as-built" systems, subsystems, equipment, and components.

1.4 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Perform commissioning tests at the direction of the CxA.

B. Attend construction phase controls coordination meeting.

C. Attend testing, adjusting, and balancing review and coordination meeting.

D. Participate in plumbing systems, assemblies, equipment, and component maintenance orientation and inspection as directed by the CxA.

COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING 220800 - 1


E. Provide information requested by the CxA for final commissioning documentation.

F. Provide measuring instruments and logging devices to record test data, and provide data acquisition equipment to record data for the complete range of testing for the required test period.

1.5 CxA'S RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Provide Project-specific construction checklists and commissioning process test procedures for actual plumbing systems, assemblies, equipment, and components to be furnished and installed as part of the construction contract.

B. Direct commissioning testing.

C. Verify testing, adjusting, and balancing of Work are complete.

D. Provide test data, inspection reports, and certificates in Systems Manual.

1.6 COMMISSIONING DOCUMENTATION

A. Provide the following information to the CxA for inclusion in the commissioning plan:

1. Plan for delivery and review of submittals, systems manuals, and other documents and reports.

2. Identification of installed systems, assemblies, equipment, and components including design changes that occurred during the construction phase.

3. Process and schedule for completing construction checklists and manufacturer's prestart and startup checklists for plumbing systems, assemblies, equipment, and components to be verified and tested.

4. Certificate of completion certifying that installation, prestart checks, and startup procedures have been completed.

5. Certificate of readiness certifying that plumbing systems, subsystems, equipment, and associated controls are ready for testing.

6. Test and inspection reports and certificates. 7. Corrective action documents. 8. Verification of testing, adjusting, and balancing reports.

1.7 SUBMITTALS

A. Certificates of readiness.

B. Certificates of completion of installation, prestart, and startup activities.


VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TESTING PREPARATION

A. Certify that plumbing systems, subsystems, and equipment have been installed, calibrated, and started and are operating according to the Owner’s Project Requirements.

B. Certify that plumbing instrumentation and control systems have been completed and calibrated, that they are operating according to the Owner’s Project Requirements, and that pretest set points have been recorded.

C. Certify that testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures have been completed and that testing, adjusting, and balancing reports have been submitted, discrepancies corrected, and corrective work approved.

D. Set systems, subsystems, and equipment into operating mode to be tested (e.g., normal shutdown, normal auto position, normal manual position, emergency power, and alarm conditions).

E. Check safety cutouts, alarms, and interlocks with others systems during each mode of operation.

F. Testing Instrumentation: Install measuring instruments and logging devices to record test data as directed by the CxA.

3.2 TESTING VERIFICATION

A. Prior to performance of testing Work, provide copies of reports, sample forms, checklists, and certificates to the CxA.

B. Notify the CxA at least 7 days in advance of testing Work, and provide access for the CxA to witness testing Work.

C. Provide technicians, instrumentation, and tools to verify testing of plumbing systems at the direction of the CxA.

1. The testing Subcontractor shall use the same instruments (by model and serial number) that were used when original data were collected.

2. Failure of an item includes a deviation of more than 10 percent. Failure of more than 10 percent of selected items shall result in rejection of final testing, adjusting report.

3. Remedy the deficiency and notify the CxA so verification of failed portions can be performed.


VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 3.3 GENERAL TESTING REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide technicians, instrumentation, and tools to perform commissioning test at the direction of the CxA.

B. Scope of plumbing testing shall include entire plumbing installation, and equipment. Testing shall include measuring capacities and effectiveness of operational and control functions.

C. Tests will be performed using design conditions whenever possible.

D. Simulated conditions may need to be imposed using an artificial load when it is not practical to test under design conditions. Before simulating conditions, calibrate testing instruments. Provide equipment to simulate loads. Set simulated conditions as directed by the CxA and document simulated conditions and methods of simulation. After tests, return settings to normal operating conditions.

E. The CxA may direct that set points be altered when simulating conditions is not practical.

F. The CxA may direct that sensor values be altered with a signal generator when design or simulating conditions and altering set points are not practical.

G. If tests cannot be completed because of a deficiency outside the scope of the plumbing system, document the deficiency and report it to the Owner. After deficiencies are resolved, reschedule tests.

H. If the testing plan indicates specific seasonal testing, complete appropriate initial performance tests and documentation and schedule seasonal tests.

3.4 PLUMBING SYSTEMS, SUBSYSTEMS, AND EQUIPMENT TESTING PROCEDURES

A. Boiler Testing and Acceptance Procedures: Testing requirements are specified in Division boiler Sections. Provide submittals, test data, inspector record, and boiler certification to the CxA.

B. Water Heater Testing and Acceptance Procedures: Testing requirements are specified in Division 22 Water Heaters Section. Provide submittal, test data, inspector record, and water heater certification to the CxA.

C. Hot Water Circulator Pump Testing and Acceptance Procedures: Testing requirements are specified in Division 22 Domestic Water Pump Section. Provide submittal, test data, inspector record, and domestic water pump certification to the CxA.

D. Air Compressor Testing and Acceptance Procedures: Testing requirements are specified in Division 22 Air Compressors. Provide submittal, test data, inspector record, and air compressor certification to the CxA.

E. Cage Washer Testing and Acceptance Procedures: Testing requirements are specified in Division 11 Cage and Rack Washer Section. Provide submittal, test data, inspector record, and cage washer certification to the CxA.



F. Domestic Water Package Booster Pumps Testing and Acceptable Procedures: Testing requirements are specified in Division 22 Air Compressors. Provide submittal, test data, inspector record, and air compressor certification to the CxA

G. Autoclave Steam Sterilizer Testing and Acceptable Procedures: Testing requirements are

specified in Division 22 Autoclave Steam Sterilizer. Provide submittal, test data, inspector record, and autoclave certification to CxA.

H. Sump Pump Testing and Acceptable Procedures: Testing requirements are specified in Division

22 Sump Pump. Provide submittal, test data, inspector record, and sump pump certification to CxA.

I. Pipe system cleaning, flushing, hydrostatic tests, and chemical treatment requirements are

specified in Division 22 piping Sections. Plumbing Contractor shall prepare a pipe system cleaning, flushing, and hydrostatic testing plan. Provide cleaning, flushing, testing, and treating plan and final reports to the CxA. Plan shall include the following:

1. Sequence of testing and testing procedures for each section of pipe to be .tested, identified by pipe zone or sector identification marker. Markers shall be keyed to Drawings for each pipe sector, showing the physical location of each designated pipe test section. Drawings keyed to pipe zones or sectors shall be formatted to allow each section of piping to be physically located and identified when referred to in pipe system cleaning, flushing, hydrostatic testing, and chemical treatment plan.

2. Description of equipment for flushing operations. 3. Minimum flushing water velocity. 4. Tracking checklist for managing and ensuring that all pipe sections have been cleaned,

flushed, hydrostatically tested, and chemically treated.

J. Plumbing Distribution System Testing: Provide technicians, instrumentation, tools, and equipment to test performance of steam, and hydronic distribution systems and other distribution systems.

K. Vibration and Sound Tests: Provide technicians, instrumentation, tools, and equipment to test performance of vibration isolation and seismic controls.

L. Plumbing systems: Refer to Plumbing drawings..




SECTION 221113 - FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes water-distribution piping and related components outside the building for water service .

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EPDM: Ethylene propylene diene terpolymer rubber.

B. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Field quality-control test reports.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For water valves and specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for potable-water-service piping,

including materials, installation, testing, and disinfection.

B. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

C. Comply with ASTM F 645 for selection, design, and installation of thermoplastic water piping.

D. NSF Compliance:

1. Comply with NSF 14 for plastic potable-water-service piping. Include marking "NSF-pw" on piping.Comply with NSF 61 for materials for water-service piping and specialties for domestic water.

FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING 221113 - 1

VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Preparation for Transport: Prepare valves, according to the following:

1. Ensure that valves are dry and internally protected against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect valves against damage to threaded ends and flange faces. 3. Set valves in best position for handling. Set valves closed to prevent rattling.

B. During Storage: Use precautions for valves according to the following:

1. Do not remove end protectors unless necessary for inspection; then reinstall for storage. 2. Protect from weather. Store indoors and maintain temperature higher than ambient dew-

point temperature.

C. Deliver piping with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe-end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

D. Protect stored piping from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade.

E. Protect flanges, fittings, and specialties from moisture and dirt.

F. Store plastic piping protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Interruption of Existing Water-Distribution Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied by Government or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary water-distribution service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Government no fewer than 5 days in advance of proposed interruption of service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of water-distribution service without Government’s

written permission.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate connection to water main with Government.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. PVC, Schedule 80 Pipe: ASTM D 1785.

1. PVC, Schedule 80 Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2467.


VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 2.2 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for commonly used joining materials.

B. Plastic Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Transition Fittings: Manufactured fitting or coupling same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be joined.

2.4 GATE VALVES

A. Bronze Gate Valves:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. d. Hammond Valve. e. Milwaukee Valve Company. f. NIBCO INC. g. Red-White Valve Corporation.

2. OS&Y, Rising-Stem Gate Valves:

a. Description: Bronze body and bonnet and bronze stem.

1) Standards: UL 262 and FMG approved. 2) Minimum Pressure Rating: 175 psig. 3) End Connections: Threaded.

2.5 GATE VALVE ACCESSORIES AND SPECIALTIES

A. Tapping-Sleeve Assemblies:


a. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; Waterous Co. Subsidiary. b. East Jordan Iron Works, Inc. c. Flowserve. d. McWane, Inc.; M & H Valve Company Div.



e. Mueller Co.; Water Products Div. f. U.S. Pipe and Foundry Company.

2. Description: Sleeve and valve compatible with drilling machine.

a. Standard: MSS SP-60. b. Tapping Sleeve: Cast- or ductile-iron or stainless-steel, two-piece bolted sleeve

with flanged outlet for new branch connection. Include sleeve matching size and type of pipe material being tapped and with recessed flange for branch valve.

c. Valve: AWWA, cast-iron, nonrising-stem, resilient-seated gate valve with one raised face flange mating tapping-sleeve flange.

B. Valve Boxes: Comply with AWWA M44 for cast-iron valve boxes. Include top section, adjustable extension of length required for depth of burial of valve, plug with lettering "WATER," and bottom section with base that fits over valve and with a barrel approximately 5 inches in diameter.

1. Operating Wrenches: Steel, tee-handle with one pointed end, stem of length to operate deepest buried valve, and socket matching valve operating nut.

2.6 ELECTROMAGNETIC DETECTOR TYPE WATER METERS

A. Electromagnetic Detector-Type Water Meters:

1. Basis of Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Badger electromagnetic water flow Mag-Meter M-2000 detector or a comparable product by one of the following:

a. Mueller Co.; Hersey Meters. b. Neptune Technology Group Inc. c. Sensus Metering Systems.

B. Description: Main line, proportional electromagnetic meter. Register flow in gallons.

1. Standards: AWWA C703, UL listed, and FMG approved. 2. Pressure Rating: 150 psig.

C. Features:

1. ± 0.25 percent accuracy. 2. Pulsed DC magnetic field for zero point stability. 3. Corrosion resistant liners. 4. Stainless steel tube nonconductive materials. 5. Integral and remote signal converter availability. 6. 316 SS measuring electrodes system 7. Power Supply: 120 VAC/24 VAC. 8. Fluid Maximum Temperature: 212°F. 9. Pipe Spool Materials: 316 Stainless steel.



10. Meter Housing Material: Carbon steel welded. 11. Flanges: Carbon Steel –ANSI B16.5 class 150RF.

D. Detector Mounted Registration System:

1. Description: Magnetic amplifier. Include meter modified with signal-transmitting assembly, low-voltage connecting wiring, and remote register assembly.

a. Standard: AWWA C707. b. Registration: Flow in gallons. c. Data-Acquisition Units: Comply with utility company requirements for type and

quantity. d. Visible Display Units: Comply with utility company requirements for type and

quantity.

2. Features:

a. Digital signal processor. b. Large four line by 20 character LCD display with backlight. c. NEMA 4X enclosure. d. Bidirectional flow sensing. e. Empty pipe detection. f. Power loss totalization. g. Modbus RTU via RS232/RS-485. h. Coil Power: Pulse DC

PART 3 - EXECUTION

A. Refer to Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.

3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. General: Use pipe, fittings, and joining methods for piping systems according to the following applications.

B. Transition couplings and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure rating may be used, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Do not use flanges or unions for underground piping.

D. Flanges, unions, grooved-end-pipe couplings, and special fittings may be used, instead of joints indicated, on aboveground piping and piping in vaults.

E. Underground water-service piping NPS 3/4 to NPS 2 shall be the following:

1. PVC, Schedule 80 pipe; PVC, Schedule 80 socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints.


VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 3.3 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. General Application: Use threaded- or flanged-end valves for installation in vaults. Use corporation valves and curb valves with ends compatible with piping, for NPS 2 and smaller installation.

B. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply:

1. Use the following for valves in vaults and aboveground:

a. Gate Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze, rising stem.


A. See Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping-system common requirements.

3.5 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Water-Main Connection: Tap water main according to requirements of water utility company and of size and in location indicated.

B. Make connections NPS 2 and smaller with drilling machine according to the following:

1. Install service-saddle assemblies and corporation valves in size, quantity, and arrangement required by utility company standards.

2. Install service-saddle assemblies on water-service pipe to be tapped. Position outlets for corporation valves.

3. Use drilling machine compatible with service-saddle assemblies and corporation valves. Drill hole in main. Remove drilling machine and connect water-service piping.

4. Install corporation valves into service-saddle assemblies. 5. Install curb valve in water-service piping with head pointing up and with service box.

C. Install PVC, AWWA pipe according to ASTM F 645 and AWWA M23.

D. Bury piping with depth of cover over top at least 30 inches. and according to the following:

1. Under Driveways: With at least 36 inches cover over top.

E. Extend water-service piping and connect to water-supply source and building-water-piping systems at outside face of building wall in locations and pipe sizes indicated.

1. Terminate water-service piping at building wall until building-water-piping systems are installed. Terminate piping with caps, plugs, or flanges as required for piping material. Make connections to building-water-piping systems when those systems are installed.



F. Install underground piping with restrained joints at horizontal and vertical changes in direction. Use restrained-joint piping, thrust blocks, anchors, .

G. See Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping" for potable-water piping inside the building.

3.6 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. See Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for basic piping joint construction.

B. Make pipe joints according to the following: 1. PVC Piping Gasketed Joints: Use joining materials according to AWWA C900.

Construct joints with elastomeric seals and lubricant according to ASTM D 2774 or ASTM D 3139 and pipe manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Dissimilar Materials Piping Joints: Use adapters compatible with both piping materials, with OD, and with system working pressure. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for joining piping of dissimilar metals.

3.7 ANCHORAGE INSTALLATION

A. Anchorage, General: Install water-distribution piping with restrained joints. Anchorages and restrained-joint types that may be used include the following:

1. Concrete thrust blocks. 2. Pipe clamps and tie rods.

B. Install anchorages forbends, valves, . Include anchorages for the following piping systems:

1. Gasketed-Joint, PVC Water-Service Piping: According to AWWA M23.

C. Apply full coat of asphalt or other acceptable corrosion-resistant material to surfaces of installed ferrous anchorage devices.


A. AWWA Gate Valves: Comply with AWWA C600 and AWWA M44. Install each underground valve with stem pointing up and with valve box.

3.9 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. See Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping connections to valves and equipment.



C. Connect water-distribution piping to existing water main. Use tapping sleeve and tapping valve.

D. Connect water-distribution piping to interior domestic waterpiping.


A. Piping Tests: Conduct piping tests before joints are covered and after concrete thrust blocks have hardened sufficiently. Fill pipeline 24 hours before testing and apply test pressure to stabilize system. Use only potable water.

B. Hydrostatic Tests: Test at not less than one-and-one-half times working pressure for two hours.

1. Increase pressure in 50-psig increments and inspect each joint between increments. Hold at test pressure for 1 hour; decrease to 0 psig. Slowly increase again to test pressure and hold for 1 more hour. Maximum allowable leakage is 2 quarts per hour per 100 joints. Remake leaking joints with new materials and repeat test until leakage is within allowed limits.

C. Prepare reports of testing activities.

3.11 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install continuous underground detectable warning tape during backfilling of trench for underground water-distribution piping. Locate below finished grade, directly over piping. Underground warning tapes are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."

B. Permanently attach equipment nameplate or marker indicating plastic water-service piping, on main electrical meter panel. See Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for identifying devices.

3.12 CLEANING

A. Clean and disinfect water-distribution piping as follows:

1. Purge new water-distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired before use.

2. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if method is not prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction, use procedure described in AWWA C651 or do as follows:

a. Fill system or part of system with water/chlorine solution containing at least 50 ppm of chlorine; isolate and allow to stand for 24 hours.

b. Drain system or part of system of previous solution and refill with water/chlorine solution containing at least 200 ppm of chlorine; isolate and allow to stand for 3 hours.



c. After standing time, flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine remains in water coming from system.

d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedure if biological examination shows evidence of contamination.

B. Prepare reports of purging and disinfecting activities.




SECTION 221116 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Under-building slab and aboveground domestic water pipes, tubes, fittings, and specialties inside the building.

2. Escutcheons. 3. Sleeves and sleeve seals.

B. Related Section:

1. Division 22 Section "Facility Water Distribution Piping" for water-service piping outside the building from source to the point where water-service piping enters the building.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following products:

1. Transition fittings. 2. Dielectric fittings. 3. Flexible connectors.

B. Water Samples: Specified in "Cleaning" Article.

C. Field quality-control reports.


A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Comply with NSF 14 for plastic, potable domestic water piping and components. Include marking "NSF-pw" on piping.

C. Comply with NSF 61 for potable domestic water piping and components.

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 1

VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Interruption of Existing Water Service: Do not interrupt water service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary water service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Government no fewer than five days in advance of proposed interruption of water service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of water service without Government’s written permission.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.

2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L and ASTM B 88, Type M water tube, drawn temper.

1. Cast-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, pressure fittings. 2. Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings. 3. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends. 4. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and-

socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends.

B. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K water tube, annealed temper.

1. Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings.

C. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping" for general-duty metal valves.

D. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for drain valves, backflow preventers, and vacuum breakers.

2.3 TRANSITION FITTINGS

A. General Requirements:



1. Same size as pipes to be joined. 2. Pressure rating at least equal to pipes to be joined. 3. End connections compatible with pipes to be joined.

B. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system fitting.

C. Sleeve-Type Transition Coupling: AWWA C219.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, :

a. Cascade Waterworks Manufacturing. b. Dresser, Inc.; Dresser Piping Specialties. c. Ford Meter Box Company, Inc. (The). d. JCM Industries. e. Romac Industries, Inc. f. Smith-Blair, Inc; a Sensus company. g. Viking Johnson; c/o Mueller Co.

D. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings:


a. Charlotte Pipe and Foundry Company. b. Harvel Plastics, Inc. c. Spears Manufacturing Company.

2. Description: CPVC or PVC one-piece fitting with manufacturer's Schedule 80 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert and one solvent-cement-socket or threaded end.

E. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Unions:


a. Colonial Engineering, Inc. b. NIBCO INC. c. Spears Manufacturing Company.

2. Description: CPVC or PVC four-part union. Include brass threaded end, solvent-cement-joint or threaded plastic end, rubber O-ring, and union nut.


A. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials or ferrous material body with separating nonconductive insulating material suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.



B. Dielectric Unions:


a. Capitol Manufacturing Company. b. Central Plastics Company. c. EPCO Sales, Inc. d. Hart Industries International, Inc. e. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products.

2. Description:

a. Pressure Rating: 150 psig at 180 deg F. b. End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

2.5 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS


1. Flex-Hose Co., Inc. 2. Flexicraft Industries. 3. Flex Pression, Ltd. 4. Flex-Weld, Inc. 5. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc. 6. Mercer Rubber Co. 7. Metraflex, Inc. 8. Proco Products, Inc. 9. Tozen Corporation. 10. Unaflex, Inc. 11. Universal Metal Hose; a Hyspan company

B. Stainless-Steel-Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated-stainless-steel tubing with stainless-steel wire-braid covering and ends welded to inner tubing.

1. Working-Pressure Rating: Minimum 200 psig. 2. End Connections NPS 2 and Smaller: Female copper tube end. 3. End Connections NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Female copper tube end.

2.6 ESCUTCHEONS

A. General: Manufactured ceiling, floor, and wall escutcheons and floor plates.

B. One Piece, Cast Brass: Polished, chrome-plated finish with setscrews.

C. One Piece, Deep Pattern: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with chrome-plated finish.



D. One Piece, Stamped Steel: Chrome-plated finish with setscrew or spring clips.

E. One-Piece Floor Plates: Cast-iron flange with holes for fasteners.

2.7 SLEEVES

A. PVC-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.

B. Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc-coated, with plain ends.

2.8 SLEEVE SEALS


1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. 2. Calpico, Inc. 3. Metraflex, Inc. 4. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

B. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, used to fill annular space between pipe and sleeve.

1. Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

2. Pressure Plates: Plastic. 3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to

sealing elements.

2.9 GROUT

A. Standard: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.

B. Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.

C. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.



3.1 EARTHWORK

A. Comply with requirements in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.


A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of domestic water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

B. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, and test tee with valve, inside the building at each domestic water service entrance. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for drain valves and strainers.

C. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.

D. Install domestic water piping level with 0.25 percent slope downward toward drain unless other wise indicated on the drawings.

E. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

F. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

G. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and coordinate with other services occupying that space.

H. Install piping adjacent to equipment and specialties to allow service and maintenance.

I. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

J. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher than system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

K. Install piping free of sags and bends.

L. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

M. Install thermometers on inlet and outlet piping from each water heater. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for thermometers.


VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly.

C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or

damaged.

D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux to end of tube. Join copper tube and fittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

E. Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping systems.


A. General-Duty Valves: Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping" for valve installations.

B. Install shutoff valve close to water main on each branch and riser serving plumbing fixtures or equipment, on each water supply to equipment, and on each water supply to plumbing fixtures that do not have supply stops. Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use gate valves for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

C. Install drain valves for equipment at base of each water riser, at low points in horizontal piping, and where required to drain water piping. Drain valves are specified in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."

1. Hose-End Drain Valves: At low points in water mains, risers, and branches. 2. Stop-and-Waste Drain Valves: Instead of hose-end drain valves where indicated.

3.5 TRANSITION FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install transition couplings at joints of dissimilar piping.

B. Transition Fittings in Underground Domestic Water Piping:

1. NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Fitting-type coupling. 2. NPS 2 and Larger: Sleeve-type coupling.



C. Transition Fittings in Aboveground Domestic Water PipingNPS 2 and Smaller: Plastic-to-metal transition fittings .

3.6 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.

B. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric unions.

3.7 FLEXIBLE CONNECTOR INSTALLATION

A. Install flexible connectors in suction and discharge piping connections to each domestic water pump.

B. Install stainless-steel-hose flexible connectors in steel domestic water piping.

3.8 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for pipe hanger and support products and installation.

1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps. 2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:

a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.

B. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

C. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch.

D. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 3/4 and Smaller: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 4. NPS 2-1/2: 108 inches with 1/2-inch rod.

E. Support piping and tubing not listed in this article according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions.

3.9 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance.



C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.

D. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve; extend and connect to the following:

1. Domestic Water Booster Pumps: Cold-water suction and discharge piping. 2. Water Heaters: Cold-water inlet and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not

smaller than sizes of water heater connections. 3. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller

than required by plumbing code. Comply with requirements in Division 22 plumbing fixture Sections for connection sizes.

4. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection.

3.10 ESCUTCHEON INSTALLATION

A. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.

B. Escutcheons for New Piping:

1. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One piece, deep pattern. 2. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One piece, cast brass

with polished chrome-plated finish with set screw. 3. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One piece, cast brass with

polished chrome-plated finish 4. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One piece, stamped steel with set screw or

spring clips.

3.11 SLEEVE INSTALLATION

A. General Requirements: Install sleeves for pipes and tubes passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.

B. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

C. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

D. Install sleeves in new partitions, slabs, and walls as they are built.

E. For interior wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants.

F. For exterior wall penetrations above grade, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants.



G. For exterior wall penetrations below grade, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe using sleeve seals specified in this Section.

H. Seal space outside of sleeves in concrete slabs and walls with grout.

I. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation unless otherwise indicated.

J. Install sleeve materials according to the following applications:

1. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Concrete Floor Slabs: Molded PVC or Steel pipe.

a. Extend sleeves 2 inchesabove finished floor level.

2. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Concrete Roof Slabs: Steel pipe. 3. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Exterior Concrete Walls:

a. Steel pipesleeves for pipes smaller than NPS 6. b. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1-inch annular clear space between

sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation when sleeve seals are used.

4. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Interior Concrete Walls:

a. Steel pipe sleeves for pipes smaller than NPS 6.

K. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for firestop materials and installations.

3.12 SLEEVE SEAL INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve seals in sleeves in exterior concrete walls at water-service piping entries into building.

B. Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble sleeve seal components and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.13 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for identification materials and installation.

B. Label pressure piping with system operating pressure.


VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 3.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Piping Inspections:

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction:

a. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.

b. Final Inspection: Arrange final inspection for authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

3. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests or inspections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Piping Tests:

1. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that piping is full of water.

2. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

3. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

4. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.

5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained.

6. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required.

D. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


3.15 ADJUSTING

A. Perform the following adjustments before operation:

1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs.



2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position. 3. Open throttling valves to proper setting.

4. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and for temporary sealing of piping during installation.

5. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs. 6. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.

3.16 CLEANING

A. Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows:

1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using.

2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below:

a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets.

b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:

1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.

2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.

c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from system after the standing time.

d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination.

B. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities.

C. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

3.17 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

B. Unions may be used for aboveground piping joints unless otherwise indicated.

C. Domestic cold water piping, NPS 2 ½ and smaller, shall be the following:

1. Above Ground: Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L with cast- or wrought- copper solder-joint fittings; and soldered joints.



2. Under Ground: Hard cooper tube, ASTM B 88 Type K annealed drawn temper, with cast- or wrought-copper solder joint fitting; and solder joints.

D. Aboveground domestic hot water piping, NPS 2”and smaller, shall be the following:

1. Hard copper tube, AST

2. M B 88, Type Lwith wrought- copper solder-joint fittings; and soldered joints.

3.18 VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply:

1. Shutoff Duty: Use ball valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. 2. Throttling Duty: Use ball or globe valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. 3. Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves.

B. Use check valves to maintain correct direction of domestic water flow to and from equipment.




SECTION 221119 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following domestic water piping specialties:

1. Vacuum breakers. 2. Backflow preventers. 3. Strainers. 4. Hose bibbs. 5. Drain valves. 6. Water hammer arresters. 7. Air vents. 8. Trap-seal primer systems.


1. Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for thermometers and pressure gages, in domestic water piping.

2. Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping" for piping materials.


A. Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 psig, unless otherwise indicated.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Field quality-control test reports.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For domestic water piping specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119 - 1


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. NSF Compliance:

1. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic domestic water piping components.

2. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1 through 9."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VACUUM BREAKERS

A. Pipe-Applied, Atmospheric-Type Vacuum Breakers:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:


a. Ames Co. b. Cash Acme. c. Conbraco Industries, Inc. d. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls. e. Rain Bird Corporation. f. Toro Company (The); Irrigation Div. g. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.

3. Standard: ASSE 1001. 4. Size: NPS 1/4 to NPS 3, as required to match connected piping. 5. Body: Bronze. 6. Inlet and Outlet Connections: Threaded. 7. Finish: Rough bronze or Chrome plated.

B. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers : 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

a. Arrowhead Brass Products, Inc. b. Cash Acme. c. Conbraco Industries, Inc. d. Legend Valve.



e. MIFAB, Inc. f. Prier Products, Inc. g. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. h. Woodford Manufacturing Company. i. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation. j. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.

2. Standard: ASSE 1011. 3. Body: Bronze, nonremovable, with manual drain. 4. Outlet Connection: Garden-hose threaded complying with ASME B1.20.7. 5. Finish: Rough bronze.

C. Laboratory-Faucet Vacuum Breakers :


a. Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. c. Woodford Manufacturing Company. d. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.

2. Standard: ASSE 1035. 3. Size: NPS 1/4 or NPS 3/8 matching faucet size. 4. Body: Bronze. 5. End Connections: Threaded. 6. Finish: Chrome plated.

2.2 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS

A. Reduced-Pressure-Principle Backflow Preventers:


a. Ames Co. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc. c. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls. d. Flomatic Corporation. e. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.

2. Standard: ASSE 1013. 3. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications. 4. Pressure Loss: 5 psig maximum, through middle 1/3 of flow range. 5. Size: 1 ½ “NPS. 6. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller.



7. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller. 8. Configuration: Designed for horizontal, straight through. 9. Accessories:

a. Valves: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet of NPS 2 and smaller; Air-Gap Fitting: ASME A112.1.2, matching backflow-preventer connection.

2.3 STRAINERS FOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

A. Y-Pattern Strainers:

1. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron with interior lining complying with

AWWA C550 or FDA-approved, epoxy coating and for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 3. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 4. Screen: Stainless steel with round perforations, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Perforation Size:

a. Strainers NPS 2 and Smaller: 0.020 inch. b. Strainers NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: 0.045 inch.

6. Drain: Factory-installed, hose-end drain valve.

2.4 HOSE BIBBS

A. Hose Bibbs :

1. Standard: ASME A112.18.1 for sediment faucets. 2. Body Material: Bronze. 3. Seat: Bronze, replaceable. 4. Supply Connections: NPS 1/2 or NPS 3/4 threaded or solder-joint inlet. 5. Outlet Connection: Garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7. 6. Pressure Rating: 125 psig. 7. Vacuum Breaker: Integral, nonremovable, drainable, hose-connection vacuum breaker

complying with ASSE 1011. 8. Finish for Equipment Rooms: Rough bronze, or chrome or nickel plated. 9. Finish for Service Areas: Rough bronze. 10. Finish for Finished Rooms: Chrome or nickel plated. 11. Operation for Equipment Rooms: Wheel handle or operating key. 12. Operation for Service Areas: Wheel handle. 13. Operation for Finished Rooms: Wheel handle. 14. Include integral wall flange with each chrome- or nickel-plated hose bibb.

2.5 DRAIN VALVES

A. Ball-Valve-Type, Hose-End Drain Valves:



1. Standard: MSS SP-110 for standard-port, two-piece ball valves. 2. Pressure Rating: 400-psig minimum CWP. 3. Size: NPS 3/4. 4. Body: Copper alloy. 5. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. 6. Seats and Seals: Replaceable. 7. Handle: Vinyl-covered steel. 8. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint. 9. Outlet: Threaded, short nipple with garden-hose thread complying with ASME B1.20.7

and cap with brass chain.

2.6 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS

A. Water Hammer Arresters:


a. AMTROL, Inc. b. Josam Company. c. MIFAB, Inc. d. PPP Inc. e. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. f. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. g. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. h. Watts Drainage Products Inc. i. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

2. Standard: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201. 3. Type: Metal bellows or Copper tube with piston. 4. Size: ASSE 1010, Sizes AA and A through F or PDI-WH 201, Sizes A through F.

2.7 AIR VENTS

A. Bolted-Construction Automatic Air Vents:

1. Body: Bronze. 2. Pressure Rating: 125-psig minimum pressure rating at 140 deg F. 3. Float: Replaceable, corrosion-resistant metal. 4. Mechanism and Seat: Stainless steel. 5. Size: NPS 3/8minimum inlet. 6. Inlet and Vent Outlet End Connections: Threaded.

2.8 TRAP-SEAL PRIMER SYSTEMS

A. Trap-Seal Primer Systems:



1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product indicated on Drawings Zurn Electronic Trap Primer or a comparable product by one of the following:

a. PPP Inc. b. Smith, Jay R Manufacturer Co; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.

2. ZURN Z1020 Electronic Tap Primer programmed as standard to provide wayter injection to traps every twenty four hours, complete with galvanized steel combination surface mount box and cover, ½ “ solder copper inlet connection, brass ball type stop valve, slow closing 24 VAC solenoid valve with integral strainer, 120-24 VAC transformer, brass atmospheric vacuum breaker, PEX waterway, and anti-scaling multi-port manifold with five ½“ male PEX outlet connections.

a. Min. Pressure: 3 psi. b. Working Pressure: 20 to 100 psig. c. Default Settings:

1) Frequency: 24 Hrs. 2) Injection Time: 6 Seconds. 3) Volume: 2 oz. min. per port.

3. Standard: ASSE 1044, 4. Piping: NPS 3/4, ASTM B 88, Type L; copper, water tubing. 5. Cabinet: Surface-mounting steel box with stainless-steel cover. 6. Electric Controls: 24-hour timer, solenoid valve, and manual switch for 120-V ac power. 7. Vacuum Breaker: ASSE 1001. 8. Number Outlets: Six . 9. Size Outlets: NPS 1/2.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping joining materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.

B. Install backflow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment and systems and to other equipment and water systems that may be sources of contamination. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Locate backflow preventers in same room as connected equipment or system. 2. Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric-vent drain connection with air-gap

fitting, fixed air-gap fitting, or equivalent positive pipe separation of at least two pipe diameters in drain piping and pipe to floor drain. Locate air-gap device attached to or under backflow preventer. Simple air breaks are not acceptable for this application.

3. Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers.



C. Install water hammer arresters in water piping according to PDI-WH 201.

D. Install air vents at high points of water piping. Install drain piping and discharge onto floor drain.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties.

B. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

3.3 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING

A. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplate or sign on or near each of the following: 1. Double-check backflow-prevention assemblies.

B. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."


A. Perform the following tests and prepare test reports:

1. Test each double-check backflow-prevention assembly according to authorities having jurisdiction and the device's reference standard.

B. Remove and replace malfunctioning domestic water piping specialties and retest as specified above.




SECTION 221123 - DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Vertically mounted, in-line, close-coupled centrifugal pumps.


1. Division 22 Section "Domestic-Water Packaged Booster Pumps" for booster systems.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or for remote-control, signaling power-limited circuits.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include materials of construction, rated capacities, certified performance curves with operating points plotted on curves, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For domestic water pumps to include in operation and maintenance manuals.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 778 for motor-operated water pumps.


A. Retain shipping flange protective covers and protective coatings during storage.

DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS 221123 - 1


B. Protect bearings and couplings against damage.

C. Comply with pump manufacturer's written rigging instructions for handling.

1.7 COORDINATION


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 IN-LINE, SEALLESS CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS


1. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; ITT Corporation. 2. Armstrong Pumps Inc. 3. Grundfos Pumps Corp. 4. TACO Incorporated. 5. WILO USA LLC - WILO Canada Inc.

B. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, in-line, close-coupled, canned-motor, sealless, overhung-impeller centrifugal pumps.

C. Pump Construction:

1. Pump and Motor Assembly: Hermetically sealed, replaceable-cartridge type with motor and impeller on common shaft and designed for installation with pump and motor shaft horizontal.

2. Casing: Bronze, with threaded or companion-flange connections. 3. Impeller: Plastic. 4. Motor: Single speed, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Capacities and Characteristics: See drawings for Schedule

2.2 MOTORS

A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 22 Section "Common Motor Requirements for Plumbing Equipment."

1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.

2. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical devices and connections specified in Division 26 Sections.


VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 2.3 CONTROLS

A. Thermostats: Electric; adjustable for control of hot-water circulation pump.

1. Type: Water-immersion temperature sensor, for installation in piping. 2. Range: 65 to 200 deg F. 3. Enclosure: NEMA 250. 4. Operation of Pump: On or off. 5. Power Requirement: 120 V, ac.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in of domestic-water-piping system to verify actual locations of connections before pump installation.

3.2 PUMP INSTALLATION

A. Comply with HI 1.4.

B. Install in-line, sealless centrifugal pumps with shaft horizontal unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install continuous-thread hanger rods and spring hangers with vertical-limit stop of size required to support pump weight.

1. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." Fabricate brackets or supports as required.

2. Comply with requirements for hangers and supports specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

D. Install thermostats in hot-water return piping.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to pumps to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect domestic water piping to pumps. Install suction and discharge piping equal to or greater than size of pump nozzles.

1. Install flexible connectors adjacent to pumps in suction and discharge piping of the following pumps:



a. Horizontally mounted, in-line, separately coupled centrifugal pumps. b. Horizontally mounted, in-line, close-coupled centrifugal pumps. c. Vertically mounted, in-line, close-coupled centrifugal pumps. d. Comply with requirements for flexible connectors specified in Division 22 Section

"Domestic Water Piping."

2. Install shutoff valve and strainer on suction side of each pump, and check, shutoff, and throttling valves on discharge side of each pump. Install valves same size as connected piping. Comply with requirements for valves specified in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping" and comply with requirements for strainers specified in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."

3. Install pressure gage at suction of each pump and pressure gage at discharge of each pump. Install at integral pressure-gage tappings where provided or install pressure-gage connectors in suction and discharge piping around pumps. Comply with requirements for pressure gages and snubbers specified in Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping."

D. Comply with Division 26 Sections for electrical connections, and wiring methods.

E. Connect thermostats to pumps that they control.

F. Interlock pump between water heater and hot-water storage tank with water heater burner and time-delay relay.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for identification of pumps.

3.5 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Perform startup service.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Check piping connections for tightness. 3. Clean strainers on suction piping. 4. Set thermostats for automatic starting and stopping operation of pumps. 5. Perform the following startup checks for each pump before starting:

a. Verify bearing lubrication. b. Verify that pump is free to rotate by hand and that pump for handling hot liquid is

free to rotate with pump hot and cold. If pump is bound or drags, do not operate until cause of trouble is determined and corrected.

c. Verify that pump is rotating in the correct direction.

6. Prime pump by opening suction valves and closing drains, and prepare pump for operation.

7. Start motor.



8. Open discharge valve slowly. 9. Adjust temperature settings on thermostats. 10. Adjust timer settings.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust domestic water pumps to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Adjust initial temperature set points.

C. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.




SECTION 221124 - DOMESTIC-WATER PACKAGED BOOSTER PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Multiplex, constant-speed booster pumps.


1. Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Pumps" for domestic-water circulation pumps.


A. Seismic Performance: Booster pumps shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to IBC 2006/Seismic Zone # 3.

1. The term "withstand" means "the booster pump will remain in place without separation of any parts from the booster pump when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the booster pump will be fully operational after the seismic event."

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, and dimensions of individual components and profiles. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For booster pumps. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For booster pumps, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

DOMESTIC-WATER PACKAGED BOOSTER PUMPS 221124 - 1


1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For booster pumps to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.



B. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9 for piping.

C. UL Compliance for Packaged Pumping Systems:

1. UL 508A, "Industrial Control Panels." 2. UL 778, "Motor-Operated Water Pumps." 3. UL QCZJ, "Packaged Pumping Systems."

D. Booster pumps shall be listed and labeled as packaged pumping systems by testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

E. NSF Compliance: All wetted components shall comply with NSF Standard 61.


A. Retain protective coatings and flange's protective covers during storage.

1.7 COORDINATION


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DUPLEX, CONSTANT-SPEED BOOSTER PUMPS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following available manufacturers offering products with representative in Puerto Rico:

1. Canariis Corporation. 2. Armstrong Pumps Inc.



3. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; ITT Corporation. 4. Grundfos Pumps Corporation U.S.A. 5. Paco Pumps. 6. Patterson Pump Company; a subsidiary of the Gorman-Rupp Company.

B. Description: Duplex constant speed variable flow factory-assembled and -tested, fluid-handling booster system for domestic water, with pumps, piping, valves, specialties, and controls, and mounted on steel base.

C. Pumps:

1. Type: Foot supported casing back pull out design top center line discharge end suction as defined in HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3 for end-suction, close-coupled, single-stage, overhung-impeller, centrifugal pump.

2. Casing: Radially split; cast iron. 3. Impeller: Closed, ASTM B 584 cast bronze ; statically and dynamically balanced and

keyed to shaft. 4. Shaft and Shaft Sleeve: Steel shaft, with copper-alloy replaceable shaft sleeve and

deflector. 5. Seal: Mechanical for a working pressure of 175 psgi. 6. Orientation: Mounted vertically.

D. Motors: NEMA standard totally enclosed fan cooled single speed, with pre-greased, permanently shielded, ball-type bearings. Select motors that will not overload through full range of pump performance curve.

E. Suction and Discharge Manifold Piping: Stainless-steel pipe and fittings, flanged or threaded as required. Brach piping and tank piping shall be the same material as the suction and discharge manifold.

F. Valves:

1. Shutoff Valves NPS 2 and Smaller: Two piece, full port ball valve, in each pump's suction and discharge piping.

2. Shutoff Valves NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Lug-type butterfly valve, in each pump's suction and discharge piping and in inlet and outlet headers.

3. Check Valves NPS 2 and Smaller: Silent stainless steel disc or swing type in each pump's discharge piping.

4. Check Valves NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Silent type in each pump's discharge piping. 5. Control Valves: Constant system pressure shall be maintained by a diaphragm type

combination adjustable, automatic, pilot-operated pressure-reducing-non-slam-and-check valve type in each pump's discharge piping. Main valve and cover shall be ductible iron with a fused epoxy coating and stainless steel stem and cover bolts. Construction shall be suitable for the maximum working pressure of the system.

6. Thermal-Relief Valve: Temperature-and-pressure relief type in pump's discharge header piping.

G. Dielectric Fittings: With insulating material isolating joined dissimilar metals.



H. Hydro-Pneumatic Tank: Provide hydro-pneumatic tank with a carbon steel shell, complying with NSF 61 and a replaceable F.D.A. approved heavy duty bladder to separate their air and water. No water shall come in contact with the metal walls of the tank. Features shall include an air fill valve and bottom system connection suitable 100% drawdown. Control.

1. The tank must be constructed in accordance with Section VII of the ASME code and N.B stamped and shall be rated 132 gallon – 125 PSGI.

2. The tank shall be mounted adjacent to the system requiring one field connection and the tank line feed shall be connected between the lead pump(s) discharge and its PRV to provide maximum tank storage.

I. Indusrial Control Panel: Factory installed and connected as an integral part of booster pump; automatic for multiple-pump, constant-speed operation, with load control and protection functions.

1. Control Logic: Electromechanical system with switches, relays, and other devices in the controller.

2. Motor Controller: NEMA ICS 2, general-purpose, Class A, full-voltage, combination-magnetic type with undervoltage release feature, motor-circuit-protector-type main disconnect, with circuit brakers and short-circuit protective device.

a. Control Voltage: 120-V ac, with integral control-power transformer.

3. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 12. 4. Motor Overload Protection: Overload relay in each phase. 5. Starting Devices: Hand-off-automatic selector switch for each pump in cover of control

panel, plus pilot device for automatic control.

a. Duplex, Automatic, Alternating Starter: Switches lead pump to lag main pump and to two-pump operation.

6. Pump Operation and Sequencing: Pressure-sensing method.

a. Lead Pump Operation: The lead pump operation shall run only as necessary to maintain system pressure and will be controlled automatically by means of a pressure switch and minimum timer run to prevent short cycling.

b. Lag Pump Sequencing: The lag pump will be sequenced ON and OFF automatically in accordance with the system demand.

c. The lag sequence control will be pressure switch operated, with on delay and minimum run timers to prevent short cycling.

d. Time Delay: Controls pump on-off operation; adjustable from 1 to 300 seconds.

7. Instrumentation: Suction and discharge 4 1/2” ASME grade pressure gages. 8. Lights: Running light for each pump, and control power (ON/OFF) switch and light. 9. Alarm Signal Device: Sounds alarm when backup pumps are operating.

a. Time Delay: Controls alarm operation; adjustable from 1 to 300 seconds, with automatic reset.



10. Thermal-bleed cutoff. 11. Low suction level shutdown circuit with auto reset and light.

12. Flow switch to limit lead pump ON-OFF cycling. 13. Elapsed time meters. 14. Phase loss, low/high voltage shutdown with auto reset and light. 15. Emergency power alarm to prevent lag pump operation. 16. Building Automation System Interface: Provide auxiliary contacts for interface to

BACnet building automation system. Building automation systems are specified in Division 23 Section "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC." Include the following:

a. On-off status of each pump. b. Alarm status.

J. Base: Stainless steel.

K. Capacities and Characteristics: As indicated on the schedule drawings.

2.2 MOTORS

A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors.

1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated on the schedule drawings. 2. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical

devices and connections specified in NFPA 70.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for booster pumps to verify actual locations of piping connections before booster-pump installation.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Equipment Mounting: Install booster pumps on concrete base using restrained spring isolators. Comply with requirements for concrete base specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

1. Minimum Deflection: 1 inch. 2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated,

install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base. 3. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete

base and anchor into structural concrete floor.



4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.

B. Support connected domestic-water piping so weight of piping is not supported by booster pumps.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Connect domestic-water piping to booster pumps. Install suction and discharge pipe equal to or greater than size of system suction and discharge headers piping.

1. Install shutoff valves on piping connections to booster-pump suction and discharge headers piping. Install ball, or gate valves same size as suction and discharge headers piping. Comply with requirements for general-duty valves specified in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping."

2. Install union, or flanged connections on suction and discharge headers piping at connection to domestic-water piping. Comply with requirements for unions and flanges specified in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping."

3. Install valved bypass, same size as and between piping, at connections to booster-pump suction and discharge headers piping. Comply with requirements for domestic-water piping specified in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping."

4. Install flexible connectors, same size as piping, on piping connections to booster-pump suction and discharge headers piping. Comply with requirements for flexible connectors specified in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping."

5. Install piping adjacent to booster pumps to allow service and maintenance.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.


1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.




1. Perform visual and mechanical inspection. 2. Leak Test: After installation, charge booster pump and test for leaks. Repair leaks and

retest until no leaks exist. 3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start booster pumps to

confirm proper motor rotation and booster-pump operation. 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment.

D. Pumps and controls will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.


3.6 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.7 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust booster pumps to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Adjust pressure set points.

C. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting booster pump to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain booster pumps.




SECTION 221216 - FACILITY POTABLE-WATER STORAGE TANKS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This section includes upright, cylindrical, flat bottom, single wall tanks molded in a one-piece seamless construction by the rotational molding process. The tanks are designed for above-ground, vertical installation and are capable of containing potable water at atmospheric pressure. Included are requirements for materials, properties, design, construction, dimensions, tolerances, workmanship, and appearance. Tank capacities are indicated on drawings.

B. Contractor shall supply and install all materials, equipment, appurtenances, specialty items, and services required to provide an upright, single wall, flat bottom, closed top, polyethylene storage tank for storage of the potable water. Each tank is to be molded in one-piece seamless construction according to ASTM D 1998 and will be capable of storing the potable water at atmospheric pressure.


A. Wind/Seismic Performance: Water storage tank installed on appropriate concrete pad shall withstand the effect of 145 MPH wind velocity or earthquake motions of seismic zone 3 conditions.

1. The term "withstand" means: The unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the wind velocity or to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with Section 013300 “Submittal Procedures”.

B. Drawings and Product Data: The manufacturer’s shop drawings shall be approved by the Architect prior to the manufacturing of the tank(s). Data and specifications for the equipment shall include, but shall not be limited to the following:

1. Contractor shall submit for review sufficient literature, detailed specifications, and drawings to show dimensions, materials used, design features, internal construction,

FACILITY POTABLE-WATER STORAGE TANKS 221216 - 1


weights and any other information required by the Architect for review of storage tanks and accessories.

2. The following additional requirements for information shall be included with shop drawings submittals below:

a. Service Conditions: Chemical environment and temperature. b. Statement that fabrication shall be in accordance with ASTM D 1998, where

applicable. c. Sizing and description of the fittings and accessories for each tank that are to be

provided by the tank manufacturer. d. Layouts and assembly schedules for each tank identifying the location and

elevation from the bottom of the tank for all inlet, outlet and other integrally molded connections and appurtenances supplied by the tank manufacturer, as specified and show on the design drawings.

C. Wind/Seismic Qualification Certificates: For water storage tank, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.


2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Storage Tanks: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

3. Detailed description of storage tanks anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.

D. A copy of the resin data sheet from the resin manufacturer for the tank is to be supplied and the tank manufacturer is to certify that it will be the resin used in the manufacture of the tank. Verification may be required if the resin is to be FDA or NSF 61 listed.

1. Wall thickness - Prior to the manufacture of the tank the designed wall thickness audit is to be supplied based upon 600 psi hoop stress (ASTM D 1998) @ 100 degrees F.

E. Technical Manuals: The tank manufacturers Guideline for Use & Installation is to be submitted for review.

F. Manufacturer’s warranty

G. Manufacturer Qualifications: The manufacturer is to have rotationally molded tanks based upon ASTM D 1998 utilizing Type I and Type II resins for the last 10 years.

H. Factory Test Report: Upon completion of the tank the manufacturer’s inspection report is to be supplied for each tank.

1. Verification of wall thickness 2. Impact test) 3. Gel test – (Type I resin only) 4. Hydrostatic test 5. Verification of fitting placement 6. Visual inspection 7. Verification of materials



1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS

A. The applicable publications listed below form a part of this specification section to the extend reference. The publications are referenced in the text by the basis designation only.

B. ASTM (American Society for Testing and Materials) Standards:

1. D618 Conditioning Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials for Testing 2. D638 Tensile Properties of Plastics 3. D790 Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical

Insulating Materials 4. D883 Definitions of Terms Relating to Plastics 5. D1505 Density of Plastics by the Density-Gradient Technique 6. D1525 Test Method for Vicat Softening Temperature of Plastics 7. D1693 Test Method for Environmental Stress-Cracking of Ethylene Plastics 8. D1998 Standard Specification for Polyethylene Upright Storage Tanks 9. D2765 Degree of Crosslinking in Crosslinked Ethylene Plastics as Determined by

Solvent Extraction 10. D2837 Method for Obtaining Hydrostatic Design Basis for Thermoplastic Pipe Materials 11. D3892 Practice for Packaging/Packing of Plastics 12. F412 Definitions of Terms Relating to Plastic Piping Systems

C. ARM (Association of Rotational Molders) Standards: Low Temperature Impact Resistance (Falling Dart Test Procedure)

D. ANSI Standards: B-16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings

E. OSHA Standards: 29 CFR 1910.106 Occupational Safety and Health Administration, Flammable and Combustible Liquids

F. UBC CODE: Uniform Building Code 2006 Edition

G. IBC CODE: International Building Code 2006 Edition

H. CBC Code: California Building Code 2007 Edition

I. NSF/ANSI Standard 61 – Drinking Water System Components (Type II resin)

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND TESTING

A. The tanks of the same material furnished under this Section shall be supplied by a manufacturer who has been regularly engaged in the design and manufacturing of rotationally molded chemical storage tanks using cross-linked and high density linear polyethylene tanks for over ten years.



B. Dimensions and Tolerances

1. All dimensions will be taken with the tank in the vertical position, unfilled. Tank dimensions will represent the exterior measurements.

2. The tolerance for the outside diameter, including out of roundness, shall be per ASTM D1998.

3. The tolerance for fitting placements shall be +/- 0.5 in. in elevation and 2 degrees radial at ambient temperature.

C. Test Methods Test specimens shall be taken from fitting location areas.

1. Low Temperature Impact Test

a. Test specimens shall be conditioned at (- 40) degrees Fahrenheit for a minimum of 2 hours.

b. The test specimens shall be impacted in accordance with the standard testing methods as found in ASTM D1998. Test specimens < ½” thickness shall be tested at 100 ft-lb. Test specimens > ½” thickness shall be tested at 200 ft-lb.

2. Degree of Crosslinking Test (% Gel – Type I Resin Only)

a. The test method used is to be the o-xylene insoluble fraction (gel test) per ASTM D2765 Method C. This test method is for determination of the ortho-xlene insoluble fraction (gel) of crosslinked polyethylene.

b. The percent gel level for Type I tanks on the inside 1/8 in. of the wall shall be a minimum of 65%.

3. Ultrasonic Tank Thickness Test

a. All tanks 2000 gallons or larger shall be measured for tank wall thickness at 6”, 1ft., 2ft. and 3ft. on the tank sidewall height at 0° and 180° around the tank circumference with 0° being the tank manway and going counter-clockwise per ANSI standard drafting specifications. A copy of this test report can be ordered when placing the original tank order. All tanks shall meet design thickness requirements and tolerances.

D. Hydrostatic Water Test

1. The hydrostatic water test shall consist of filling the tank to brim full capacity for a minimum of four hours and conducting a visual inspection for leaks. A hydrostatic water test will be conducted if ordered by the customer.

E. Workmanship

1. The finished tank wall shall be free, as commercially practicable, of visual defects such as foreign inclusions, air bubbles, pinholes, pimples, crazing, cracking and delaminations that will impair the serviceability of the vessel. Fine bubbles are acceptable with Type II tanks to the degree in which they do not interfere with proper fusion of the resin melt.

2. All cut edges where openings are cut into the tanks shall be trimmed smooth.



1.7 SERVICE CONDITIONS

A. Table I – Service Conditions

Tank # Chemical Stored

Specific Gravity

Tank Location Outside

Operating Temperature

Fitting Material

Gasket Material

Bolt / Insert

Material

1 Water 1-0 Yes 60°F PVC EPDM 316SS

1.8 CHEMICAL COMPATIBILITY

A. Chemical compatibility shall be according to the following chemical resistance guides:

1. Pruett, Kenneth M., "Chemical Resistance Guide for Elastomers", Compass Publications.

2. Pruett, Kenneth M., "Compass Corrosion Guide II", Compass Publications.

B. These references shall be considered as general guidelines only. In many cases, combinations of these chemicals are used in such a way that only the customer (by testing molded product samples) can make a determination in regards to acceptability.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. The tank shall be warranted for three years in regards to defects in materials and workmanship.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WATER STORAGE TANKS

A. Manufacturer’s: Subject to compliance requirements; manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the work include but not limited to the following:

1. Snyder Industries, Inc.

B. Description: Upright, single wall, flat bottom closed top, polyethylene stotrage tank and accessories.

2.2 MATERIALS-RESIN CLASSIFICATION

A. Type II - Tanks molded from high density linear polyethylene resin.



B. The material used shall be virgin polyethylene resin as compounded and certified by the manufacturer. Type II tanks shall be made from high density linear polyethylene (HDLPE) resin as manufactured by ExxonMobil Chemical, or resin of equal physical and chemical properties.

C. All polyethylene resin material shall contain a minimum of a U.V. 8 stabilizer as compounded by the resin manufacturer. Pigments may be added at the purchaser's request, but shall not exceed 0.25% (dry blended) of the total weight.

D. Mechanical Properties of Type II tank material: High density Linear (HDLPE)

PROPERTY ASTM VALUEDensity (Resin) D1505 0.941-0.948 g/cc

Tensile (Yield Stress 2"/min)

D638 2950 PSI

Elongation at Break (2"/min.)

D638

>1000%

ESCR (100% Igepal, Cond. A, F50)

D1693

550 hours

ESCR (10% Igepal, Cond. A, F50)

D1693

48 hours

Vicat Softening Degrees F. Temperature D1525 235

Flexural Modulus

D790

129,000 PSI

2.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. The minimum required wall thickness of the cylindrical shell at any fluid level shall be determined by the following equation, but shall not be less than 0.187 in. thick.

1. T = P x O.D./2 SD = 0.433 x S.G. x H x O.D./2 SD 2. T = wall thickness 3. SD = hydrostatic design stress, PSI 4. P = pressure (.433 x S.G. x H), PSI 5. H = fluid head, ft. 6. S.G. = specific gravity, g/cm^3 7. O.D. = outside diameter, in.

B. The hydrostatic design stress shall be determined by multiplying the hydrostatic design basis, determined by ASTM D2837 using rotationally molded samples, with a service factor selected for the application. The hydrostatic design stress is 600 PSI at 73 degrees Fahrenheit for Type I and Type II materials. In accordance with the formula in Para “A”, the tank shall have a stratiform (tapered wall thickness) wall.

1. The hydrostatic design stress shall be derated for service above 100 degrees Fahrenheit and for mechanical loading of the tank.

2. The standard design specific gravity shall be 1.5 or 1.9.



C. The minimum required wall thickness for the cylinder straight shell must be sufficient to support its own weight in an upright position without any external support.

D. The top head must be integrally molded with the cylinder shell. The minimum thickness of the top head shall be equal to the top of the straight wall. The top head of tanks shall be designed to provide a minimum of 1300 square inches of flat area for fitting locations.

E. Tanks shall have a minimum of 3 lifting lugs integrally molded into the top head. The lifting lugs shall be designed to allow erection of an empty tank.

F. The tank shall be designed to provide a minimum of 4 tie-down lugs integrally molded into the top head. The tie-down lugs shall be designed to allow tank retention in wind and seismic loading.

2.4 TANK SCHEDULE

Tank Reference # 1

Quantity One

Capacity - Side Wall As Indicated on Drawings

Specific Gravity– designed 1.0

Diameter (nominal) As Indicated on Drawings

Height (feet) maximum As Indicated on Drawings

Type II HDLPE Yes

Color Black and Dark Olive Green

Manway Type Threaded-Vented w/access

Fitting Material PP/DBL Flanged

Gasket Material EPDM

Bolt Material SS

2.5 FITTING AND ACCESSORY SCHEDULE

Tank Number TNK # 1Description Quantity / Size

Inlet nozzle One/1 ½” Outlet nozzle One/2” External fill pipe Yes Manway Threaded/ vented One Over Flow Yes Lifting Lugs Four Tie-down Lugs Four Seismic/Wind Tie-down See details on drawings.



2.6 THANK FITTINGS (NOZZLES) AND ATTACHMENTS

A. Fittings – Bolted Double 150 lb. Flange Fittings:

1. Bolted double flange fittings are required for below liquid level installation for sizes above 2 in. depending on the tank diameter and the placement of the fitting in the tank. Fittings must be placed away from tank knuckle radius' and flange lines. Consult the manufacturer for placement questions. Bolted double flange fittings provide the best strength and sealing characteristics of any tank fitting available. Allowable fittings sizes based on tank diameter for curved surfaces are shown below.

Tank Diameter Maximum Bolted Fitting

Size Allowable120 in. - 142 in. 8 in.

2. The bolted double flange fitting shall be constructed with 2 ea. 150 lb. flanges, 2 ea. 150

lb. flange gaskets, and the correct number and size of all-thread bolts for the flange specified by the flange manufacturer. The flanges shall be constructed of PVC Type I, Grade I. Gaskets shall be a minimum of 1/4" thickness and constructed of 40-50 durometer EPDM, 60-70 durometer Viton . There shall be a minimum of 4 ea. full thread bolts. The bolts diameter is to meet ASNI standards based upon the flange size. The bolts may have gasketed flanged metal heads or bolt heads encapsulated in Type II polyethylene material. The encapsulated bolt shall be designed to prevent metal exposure to the liquid in the tank and prevent bolt rotation during installation. The polyethylene encapsulation shall fully encapsulate the bolt head. The polyethylene shall be color coded to distinguish bolt material (white - 316 S.S., yellow - Hastelloy C276, red - Monel, green - Titanium). Each encapsulated bolt shall have a gasket to provide a sealing surface against the inner flange.

3. Standard orientation of bolted double flange fittings shall have bolt holes straddling the principal centerline of the tank in accordance with ANSI/ASME B-16.5 unless otherwise specified.

B. Fittings – Siphon Tube Fittings

1. Siphon tubes may be added to the fittings specified. Siphon tubes will allow these fittings, when used as drainage fittings, to provide better tank drainage.

C. Vents

1. Vents must comply with OSHA 1910.106 (f) (2) (iii) or other accepted standard. All tanks must be vented for atmospheric pressure as well as any pressure created by filling and emptying the tank. Venting equipment should be sized to limit pressure or vacuum in the tank to a maximum of 1/2" of water column (0.02 psi). U-Vents with mesh screening may require additional sizing due to reduced air-flow rates.

2. All U-vents shall be constructed of PVC or other specified materials.



2.7 TANK ACCESSORIES

A. Level Indication

1. Sight Level Gage

a. The sight level gage shall be constructed of flexible PE or PVC tubing to allow for tank contraction and expansion due to loading and temperature changes. The level gage shall be connected to the tank with 2 ea. appropriate 3/4" fittings. Each fitting can have valves installed for isolation or drainage purposes.

2. Manway and Fill Cap (Non-sealed): As indicated on drawings.

3. Surge Protection Lid

a. The hinged lid is to be manufactured of polyethylene. The lid will be a 14 in. size with 11 in. access opening or 18” with 15” access. The opening of the lid is to be restricted by a tether. The lid is to be designed so that is will close when the pressure has been released. Check SII specification drawing for availability and position.

4. Down Pipes and Fill Pipes

a. Down pipes and fill pipes shall be prepared per the customer approved drawings and specifications. All down pipes and fill pipes shall be supported at 5 ft. maximum intervals with support structures. Standard support structure design shall utilize bulkhead fitting tank attachments or welded attachments on Type II tanks. All designs shall be done according to the specific needs of the customer.

b. All down pipes and fill pipes shall be constructed of PVC or other specified materials.

5. Tie Down Systems

a. The tie down system shall be designed to withstand 150 MPH wind loads. Tie down systems must meet seismic requirements per IBC 2006 / CBC 2007 code with seismic loads ≤ .445g (Seismic Design Category "D" - Fa=1.0, Fv=1.5, Ss=1.4, S1=0.5). Anchor bolts shall be provided by the contractor per the calculations and the base plates for the system. A registered engineer’s wet stamped calculations and or drawings may be required.

b. The tie down system shall be galvanized. c. Mild steel parts shall be deburred and galvanized.

2.8 MARKING, PACKING AND PACKAGING

A. The tanks shall be marked to identify the product, date (month and year) of manufacture, capacity, and serial number. The tank shall be shipped with a 3 of 9, HRI bar code label



containing tank description, manufacturing order number, part number, serial number, manufacturer, and date.

B. The proper caution or warning signs as prescribed by OSHA standard 29 CFR 1910.106 shall be customer determined and supplied.

C. All packing, packaging, and marking provisions of ASTM Practice D3892 shall apply to this standard.

D. Customer specified labeling is available.

E. Tank shrink wrapping and bagging is available upon customer request.

F. All fittings that do not interfere with tank shipment shall be installed unless otherwise specified. Fittings and accessories that interfere with tank shipment or could be broken during shipment are shipped separately.

G. Permanent Labels:

1. Engraved stainless steel identification plate (if required). 2. National Fire Protection Association label specifically coded for the tank contents in

accordance with NFPA 30. (to be supplied by the contractor). 3. Stencil the chemical label on to the tank wall to be clearly visible from outside the tank

enclosure.

2.9 SHIPPING

A. Since there are variations in methods of shipping, SII's instruction shall be followed in all cases.

B. Consult the manufacturer’s “Guideline for Use and Installation” booklet included with your tank for unloading instructions on specific tanks. This booklet can be found attached to the cap or manway area on the inside of the tank. Tanks with capacities of 2000 gallons or more have molded-in lifting lugs provided to assist with handling the empty tank.

C. Upon receipt of the tank, fittings and accessories the purchaser and/or his agent shall be responsible for inspection for damage and to verify that the system is complete. If damage has occurred, a claim should be filed with the carrier by the purchaser, and the manufacturer should be notified prior to the tank being put into service. All fittings and accessories need to be installed and adjusted in the field according to the manufacturer’s Guidelines for Use & Installation.

2.10 DELIVERY & STORAGE

A. Installation

B. Transportation, handling, storage of the tanks, and installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions.



C. Repair any damage to tank components or the insulation due to transportation or installation.

D. All tank fitting attachments shall be equipped with flexible couplers or other movement provisions provided by the tank customer. The tank will deflect based upon tank loading, chemical temperature and storage time duration. Tank piping flexible couplers shall be designed to allow 4 percent design movement. Movement shall be considered to occur both outward in tank radius and downward in fitting elevation from the neutral tank fitting placement.




SECTION 221313 - FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Pipe and fittings. 2. Nonpressure couplings. 3. Cleanouts. 4. Encasement for piping. 5. Manholes.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: For manholes. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and frames and covers.

B. Coordination Drawings: Show pipe sizes, locations, and elevations. Show other piping in same trench and clearances from sewer system piping. Indicate interface and spatial relationship between manholes, piping, and proximate structures.

C. Profile Drawings: Show system piping in elevation. Draw profiles to horizontal scale of not less than 1 inch equals 50 feet and to vertical scale of not less than 1 inch equals 5 feet. Indicate manholes and piping. Show types, sizes, materials, and elevations of other utilities crossing system piping.

D. Product Certificates: For each type of pvc pipe and fitting, from manufacturer.



A. Do not store plastic manholes, pipe, and fittings in direct sunlight.

FACILITY SANITARY SEWERS 221313 - 1


B. Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage.

C. Handle manholes according to manufacturer's written rigging instructions.


A. Interruption of Existing Sanitary Sewerage Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied by Owner unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Resident Engineer no fewer than 5 days in advance of proposed interruption of service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of service without Resident Engineer’s written permission.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. PVC Type PSM Sewer Piping:

1. Pipe: ASTM D 3034, SDR 35, PVC Type PSM sewer pipe with bell-and-spigot ends for gasketed joints.

2. Fittings: ASTM D 3034, PVC with bell ends. 3. Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals.

2.2 NONPRESSURE-TYPE TRANSITION COUPLINGS

A. Comply with ASTM C 1173, elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition coupling, for joining underground nonpressure piping. Include ends of same sizes as piping to be joined and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.

B. Sleeve Materials:

1. For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC.

C. Nonpressure-Type, Rigid Couplings:


a. ANACO-Husky.

2. Description: ASTM C 1461, sleeve-type, reducing- or transition-type mechanical coupling, molded from ASTM C 1440, TPE material; with corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.


VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 2.3 CLEANOUTS

A. PVC Cleanouts:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following :

a. Canplas LLC. b. IPS Corporation. c. NDS. d. Plastic Oddities; a division of Diverse Corporate Technologies, Inc. e. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. f. Zurn Light Commercial Products Operation; Zurn Plumbing Products Group.

2. Description: PVC body with PVC threaded plug. Include PVC sewer pipe fitting and riser to cleanout of same material as sewer piping.

2.4 MANHOLES

A. Standard Precast Concrete Manholes:

1. Description: ASTM C 478, precast, reinforced concrete, of depth indicated, with provision for sealant joints.

2. Diameter: 48 inches minimum unless otherwise indicated. 3. Ballast: Increase thickness of precast concrete sections or add concrete to base section,

as required to prevent flotation. 4. Base Section: 6-inch minimum thickness for floor slab and 4-inch minimum thickness

for walls and base riser section; with separate base slab or base section with integral floor.

5. Riser Sections: 4-inch minimum thickness, of length to provide depth indicated. 6. Top Section: Eccentric-cone type unless concentric-cone or flat-slab-top type is

indicated; with top of cone of size that matches grade rings. 7. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 990, bitumen or butyl rubber. 8. Resilient Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923, cast or fitted into manhole walls, for each pipe

connection. 9. Steps: Individual FRP steps, or ASTM A 615, deformed, 1/2-inch steel reinforcing rods

encased in ASTM D 4101, PP ; wide enough to allow worker to place both feet on one step and designed to prevent lateral slippage off step. Cast or anchor steps into sidewalls at 12-inch intervals. Omit steps if total depth from floor of manhole to finished grade is less than 48 inches

10. Adjusting Rings: Interlocking HDPE rings, with level or sloped edge in thickness and diameter matching manhole frame and cover, and with height as required to adjust manhole frame and cover to indicated elevation and slope. Include sealant recommended by ring manufacturer.

11. Grade Rings: Reinforced-concrete rings, 6- to 9-inch total thickness, with diameter matching manhole frame and cover, and with height as required to adjust manhole frame and cover to indicated elevation and slope.

B. Manhole Frames and Covers:



1. Description: Ferrous; 24-inch ID by 7- to 9-inch riser, with 4-inch- minimum-width flange and 26-inch- diameter cover. Include indented top design with lettering cast into cover, using wording equivalent to "SANITARY SEWER" in spanish.

2. Material: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18 ductile .

C. Manhole-Cover Inserts:


a. FRW Industries; a Syneco Systems, Inc. company. b. Knutson Enterprises. c. L. F. Manufacturing, Inc. d. Parson Environmental Products, Inc.

2. Description: Manufactured, plastic form, of size to fit between manhole frame and cover and designed to prevent stormwater inflow. Include handle for removal and gasket for gastight sealing.

3. Type: Drainage with vent holes.

2.5 CONCRETE

A. General: Cast-in-place concrete complying with ACI 318, ACI 350/350R, and the following:

1. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II. 2. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand. 3. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel. 4. Water: Potable.

B. Portland Cement Design Mix: 4000 psi minimum, with 0.45 maximum water/cementitious materials ratio.

1. Reinforcing Fabric: ASTM A 185/A 185M, steel, welded wire fabric, plain. 2. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (420 MPa) deformed steel.

C. Manhole Channels and Benches: Factory or field formed from concrete. Portland cement design mix, 4000 psi minimum, with 0.45 maximum water/cementitious materials ratio. Include channels and benches in manholes.

1. Channels: Concrete invert, formed to same width as connected piping, with height of vertical sides to three-fourths of pipe diameter. Form curved channels with smooth, uniform radius and slope.

a. Invert Slope: 1 inch difference between inlet and outlet.

2. Benches: Concrete, sloped to drain into channel.

a. Slope: 4 percent.



D. Ballast and Pipe Supports: Portland cement design mix, 3000 psi minimum, with 0.58 maximum water/cementitious materials ratio.

1. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 deformed steel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK

A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."


A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate general location and arrangement of underground sanitary sewer piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout take into account design considerations. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical. Where specific installation is not indicated, follow piping manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions for using lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements.

C. Install manholes for changes in direction unless fittings are indicated. Use fittings for branch connections unless direct tap into existing sewer is indicated.

D. Install proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings where different sizes or materials of pipes and fittings are connected. Reducing size of piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

E. When installing pipe under streets or other obstructions that cannot be disturbed, use pipe-jacking process of microtunneling.

F. Install gravity-flow, nonpressure, drainage piping according to the following:

1. Install piping pitched down in direction of flow to meet existing invert elevations. 2. Install piping NPS 6 and larger with restrained joints at tee fittings and at changes in

direction. Use corrosion-resistant rods, pipe or fitting manufacturer's proprietary restraint system, or cast-in-place-concrete supports or anchors.

3. Install PVC Type PSM sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668.

G. Clear interior of piping and manholes of dirt and superfluous material as work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in piping, and pull past each joint as it is completed. Place plug in end of incomplete piping at end of day and when work stops.

3.3 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Join gravity-flow, nonpressure, drainage piping according to the following:



1. Join PVC Type PSM sewer piping according to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM D 3034 for elastomeric-seal joints or ASTM D 3034 for elastomeric-gasket joints.

B. Pipe couplings, expansion joints, and deflection fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

1. Use nonpressure flexible couplings where required to join gravity-flow, nonpressure sewer piping unless otherwise indicated.

a. Shielded flexible couplings for pipes of same or slightly different OD. b. Unshielded, increaser/reducer-pattern, flexible couplings for pipes with different

OD.

3.4 MANHOLE INSTALLATION

A. General: Install manholes complete with appurtenances and accessories indicated.

B. Install precast concrete manhole sections with sealants according to ASTM C 891.

C. Form continuous concrete channels and benches between inlets and outlet.

3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Place cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318.

3.6 CLEANOUT INSTALLATION

A. Install cleanouts and riser extensions from sewer pipes to cleanouts at grade. Use cast-iron soil pipe fittings in sewer pipes at branches for cleanouts, and use cast-iron soil pipe for riser extensions to cleanouts. Install piping so cleanouts open in direction of flow in sewer pipe.

1. Use Light-Duty, top-loading classification cleanouts in earth or unpaved foot-traffic areas.

2. Use Heavy-Duty, top-loading classification cleanouts in vehicle-traffic service areas.

B. Set cleanout frames and covers in earth in cast-in-place-concrete block, 18 by 18 by 12 inches deep. Set with tops 1 inch above surrounding grade.

C. Set cleanout frames and covers in concrete pavement and roads with tops flush with pavement surface.

3.7 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect nonpressure, gravity-flow drainage piping to building's sanitary building drains specified in Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping."

B. Make connections to existing piping and underground manholes.



1. Use commercially manufactured wye fittings for piping branch connections. Remove section of existing pipe, install wye fitting into existing piping, and encase entire wye fitting plus 6-inch overlap with not less than 6 inches of concrete with 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi.

2. Make branch connections from side into existing piping, NPS 4 to NPS 20. Remove section of existing pipe, install wye fitting into existing piping, and encase entire wye with not less than 6 inches of concrete with 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi.

3. Protect existing piping and manholes to prevent concrete or debris from entering while making tap connections. Remove debris or other extraneous material that may accumulate.

3.8 CLOSING ABANDONED SANITARY SEWER SYSTEMS

A. Abandoned Piping: Close open ends of abandoned underground piping indicated to remain in place. Include closures strong enough to withstand hydrostatic and earth pressures that may result after ends of abandoned piping have been closed. Use either procedure below:

1. Close open ends of piping with at least 8-inchthick, brick masonry bulkheads. 2. Close open ends of piping with threaded metal caps, plastic plugs, or other acceptable

methods suitable for size and type of material being closed. Do not use wood plugs.

B. Abandoned Manholes: Excavate around manhole as required:

1. Remove manhole and close open ends of remaining piping. 2. Remove top of manhole down to at least 36 inches below final grade. Fill to within 12

inches of top with stone, rubble, gravel, or compacted dirt. Fill to top with concrete.

C. Backfill to grade according to Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."

3.9 IDENTIFICATION

A. Materials and their installation are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." Arrange for installation of green warning tapes directly over piping and at outside edges of underground manholes.

1. Use detectable warning tape over piping and over edges of underground manholes.


A. Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred. Inspect after approximately 24 inches of backfill is in place, and again at completion of Project.

1. Submit separate report for each system inspection. 2. Defects requiring correction include the following:

a. Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between structures.



b. Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or cylinder of size not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter.

c. Damage: Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping. d. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping. e. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping.

3. Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until defects are within allowances specified.

4. Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory.

B. Test new piping systems, and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired, for leaks and defects.

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval. 2. Test completed piping systems according to requirements of authorities having

jurisdiction. 3. Schedule tests and inspections by authorities having jurisdiction with at least 24 hours'

advance notice. 4. Submit separate report for each test. 5. Hydrostatic Tests: Test sanitary sewerage according to requirements of authorities

having jurisdiction and the following:

a. Fill sewer piping with water. Test with pressure of at least 10-foot head of water, and maintain such pressure without leakage for at least 15 minutes.

b. Close openings in system and fill with water. c. Purge air and refill with water. d. Disconnect water supply. e. Test and inspect joints for leaks.

6. Manholes: Perform hydraulic test according to ASTM C 969.

C. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.

D. Replace leaking piping using new materials, and repeat testing until leakage is within allowances specified.

3.11 CLEANING

A. Clean dirt and superfluous material from interior of piping. Flush with potable water.




SECTION 221316 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following for soil, waste, and vent piping inside the building:

1. Pipe, tube, and fittings. 2. Special pipe fittings.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

B. LLDPE: Linear, low-density polyethylene plastic.

C. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

D. PE: Polyethylene plastic.

E. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

F. TPE: Thermoplastic elastomer.


A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water. 2. Sanitary Sewer, Force-Main Piping: 50 psig.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings.

B. Field quality-control inspection and test reports.

SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 1



B. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping; "NSF-drain" for plastic drain piping; "NSF-tubular" for plastic continuous waste piping; and "NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS




A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining materials.


A. Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent.

1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, socket type, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns.

B. Solvent Cement and Adhesive Primer:

1. Use PVC solvent cement that has a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2. Use adhesive primer that has a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2.4 SPECIAL PIPE FITTINGS

A. Flexible, Nonpressure Pipe Couplings: Comply with ASTM C 1173, elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition pattern. Include shear ring, ends of same sizes as piping to be joined, and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.

1. Manufacturers:



a. Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co. b. Fernco, Inc. c. Logan Clay Products Company (The). d. Mission Rubber Co. e. NDS, Inc. f. Plastic Oddities, Inc.

2. Sleeve Materials: a. For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC. b. For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible with pipe

materials being joined.

B. Shielded Nonpressure Pipe Couplings: ASTM C 1460, elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-length, corrosion-resistant outer shield and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co. b. Mission Rubber Co.

C. Rigid, Unshielded, Nonpressure Pipe Couplings: ASTM C 1461, sleeve-type reducing- or transition-type mechanical coupling molded from ASTM C 1440, TPE material with corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.

1. Manufacturers:

a. ANACO.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXCAVATION

A. Refer to Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.


A. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Aboveground, soil and waste piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be any of the following: 1. Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints. 2. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Flexiblenonpressure pipe couplings for joining

dissimilar pipe materials with small difference in OD.

C. Aboveground, soil and waste piping NPS 5 and larger shall be the following: 1. Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints.



2. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Flexible, nonpressure pipe couplings for joining dissimilar pipe materials with small difference in OD.

D. Aboveground, vent piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be the following:

1. Solid-wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints. 2. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Flexible, nonpressure pipe couplings for joining


E. Underground, soil, waste, and vent piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be the following:

1. Solid wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints. 2. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Flexible, nonpressure pipe couplings for joining


F. Underground, soil and waste piping NPS 5 and larger shall be the following:

1. Solid-wall, Schedule 40, PVC pipe; PVC socket fittings; and solvent-cemented joints. 2. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Flexible, nonpressure pipe couplings for joining



A. Sanitary sewer piping outside the building is specified in Division 22 Section "Facility Sanitary Sewers."

B. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."

C. Install seismic restraints on piping. Seismic-restraint devices are specified in Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

D. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building sanitary sewers.

E. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if 2 fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

F. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed.



G. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger.

2. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow. 3. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.

H. Install PVC soil and waste drainage and vent piping according to ASTM D 2665.

I. Install underground PVC soil and waste drainage piping according to ASTM D 2321.

J. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.


A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."

B. PVC Nonpressure Piping Joints: Join piping according to ASTM D 2665.


A. General valve installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping."


A. Pipe hangers and supports are specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." Install the following:

1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps. 2. Install individual, straight, horizontal piping runs according to the following:

a. Longer Than 100 Feet, if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.

3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.

B. Install supports according to Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

D. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch minimum rods.

E. Install hangers for PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:



1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 48 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 3: 48 inches with 1/2-inch rod. 3. NPS 4 and 5: 48 inches with 5/8-inch rod. 4. NPS 6: 48 inches with 3/4-inch rod. 5. NPS 8 to NPS 12: 48 inches with 7/8-inch rod.

F. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions.

3.7 CONNECTIONS


B. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.

C. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following:

1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code.

2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code.

4. Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve, if indicated, and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2-1/2 and larger.


A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.

2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:



1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

3. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping, except outside leaders, on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water. From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks.

4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug vent-stack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into piping system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg. Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap of water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks.

5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained.

6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

3.9 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.

3.10 PROTECTION

A. Exposed PVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with two coats of water-based latex paint.




SECTION 221319 - SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following sanitary drainage piping specialties:

1. Backwater valves. 2. Cleanouts. 3. Floor Sinks 4. Floor drains. 5. Roof flashing assemblies. 6. Miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties. 7. Flashing materials.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and accessories for the following:

1. Backwater valves. 2. Floor Sinks.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For drainage piping specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319 - 1


C. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic sanitary piping specialty components.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of roof penetrations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BACKWATER VALVES

A. Horizontal, Cast-Iron Backwater Valves:


a. Josam Company; Josam Div. b. MIFAB, Inc. c. Smith, Jay R. Mfr. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. e. Watts Drainage Products Inc. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

2. Standard: ASME A112.14.1. 3. Size: Same as connected piping. 4. Body: Cast iron. 5. Cover: Cast iron with threaded access check valve. 6. End Connections: Hub and spigot. 7. Type Check Valve: Removable, bronze, swing check, factory assembled open for

airflow unless subject to backflow condition. 8. Extension: ASTM A 74, Service class; full-size, cast-iron, soil-pipe extension to field-

installed cleanout at floor; replaces backwater valve cover.

2.2 CLEANOUTS

A. Metal Floor Cleanouts


2.

a. Josam Company; Josam Div. b. Oatey. c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.



d. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. e. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. f. Watts Drainage Products Inc. g. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation. h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

3. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for cast-iron soil pipe with cast-iron ferrule cleanout. 4. Size: Same as connected branch. 5. Type: Heavy-duty, adjustable housing. 6. Body or Ferrule: Cast iron. 7. Clamping Device: Required. 8. Outlet Connection: Threaded. 9. Closure: Brass plug with straight threads and gasket. 10. Adjustable Housing Material: Cast iron with. 11. Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Rough bronze. 12. Frame and Cover Shape: Round. 13. Top Loading Classification: Heavy Duty. 14. Riser: ASTM A 74, Service class, cast-iron drainage pipe fitting and riser to cleanout. 15. Standard: ASME A112.3.1. 16. Size: Same as connected branch.

2.3 FLOOR DRAINS

A. Floor Sinks:


a. Commercial Enameling Co. b. Josam Company; Josam Div. c. MIFAB, Inc. d. Prier Products, Inc. e. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. f. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. g. Watts Drainage Products Inc. h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation. i. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.

2. Standard: ASME A112.6.3. 3. Pattern: Floor drain. 4. Body Material: Stainless steel. 5. Seepage Flange: Required. 6. Anchor Flange: Required. 7. Clamping Device: Required. 8. Outlet: Bottom. 9. Coating on Interior and Exposed Exterior Surfaces: Acid-resistant enamel. 10. Sediment Bucket: Required. 11. Top or Strainer Material: Stainless steel.



B. Description: Manufactured assembly made of 6.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0938-inchthick, lead flashing collar and skirt extending at least 6 inches from pipe, with galvanized-steel boot reinforcement and counterflashing fitting.

1. Open-Top Vent Cap: Without cap. 2. Low-Silhouette Vent Cap: With vandal-proof vent cap. 3. Extended Vent Cap: With field-installed, vandal-proof vent cap.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS SANITARY DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Vent Caps:

1. Description: Cast-iron body with threaded or hub inlet and vandal-proof design. Include vented hood and setscrews to secure to vent pipe.

2. Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack.

2.6 FLASHING MATERIALS

A. Elastic Membrane Sheet: ASTM D 4068, flexible, chlorinated polyethylene, 40-mil minimum thickness.

B. Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened.

C. Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units required for installation; matching or compatible with material being installed.

D. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type, bituminous mastic.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping joining materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.

B. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated.

2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees. 3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for

larger piping. 4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.

C. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished floor.



D. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.

E. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance. 2. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage.

Set with grates depressed according to the following drainage area radii:

a. Radius, 30 Inches or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not less than 1/4-inch total depression.

b. Radius, 30 to 60 Inches: Equivalent to 1 percent slope. c. Radius, 60 Inches or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not greater than 1-

inch total depression.

3. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.

4. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Install roof flashing assemblies on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof.

G. Install deep-seal traps on floor drains and other waste outlets, if indicated.

H. Install vent caps on each vent pipe passing through roof.

3.2 CONNECTIONS


B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.

3.3 FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement.

B. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device.

C. Install flashing for piping passing through roofs with counterflashing or commercially made flashing fittings, according to Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

D. Extend flashing up vent pipe passing through roofs and turn down into pipe, or secure flashing into cast-iron sleeve having calking recess.



SECTION 221413 - FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Pipe, tube, and fittings. 2. Specialty pipe fittings. 3. Encasement for underground metal piping.


1. Division 22 Section "Sump Pumps" for storm drainage pumps. 2. Division 33 Section "Storm Utility Drainage Piping" for storm drainage piping outside

the building.


A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure unless otherwise indicated:

1. Storm Drainage Piping: [10-foot head of water (30 kPa)] <Insert pressure>. 2. Storm Drainage, Force-Main Piping: [50 psig (345 kPa)] [100 psig (690 kPa)] [150 psig

(1035 kPa)] <Insert pressure>.

B. Seismic Performance: Storm drainage piping and support and installation shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to [ASCE/SEI 7] <Insert requirement>.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. LEED Submittal:

1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For solvent cements and adhesive primers, documentation including printed statement of VOC content.

FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING 221413 - 1


C. Shop Drawings: For [controlled-flow] [siphonic] roof drainage system. Include calculations, plans, and details.

D. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For storm drainage piping, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.






B. Comply with NSF/ANSI 14, "Plastics Piping System Components and Related Materials," for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-drain" for plastic drain piping and "NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping.


A. Interruption of Existing Storm-Drainage Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify [Architect] [Construction Manager] [Owner] no fewer than [two] <Insert number> days in advance of proposed interruption of storm-drainage service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of storm-drainage service without [Architect's] [Construction Manager's] [Owner's] written permission.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.

2.2 HUB-AND-SPIGOT, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, [Service] [and] [Extra Heavy] classes.

B. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber.

C. Calking Materials: ASTM B 29, pure lead and oakum or hemp fiber.


VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 2.3 HUBLESS, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301.

B. CISPI, Hubless-Piping Couplings:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:

a. ANACO-Husky. b. Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co. c. Fernco Inc. d. Matco-Norca, Inc. e. MIFAB, Inc. f. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. g. Stant. h. Tyler Pipe. i. <Insert manufacturer's name>.

2. Standards: ASTM C 1277 and CISPI 310. 3. Description: Stainless-steel corrugated shield with stainless-steel bands and tightening

devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.

C. Heavy-Duty, Hubless-Piping Couplings:


a. ANACO-Husky. b. Clamp-All Corp. c. Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co. d. MIFAB, Inc. e. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. f. Stant. g. Tyler Pipe. h. <Insert manufacturer's name>.

2. Standards: ASTM C 1277 and ASTM C 1540. 3. Description: Stainless-steel shield with stainless-steel bands and tightening devices; and

ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.

D. Cast-Iron, Hubless-Piping Couplings:


a. MG Piping Products Company.



b. <Insert manufacturer's name>.

2. Standard: ASTM C 1277. 3. Description: Two-piece ASTM A 48/A 48M, cast-iron housing; stainless-steel bolts and

nuts; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.

2.4 GALVANIZED-STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Galvanized-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Standard Weight. Include square-cut-grooved or threaded ends matching joining method.

B. [Galvanized-]Cast-Iron Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.12 threaded.

C. Steel-Pipe Pressure Fittings:

1. Galvanized-Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M or ASTM A 106/A 106M, Schedule 40, seamless steel pipe. Include ends matching joining method.

2. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Class 150; hexagonal-stock body with ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal, bronze seating surface; and female threaded ends.

3. [Galvanized-]Gray-Iron, Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, standard pattern.

D. Cast-Iron Flanges: ASME B16.1, Class 125.

1. Flange Gasket Materials: ASME B16.21, full-face, flat, nonmetallic, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch (3.2-mm) maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated.

2. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.

E. Grooved-Joint, Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Appurtenances:


a. Anvil International. b. Grinnell Mechanical Products. c. Shurjoint Piping Products. d. Victaulic Company. e. <Insert manufacturer's name>.

2. Galvanized, Grooved-End Fittings for Galvanized-Steel Piping: ASTM A 536 ductile-iron castings, ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable-iron castings, ASTM A 234/A 234M forged-steel fittings, or ASTM A 106/A 106M steel pipes with dimensions matching ASTM A 53/A 53M steel pipe, and complying with AWWA C606 for grooved ends.

3. Grooved Mechanical Couplings for Galvanized-Steel Piping: ASTM F 1476, Type I. Include ferrous housing sections with continuous curved keys; EPDM-rubber gasket suitable for hot and cold water; and bolts and nuts.


VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 2.5 DUCTILE-IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Ductile-Iron, Mechanical-Joint Piping:

1. Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151/A21.51, with mechanical-joint bell and plain spigot end unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated.

2. Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110/A21.10, mechanical-joint ductile- or gray-iron standard pattern or AWWA C153/A21.53, ductile-iron compact pattern.

3. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111/A21.11, ductile- or gray-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.

B. Ductile-Iron, Push-On-Joint Piping:

1. Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151/A21.51, with push-on-joint bell and plain spigot end unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated.

2. Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110/A21.10, push-on-joint ductile- or gray-iron standard pattern or AWWA C153/A21.53, ductile-iron compact pattern.

3. Gaskets: AWWA C111/A21.11, rubber.

C. Ductile-Iron, Grooved-Joint Piping:

1. Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151/A21.51 with round-cut-grooved ends according to AWWA C606.

2. Ductile-Iron-Pipe Appurtenances:

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:

1) Anvil International. 2) Shurjoint Piping Products. 3) Star Pipe Products. 4) Victaulic Company. 5) <Insert manufacturer's name>.

b. Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron Fittings: ASTM A 536 ductile-iron castings with dimensions matching AWWA C110/A21.10 ductile-iron pipe or AWWA C153/A21.53 ductile-iron fittings and complying with AWWA C606 for grooved ends.

c. Grooved Mechanical Couplings for Ductile-Iron Pipe: ASTM F 1476, Type I. Include ferrous housing sections with continuous curved keys; EPDM-rubber center-leg gasket suitable for hot and cold water; and bolts and nuts.


A. Copper DWV Tube: ASTM B 306, drainage tube, drawn temper.

B. Copper Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.23, cast-copper fittings or ASME B16.29, wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings.



1. Use PVC solvent cement that has a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2.9 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS

A. Transition Couplings:

1. General Requirements: Fitting or device for joining piping with small differences in OD's or of different materials. Include end connections same size as and compatible with pipes to be joined.

2. Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified-piping-system fitting.

3. Unshielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings:


1) Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co. 2) Fernco Inc. 3) Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. 4) Plastic Oddities; a division of Diverse Corporate Technologies, Inc. 5) <Insert manufacturer's name>.

b. Standard: ASTM C 1173. c. Description: Elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition pattern. Include

shear ring and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.

d. Sleeve Materials:

1) For Cast-Iron Soil Pipes: ASTM C 564, rubber. 2) For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC. 3) For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible

with pipe materials being joined.

4. Shielded, Nonpressure Transition Couplings:


1) Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co. 2) Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. 3) <Insert manufacturer's name>.

b. Standard: ASTM C 1460. c. Description: Elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-length, corrosion-resistant

outer shield and corrosion-resistant-metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.



5. Pressure Transition Couplings:


1) Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co. 2) Dresser, Inc. 3) EBAA Iron, Inc. 4) Ford Meter Box Company, Inc. (The) 5) JCM Industries, Inc. 6) Romac Industries, Inc. 7) Smith-Blair, Inc.; a Sensus company. 8) Viking Johnson; c/o Mueller Co. 9) <Insert manufacturer's name>.

b. Standard: AWWA C219. c. Description: Metal, sleeve-type couplings same size as, with pressure rating at

least equal to and ends compatible with, pipes to be joined. d. Center-Sleeve Material: [Manufacturer's standard] [Carbon steel] [Stainless

steel] [Ductile iron] [Malleable iron]. e. Gasket Material: Natural or synthetic rubber. f. Metal Component Finish: Corrosion-resistant coating or material.

B. Dielectric Fittings:

1. General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined.

2. Dielectric Unions:


1) Capitol Manufacturing Company. 2) Central Plastics Company. 3) Hart Industries International, Inc. 4) Jomar International Ltd. 5) Matco-Norca, Inc. 6) McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. 7) Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 8) Wilkins; a Zurn company. 9) <Insert manufacturer's name>.

b. Description:

1) Standard: ASSE 1079. 2) Pressure Rating: [150 psig (1035 kPa)] [250 psig (1725 kPa)] at 180 deg F

(82 deg C).



3) End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

3. Dielectric Flanges:


1) Capitol Manufacturing Company. 2) Central Plastics Company. 3) Matco-Norca, Inc. 4) Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 5) Wilkins; a Zurn company. 6) <Insert manufacturer's name>.

b. Description:

1) Standard: ASSE 1079. 2) Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly. 3) Pressure Rating: [150 psig (1035 kPa)] [175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum]

[300 psig (2070 kPa)]. 4) End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded

solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.

4. Dielectric-Flange Insulating Kits:


1) Advance Products & Systems, Inc. 2) Calpico, Inc. 3) Central Plastics Company. 4) Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. 5) <Insert manufacturer's name>.

b. Description:

1) Nonconducting materials for field assembly of companion flanges. 2) Pressure Rating: [150 psig (1035 kPa)] <Insert pressure>. 3) Gasket: Neoprene or phenolic. 4) Bolt Sleeves: Phenolic or polyethylene. 5) Washers: Phenolic with steel-backing washers.

5. Dielectric Nipples:




1) Elster Perfection. 2) Grinnell Mechanical Products. 3) Matco-Norca, Inc. 4) Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. 5) Victaulic Company. 6) <Insert manufacturer's name>.

b. Description:

1) Electroplated steel nipple complying with ASTM F 1545. 2) Pressure Rating: [300 psig (2070 kPa) at 225 deg F (107 deg C)] <Insert

pressure and temperature>. 3) End Connections: Male threaded or grooved. 4) Lining: Inert and noncorrosive, propylene.

2.10 ENCASEMENT FOR UNDERGROUND METAL PIPING

A. Standard: ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.

B. Material: [High-density, crosslaminated PE film of 0.004-inch (0.10-mm)] [or] [LLDPE film of 0.008-inch (0.20-mm)] minimum thickness.

C. Form: [Sheet] [or] [tube].

D. Color: [Black] [or] [natural].

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTH MOVING

A. Comply with requirements for excavating, trenching, and backfilling specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."


A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations from layout are approved on coordination drawings.

B. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.



D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

E. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

F. Install piping at indicated slopes.

G. Install piping free of sags and bends.

H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

I. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

J. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

K. Make changes in direction for storm drainage piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

L. Lay buried building storm drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed.

M. Install storm drainage piping at the following minimum slopes unless otherwise indicated:

1. Building Storm Drain: [1 percent] [2 percent] <Insert slope> downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 (DN 80) and smaller; [1 percent] [2 percent] <Insert slope> downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and larger.

2. Horizontal Storm-Drainage Piping: [2 percent] <Insert slope> downward in direction of flow.

N. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."

1. Install encasement on underground piping according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.

O. Install steel piping according to applicable plumbing code.

P. Install aboveground copper tubing according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

Q. Install aboveground ABS piping according to ASTM D 2661.

R. Install aboveground PVC piping according to ASTM D 2665.

S. Install underground [ABS] [and] [PVC] piping according to ASTM D 2321.



T. Install engineered [controlled-flow] [siphonic] drain specialties and storm drainage piping in locations indicated.

U. Install underground, ductile-iron, force-main piping according to AWWA C600. Install buried piping inside building between wall and floor penetrations and connection to storm sewer piping outside building with restrained joints. Anchor pipe to wall or floor. Install thrust-block supports at vertical and horizontal offsets.

1. Install encasement on piping according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.

V. Install underground, copper, force-main tubing according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

1. Install encasement on piping according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.

W. Install force mains at elevations indicated.

X. Plumbing Specialties:

1. Install backwater valves in storm drainage gravity-flow piping. Comply with requirements for backwater valves specified in Division 22 Section "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties."

2. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building storm drains connect to building storm sewers in storm drainage gravity-flow piping. Install cleanout fitting with closure plug inside the building in storm drainage force-main piping. Comply with requirements for cleanouts specified in Division 22 Section "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties."

3. Install drains in storm drainage gravity-flow piping. Comply with requirements for drains specified in Division 22 Section "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties."

Y. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

Z. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Division 22 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

AA. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Division 22 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

BB. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Division 22 Section "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."


A. Hub-and-Spigot, Cast-Iron Soil Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for compression joints.

B. Hub-and-Spigot, Cast-Iron Soil Piping Calked Joints: Join according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for lead-and-oakum calked joints.



C. Hubless, Cast-Iron Soil Piping Coupled Joints: Join according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for hubless-piping coupling joints.

D. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:



E. Join copper tube and fittings with soldered joints according to ASTM B 828 procedure. Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux and ASTM B 32, lead-free-alloy solder.

F. Grooved Joints: Cut groove ends of pipe according to AWWA C606. Lubricate and install gasket over ends of pipes or pipe and fittings. Install coupling housing sections, over gasket, with keys seated in piping grooves. Install and tighten housing bolts.

G. Flanged Joints: Align bolt holes. Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Torque bolts in cross pattern.

H. Plastic, Nonpressure-Piping, Solvent-Cemented Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:


2. ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 Appendixes. 3. PVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855 and ASTM D 2665 Appendixes.

3.4 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Transition Couplings:

1. Install transition couplings at joints of piping with small differences in OD's. 2. In Drainage Piping: [Unshielded] [Shielded], nonpressure transition couplings. 3. In Aboveground Force-Main Piping: Fitting-type transition couplings. 4. In Underground Force-Main Piping:

a. NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) and Smaller: Fitting-type transition couplings. b. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Larger: Pressure transition couplings.

B. Dielectric Fittings:

1. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing. 2. Dielectric Fittings for [NPS 2 (DN 50)] <Insert pipe size> and Smaller: Use dielectric

[nipples] [unions].



3. Dielectric Fittings for [NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100)] <Insert pipe size range>: Use dielectric [flanges] [flange kits] [nipples].

4. Dielectric Fittings for [NPS 5 (DN 125)] <Insert pipe size> and Larger: Use dielectric flange kits.


A. General valve installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping."

B. Shutoff Valves: Install shutoff valve on each sump pump discharge.

1. Install gate or full-port ball valve for piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller. 2. Install gate valve for piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.

C. Check Valves: Install swing-check valve, between pump and shutoff valve, on each sump pump discharge.

D. Backwater Valves: Install backwater valves in piping subject to backflow.

1. Horizontal Piping: Horizontal backwater valves.[ Use normally closed type unless otherwise indicated.]

2. Install backwater valves in accessible locations. 3. Comply with requirements for backwater valves specified in Division 22 Section "Storm

Drainage Piping Specialties."


A. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

B. Comply with requirements for pipe hanger and support devices and installation specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

1. Install [carbon-steel] <Insert material> pipe hangers for horizontal piping in noncorrosive environments.

2. Install [stainless-steel] [fiberglass] pipe hangers for horizontal piping in corrosive environments.

3. Install [carbon-steel] <Insert material> pipe support clamps for vertical piping in noncorrosive environments.

4. Install stainless-steel pipe support clamps for vertical piping in corrosive environments. 5. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps. 6. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:

a. 100 Feet (30 m) and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m): MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. c. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m) if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.



7. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet (30 m) or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.

8. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

C. Support horizontal piping and tubing within 12 inches (300 mm) of each fitting[, valve,] and coupling.

D. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

E. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum rods.

F. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod.

2. NPS 3 (DN 80): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod. 3. NPS 4 and NPS 5 (DN 100 and DN 125): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 5/8-inch (16-mm)

rod. 4. NPS 6 and NPS 8 (DN 150 and DN 200): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 3/4-inch (19-mm)

rod. 5. NPS 10 and NPS 12 (DN 250 and DN 300): 60 inches (1500 mm) with 7/8-inch (22-

mm) rod. 6. Spacing for 10-foot (3-m) pipe lengths may be increased to 10 feet (3 m). Spacing for

fittings is limited to 60 inches (1500 mm).

G. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet (4.5 m).

H. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32): 84 inches (2100 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 2. NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40): 108 inches (2700 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 3. NPS 2 (DN 50): 10 feet (3 m) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 4. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): 11 feet (3.4 m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod. 5. NPS 3 (DN 80): 12 feet (3.7 m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod. 6. NPS 4 and NPS 5 (DN 100 and DN 125): 12 feet (3.7 m) with 5/8-inch (16-mm) rod. 7. NPS 6 and NPS 8 (DN 150 and DN 200): 12 feet (3.7 m) with 3/4-inch (19-mm) rod. 8. NPS 10 and NPS 12 (DN 250 and DN 300): 12 feet (3.7 m) with 7/8-inch (22-mm) rod.

I. Install supports for vertical steel piping every 15 feet (4.5 m).

J. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32): 72 inches (1800 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod. 2. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): 96 inches (2400 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm)

rod. 3. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65): 108 inches (2700 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod.



4. NPS 3 to NPS 5 (DN 80 to DN 125): 10 feet (3 m) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod. 5. NPS 6 (DN 150): 10 feet (3 m) with 5/8-inch (16-mm) rod. 6. NPS 8 (DN 200): 10 feet (3 m) with 3/4-inch (19-mm) rod.

K. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet (3 m).

L. Install hangers for [ABS] [and] [PVC] piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 (DN 40 and DN 50): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 3/8-inch (10-mm) rod.

2. NPS 3 (DN 80): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 1/2-inch (13-mm) rod. 3. NPS 4 and NPS 5 (DN 100 and DN 125): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 5/8-inch (16-mm)

rod. 4. NPS 6 and NPS 8 (DN 150 and DN 200): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 3/4-inch (19-mm)

rod. 5. NPS 10 and NPS 12 (DN 250 and DN 300): 48 inches (1200 mm) with 7/8-inch (22-

mm) rod.

M. Install supports for vertical [ABS] [and] [PVC] piping every 48 inches (1200 mm).

N. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions.

3.7 CONNECTIONS


B. Connect interior storm drainage piping to exterior storm drainage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.

C. Connect storm drainage piping to roof drains and storm drainage specialties.

1. Install test tees (wall cleanouts) in conductors near floor, and floor cleanouts with cover flush with floor.

2. Install horizontal backwater valves [with cleanout cover flush with floor] [in pit with pit cover flush with floor] <Insert description>.

3. Comply with requirements for [backwater valves] [cleanouts] [and] [drains] specified in Division 22 Section "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties."

D. Connect force-main piping to the following:

1. Storm Sewer: To exterior force main. 2. Sump Pumps: To sump pump discharge.

E. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance of equipment.

F. Make connections according to the following unless otherwise indicated:



1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

3.8 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify exposed storm drainage piping. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."


A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in.

2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Test storm drainage piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:

1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced storm drainage piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

3. Test Procedure: Test storm drainage piping[, except outside leaders,] on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water (30 kPa). From 15 minutes before inspection starts until completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks.



E. Test force-main piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:

1. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced force-main piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.



2. Cap and subject piping to static-water pressure of 50 psig (345 kPa) above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.



3.10 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.

3.11 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping unless otherwise indicated.

B. Aboveground storm drainage piping [NPS 6 (DN 150) and smaller] <Insert pipe size range> shall be[ any of] the following:

1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; [CISPI,] [heavy-duty,] hubless-piping

couplings; and coupled joints. 3. Galvanized-steel pipe, drainage fittings, and threaded joints. 4. Copper DWV tube, copper drainage fittings, and soldered joints. 5. [Solid-wall] [Cellular-core] ABS pipe, ABS socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints. 6. [Solid-wall] [Cellular-core] PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints. 7. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: [Unshielded] [Shielded], nonpressure transition

couplings.

C. Aboveground, storm drainage piping [NPS 8 (DN 200) and larger] <Insert pipe size range> shall be[ any of] the following:

1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; [CISPI,] [heavy-duty,] hubless-piping

couplings; and coupled joints. 3. Galvanized-steel pipe, drainage fittings, and threaded joints. 4. Copper DWV tube, copper drainage fittings, and soldered joints. 5. [Solid-wall] [Cellular-core] PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent-cemented joints. 6. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: [Unshielded] [Shielded], nonpressure transition

couplings.

D. Underground storm drainage piping [NPS 6 (DN 150) and smaller] <Insert pipe size range> shall be[ any of] the following:



1. Hard copper tube; [wrought-]copper pressure fittings; and soldered joints. 2. Ductile-iron, mechanical-joint piping and mechanical joints. 3. Ductile-iron, push-on-joint piping and push-on joints. 4. Ductile-iron, grooved-joint piping and grooved joints. 5. Pressure transition couplings if dissimilar pipe materials.




SECTION 221429 - SUMP PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Packaged drainage-pump units.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For pumps and controls, to include in operation and maintenance manuals.



B. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 778 for motor-operated water pumps.


A. Retain shipping flange protective covers and protective coatings during storage.

B. Protect bearings and couplings against damage.

C. Comply with pump manufacturer's written rigging instructions for handling.

SUMP PUMPS 221429 - 1


2.1 PACKAGED DRAINAGE-PUMP UNITS

A. Packaged Submersible Drainage-Pump Units:


a. Zoeller Company. b. ABS Pumps Inc. c. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; ITT Corporation. d. Goulds Pumps; ITT Corporation. e. Grundfos Pumps Corp. f. Little Giant Pump Co. g. Pentair Pump Group; Myers.

2. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, automatic-operation, basin-mounted, sump-pump unit.

3. Pump Type: Submersible, end-suction, single-stage, close-coupled, overhung-impeller centrifugal pump as defined in HI 1.1-1.2 and HI 1.3.

4. Casing: Metal. 5. Impeller: Brass or glass filled with metal insert. 6. Pump Seal: Mechanical. 7. Motor: Hermetically sealed, capacitor-start type, with built-in overload protection. 8. Power Cord: Three-conductor, waterproof cable of length required but not less than 72

inches, with grounding plug and cable-sealing assembly for connection at pump. 9. Pump Discharge Piping: Factory or field fabricated, galvanized, ASTM A 53/A 53M,

Schedule 40, steel pipe with ASME B16.4, Class 125, gray iron threaded fittings. 10. Control: Motor-mounted float switch. 11. Basin: Plastic.

B. Capacity and Characteristics: See Drawings for Schedule

1. Basin:

a. In pit.

2.2 MOTORS

A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 22 Section "Common Motor Requirements for Plumbing Equipment."





B. Motors for submersible pumps shall be hermetically sealed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK

A. Excavation and filling are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."

3.2 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for plumbing piping to verify actual locations of storm drainage piping connections before sump pump installation.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Pump Installation Standards: Comply with HI 1.4 for installation of sump pumps.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Division 22 Section "Facility Storm Drainage Piping." Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.




B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection. 2. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest

until no leaks exist. 3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm

proper motor rotation and unit operation. 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment.

C. Pumps and controls will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.


VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust pumps to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Adjust control set points.




SECTION 221513 - GENERAL-SERVICE COMPRESSED-AIR PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes piping and related specialties for general-service compressed-air systems operating at 200 psig or less.


1. Division 22 Section "General-Service Packaged Air Compressors and Receivers" for general-service air compressors and accessories.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.

B. CR: Chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic rubber.

C. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

D. HDPE: High-density polyethylene plastic.

E. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

F. PE: Polyethylene plastic.

G. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

H. Low-Pressure Compressed-Air Piping: System of compressed-air piping and specialties operating at pressures of 150 psig or less.


A. Seismic Performance: Compressed-air piping and support and installation shall withstand effects of seismic events determined according to [SEI/ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures."

GENERAL-SERVICE COMPRESSED-AIR PIPING 221513 - 1

VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 1.5 SUBMITTALS


1. Plastic pipes, fittings, and valves. 2. Dielectric fittings. 3. Flexible pipe connectors. 4. Safety valves. 5. Pressure regulators. Include rated capacities and operating characteristics. 6. Automatic drain valves. 7. Filters. Include rated capacities and operating characteristics. 8. Lubricators. Include rated capacities and operating characteristics. 9. Quick couplings. 10. Hose assemblies.

B. Brazing certificates.

C. Qualification Data: For Installers.


E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For general-service compressed-air piping specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Brazing: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications," or to AWS B2.2, "Standard for Brazing Procedure and Performance Qualification."

B. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.

C. ASME Compliance:

1. Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for low-pressure compressed-air piping.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS

A. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L seamless, drawn-temper, water tube.

1. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22, solder-joint pressure type or MSS SP-73, wrought copper with dimensions for brazed joints.

2. Cast-Copper-Alloy Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150 or 300.



3. Copper Unions: ASME B16.22 or MSS SP-123.


A. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing, unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 VALVES

A. Metal Ball, Butterfly, Check, Gate, and Globe Valves: Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping."


A. General Requirements for Dielectric Fittings: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with insulating material; suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature. Include threaded, solder-joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.

B. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure at 180 deg F.


a. Capitol Manufacturing Company. b. Central Plastics Company. c. EPCO Sales, Inc. d. Hart Industries International, Inc. e. Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Water Products Div. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div.

2.5 FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTORS


B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Flex-Hose Co., Inc. 2. Flexicraft Industries. 3. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc. 4. Mercer Rubber Co. 5. Metraflex, Inc. 6. Proco Products, Inc. 7. Unaflex, Inc.



8. Universal Metal Hose; a Hyspan Company

C. Stainless-Steel-Hose Flexible Pipe Connectors: Corrugated-stainless-steel tubing with stainless-steel wire-braid covering and ends welded to inner tubing.

1. Working-Pressure Rating: 200 psig minimum. 2. End Connections, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded steel pipe nipple.

2.6 SPECIALTIES

A. Safety Valves: ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, "Pressure Vessels," construction; National Board certified, labeled, and factory sealed; constructed of bronze body with poppet-type safety valve for compressed-air service.

1. Pressure Settings: Higher than discharge pressure and same or lower than receiver pressure rating.

B. Air-Line Pressure Regulators: Diaphragm operated, bronze body, direct acting, spring-loaded manual pressure-setting adjustment, and rated for 200-psigminimum inlet pressure, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Automatic Drain Valves: Stainless-steel body and internal parts, rated for 200-psig minimum working pressure, capable of automatic discharge of collected condensate. Include mounting bracket if wall mounting is indicated.

D. Coalescing Filters: Coalescing type with activated carbon capable of removing water and oil aerosols; with color-change dye to indicate when carbon is saturated and warning light to indicate when selected maximum pressure drop has been exceeded. Include mounting bracket if wall mounting is indicated.

E. Air-Line Lubricators: With drip chamber and sight dome for observing oil drop entering air stream; with oil-feed adjustment screw and quick-release collar for easy bowl removal. Include mounting bracket if wall mounting is indicated.

1. Provide with automatic feed device for supplying oil to lubricator.

2.7 QUICK COUPLINGS


B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Aeroquip Corporation; Eaton Corp. 2. Foster Manufacturing, Inc. 3. Milton Industries, Inc. 4. Parker Hannifin Corp.; Fluid Connectors Group; Quick Coupling Div.



5. Schrader-Bridgeport; Amflo Div. 6. Snap-Tite, Inc.; Quick Disconnect & Valve Division.

C. General Requirements for Quick Couplings: Assembly with locking-mechanism feature for quick connection and disconnection of compressed-air hose.

D. Automatic-Shutoff Quick Couplings: Straight-through brass body with O-ring or gasket seal and stainless-steel or nickel-plated-steel operating parts.

1. Socket End: With one-way valve and threaded inlet for connection to piping or threaded hose fitting.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Compressed-Air Piping between Air Compressors and Receivers: Use one of the following piping materials for each size range:

1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Type L, copper tube; wrought-copper fittings; and brazed joints.

B. Low-Pressure Compressed-Air Distribution Piping: Use the following piping materials for each size range:

1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Type K or L, copper tube; wrought-copper fittings; and brazed joints.

C. Drain Piping: Use the following piping materials:

1. NPS 2 and Smaller: PVC pipe and fittings; and solvent-cemented joints.

3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. General-Duty Valves: Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping" for metal general-duty valves. Use metal valves, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Metal General-Duty Valves: Use valve types specified in "Valve Applications" Article in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping" according to the following:

a. Low-Pressure Compressed Air: Valve types specified for low-pressure compressed air.

b. Equipment Isolation NPS 2 and Smaller: Safety-exhaust, copper-alloy ball valve with exhaust vent and pressure rating at least as great as piping system operating pressure.


VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of compressed-air piping. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, air-compressor sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

B. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal and to coordinate with other services occupying that space.

E. Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance.

F. Install air and drain piping with 1 percent slope downward in direction of flow.

G. Install nipples, flanges, unions, transition and special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings same as or higher than system pressure rating, unless otherwise indicated.

H. Equipment and Specialty Flanged Connections: 1. Use cast-copper-alloy companion flange with gasket and brazed joint for connection to

copper tube. Do not use soldered joints for connection to air compressors or to equipment or machines producing shock or vibration.

I. Flanged joints may be used instead of specified joint for any piping or tubing system.

J. Install eccentric reducers where compressed-air piping is reduced in direction of flow, with bottoms of both pipes and reducer fitting flush.

K. Install branch connections to compressed-air mains from top of main. Provide drain leg and drain trap at end of each main and branch and at low points.

L. Install thermometer and pressure gage on discharge piping from each air compressor and on each receiver. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping."

M. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

N. Install piping free of sags and bends.

O. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

P. Install seismic restraints on piping. Seismic-restraint devices are specified in Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."



Q. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Division 22 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

R. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Division 22 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Plumbing Piping."

S. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Division 22 Section "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."


A. Brazed Joints for Copper Tubing: Join according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter.

B. Flanged Joints: Use asbestos-free, nonmetallic gasket suitable for compressed air. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9 for bolting procedure.

C. Dissimilar Metal Piping Material Joints: Use dielectric fittings.


A. General-Duty Valves: Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping."

B. Install shutoff valves and unions or flanged joints at compressed-air piping to air compressors.

C. Install shutoff valve at inlet to each automatic drain valve, filter, lubricator, and pressure regulator.

D. Install check valves to maintain correct direction of compressed-air flow to and from compressed-air piping specialties and equipment.

3.6 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.

B. NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric unions.

3.7 FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTOR INSTALLATION

A. Install flexible pipe connectors in discharge piping and in inlet air piping from remote air-inlet filter of each air compressor.

B. Install bronze-hose flexible pipe connectors in copper compressed-air tubing.


VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 3.8 SPECIALTY INSTALLATION

A. Install safety valves on receivers in quantity and size to relieve at least the capacity of connected air compressors.

B. Install air-main pressure regulators in compressed-air piping at or near air compressors.

C. Install air-line pressure regulators in branch piping to equipment.

D. Install automatic drain valves on aftercoolers, receivers, and dryers. Discharge condensate onto nearest floor drain.

E. Install coalescing filters in compressed-air piping at or near air compressors and upstream from mechanical filters. Mount on wall at locations indicated.

F. Install mechanical filters in compressed-air piping at or near air compressors and downstream from coalescing filters. Mount on wall at locations indicated.

G. Install quick couplings at piping terminals for hose connections.

3.9 CONNECTIONS

A. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment and machine.


A. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment " for seismic-restraint devices.

B. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for pipe hanger and support devices.

C. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps.

D. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:

1. 100 Feet or Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.

E. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.

F. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

G. Support horizontal piping within 12 inches of each fitting and coupling.

H. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:



1. NPS 1/4: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 3/8 and NPS 1/2: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 3. NPS 3/4: 84 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 4. NPS 1: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod.

I. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.

3.11 LABELING AND IDENTIFICATION

A. Install identifying labels and devices for general-service compressed-air piping, valves, and specialties. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."


A. Perform field tests and inspections.


1. Piping Leak Tests for Metal Compressed-Air Piping: Test new and modified parts of existing piping. Cap and fill general-service compressed-air piping with oil-free dry air or gaseous nitrogen to pressure of 50 psig above system operating pressure, but not less than 150 psig. Isolate test source and let stand for four hours to equalize temperature. Refill system, if required, to test pressure; hold for two hours with no drop in pressure.

2. Inspect filters and pressure regulators for proper operation.

C. Prepare test reports.




SECTION 222213 - STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following for LP and HP steam and condensate piping:

1. Pipe and fittings. 2. Strainers. 3. Flash tanks. 4. Safety valves. 5. Steam traps. 6. Thermostatic air vents and vacuum breakers.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. HP Systems: High-pressure piping operating at more than 15 psig as required by ASME B31.1.

B. LP Systems: Low-pressure piping operating at 15 psig or less as required by ASME B31.9.


A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressures and temperatures:

1. HP Steam Piping: 80 psig at 324 deg F. 2. HP Condensate Piping: 80 psig at 324 deg F. 3. LP Steam Piping: 15 psig at 250 deg F. 4. LP Condensate Piping: 15 psig at 250 deg F. 5. Makeup-Water Piping: 80 psig at 150 deg F. 6. Blowdown-Drain Piping: Equal to pressure of the piping system to which it is attached. 7. Air-Vent and Vacuum-Breaker Piping: Equal to pressure of the piping system to which it

is attached. 8. Safety-Valve-Inlet and -Outlet Piping: Equal to pressure of the piping system to which it

is attached.

STEAM AND CONDENSATE PIPING 222213 - 1


A. Product Data: For each type of the following:

1. Pipe and fittings. 2. Steam trap. 3. Air vent and vacuum breaker. 4. Flash tank.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail, 1/4 inch equals 1 foot scale, flash tank assemblies and fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers, pipe, multiple pipes, alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops and their attachment to the building structure. Detail locations of anchors, alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops.

C. Qualification Data: For Installer.

D. Welding certificates.

E. Field quality-control test reports.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For valves, safety valves, pressure-reducing valves, steam traps, air vents, vacuum breakers, and meters to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to the following:



C. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping" for materials, products, and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label. Fabricate and stamp flash tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Drawn-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L.

B. Wrought-Copper Fittings and Unions: ASME B16.22.


VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 2.2 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, plain ends, Type, Grade, and Schedule as indicated in Part 3 piping applications articles.

B. Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4; Classes 125, 150, and 300 as indicated in Part 3 piping applications articles.

C. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3; Classes 150 and 300 as indicated in Part 3 piping applications articles.

D. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Classes 150, 250, and 300 as indicated in Part 3 piping applications articles.

E. Cast-Iron Threaded Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Classes 125 and 250 as indicated in Part 3 piping applications articles; raised ground face, and bolt holes spot faced.

F. Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel of same Type, Grade, and Schedule as pipe in which installed.


A. Welding Materials: Comply with Section II, Part C, of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and for chemical analysis of pipe being welded.




C. Dielectric Unions:


a. Capitol Manufacturing Company. b. Central Plastics Company. c. Hart Industries, International Inc. d. Watts Water Technologies, Inc. e. Zurn Plumbing Products Group.

2. Factory-fabricated union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure at 180 deg F. As required to suit system pressures.


VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 2.5 VALVES

A. Gate, Globe and Check: Comply with requirements specified in Division 23 Section "General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping."

B. Stop-Check Valves:


a. Crane Co. b. Jenkins Valves; a Crane Company. c. Lunkenheimer Valves. d. A.Y. McDonald Mfg. Co.

2. Body and Bonnet: Malleable iron. 3. End Connections: Flanged. 4. Disc: Cylindrical with removable liner and machined seat. 5. Stem: Brass alloy. 6. Operator: Outside screw and yoke with cast-iron handwheel. 7. Packing: Polytetrafluoroethylene-impregnated packing with two-piece packing gland

assembly. 8. Pressure Class: 250.

2.6 STRAINERS


1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B cast iron, with bolted cover and bottom drain connection. 2. End Connections: Threaded ends for strainers NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for

strainers NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 3. Strainer Screen: Stainless-steel, 20 mesh strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket

with 50 percent free area. 4. Tapped blowoff plug. 5. CWP Rating: 250-psig working steam pressure.

B. Basket Strainers:

1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B cast iron, with bolted cover and bottom drain connection. 2. End Connections: Threaded ends for strainers NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for

strainers NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 3. Strainer Screen: Stainless-steel, 20 mesh strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket

with 50 percent free area. 4. CWP Rating: 250-psig working steam pressure.


VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 2.7 FLASH TANKS

A. Shop or factory fabricated of welded steel according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, for 150-psig rating; and bearing ASME label. Fabricate with tappings for low-pressure steam and condensate outlets, high-pressure condensate inlet, air vent, safety valve, and legs.

2.8 SAFETY VALVES

A. Bronze Safety Valves:


a. Armstrong International, Inc. b. Kunkle Valve; a Tyco International Ltd. Company. c. Spirax Sarco, Inc. d. Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Disc Material: Forged copper alloy. 3. End Connections: Threaded inlet and outlet. 4. Spring: Fully enclosed steel spring with adjustable pressure range and positive shutoff,

factory set and sealed. 5. Pressure Class: 250. 6. Drip-Pan Elbow: Cast iron and having threaded inlet and outlet with threads complying

with ASME B1.20.1. 7. Size and Capacity: As required for equipment according to ASME Boiler and Pressure

Vessel Code.

B. Cast-Iron Safety Valves:


a. Armstrong International, Inc. b. Kunkle Valve; a Tyco International Ltd. Company. c. Spirax Sarco, Inc. d. Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Disc Material: Forged copper alloy with bronze nozzle. 3. End Connections: Raised-face flanged inlet and threaded or flanged outlet connections. 4. Spring: Fully enclosed cadmium-plated steel spring with adjustable pressure range and

positive shutoff, factory set and sealed. 5. Pressure Class: 250. 6. Drip-Pan Elbow: Cast iron and having threaded inlet, outlet, and drain, with threads

complying with ASME B1.20.1. 7. Exhaust Head: Cast iron and having threaded inlet and drain, with threads complying

with ASME B1.20.1.



8. Size and Capacity: As required for equipment according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

2.9 STEAM TRAPS

A. Thermostatic Traps:


a. Armstrong International, Inc. b. Barnes & Jones, Inc. c. Dunham-Bush, Inc. d. Hoffman Specialty; Division of ITT Industries. e. Spirax Sarco, Inc. f. Sterling.

2. Body: Bronze angle-pattern body with integral union tailpiece and screw-in cap. 3. Trap Type: Balanced-pressure. 4. Bellows: Stainless steel or monel. 5. Head and Seat: Replaceable, hardened stainless steel. 6. Pressure Class: 125.

B. Thermodynamic Traps:


a. Armstrong International, Inc. b. Barnes & Jones, Inc. c. Dunham-Bush, Inc. d. Hoffman Specialty; Division of ITT Industries. e. Spirax Sarco, Inc.

2. Body: Stainless steel with screw-in cap. 3. End Connections: Threaded. 4. Disc and Seat: Stainless steel. 5. Maximum Operating Pressure: 600 psig.

C. Float and Thermostatic Traps:


a. Armstrong International, Inc. b. Barnes & Jones, Inc.



c. Dunham-Bush, Inc. d. Hoffman Specialty; Division of ITT Industries. e. Spirax Sarco, Inc. f. Sterling.

2. Body and Bolted Cap: ASTM A 126, cast iron. 3. End Connections: Threaded. 4. Float Mechanism: Replaceable, stainless steel. 5. Head and Seat: Hardened stainless steel. 6. Trap Type: Balanced pressure. 7. Thermostatic Bellows: Stainless steel or monel. 8. Thermostatic air vent capable of withstanding 45 deg F of superheat and resisting water

hammer without sustaining damage. 9. Vacuum Breaker: Thermostatic with phosphor bronze bellows, and stainless steel cage,

valve, and seat. 10. Maximum Operating Pressure: 125 psig.

2.10 THERMOSTATIC AIR VENTS AND VACUUM BREAKERS

A. Thermostatic Air Vents:


a. Armstrong International, Inc. b. Barnes & Jones, Inc. c. Dunham-Bush, Inc. d. Hoffman Specialty; Division of ITT Industries. e. Spirax Sarco, Inc. f. Sterling.

2. Body: Cast iron, bronze or stainless steel. 3. End Connections: Threaded. 4. Float, Valve, and Seat: Stainless steel. 5. Thermostatic Element: Phosphor bronze bellows in a stainless-steel cage. 6. Pressure Rating: 125 psig . 7. Maximum Temperature Rating: 350 deg F.

B. Vacuum Breakers:


a. Armstrong International, Inc. b. Dunham-Bush, Inc. c. Hoffman Specialty; Division of ITT Industries. d. Johnson Corporation (The).



e. Spirax Sarco, Inc.

2. Body: Cast iron, bronze, or stainless steel. 3. End Connections: Threaded. 4. Sealing Ball, Retainer, Spring, and Screen: Stainless steel. 5. O-ring Seal: EPR. 6. Pressure Rating: 125 psig . 7. Maximum Temperature Rating: 350 deg F.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 LP STEAM PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. LP Steam Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller: Schedule 80, Type S, Grade B, steel pipe; Class 125 cast-iron fittings; and threaded joints.

B. Condensate piping above grade, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be the following:

1. Schedule 80, Type S, Grade B, steel pipe; Class 125 cast-iron fittings; and threaded joints.

3.2 HP STEAM PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. HP Steam Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller: Schedule 80, Type S, Grade B, steel pipe; Class 150 cast-iron fittings; and threaded joints.

B. Condensate piping above grade, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be the following:

1. Schedule 80, Type S, Grade B, steel pipe; Class 125 cast-iron fittings; and threaded joints.

3.3 ANCILLARY PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Makeup-water piping installed above grade shall be the following:

1. Drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered or brazed joints.

B. Blowdown-Drain Piping: Same materials and joining methods as for piping specified for the service in which blowdown drain is installed.

C. Air-Vent Piping:

1. Inlet: Same as service where installed. 2. Outlet: Type K annealed-temper copper tubing with soldered or flared joints.

D. Vacuum-Breaker Piping: Outlet, same as service where installed.



E. Safety-Valve-Inlet and -Outlet Piping: Same materials and joining methods as for piping specified for the service in which safety valve is installed.

3.4 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. Install shutoff duty valves at branch connections to steam supply mains, at steam supply connections to equipment, and at the outlet of steam traps.

B. Install safety valves on pressure-reducing stations and elsewhere as required by ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Install safety-valve discharge piping, without valves, to nearest floor drain or as indicated on Drawings. Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1, for installation requirements.


A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Use indicated piping locations and arrangements if such were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

B. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

E. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

F. Install piping free of sags and bends.

G. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

H. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

I. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

J. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of valves.

K. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 full port-ball valve, and short NPS 3/4 threaded nipple with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system drainage.



L. Install steam supply piping at a minimum uniform grade of 0.2 percent downward in direction of steam flow.

M. Install condensate return piping at a minimum uniform grade of 0.4 percent downward in direction of condensate flow.

N. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side down.

O. Install branch connections to mains using tee fittings in main pipe, with the branch connected to top of main pipe.

P. Install valves according to Division 23 Section "General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping."

Q. Install unions in piping, NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to valves, at final connections of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.

R. Install strainers on supply side of control valves, pressure-reducing valves, traps, and elsewhere as indicated. Install NPS 3/4 nipple and full port ball valve in blowdown connection of strainers NPS 2 and larger. Match size of strainer blowoff connection for strainers smaller than NPS 2.

S. Identify piping as specified in Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

T. Install drip legs at low points and natural drainage points such as ends of mains, bottoms of risers, and ahead of pressure regulators, and control valves.

1. On straight runs with no natural drainage points, install drip legs at intervals not exceeding .

2. Size drip legs same size as main.

U. Flash Tank:

1. Pitch condensate piping down toward flash tank. 2. If more than one condensate pipe discharges into flash tank, install a check valve in each

line. 3. Install thermostatic air vent at tank top. 4. Install safety valve at tank top. 5. Install full-port ball valve, and swing check valve on condensate outlet. 6. Install inverted bucket or float and thermostatic trap at low-pressure condensate outlet,

sized for three times the calculated heat load. 7. Install pressure gage on low-pressure steam outlet according to Division 23 Section

"Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping."

V. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Retain first paragraph below for piping that penetrates an exterior concrete wall or concrete slab.

W. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs.

X. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.


VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 3.6 STEAM-TRAP INSTALLATION

A. Install steam traps in accessible locations as close as possible to connected equipment.

B. Install full-port ball valve, strainer, and union upstream from trap; install union, check valve, and full-port ball valve downstream from trap unless otherwise indicated.

3.7 SAFETY VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install safety valves according to ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping."

B. Pipe safety-valve discharge without valves to atmosphere outside the building.

C. Install drip-pan elbow fitting adjacent to safety valve and pipe drain connection to nearest floor drain.

D. Install exhaust head with drain to waste, on vents equal to or larger than NPS 2-1/2.

3.8 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Install hangers and supports according to Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment." Comply with requirements below for maximum spacing.

B. Install the following pipe attachments:

1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 20 feet long. 2. Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal piping 20 feet or

longer. 3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet or longer,

supported on a trapeze.

C. Install hangers with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:

1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 2. NPS 1: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 3. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 12 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 4. NPS 2: Maximum span, 13 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.

D. Install hangers for drawn-temper copper piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:

1. NPS 1/2: Maximum span, 4 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 2. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 5 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 3. NPS 1: Maximum span, 6 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.


VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 3.9 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION




D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube ends. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.

E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.




3.10 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

A. Size for supply and return piping connections shall be the same as or larger than equipment connections.

B. Install traps and control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment.

C. Install bypass piping with globe valve around control valve. If parallel control valves are installed, only one bypass is required.

D. Install vacuum breakers downstream from control valve, close to coil inlet connection.

E. Install a drip leg at coil outlet.


A. Prepare steam and condensate piping according to ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," and as follows:

1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test. 2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test

pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing.



3. Flush system with clean water. Clean strainers. 4. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be

capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged joints to isolate equipment.

B. Perform the following tests on steam and condensate piping:

1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage due to freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping may be used.

2. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the working pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength.

3. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.

C. Prepare written report of testing.




SECTION 223100 - DOMESTIC WATER SOFTENERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Commercial water softeners. 2. Chemicals. 3. Water testing sets.


A. Seismic Performance: Water softeners shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."

1.4 SUBMITTALS


1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for water softeners.

2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.


B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For water softeners, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.




DOMESTIC WATER SOFTENERS 223100 - 1


C. Source quality-control reports.

D. Field quality-control reports.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For water softeners to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

F. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended application.

B. ASME Compliance for Steel Tanks: Fabricate and label mineral tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1, where indicated.

C. ASME Compliance for FRP Tanks: Fabricate and label mineral tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section X, where indicated.

D. UL Compliance: Fabricate and label water softeners to comply with UL 979, "Water Treatment Appliances."

1.6 COORDINATION


1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of water softeners that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures of mineral and brine tanks. b. Faulty operation of controls. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use. d. Attrition loss of resin exceeding 3 percent per year. e. Mineral washed out of system during service run or backwashing period. f. Effluent turbidity greater and color darker than incoming water. g. Fouling of underdrain system, gravel, and resin with turbidity or by dirt, rust, or

scale from water softener or soft water, while operating according to manufacturer's written operating instructions.

2. Commercial Water Softeners, Warranty Period: From date of Substantial Completion.

a. Mineral Tanks: Five years.



b. Brine Tanks: 10 years. c. Control Valve: One year.

1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide 12 months' full maintenance by skilled employees of water softener Installer. Include quarterly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper water softener operation at rated capacity. Provide parts and supplies the same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment.

B. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: From Installer to Owner, in the form of a standard yearly (or other period) maintenance agreement, starting on date initial maintenance service is concluded. State services, obligations, conditions, and terms for agreement period and for future renewal options.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Salt for Brine Tanks: Furnish in same form as and at least four times original load, but not less than 200 lb . Deliver on pallets according to the following:

a. Food-Grade Pellet Salt: In 50-lb packages.

2. Store salt on raised platform where directed by Owner. Do not store in contact with concrete floor.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COMMERCIAL WATER SOFTENERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the work with representative in Puerto Rico.

1. Res-Kem Corp. 2. Aquion Water Treatment Products. 3. Culligan International Company. 4. Diamond Water Systems, Inc. 5. Ecodyne Water Treatment, Inc. 6. Springsoft International, Inc. 7. Water King. 8. WaterSoft; a division of Amtrol, Inc.

B. Description: Factory-assembled, pressure-type water softener.



1. Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects." 2. Configuration: Twin unit with two mineral tanks and one brine tank. 3. Mounting: On skids. 4. Wetted Components: Suitable for water temperatures from 40 to at least 100 deg F. 5. Mineral Tanks: FRP, pressure-vessel quality.

a. Seismic Requirements: Fabricate supports and attachments to tank with reinforcement strong enough to resist tank movement during seismic event when tank supports are anchored to building structure.

b. Construction: Fabricated and stamped to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section X, "Fiber-Reinforced Plastic Pressure Vessels."

c. Pressure Rating: 100 psig minimum. d. Freeboard: 50 percent minimum for backwash expansion above normal resin bed

level. e. Support Legs or Skirt: Constructed of structural steel, welded to tank. f. Upper Distribution System: Single, point type, fabricated from galvanized-steel

pipe and fittings. g. Lower Distribution System: Hub and radial-arm or header-lateral type; fabricated

from nonmetallic pipe and fittings with individual, fine-slotted, nonclogging plastic strainers, and arranged for even flow distribution through resin bed.

h. Liner: PE, ABS, or other material suitable for potable water.

6. Controls: Automatic; factory wired and factory mounted on unit.

a. Adjustable duration of various regeneration steps. b. Push-button start and complete manual operation. c. Electric time clock and switch for automatic operation except for manual return to

service. d. Sequence of Operation: Multiport pilot-control valve automatically pressure-

actuates main operating valve through steps of regeneration. e. Pointer on pilot-control valve shall indicate cycle of operation. f. Includes means of manual operation of pilot-control valve if power fails.

7. Main Operating Valves: Lead-free brass industrial, automatic, multiport, diaphragm type with the following features:

a. Slow opening and closing, nonslam operation. b. Diaphragm guiding on full perimeter from fully open to fully closed. c. Isolated, dissimilar metals within valve. d. Self-adjusting, internal, automatic brine injector that draws brine and rinses at

constant rate independent of pressure. e. Valve for single mineral-tank unit with internal automatic bypass of raw water

during regeneration. f. Sampling cocks for soft water. g. Special tools are not required for service. h. Cycle: Five.

8. Flow Control: Automatic, to control backwash and flush rates over wide variations in operating pressure; does not require field adjustments.



a. Meter Control: Each mineral tank is equipped with signal-register-head water meter that produces electrical signal indicating need for regeneration on reaching hand-set total in gallons. Signal will continue until reset.

b. Demand-Initiated Control: Each mineral tank of twin mineral-tank unit is equipped with automatic-reset-head water meter that electrically activates cycle controllers to initiate regeneration at preset total in gallons. Head automatically resets to preset total in gallons for next service run. Electrical lockout prevents simultaneous regeneration of both tanks.

9. Brine Tank: Combination measuring and wet-salt storing system.

a. Tank and Cover Material: Fiberglass, 3/16 inch thick; or molded PE, 3/8 inch thick.

b. Brine Valve: Float operated and plastic fitted for automatic control of brine withdrawal and freshwater refill.

c. Size: Large enough for at least four regenerations at full salting.

10. Factory-Installed Accessories:

a. Piping, valves, tubing, and drains. b. Sampling cocks. c. Main-operating-valve position indicators. d. Water meters.

C. Capacities and Characteristics: As indicated on schedule drawings.

1. Water Analysis: Perform an analysis of supply water to determine quality of water available and make recommendations to the Owner.

2.2 CHEMICALS

A. Mineral: High-capacity, sulfonated-polystyrene, ion-exchange resin that is stable over entire pH range with good resistance to bead fracture from attrition or shock.

1. Exchange Capacity: 30,000 grains/cu. ft. of calcium carbonate of resin when regenerated with 15 lb of salt.

B. Salt for Brine Tanks: High-purity sodium chloride, free of dirt and foreign material. Rock and granulated forms are unacceptable.

1. Form: Processed, food-grade salt pellets.

2.3 WATER-TESTING SETS

A. Description: Manufacturer's standard water-hardness testing apparatus and chemicals with testing procedure instructions. Include metal container suitable for wall mounting.


VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Hydrostatically test mineral tanks before shipment to a minimum of one and one-half times the pressure rating.

B. Prepare test and inspection reports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WATER SOFTENER INSTALLATION

A. Equipment Mounting: Install commercial water softeners on floor.

1. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. 2. Arrange units so controls and devices that require servicing are accessible.

B. Equipment Mounting: Install commercial water softeners on concrete base.

1. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. 2. Arrange units so controls and devices that require servicing are accessible. 3. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated,

install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base. 4. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete

base and anchor into structural concrete floor. 5. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,

instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 6. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 7. Anchor water softener and brine tanks to substrate.

C. Install seismic restraints for tanks and floor-mounting accessories and anchor to building structure.

D. Install brine lines and fittings furnished by equipment manufacturer but not specified to be factory installed.

E. Prepare mineral-tank distribution system and underbed for minerals and place specified mineral into mineral tanks.

F. Install water-testing sets mounted on wall, unless otherwise indicated, and near water softeners.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

D.


C. Install shutoff valves on raw-water inlet and soft-water outlet piping of each mineral tank.

1. Metal general-duty valves are specified in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping."

2. Exception: Water softeners with factory-installed shutoff valves at locations indicated.

D. Install pressure gages on raw-water inlet and soft-water outlet piping of each mineral tank. Pressure gages are specified in Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping."

1. Exception: Water softeners with factory-installed pressure gages at locations indicated.

E. Install valved bypass in water piping around water softeners.

1. Metal general-duty valves are specified in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping."

2. Water piping is specified in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping."

F. Install drains as indirect wastes to spill into open drains or over floor drains.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION



A. Tests and Inspections:

1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation.

3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

B. Water softeners will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.5 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Perform startup service.


B. Add water to brine tanks and fill with the following form of salt:

1. Commercial Water Softeners: Processed, plain salt pellets.



C. Sample water softener effluent after startup and at three consecutive seven-day intervals (total of four samples), and prepare certified test reports for required water performance characteristics. Comply with the following:

1. ASTM D 859, "Test Method for Silica in Water." 2. ASTM D 1067, "Test Methods for Acidity or Alkalinity of Water." 3. ASTM D 1068, "Test Methods for Iron in Water." 4. ASTM D 1126, "Test Method for Hardness in Water." 5. ASTM D 1129, "Terminology Relating to Water." 6. ASTM D 3370, "Practices for Sampling Water from Closed Conduits."

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain water softeners.




SECTION 223400 - FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Commercial, atmospheric, gas-fired, storage, domestic-water heaters. 2. Commercial, power-burner, gas-fired, storage, domestic-water heaters. 3. Commercial power-vent, gas-fired storage domestic-water heater.


A. Seismic Performance: Commercial domestic-water heaters shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to IBC2006/Seismic Zone # 3.


1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type and size of domestic-water heater indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. LEED Submittal:

1. Product Data for Prerequisite EA 2: Documentation indicating that units comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 7, "Service Water Heating."

C. Shop Drawings:


D. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For fuel-fired, domestic-water heaters, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

FUEL-FIRED, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS 223400 - 1





E. Product Certificates: For each type of commercial, gas-fired, domestic-water heater, from manufacturer.

F. Domestic-Water Heater Labeling: Certified and labeled by testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

G. Source quality-control reports.

H. Field quality-control reports.

I. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fuel-fired, domestic-water heaters to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

J. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.



B. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Fabricate and label fuel-fired, domestic-water heaters to comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.

C. ASME Compliance:

1. Where ASME-code construction is indicated, fabricate and label commercial, domestic-water heater storage tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.

D. NSF Compliance: Fabricate and label equipment components that will be in contact with potable water to comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects."

1.6 COORDINATION


1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of fuel-fired, domestic-water heaters that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.



1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures including storage tank and supports. b. Faulty operation of controls. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use.

2. Warranty Periods: From date of Substantial Completion.

a. Commercial, Gas-Fired, Storage, Domestic-Water Heaters:

1) Storage Tank: Five years. 2) Controls and Other Components: Two year(s).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COMMERCIAL, GAS-FIRED, STORAGE, DOMESTIC-WATER HEATERS

A. Commercial, Sealed Combustion, Gas-Fired, Storage, Domestic-Water Heaters:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following available manufacturers offering products with representative in Puerto Rico:

a. Rheem Ruud Manufacturing Company. b. GSW Water Heating c. Lochinvar Corporation. d. PVI Industries, LLC. e. RECO USA. f. Smith, A. O. Water Products Co.; a division of A. O. Smith Corporation.

2. Standard: ANSI Z21.10.3/CSA 4.3. 3. Storage-Tank Construction: ASME-code steel with 150-psig working-pressure rating.

a. Tappings: Factory fabricated of materials compatible with tank. Attach tappings to tank before testing.

1) NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1.

b. Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-water tank linings, including extending finish into and through tank fittings and outlets.

4. Factory-Installed Storage-Tank Appurtenances:

a. Anode Rod: Replaceable magnesium. b. Dip Tube: Required unless cold-water inlet is near bottom of tank. c. Drain Valve: Corrosion-resistant metal complying with ASSE 1005. d. Insulation: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1. Surround entire storage tank

except connections and controls. e. Jacket: Steel with enameled finish.



f. Burner: For use with atmospheric, gas-fired, domestic-water heaters and LP-gas fuel.

g. Automatic Ignition: ANSI Z21.20/CSA C22.2 No. 199, electric, automatic, gas-ignition system. Sealed combustion type.

h. Temperature Control: Self-diagnostic LCD electronic control and adjustable thermostat.

i. Safety Controls: Automatic, high-temperature-limit and low-water cutoff devices or systems.

j. Combination Temperature-and-Pressure Relief Valves: ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4-M. Include one or more relief valves with total relieving capacity at least as great as heat input, and include pressure setting less than domestic-water heater working-pressure rating. Select one relief valve with sensing element that extends into storage tank.

k. Corrosion resistant high efficiency 3-pass heat exchanger.

5. Special Requirements: NSF 5 construction, and low NOx emissions. 6. Direct vent.

B. Commercial, Sealed Combustion, Gas-Fired, Storage, Domestic-Water Heaters:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following available manufacturers offering products with representative in Puerto Rico:

a. Rheem Ruud manufacturing company. b. Smith, A. O. Water Products Co.; a division of A. O. Smith Corporation. c. PVI Industries, LLC. d. Precision Boilers. e. RECO USA.

2. Standard: ANSI Z21.10.3/CSA 4.3. 3. Storage-Tank Construction: ASME-code 316 stainless steel with 150-psig working-

pressure rating.

a. Tappings: Factory fabricated of materials compatible with tank. Attach tappings to tank before testing.

1) NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1.


4. Factory-Installed Storage-Tank Appurtenances:

a. Anode Rod: Not requires.. b. Dip Tube: Required unless cold-water inlet is near bottom of tank. c. Drain Valve: Corrosion-resistant metal complying with ASSE 1005. d. Insulation: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1. Surround entire storage tank

except connections and controls. e. Jacket: Stainless steel.



f. Burner: UL 795 for power-burner, gas-fired, domestic-water heaters and LP-gas fuel.

g. Automatic Ignition: ANSI Z21.20/CSA C22.2 No. 199, electric, automatic, gas-ignition system.

h. Temperature Control: Self-diagnostic electronic control with digital readout for water temperature, set point and differential.

i. Safety Controls: Automatic, high-temperature-limit and low-water cutoff devices or systems.

j. Combination Temperature-and-Pressure Relief Valves: ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4-M. Include one or more relief valves with total relieving capacity at least as great as heat input, and include pressure setting less than domestic-water heater working-pressure rating. Select one relief valve with sensing element that extends into storage tank.

k. Corrosion resistant, high efficiency 90/10 cupronickel heat exchanger.

5. Special Requirements: NSF 5 construction, and low NOx emissions. 6. Direct vent.

2.2 DOMESTIC-WATER HEATER ACCESSORIES

A. Domestic-Water Compression Tanks:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following available manufacturers offering products with the representative in Puerto Rico:

a. AMTROL Inc. b. Flexcon Industries. c. Pentair Pump Group (The); Myers. d. Smith, A. O. Water Products Co.; a division of A. O. Smith Corporation. e. State Industries. f. Taco, Inc.

2. Description: Steel, pressure-rated tank constructed with welded joints and factory-installed butyl-rubber diaphragm. Include air precharge to minimum system-operating pressure at tank.

3. Construction:

a. Tappings: Factory-fabricated steel, welded to tank before testing and labeling. Include ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.


c. Air-Charging Valve: Factory installed.

4. Capacity and Characteristics:

a. Working-Pressure Rating: 150 psig. b. Capacity Acceptable: 4 gal. minimum. c. Air Precharge Pressure: 2 psgi.



5. Warranty Periods: Five years from date of substantial completion.

B. Drain Pans: Corrosion-resistant metal with raised edge. Comply with ANSI/CSA LC 3. Include dimensions not less than base of domestic-water heater, and include drain outlet not less than NPS 3/4 with ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads or with ASME B1.20.7 garden-hose threads.

C. Gas Shutoff Valves: ANSI Z21.15/CSA 9.1-M, manually operated. Furnish for installation in piping.

D. Gas Pressure Regulators: ANSI Z21.18/CSA 6.3, appliance type. Include 1/2-psig pressure rating as required to match gas supply.

E. Combination Temperature-and-Pressure Relief Valves: Include relieving capacity at least as great as heat input, and include pressure setting less than domestic-water heater working-pressure rating. Select relief valves with sensing element that extends into storage tank.

1. Gas-Fired, Domestic-Water Heaters: ANSI Z21.22/CSA 4.4-M.

2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Factory Tests: Test and inspect assembled domestic-water heaters and storage tanks specified to be ASME-code construction, according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

B. Hydrostatically test commercial domestic-water heaters and storage tanks to minimum of one and one-half times pressure rating before shipment.

C. Domestic-water heaters will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for retesting and reinspecting requirements and Division 01 Section "Execution" for requirements for correcting the Work.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DOMESTIC-WATER HEATER INSTALLATION

A. Commercial, Domestic-Water Heater MountingTjETd1T2DdN-2E0.05hlf times pressvisi.er MountingTjETd1T Tc s IYs on concrete base. Comply with requirements for concrete base specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

1. Maintain manufacture s IY's reN-2E0.05hnded clearances. 2. Arrange units so controls and devices that require servicing are accessible. 3. ETd1T2Dddowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated,

iTd1T2Dddowel rods on 18-inch centers ar-2E0.und the fu2Ddperimeter of concrete base. 4. For supported equipment, iTd1T2Ddepoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete

base and anchor into structural concrete floor.




6. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 7. Anchor domestic-water heaters to substrate.

B. Install domestic-water heaters level and plumb, according to layout drawings, original design, and referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so controls and devices needing service are accessible.

1. Install shutoff valves on domestic-water-supply piping to domestic-water heaters and on domestic-hot-water outlet piping. Comply with requirements for shutoff valves specified in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping."

C. Install gas-fired, domestic-water heaters according to NFPA 54.

1. Install gas shutoff valves on gas supply piping to gas-fired, domestic-water heaters without shutoff valves.

2. Install gas pressure regulators on gas supplies to gas-fired, domestic-water heaters without gas pressure regulators if gas pressure regulators are required to reduce gas pressure at burner.

3. Install automatic gas valves on gas supplies to gas-fired, domestic-water heaters if required for operation of safety control.

D. Install commercial domestic-water heaters with seismic-restraint devices. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."

E. Install combination temperature-and-pressure relief valves in top portion of storage tanks. Use relief valves with sensing elements that extend into tanks. Extend commercial-water-heater relief-valve outlet, with drain piping same as domestic-water piping in continuous downward pitch, and discharge by positive air gap onto closest floor drain.

F. Install water-heater drain piping as indirect waste to spill by positive air gap into open drains or over floor drains. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water piping for domestic-water heaters that do not have tank drains. Comply with requirements for hose-end drain valves specified in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."

G. Install thermometer on outlet piping of domestic-water heaters. Comply with requirements for thermometers specified in Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping."

H. Fill domestic-water heaters with water.

I. Charge domestic-water compression tanks with air.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for domestic-water piping specified in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping."



B. Comply with requirements for gas piping specified in Division 23 Section "Facility Liquefied-Petroleum Gas Piping."

C. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

D. Where installing piping adjacent to fuel-fired, domestic-water heaters, allow space for service and maintenance of water heaters. Arrange piping for easy removal of domestic-water heaters.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION





2. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper operation.


B. Domestic-water heaters will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for retesting and reinspecting requirements and Division 01 Section "Execution" for requirements for correcting the Work.


3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain commercial, gas-fired, storage, domestic-water heaters.




SECTION 224000 - PLUMBING FIXTURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following plumbing fixtures and related components:

1. Faucets for lavatories and sinks. 2. Toilet seats. 3. Protective shielding guards. 4. Fixture supports. 5. Water closets. 6. Waterless Urinals. 7. Lavatories. 8. Commercial sinks. 9. Service sinks.


1. Division 10 Section "Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories." 2. Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for backflow preventers, floor

drains, and specialty fixtures not included in this Section. 3. Division 22 Section "Emergency Plumbing Fixtures."

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Accessible Fixture: Plumbing fixture that can be approached, entered, and used by people with disabilities.

B. Cast Polymer: Cast-filled-polymer-plastic material. This material includes cultured-marble and solid-surface materials.

C. Fitting: Device that controls the flow of water into or out of the plumbing fixture. Fittings specified in this Section include supplies and stops, faucets and spouts, shower heads and tub spouts, drains and tailpieces, and traps and waste pipes. Piping and general-duty valves are included where indicated.

D. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000 - 1


E. Solid Surface: Nonporous, homogeneous, cast-polymer-plastic material with heat-, impact-, scratch-, and stain-resistance qualities.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of plumbing fixture indicated. Include selected fixture and trim, fittings, accessories, appliances, appurtenances, equipment, and supports. Indicate materials and finishes, dimensions, construction details, and flow-control rates.

B. LEED Submittal:

1. Product Data for Credit WE 2, 3.1, and 3.2: Documentation indicating flow and water consumption requirements.

C. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For plumbing fixtures to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

E. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other components of each category through one source from a single manufacturer.

1. Exception: If fixtures, faucets, or other components are not available from a single manufacturer, obtain similar products from other manufacturers specified for that category.


C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A117.1, "Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities"; Public Law 90-480, "Architectural Barriers Act"; and Public Law 101-336, "Americans with Disabilities Act"; for plumbing fixtures for people with disabilities.

D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in Public Law 102-486, "Energy Policy Act," about water flow and consumption rates for plumbing fixtures.

E. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects," for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.

F. Select combinations of fixtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and other components that are compatible.



G. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for plumbing fixtures:

1. Solid-Surface-Material Lavatories and Sinks: ANSI/ICPA SS-1. 2. Stainless-Steel Commercial, Handwash Sinks: NSF 2 construction. 3. Vitreous-China Fixtures: ASME A112.19.2M.

H. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for lavatory and sink faucets:

1. Backflow Protection Devices for Faucets with Hose-Thread Outlet: ASME A112.18.3M. 2. Faucets: ASME A112.18.1. 3. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1011. 4. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7. 5. Integral, Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001. 6. NSF Potable-Water Materials: NSF 61. 7. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1. 8. Supply Fittings: ASME A112.18.1. 9. Brass Waste Fittings: ASME A112.18.2.

I. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for miscellaneous fittings:

1. Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001. 2. Brass and Copper Supplies: ASME A112.18.1. 3. Brass Waste Fittings: ASME A112.18.2.

J. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for miscellaneous components:

1. Floor Drains: ASME A112.6.3. 2. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7. 3. Off-Floor Fixture Supports: ASME A112.6.1M. 4. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1. 5. Plastic Toilet Seats: ANSI Z124.5. 6. Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TOILET ROOM LAVATORY FAUCETS

A. Lavatory Faucets::


a. Kohler Co. b. American Standard Companies, Inc.



c. Delta Faucet Company. d. Elkay Manufacturing Co. e. Moen, Inc. f. Speakman Company.

2. Description: Two-handle mixing. Include hot- and cold-water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with supplies and fixture holes; coordinate outlet with spout and fixture receptor.

a. Body Material: Commercial, solid brass. b. Finish: Polished chrome plate. c. Maximum Flow Rate: 0.5 gpm. d. Centers: 4 inches. e. Mounting: Deck exposed. f. Valve Handle(s): Wrist blade, 4 inches. g. Inlet(s): NPS 3/8 tubing, with NPS 1/2 male adaptor. h. Spout: Rigid, gooseneck type. i. Spout Outlet: Flow control Spray Aerator. j. Drain: Grid.

2.2 HAND SINK FAUCETS

A. Sink Faucets:


a. Advance Tabco. b. American Standard Companies, Inc. c. Chicago Faucets. d. Delta Faucet Company. e. Elkay Manufacturing Co. f. Just Manufacturing Company. g. Kohler Co. h. Moen, Inc. i. Speakman Company.

2. Description: Hand sink faucet with 3 hole fixture. Include hot- and cold-water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with supplies and fixture holes; coordinate outlet with spout and fixture receptor.

a. Body Material: Commercial, solid brass b. Finish: Polished chrome plate. c. Maximum Flow Rate: 0.5 gpm. d. Mixing Valve: Two-lever handle. e. Centers: 4 inches Single hole. f. Mounting: Back/wallexposed. g. Handle(s): Wrist blade, 4 inches.



h. Inlet(s): NPS 3/8 tubing with NPS 1/2 male adapter. i. Spout Type: Swivel gooseneck. j. Spout Outlet: Flow control Aerator. k. Vacuum Breaker: Required. l. Operation: Compression, manual. m. Drain: Grid.

B. Laboratory Sink Faucets:


a. Water Saver. b. American Standard Companies, Inc. c. Bradley Corporation. d. Chicago Faucets. e. Delta Faucet Company. f. Elkay Manufacturing Co. g. Just Manufacturing Company. h. Kohler Co. i. Moen, Inc. j. Speakman Company. k. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Commercial Brass Operation.

2. Description: Laboratory faucet deck mounted with 3 holes. Include hot- and cold-water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with supplies and fixture holes; coordinate outlet with spout and fixture receptor.

a. Body Material: Commercial, solid brass b. Finish: Polished chrome plate. c. Maximum Flow Rate: 1.0 gpm. d. Mixing Valve: Two-lever handle. e. Centers: 8 inches. f. Mounting: Top Back/wallexposed. g. Handle(s): Wrist blade, 4 inches. h. Inlet(s): NPS 3/8 tubing with NPS 1/2 male adapter. i. Spout Type: Swivel gooseneck. j. Spout Outlet: Flow control Aerator. k. Vacuum Breaker: Required. l. Operation: Compression, manual. m. Drain: Grid. n. Serrat hose end fitting required.

C. Surgeon Scrub Sink Faucets:


a. Elkay Manufacturing Co. b. American Standard Companies, Inc.



c. Chicago Faucets. d. Delta Faucet Company. e. Just Manufacturing Company. f. Kohler Co. g. Moen, Inc. h. Speakman Company. i. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Commercial Brass Operation.

2. Description: Sensor operated deck mounted with one hole. Coordinate faucet inlets with supplies and fixture holes; coordinate outlet with spout and fixture receptor.

a. Body Material: Commercial, solid brass b. Finish: Polished chrome plate. c. Maximum Flow Rate: 2.0 gpm. d. Water Temperature Control: Adjustable sensor eye and manual override. e. Mounting: Deck exposed. f. Handle: Wrist blade, 4 inches. g. Inlet(s): Two in line “Y” strainer with check valve and two NPS 3/8” stainless

steel braided supply line. h. Spout Type: Swivel gooseneck. i. Spout Outlet: Laminar flow control. j. Vacuum Breaker: Required. k. Control Type: Solid state with adjustable sensor range. l. Voltage: 12VDC plug-in voltage adapter. m. Closing Flow: Slow-closing piston operated solenoid valve.

D. Mop Sink Faucets:


a. Kohler Co. b. American Standard Companies, Inc. c. Chicago Faucets. d. Delta Faucet Company. e. Elkay Manufacturing Co. f. Just Manufacturing Company. g. Moen, Inc. h. Speakman Company. i. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Commercial Brass Operation.

2. Description: Service sink faucet with exposed yolk, bucket hook, and top brace.

a. Body Material: Commercial, solid brass b. Finish: Polished chrome plate. c. Maximum Flow Rate: 2.0 gpm. d. Mixing Valve: Two-lever handle. e. Mounting: Back/wallexposed. f. Handle(s): Wrist blade, 4 inches. g. Inlet(s): NPS 3/8 tubing with NPS 1/2 male adapter.



h. Spout Type: Rigid gooseneck. i. Spout Outlet: Aerator. j. Vacuum Breaker: Required. k. Operation: Compression, manual. l. Pipe end Threads; ½” inch.

E. Pantry Sink Faucets:


a. Elkay Manufacturing Co. b. American Standard Companies, Inc. c. Chicago Faucets. d. Delta Faucet Company. e. Just Manufacturing Company. f. Kohler Co. g. Moen, Inc. h. Speakman Company. i. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Commercial Brass Operation.

2. Description: Deck mounted kitchen sink faucet without spray with 3 holes. Include hot-and cold- water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with supplies and fixture holes; coordinate outlet with spout and fixture receptor.

a. Body Material: Commercial, solid brass b. Finish: Polished chrome plate. c. Maximum Flow Rate: 0.5 gpm. d. Mixing Valve: Single handle. e. Centers: 4 inches. f. Mounting: Top Back. g. Handle(s): Wrist blade, 4 inches. h. Inlet(s): NPS 3/8 tubing with NPS 1/2 male adapter. i. Spout Type: Swivel gooseneck. j. Spout Outlet: Flow control spray Aerator. k. Vacuum Breaker: Required. l. Operation: Compression, manual. m. Drain; Grid.

2.3 TOILET SEATS

A. Toilet Seats:


a. Kohler Co. b. American Standard Companies, Inc.



c. d. Bemis Manufacturing Company. e. Centoco Manufacturing Corp. f. Church Seats. g. Eljer. h. Olsonite Corp. i. Sanderson Plumbing Products, Inc.; Beneke Div. j. Sperzel.

2. Description: Toilet seat for water-closet-type fixture.

a. Material: Molded, solid plastic. b. Configuration: Open front without cover. c. Size: Elongated. d. Hinge Type: CK, check. e. Class: Heavy-duty commercial. f. Color: White.

2.4 PROTECTIVE SHIELDING GUARDS

A. Protective Shielding Pipe Covers:


a. Engineered Brass Co. b. Insul-Tect Products Co.; a Subsidiary of MVG Molded Products. c. McGuire Manufacturing Co., Inc. d. Plumberex Specialty Products Inc. e. TCI Products. f. TRUEBRO, Inc. g. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Tubular Brass Plumbing Products Operation.

2. Description: Manufactured plastic wraps for covering plumbing fixture hot- and cold-water supplies and trap and drain piping. Comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) requirements.

2.5 FIXTURE SUPPORTS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Josam Company. 2. MIFAB Manufacturing Inc. 3. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co. 4. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. 5. Watts Drainage Products Inc.; a div. of Watts Industries, Inc. 6. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.



B. Lavatory Supports,:

1. Description: Type II, lavatory carrier with concealed arms and tie rod for wall-mounting, lavatory-type fixture. Include steel uprights with feet.

2. Accessible-Fixture Support: Include rectangular steel uprights.

C. Sink Supports,:

1. Description: Type II, sink carrier with hanger plate, bearing studs, and tie rod for sink-type fixture. Include steel uprights with feet.

2.6 WATER CLOSETS

A. Water Closets, P-1:


a. Kohler Co. b. American Standard Companies, Inc. c. Crane Plumbing, L.L.C./Fiat Products. d. Eljer.

2. Description: Floor-mounting, floor-outlet, elongated, for handicap use, vitreous-china fixture designed for gravity-type tankoperation.

a. Style: Close coupled.

1) Bowl Type: Elongated with siphon-jet design. Include bolt caps matching fixture.

2) Height: Accessible. 3) Design Consumption: 1.0 gal./flush. 4) Tank: Gravity type with trim. Include cover. 5) Trip Mechanism: Lever-handle actuator. 6) Color: White.

b. Supply: NPS 3/8 chrome-plated brass or copper with loose-key stop.

2.7 URINALS

A. Urinals, P-11:


a. Kohler Co. b. Falcon Waterfree Technologies. c. Waterless Co.




a. Elkay Manufacturing Co. b. Advance Tabco c. Just Manufacturing Company.

2. Description: One-compartment, counter-mounting, 302 stainless-steel commercial sink without backsplash.

a. Dimensions: 22 inches x 22 inches x 12 inches. b. Metal Thickness: 18 gauge . c. Compartment:

d. Faucet: See paragraph 2.2 and plumbing DWG P-0.

1) Number Required: One. 2) Mounting: Deck.

e. Supplies: NPS 1/2 chrome-plated copper with stops.. f. Drain Piping: NPS 1-1/2 chrome-plated, cast-brass P-trap; 0.045-inchthick

tubular brass waste to wall; and wall escutcheon(s).

B. Commercial Sinks, P-3:


a. Advance Tabco. b. AERO Manufacturing, Inc. c. Amtekco Industries, Inc. d. Elkay Manufacturing Co. e. Just Manufacturing Company. f. Metal Masters Foodservice Equipment Co., Inc.

2. Description: Wall-mounting, 304 stainless-steel, commercial, hand wash-sink fixture.

a. Type: Basin with radius corners, back for faucet, and support brackets. b. Dimensions: 20 inches x 16 inches x 8 inches. c. Metal Thickness: 16 gauge. d. Faucet: See paragraph 2.2 and plumbing DWG P-0. e. Supplies: NPS 1/2 chrome-plated copper with stops. f. Drain: Grid. g. Drain Piping: NPS 1-1/2 chrome-plated, cast-brass P-trap; 0.045-inchthick

tubular brass waste to wall; and wall escutcheon. h. Fixture Support: Sink for wall-mounting installation.

C. Commercial Sinks, P-10:




a. Elkay Manufacturing Co. b. Advance Tabco c. Just Manufacturing Company. d. Metal Masters Foodservice Equipment Co., Inc.

2. Description: One-compartment, counter-mounting, 302 stainless-steel commercial sink without backsplash.

a. Dimensions: 19 ½ inches x 19 inches x 10 inches. b. Metal Thickness: 18 gauge. c. Faucet: See paragraph 2.2 and plumbing DWG P-0.

1) Number Required: One. 2) Mounting: Deck.

d. Supplies: NPS 1/2 chrome-plated copper with stops.. e. Drain Piping: NPS 1-1/2 chrome-plated, cast-brass P-trap; 0.045-inchthick

tubular brass waste to wall; and wall escutcheon(s).

2.10 SERVICE SINKS

A. Mop Service Sinks, P-6:


a. Kohler Co. b. American Standard Companies, Inc. c. Commercial Enameling Company. d. Eljer.

2. Description: Trap-standard- enameled, cast-iron fixture with roll-rim with two faucet holes in back and rim guard on front and sides.

a. Dimensions: 28 inches x 28 inches x 8 inches. b. Color: White. c. Faucet: See paragraph 2.2 and plumbing DWG P-0. d. Drain: Grid with NPS 3 outlet. e. Trap Standard: NPS 3 enameled, cast iron with cleanout and floor flange. f. Fixture Support: YES.



3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before plumbing fixture installation.

B. Examine cabinets, counters, floors, and walls for suitable conditions where fixtures will be installed.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Assemble plumbing fixtures, trim, fittings, and other components according to manufacturers' written instructions.

B. Install off-floor supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounting fixtures.

1. Use carrier supports without waste fitting for fixtures with tubular waste piping.

C. Install floor-mounting fixtures on closet flanges or other attachments to piping or building substrate.

D. Install wall-mounting fixtures with tubular waste piping attached to supports.

E. Install counter-mounting fixtures in and attached to casework.

F. Install fixtures level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.

G. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be connected to water distribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures. Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.

1. Exception: Use ball, or gate valves if supply stops are not specified with fixture. Valves are specified in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping."

H. Install trap and tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be directly connected to sanitary drainage system.

I. Install tanks for accessible, tank-type water closets with lever handle mounted on wide side of compartment.

J. Install toilet seats on water closets.

K. Install faucet-spout fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.

L. Install traps on fixture outlets.



1. Exception: Omit trap on fixtures with integral traps.

M. Install eyewash according to manufacturers recommendations.

N. Install escutcheons at piping wall ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. Escutcheons are specified in Division 22 Section "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."

O. Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and countertops using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Sealants are specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

3.3 CONNECTIONS


B. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.


A. Verify that installed plumbing fixtures are categories and types specified for locations where installed.

B. Check that plumbing fixtures are complete with trim, faucets, fittings, and other specified components.

C. Inspect installed plumbing fixtures for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.

D. Test installed fixtures after water systems are pressurized for proper operation. Replace malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until units operate properly.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures, fittings, and controls.

B. Adjust water pressure at faucetsto produce proper flow and stream.

C. Replace washers and seals of leaking and dripping faucets and stops.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Clean fixtures, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials. Do the following:



1. Remove faucet spouts and strainers, remove sediment and debris, and reinstall strainers and spouts.

2. Remove sediment and debris from drains.

B. After completing installation of exposed, factory-finished fixtures, faucets, and fittings, inspect exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.

B. Do not allow use of plumbing fixtures for temporary facilities.




SECTION 224300 - HEALTHCARE PLUMBING FIXTURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following medical plumbing fixtures and related components:

1. Steam sterilization autoclave.


1. Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for backflow preventers. 2. Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties" for floor drains. 3. Division 22 Section "Plumbing Fixtures" for conventional plumbing fixtures. 4. Division 22 Section "Emergency Plumbing Fixtures."

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Accessible Medical Plumbing Fixture: Plumbing fixture that can be approached, entered, and used by people with disabilities.

B. Fitting: Device that controls the flow of water into or out of the medical plumbing fixture. Fittings specified in this Section include supplies and stops, faucets and spouts, shower heads, drains and tailpieces, and traps and waste pipes.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of medical plumbing fixture indicated. Include selected fixture and trim, fittings, accessories, location of utilities for coordination with others trades, equipment, and supports. Indicate materials and finishes, dimensions, construction details, and flow-control rates.

B. LEED Submittal:

1. Product Data for Credit WE 2, 3.1, and 3.2: Documentation indicating flow and water consumption requirements.

C. Shop Drawings: Provide large scale plans and sections showings rough-in and anchor placement, clearances diagram power, signal, and control wiring.

HEALTHCARE PLUMBING FIXTURES 224300 - 1


D. Test Reports: Submit test reports verifying conformance to specified performance test.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For medical plumbing fixtures to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain medical plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other components of each category through one source from a single manufacturer.

1. Exception: If fixtures, faucets, or other components are not available from a single manufacturer, obtain similar products from other manufacturers specified for that category.


C. Quality Standards: All sterilizers are rigorously tested according to Beta Star QA and testing procedures. The results of each test are recorded and stored on the Quality Control Record (QR-001). This testing includes: instrument calibration to NIST standards, electrical input and output verification, Leak Test, Bowie & Dick Test, alarms verification, hazards test, and consecutive execution of sterilization cycles to insure repeatability. Temperature control to within +/- 0.5°C is verified for all sterilization cycles. The following listings and standards are met, exceeded and carry identifiable labeling.

1. Underwriters Laboratory (UL) Standard 2. ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1 for pressure vessels. 3. Canadian Standards Association (CSA)

D. Select combinations fixtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and other components that are compatible.

E. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for steam sterilizer:

1. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label Vessel to comply with ASME boiler and pressure Vessel Code Section VIII, Divison 1.

2. Cycle parameters compliance: Industrial moist heat sterilization. AAMI/ISO111345-R-8/93.

1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials as manufacture’s recommendations.


VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 1.7 WARRANTY

A. Provide two year written manufacturer's warrantee.

1. Coverage:

a. Structural failure, warping, and finish integrity. b. Proper operation of all parts and systems including but not limited to piping,

sensors, controls, doors, door seals, and other systems.

2. Start of Warrantee Period: Upon satisfactory verification of operation on site, or substantial completion of project, whichever date occurs latest.

3. Preventive Maintenance Service: Include preventive maintenance service, including replacement parts and other material, during warrantee period as a part of warrantee.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STEAM STERILIZER AUTOCLAVE

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Beta Star LS series steam sterilization autoclave Model LS-202038.

B. Unit Features:

1. Chamber Size: 20” x 20” x 38”. 2. Type: H1-Vacuum. 3. Enclosure:

a. One wall recessed.

4. Door Arrangement: Single door, vertical sliding. 5. Door Operation: Pneumatically operated door. 6. Control System: The Laboratory Series (LS) Color Touch Screen PLC features a user

friendly interface powered by a robust Programmable Logic Control system. Features include:

a. Operator end User Interface: Programmable 6” color touch screen operator interface.

b. Five (5) levels of user login security. c. Pre-programmed cycle types. d. Thirty (30) stored programmable custom cycles. e. Custom cycle names for easy recognition. f. Continuous cycle status output. g. Help screens / alarms h. Network or data download ports

7. Printer: The printer is a 32 column, nine (9) pin dot matrix impact printer. The printer records all cycle set points, cycle phase changes, pressure and temperature at specified time intervals and alarms. The printer uses easy to change roll paper and ink ribbons.



8. Vessel Construction: All Beta Star vessels are manufactured at our corporate headquarters in Honey Brook, PA. All standard vessels fabricated from SA 240 type 316L stainless steel chamber and door and SA 240 type 304 stainless steel steam jacket. The chamber and jacket meet the requirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Section VIII, Division

a. The vessel chamber, door(s) and jacket maintain specified operating pressures and temperatures and withstand operation from full vacuum to 45 psig. Two (2) validation ports for load probes are included on all chambers. Features include:

1) Engineered for optimum life expectancy. 2) 304 stainless steel construction. 3) 25 Ra polished chamber finish for sanitary requirements. 4) Two (2) threaded validation ports for load monitoring. 5) Machined and polished door gasket groove for extended door gasket life,

and greater assurance of seal integrity. 6) Square chamber design for maximum loading capacity. 7) Three (3) sided door retention for additional safety. 8) Dual steam inlet for uniform temperature distribution. 9) Baffles: Provide chamber with baffles steam inlets. The internal chamber

baffling of 316 stainless steel shall be designed to direct condensate to the chamber floor drain, to minimize load wetting by direct impingement on the load by condensate and assure proper steam temperature distribution in the chamber.

10) Shell Insulation: Cover sterilizer jacket with minimum one inch thick bonded fiberglass insulation encased in aluminum skin.

9. Piping: All piping assemblies are constructed tested and fitted using brass and copper connected to the jacket, chamber and drain. Industrial grade pneumatic valves require less maintenance, eliminating costly downtime. Features include:

a. Engineered for lowest cost of ownership b. High temperature industrial grade valves c. Pressure relief valves d. Automatic Condensate Exhaust: The piping system shall provide automatic

condensing of chamber steam disposal of effluent discharge at a minimum temperature of 140°F at the floor drain inlet.

e. Serviceable piping configuration for P.M. inspections f. Integrated RTD’s for constant and accurate temperature monitoring g. Easy-Clean chamber drain strainer h. Stainless steel piping configurations.

10. Door System: Each vertical siding door system is equipped with both automatic locking and sealing subsystems. The locking system is used to ensure that once the door reaches the closed position, the door gasket remains there until the system has reached a safe to open state. The sealing system uses compressed air to activate the seal once the door is in the closed state and is tested prior to a cycle initiation. Power operated door systems have a closing safety feature that requires the operator to hold the close button until the door is in the fully closed position. Should the operator



release the close button before the door is fully closed, the door will auto reverse to the fully open position ensuring proper and safe operation. Electrical, mechanical and pneumatic safety locks are provided to prevent the sterilizer doors from being unsealed or opened while the chamber is under pressure.

11. Door Gasket: Beta Star’s high temperature, air actuated door gaskets are seated into a machined groove that provides close tolerances, offering a less strenuous operating environment, extending door gasket life.

12. Fascia: Beta Star sterilizers include a number 4 finish, 304 stainless steel, removable front fascia panel to enclose the vessel, mechanicals and the door. Side, back and top panel removable enclosures are available.

13. Vacuum System: Beta Star LS series sterilizer is equipped with a water ejector system. Beta Star’s unique piping configuration reduces water consumption while maintaining consistent vacuum and automatically regulating effluent temperature to the facility drain to below locally specified temperature requirements.

14. Safety Features: Beta Star sterilizers shall be safe to operate. They shall contain safety checks and balances that ensure operator safety.

a. An auto abort system for abnormal chamber conditions. b. An interlocking door that will stay closed under chamber pressure. c. Key lock system that ensures only authorized users have access to the sterilizer. d. A pneumatic override of steam to chamber valve. e. Safety door handle that will bend but not break if too much operator pressure is

applied when the door is locked.

15. Control System Options: Beta Star LS Touch Screen control system shall be equipped to handle advanced cycle functionality which includes pre-configured cycles for standard loads such as glassware, plastic ware, liquids, pre-vacuum and hard goods.

a. F0 Cycle: The F0 Cycle calculates the sterilization time based on load temperature and duration exposed. These calculations are based on predetermined set points. The result is controlled exposure time.

b. Isothermal Cycle: This is a low temperature cycle used in disinfection or pasteurization of heat sensitive solutions.

c. Foot Pedal: A foot pedal for operating the automatic sliding door can be used where hands free operation is necessary.

d. Load Probe: A load probe for temperature monitoring can be added through one of the included validation ports.

16. Vessel Options: The Beta Star vessel can be configured to enhance functionality and include:

a. Sanitary Ports: The chamber ports can be upgraded with sanitary ports accepting thermocouple fittings for use with critical media or goods.

b. Seismic Restraints: For equipment being installed in areas of seismic activity, a seismic restraint or tie-down is used.

c. Dual Drain: Allows for improved temperature distribution.



d. Jacket Idle: Holds jacket at lower temperature for utility conservation when the unit is not in cycle.

17. Piping Options: Sterilizer jacket and chamber piping can be configured to meet process requirements and are upgrades.

a. 316L Stainless Steel Piping with threaded and swagelock fittings, and stainless steel process valves.

b. Sanitary Piping: 316L stainless steel, orbital welded, sanitary piping and process valves can be added for high level sterilization.

18. Steam Source:

a. Steam shall be provided from the building which is equipped with a steam source boiler that can supply the sterilizer with the required steam utility.

19. Loading Equipment: A bottom shelf is standard with all Beta Star sterilizers. Additional shelves are available using the internal rack system.

a. Loading Cart & Transfer Carriage: The heavy duty 316L stainless steel loading cart is designed to hold the goods or media to be sterilized. The loading cart rides on the tracks between the transfer carriage and the chamber. The transfer carriage is used to transport the loading cart from station to station. A drip pan can be added to the loading cart to capture spilled liquid or media.

C. Utility Requirements:

1. Vacuum System Power: 208V/ 3 Phase / 60Hz / 6.9 Amps. Customer to provide 30 Amp disconnected with 5 Amp/ 10 Amp fuses for each leg.

2. Control Power: 120V/ 1 Phase / 60 Hz/ 5 Amps. Customer to provide 15 Amp external wall mounted box and switch.

3. Cold Water High Vacuum: 3 GPM, 40-60 psig, ½” FNPT connection. Customer to provide shut-off valve.

4. Compressed Air: 2 SCFM, 80–100 psig, ½” FNPT connection. Customer to provide shut-off valve

5. Remote Located Air Compressor: 120V / 1 Phase / 60Hz / 13.5 Amps. Customer to provide dual outlet.

6. House Steam: 80 lb/Hr, 60-80 psig, ½” FNPT connection (regulated to 40 PSI). Customer to provide shut-off valve.

7. Drain: 3” floor drain.

2.2 OILESS RECIPROCATING AIR COMPRESOR

A. Manufactures: Subject to complied with requirement provide products of following manufacturer:

1. Beta Start Life Science Equipment.



B. Duplex Oil free reciprocating piston type with non-lubricated compression chamber, lubricated crack case and of construction that prohibits oil from entering compression chamber.

1. Two metal gauges with universal quick connectors. 2. “On-Off” switch. 3. Thermal overload protection. 4. Belt guard totally enclosing pulleys and belts, or direc drive. 5. Air Filters. 6. Automatic blowdown system.

C. Capacities and Characteristics:

1. 4.6 Gallons Aluminum construction twin tank. 2. CFM Flow: 4.2 at 90 psig. 3. Noise Level: 65 dB. 4. Motor: 1.5. 5. Electrical Characteristics: 120 Volts, 1 Phase, 60 Hz.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine equipment delivery route, prior to equipment design and shop drawing preparation, to determine partial disassembly requirements for equipment.

1. Review delivery path and schedule with Contractor to ensure that disassembly and packing strategy is adequate to successfully deliver units to final installation location.

B. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of equipment.

C. Review all required utility service rough-ins, with Manufacturer's representative and Installer present, for compliance with requirements for each equipment item.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 SHIPPING AND DELIVERY

A. Preparation for Shipping: Upon completion of all required factory source quality control activities:

1. Clean equipment inside and out to be free of rust, loose scale and other deposits and otherwise be in perfect factory condition.

2. Protect all exposed and finished surfaces to prevent soiling or other damage from shipping or storage.

3. Protect all threaded connections, flanges, couplings, and other items that may be subject to damage



B. Disassembly: Disassemble equipment to allow rigging to final installation site.

C. Crating and Packing:

1. Securely crate and/or package equipment to prevent damage during shipping and storage. 2. Secure all loose parts within unit to prevent uncontrolled movement and damage. 3. Properly label all crates with up/down requirements, other handling requirements, and lift

points as applicable.

D. Delivery and Initial Set-up:

1. Manufacturer to coordinate delivery to the installation site, setting the unit in place, unpacking and reassembly/initial set-up.

2. Manufacturer to verify that installation site, including required utility connections, finish surfaces, pits and other special installation facilities, and other requirements are ready for receiving the equipment including:

a. Verifying field dimensions and opening dimensions against approved shop drawings and equipment requirements.

E. Beginning installation acknowledges acceptance by Manufacturer of all existing conditions.

F. Upon unpacking equipment, remove all debris, crating material and packaging from the site.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install, level, and otherwise make equipment ready for connection to building utilities.

1. Connection to building utilities to be by mechanical, electrical and plumbing sub-contractors.

B. Functionally test all utilities supporting the equipment and set per the requirements of the equipment.

1. Manufacturer shall coordinate with the testing team to dictate the limits of operating parameters on all supporting utilities.

2. Record the functional test results to be supplied to the owner after completion of start-up.

C. Final assemble equipment including field welding, bolting, and installation of internal components and pieces.

D. Start up, program, test, clean and adjust equipment to ensure optimal performance in accordance with specified performance criteria.

1. Provide manufacturer's field representative to perform systems startup. 2. Prepare and start equipment and systems in accordance with manufacturers' instructions

and recommendations.



3. Adjust moving parts for smooth operation. Adjust doors to operate easily and to provide effective seal. Verify that all pumps, motors and other electro-mechanical devises are operating within tolerance.

4. Start-up service is a complete inspection/verification of a complete installation. Following a detailed procedure written in a checklist format, a qualified manufacturer Service Representative verifies that the equipment was properly installed, that all the supply utilities meet manufacturer’s specifications, that the unit powers up correctly, and that the operational cycles run properly. All of the necessary utilities should be available and operational without interruption for the duration of start-up.

E. Cover equipment and associated piping and controls to protect against dust and damage until Date of Substantial Completion.

3.4 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES

A. See Section 017700 - Closeout Submittals, for closeout submittals.

B. See Section 017900 - Demonstration and Training, for additional requirements.

C. Demonstrate proper operation of equipment to Owner's designated representative.

D. Demonstration: Demonstrate operation of system to Owner's personnel.

1. Use operation and maintenance data as reference during demonstration. 2. Describe function, operation, and maintenance of each component.

E. Training: Train Owner's personnel on operation and maintenance of system.

1. Use operation and maintenance manual as training reference, supplemented with additional training materials as required.

2. Provide minimum of one day of training. 3. Instructor: Manufacturer's training personnel. 4. Location: At project site.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed rack and cage washers from subsequent construction operations.

3.6 MAINTENANCE

A. See Section 017823- Operation and Maintenance Data, for additional requirements relating to maintenance service.

B. Provide a separate maintenance contract for specified maintenance service during warrantee period.




SECTION 224500 - EMERGENCY PLUMBING FIXTURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Combination units.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Accessible Fixture: Emergency plumbing fixture that can be approached, entered, and used by people with disabilities.

B. Plumbed Emergency Plumbing Fixture: Fixture with fixed, potable-water supply.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include flow rates and capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Product Certificates: Submit certificates of performance testing specified in "Source Quality Control" Article.


E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For emergency plumbing fixtures to include in operation and maintenance manuals.



B. ANSI Standard: Comply with ANSI Z358.1, "Emergency Eyewash and Shower Equipment."

EMERGENCY PLUMBING FIXTURES 224500 - 1


C. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects," for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.

D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC/ANSI A117.1, "Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities"; Public Law 90-480, "Architectural Barriers Act"; and Public Law 101-336, "Americans with Disabilities Act"; for plumbing fixtures for people with disabilities.

1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS


1. Flushing-Fluid Solution: Separate lot and equal to at least 200 percent of amount of solution installed for each self-contained unit.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 COMBINATION UNITS

A. Standard, Plumbed Emergency Shower with Eyewash Combination Units.


a. Speakman Company b. Acorn Safety; a division of Acorn Engineering Company. c. Bradley Corporation. d. Encon Safety Products. e. Guardian Equipment Co. f. Haws Corporation. g. Sellstrom Manufacturing Company. h. Speakman Company. i. WaterSaver Faucet Co.

2. Piping:

a. Material: Galvanized steelwith brass fittings. b. Unit Supply: NPS 1-1/4 minimum. c. Unit Drain: Outlet at back or side near bottom.

3. Shower:

a. Capacity: 20 gpm @ 20 psi for at least 15 minutes. b. Supply Piping: NPS 1 with flow regulator and stay-open ball control valve. c. Control-Valve Actuator: Power coated yellow aluminum triangular pull rod. d. Shower Head: 8-inch- minimum diameter, “Cycolac yellow plastic”.



e. Mounting: Pedestal.

4. Eye/Face Wash Unit:

a. Capacity: 9.3 gpm @ 30 psi for at least 15 minutes. b. Supply Piping: NPS 1/2 with flow regulator and stay-open control valve. c. Control-Valve Actuator: Stainless steel push handle. d. Spray-Head Assembly: (6) Brass, Chrome plated aerators, plastic covered brass

bodies. e. Receptor: 300 Series Stainless-steel bowl. f. Mounting: Attached shower pedestal.


A. Certify performance of emergency plumbing fixtures by independent testing organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for water piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before plumbed emergency plumbing fixture installation.


3.2 EMERGENCY PLUMBING FIXTURE INSTALLATION

A. Assemble emergency plumbing fixture piping, fittings, control valves, and other components.

B. Install fixtures level and plumb.

C. Fasten fixtures to substrate.

D. Install shutoff valves in water-supply piping to fixtures. Use ball, gate, or globe valve if specific type valve is not indicated. Install valves chained or locked in open position if permitted. Install valves in locations where they can easily be reached for operation. Comply with requirements for valves specified in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping."

1. Exception: Omit shutoff valve on supply to group of plumbing fixtures that includes emergency equipment.

2. Exception: Omit shutoff valve on supply to emergency equipment if prohibited by authorities having jurisdiction.



E. Install dielectric fitting in supply piping to emergency equipment if piping and equipment connections are made of different metals. Comply with requirements for dielectric fittings specified in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping."

F. Install escutcheons on piping wall and ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Division 22 Section "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."

G. Fill self-contained fixtures with flushing fluid.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect cold-water-supply piping to plumbed emergency plumbing fixtures not having water-tempering equipment. Comply with requirements for cold-water piping specified in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping."

B. Indirectly connect emergency plumbing fixture receptors without trapped drain outlet to sanitary waste or storm drainage piping.

C. Where installing piping adjacent to emergency plumbing fixtures, allow space for service and maintenance of fixtures.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install equipment nameplates or equipment markers on emergency plumbing fixtures and equipment and equipment signs on water-tempering equipment. Comply with requirements for identification materials specified in Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."


A. Mechanical-Component Testing: After plumbing connections have been made, test for compliance with requirements. Verify ability to achieve indicated capacities.


1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection. 2. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest

until no leaks exist. 3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm

proper unit operation. 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment.

C. Emergency plumbing fixtures will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.




3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust or replace fixture flow regulators for proper flow.




SECTION 225100 - BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Listed double-wall chimneys.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


1. Steam boiler. 2. Guy wires and connectors.

B. Shop Drawings: For vents, breechings, chimneys, and stacks. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, methods of field assembly, components, hangers and seismic restraints, and location and size of each field connection.

2. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include calculations required for selecting seismic restraints and structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.


D. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that factory-fabricated breeching, chimneys, and stacks; accessories; and components will withstand seismic forces In Puerto Rico. Include the following:

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of

any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Breeching, Chimneys, and Stacks: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS 225100 - 1


3. Detailed description of anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.

E. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain listed system components through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code--Steel," for hangers and supports and AWS D9.1/D9.1M, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for shop and field welding of joints and seams in vents, breechings, and stacks.

C. Certified Sizing Calculations: Manufacturer shall certify venting system sizing calculations.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories."

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of venting system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, structural failures caused by expansion and contraction.

1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LISTED BUILDING-HEATING-APPLIANCE CHIMNEYS


1. American Metal Products; MASCO Corporation. 2. Cleaver-Brooks; Div. of Aqua-Chem Inc. 3. FAMCO. 4. Heat-Fab, Inc. 5. Industrial Chimney Company. 6. LSP Products Group, Inc. 7. Metal-Fab, Inc. 8. Schebler Co. (The). 9. Selkirk Inc.; Selkirk Metalbestos and Air Mate.



10. Simpson Dura-Vent Co., Inc.; Subsidiary of Simpson Manufacturing Co. 11. Tru-Flex Metal Hose Corp. 12. Van-Packer Company, Inc.

B. Description: Double-wall metal vents tested according to UL 103 and UL 959 and rated for 1400 deg F continuously, or 1800 deg F for 10 minutes; with positive or negative flue pressure complying with NFPA 211.

C. Construction: Inner shell and outer jacket separated by at least a 1-inch annular space filled with high-temperature, ceramic-fiber insulation.

D. Inner Shell: ASTM A 666, 0.036” minimum thickness Type 304 stainless steel. All inner shell seams shall be full penetration welded the entire length of the pipe section. Riveted, tack or welded seams are not permitted.

E. Outer Jacket: 0.034” minimum thickness Aluminized steel.

F. All outer shell seams shall be full penetration welded the entire length of the pipe section. Riveted, tack or spot welded seams are not permitted.

G. Stainless steel centering clips shall be welded to the outher shell to maintain the 1” spacing and ensure concentricity of the shells.

H. Accessories: Tees, elbows, increasers, draft-hood connectors, terminations, adjustable roof flashings, storm collars, support assemblies, thimbles, firestop spacers, and fasteners; fabricated from similar materials and designs as vent-pipe straight sections; all listed for same assembly.

1. Termination: Stack cap designed to exclude minimum 90 percent of rainfall. 2. Termination: Exit cone with drain section incorporated into riser.

2.2 GUYING AND BRACING MATERIALS

A. Assembly to withstand 145 miles per hour.

B. Cable: Galvanized, stranded wires of the following thickness:

1. For ID Sizes 4 to 15 Inches: 5/16 inch.

C. Pipe: Galvanized steel, NPS 1-1/4.

D. Angle Iron: Galvanized steel, 2 by 2 by 0.25 inch.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.



1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 APPLICATION

A. Steam Boiler.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF LISTED VENTS AND CHIMNEYS

A. Locate to comply with minimum clearances from combustibles and minimum termination heights according to product listing or NFPA 211, whichever is most stringent.

B. Support vents at intervals recommended by manufacturer to support weight of vents and all accessories, without exceeding appliance loading.

C. Slope breechings down in direction of appliance, with condensate drain connection at lowest point piped to nearest drain.

D. Lap joints in direction of flow.

E. Connect base section to foundation using anchor lugs of size and number recommended by manufacturer.

F. Join sections with acid-resistant joint cement to provide continuous joint and smooth interior finish.

G. Erect stacks plumb to finished tolerance of no more than 1 inch out of plumb from top to bottom.

3.4 CLEANING

A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finishes.

B. Clean breechings internally, during and after installation, to remove dust and debris. Clean external surfaces to remove welding slag and mill film. Grind welds smooth and apply touchup finish to match factory or shop finish.

C. Provide temporary closures at ends of breechings, chimneys, and stacks that are not completed or connected to equipment.

D. Protect the outer jacket by a minimum of one base coat and one finish coat of heat resistant paint after installation.




SECTION 225239 - -FUEL-FIRE TUBELESS STEAM BOILERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes packaged, factory-fabricated and -assembled boilers, trim, and accessories for generating steam with the following configurations and burners:

1. Skid mounted and piped vertical, tubeless boiler, with vertical condensate return system, boiler feed water system, blow off separator, and chemical treatment package.

2. GasLPG burner.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include performance data, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For boilers, boiler trim, and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Design calculations and vibration isolation base details, signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.

a. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases.

b. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and rails and equipment mounting frames.

2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that boiler, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment." Include the following:


a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."

FUEL-FIRE TUBELESS STEAM BOILERS 225239 - 1


b. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."



D. Source quality-control test reports.


F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For boilers, components, and accessories to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

G. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.

H. Other Informational Submittals:

1. ASME Stamp Certification and Report: Submit "A," "S," or "PP" stamp certificate of authorization, as required by authorities having jurisdiction, and document hydrostatic testing of piping external to boiler.

2. Startup service reports.



B. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label boilers to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

C. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Boilers shall have minimum efficiency according to "Gas and Oil Fired Boilers - Minimum Efficiency Requirements."

D. UL Compliance: Test Boilers for compliance with UL 795, "Commercial-Industrial Gas Heating Equipment." Boilers shall be listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.


VETERINARY CLINIC CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace front- and rear-door refractories and heat exchangers of boilers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Vertical, Fire-Tube Boilers and Heat Exchanger: Five years from date of Substantial Completion, if following water-treatment program recommended by manufacturer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products with representative in Puerto Rico that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Fulton Companies. 2. Columbia Boiler Company. 3. Precision Boilers. 4. PVI Industries, LLC.

2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Description: Factory-fabricated, -assembled, and -tested, vertical, tubeless boilers with heat exchanger sealed pressure tight, built on a steel base; including insulated jacket, flue-gas vent, water supply and return connections, and controls. Each unit shall consist of a vertical tubeless boiler, boiler fittings, burner equipment and automatic controls. The boiler (with all piping and wiring) shall be completely factory assembled as a self-contained unit. Each boiler shall be neatly finished, thoroughly tested and properly packaged for shipping. Both boiler and burner must be the product of the same manufacturer to insure undivided responsibility and simplified servicing. Boiler design and construction shall be in accordance with ASME Code Section I or ASME Code Section IV, and the complete packaged unit shall bear

Underwriters' Laboratories Label. The furnace shall be constructed of SA-53B ERW Pipe or SA 285 Grade C or SA-516 Grade 70 Plate. The shell shall be constructed of SA-106B Seam-less Pipe, SA 285 Grade C or SA 516 Grade 70 Plate. The heads shall be SA 285 Grade C or SA 516 Grade 70 Plate.

B. Boiler Design: The boiler shall be a vertical tubeless design with a centrally located furnace. The top mounted forced draft burner will fire from the top of the boiler down and through a circular furnace. Adequate handholes shall be provided for access to the water side of the boiler. Hand-holes and cleanout openings shall be provided at the lower part of the boiler so that the entire bottom of the boiler may be cleaned. The standard two-pass boiler will make use of welded convection fins to enhance heat transfer and distribute the flow of flue gases.

All necessary refractories shall be installed in the boiler.



The boiler shall be insulated with compatible high temperature castable mixtures. The boiler section subject to direct flame shall be insulated with a high strength, low permanent linear change, high temperature limit castable. The remaining area shall be insulated with a lightweight, low thermal conductive castable. These castables assure strength sot that cyclic thermal stress and cracking which can damage the insulation, does not occur. The high temperature blanket Insulation thickness shall be 4 inches. Pressure vessel shall be constructed of heavy gauge steel not less than 5/16” thick or nozzles not less schedule 40 pipe. An observation port shall be provide to view the combustion chamber. Unit shall be of gas-tight construction throughout.

C. Boilers Fittings:

1. Safety valve(s) shall be ASME Section I or Section IV approved side outlet type. Their size and number shall be in accordance with Code require ments and set to open at 100 PSIG.

2. A water column shall be piped to the boiler at the factory. A gauge glass and drain valve will be -supplied. The gauge glass shall be protected by a plexi-glass gauge protector as an additional safety feature. Water column shall also include the, primary low water cut-off probe to automatically shutoff burner operation when the water falls below a predetermined level. An auxiliary low water cut-off (probe type) shall be mounted in the boiler shell. The water column shall contain two additional water level probes to "start" and "stop" the feed water pump.

3. Steam pressure gauge shall be mounted on the wade column complete with test connection.

4. Feed water stop and check valve shall be supplied at factory in line to an internally baffled feed connection in boiler shell to prevent thermal shock.

5. Additional standard trim shall include Y-type blow down valve and water column blow down valve.

D. Burner Equipment

1. The propane gas burner shall be vertically oriented, down fired, forced draft type with a1/3 hp motor. The burner shall be direct spark ignition and shall include the following components: a 6 kVA spark generator, ignition electrode, UV flame sensor, forced draft fan, primary and secondary air adjustments, and air flow safety switch. The burner shall be full modulation (2:1 turndown) operation. The complete burner assembly and fuel trains shall be ASME CSD-1 compliant. The motor shall comply with requirements specified in Division 23 Section “Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment”.

E. Controls

1. The boiler operating controls shall be 120/60/1 and shall include, but are not limited to the following: an operating pressure control for automatic start and stop of burner operation; a high limit pressure control with manual reset; a firing rate pressure control; dual safety low water cut-offs, one with manual reset to comply with ASME CSD- I code; an air safety switch to prevent operation until sufficient combustion air is assured; probe-type water level control with relays to signal pump start and stop; a Honeywell Flame Safeguard control with display.



2. A second 15 psig operating pressure control and firing rate pressure control, along with a day/night selector switch shall be added for night set back.

3. All controls to be panel mounted and so located on the boiler as to provide ease of servicing the burner and boiler without disturbing the controls; and also located to prevent possible damage by water, fuel or heat of combustion gases. Controls connected to water or fuel shall be installed outside the main boiler control panel. All controls be mounted and wired according to Underwriters’ Laboratories requirements.

F. Burner location and firing method to be such that combustion takes place within the water-backed furnace of the boiler. Burner controls shall be of on/off operation type and are to include the following:

1. Operating pressure control for automatic start and stop of burner operation. 2. Two low water cut-off probes to cause shut down of unit when water level drops to

minimum safe level, (one in the water column and one in the boiler shell). The one in the shell shall be manual reset to comply with ANSI/ASME CSD-1 Code.

3. Gas fired boilers shall have an air safety switch to prevent operation until sufficient combustion aie is assured.

4. A contact for a feed water pump shall be included and consist of a single phase pump motor starter or contacts for 3 phase pump.

5. An electronic type combustion flame safeguard shall be included to provide full protection against flame failure. The control shall maintain a running history of operating hours, number of cycles, and the most recent six flame failures. This control shall have the capability to be connected to a keyboard display module which will retrieve that information,.

6. Burner motor controller shall have thermal overload protection.

2.3 CONDENSATE RETURN/ BOILER FEED WATER SYSTEM

A. The condensate return/feedwater system shall be a vertically oriented stainless steel vented tank; Fulton model VT-20 complete with a water level gauge glass, steam preheat system, float switch with solenoid makeup water valve assembly and (2) pumps (one as back-up). The package will include a NEMA I rated control cabinet complete with pump motor starters, HOA switches, pump selector switch, and operating lights. This boiler feed system will be factory assembled and tested, including leak test to insure proper manufacturing. The system shall have a primer coat and finish coat of paint.

2.4 BLOW-OFF SEPARATOR

A. The Fulton model F-20 boiler blow-off separator shall be ASME Section VIII Div. I approved and National Board registered pressure vessel. The unit shall carry the "U" stamp and be rated for a minimum MAWP of 75 psig per National Board Code. The separator shall be constructed of a minimum of 3/8" thick steel shell and 5/8" thick flat heads. All blow down separators shall have a centrifugally baffled blow-off inlet to allow for the flashing of steam. It shall have adequate handhole openings to allow for internal inspection of vessel. The connections to be included on this vessel are a top vent for steam flash release, a bottom drain, a blow off inlet and outlet as well as a cold water inlet. The system shall include an automatic cooling kit to



insure that the proper blow-off water temperature is maintained before draining to the sewer system. The blow-off separator shall have a primer and finish coat of paint.

2.5 BOILER SOLIDS MANAGEMENT

A. An automatic blow down valve with timer shall be provided for fully automatic control of bottom boiler blow-off. This used in conjunction with the conductivity-based automatic surface blow down will allow totally unmanned operation of blow-off which is essential to boiler pressure vessel longevity.

2.6 CHEMICAL TREATMENT

A. Chemical treatment packages shall include 50 gallon polyethylene storage tank, electronic metering pump, agitator and all pump suction and discharge tubing including an injection quill. See Specification Section 232500 “HVAC and Steam Boiler Water Treatment:

2.7 SKID MOUNTING

A. All the components in this specification shall be mounted on steel skid(s) with the appropriate number of lifting holes to insure ease of movement and installation of system. The steel skid shall be constructed of '/4" thick steel decking material welded to 4" structural steel channel primed and painted. All components shall be welded or bolted to the deck of the skid to insure that no movement is possible in shipment. All specified components are to be completely piped and wired. Two check valves shall be included on the feed water line to the boiler. All blow-down piping and fittings are to be forged steel. All interconnecting steel piping shall be SA 53 F schedule 80.

2.8 SINGLE SOURCE POWER CONNECTION

A. Single source power connection allows for a single power connection to the skid system that will in turn be distributed to all the components on the skid. This will include a fused main disconnect, a control circuit transformer, and non-fused disconnects at each boiler panel.

2.9 SINGLE POINT WATER CONNECTION

A. All cold water piping to the blow-off separator, water treatment and return system will be on a common header to allow a single cold water field connection.

2.10 SINGLE POINT DRAIN

A. Drains from all the accessory equipment shall be factory piped to a common point adjacent to the edge of the skid package for ease of install.


VETERINARY CLINIC CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 2.11 SINGLE POINT STEAM

A. Single point process steam connection with steam stop valve shall be provided and include steam piping to feed system steam preheat connection.

2.12 CONTROLS

A. Refer to Division 23 Section "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC."

B. Boiler operating controls shall include the following devices and features:

1. Control transformer. 2. Set-Point Adjust: Set points shall be adjustable. 3. Operating Pressure Control: Factory wired and mounted to cycle burner. 4. Low-Water Cutoff and Pump Control: Cycle feed water pump(s) for makeup water

control. 5. Sequence of Operation: Electric, factory-fabricated and installed panel to control burner

firing rate to maintain a constant steam pressure. Maintain pressure set point plus or minus 10 percent.

6. Night Set Back: Steam at 15 psig.

C. Burner Operating Controls: To maintain safe operating conditions, burner safety controls limit burner operation.

1. High Cutoff: Automatic reset stops burner if operating conditions rise above maximum boiler design pressure.

2. Low-Water Cutoff Switch: Electronic probe shall prevent burner operation on low water. Cutoff switch shall be automatic-reset type.

3. Audible Alarm: Factory mounted on control panel with silence switch; shall sound alarm for above conditions.

D. Building Automation System Interface: Factory-install hardware and software to enable building automation system to monitor, control, and display boiler status and alarms.

1. Hardwired Points:

a. Monitoring: On/off status, and common trouble alarm . b. Control: On/off operation, steam pressure adjustment.

2. A communication interface with building automation system shall enable building automation system operator to remotely control and monitor the boiler from an operator workstation. Control features available, and monitoring points displayed, locally at boiler control panel shall be available through building automation system.

2.13 ELECTRICAL POWER

A. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Electrical devices and connections are specified in Division 26 Sections.



B. Single-Point Field Power Connection: Factory-installed and -wired switches, motor controllers, transformers, and other electrical devices necessary shall provide a single-point field power connection to boiler.

1. House in NEMA 250, Type 12 enclosure. 2. Wiring shall be numbered and color-coded to match wiring diagram. 3. Install wiring outside of an enclosure in a metal raceway. 4. Field power interface shall be to circuit breaker. 5. Provide branch power circuit to each motor and to controls with a disconnect switch or

circuit breaker. 6. Provide each motor with overcurrent protection.

2.14 CAPACITIES AND CHARACTERISTICS: As indicated on schedule drawings.


A. Test and inspect factory-assembled boilers, before shipping, according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

B. Burner and Hydrostatic Test: Factory adjust burner to eliminate excess oxygen, carbon dioxide, oxides of nitrogen emissions, and carbon monoxide in flue gas and to achieve combustion efficiency; perform hydrostatic test.

C. Proper operation of boiler and all controls will be assured by filling with water and test firing at the factory. Test firing will include adjusting all operating and safety control settings to the correct settings.

D. Boiler inspection shall be include a hydrostatic test in presence of an inspector having national board commission. He shall certify a data report which shall be delivered with the boiler as evidence of ASME code compliance. In addition to an ASME symbol, the boiler shall bear a national board registration number.

E. Allow Owner access to source quality-control testing of boilers. Notify Architect 14 days in advance of testing.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Before boiler installation, examine roughing-in for concrete equipment bases, anchor-bolt sizes and locations, and piping and electrical connections to verify actual locations, sizes, and other conditions affecting boiler performance, maintenance, and operations.

1. Final boiler locations indicated on Drawings are approximate. Determine exact locations before roughing-in for piping and electrical connections.



B. Examine mechanical spaces for suitable conditions where boilers will be installed.


3.2 BOILER INSTALLATION

A. Install boilers level on concrete base. Concrete base is specified in Division 03 Section "Common Work Results for HVAC," and concrete materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 03.

B. Vibration Isolation: Elastomeric isolator pads with a minimum static deflection of 0.25 inch. Vibration isolation devices and installation requirements are specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

C. Install gas-fired boilers according to NFPA 58.

D. Assemble and install boiler trim.

E. Install electrical devices furnished with boiler but not specified to be factory mounted.

F. Install control wiring to field-mounted electrical devices.

3.3 CONNECTIONS


B. Install piping adjacent to boiler to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect LGP piping to boiler gas-train inlet with union. Piping shall be at least full size of gas train connection. Provide a reducer if required.

D. Connect steam and condensate piping to supply-, return-, and blow down-boiler tappings with shutoff valve and union or flange at each connection.

E. Install piping from safety relief valves to nearest floor drain.

F. Connect breeching full size to boiler outlet. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Breechings, Chimneys, and Stacks" for venting materials.

G. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

H. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."


VETERINARY CLINIC CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.



1. Perform installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Leak Test: Hydrostatic test. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 3. Operational Test: Start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. Adjust

air-fuel ratio and combustion. 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment.

a. Burner Test: Adjust burner to eliminate excess oxygen, carbon dioxide, oxides of nitrogen emissions, and carbon monoxide in flue gas and to achieve combustion efficiency.

b. Check and adjust initial operating set points and high- and low-limit safety set points of fuel supply, water level, and steam pressure.

c. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.

C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

D. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other than normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

E. Performance Tests:

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect component assemblies and equipment installations, including connections, and to conduct performance testing.

2. Boilers shall comply with performance requirements indicated, as determined by field performance tests. Adjust, modify, or replace equipment in order to comply.

3. Perform field performance tests to determine the capacity and efficiency of boilers.

a. Test for full capacity. b. Test for boiler efficiency at low fire, 20, 40, 60, 80, 100, 80, 60, 40 and 20 percent

of full capacity. Determine efficiency at each test point.

4. Repeat tests until results comply with requirements indicated. 5. Provide analysis equipment required to determine performance. 6. Provide temporary equipment and system modifications necessary to dissipate the heat

produced during tests if building systems are not adequate. 7. Notify Architect in advance of test dates. 8. Document test results in a report and submit to Architect.


VETERINARY CLINIC CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 3.5 OPERATION MANUAL

A. Instruction for installation, operation, and maintenance of the boiler shall be contained in a manual provided with each unit.

B. A wiring diagram corresponding to the boiler shall be included in the boiler panel box.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain boilers. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."




SECTION 230500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems. 2. Dielectric fittings. 3. Sleeves. 4. Escutcheons. 5. Grout. 6. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections. 7. Painting and finishing. 8. Supports and anchorages.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.



D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and chases.

E. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:

1. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic. 2. PE: Polyethylene plastic. 3. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

F. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500 - 1


1. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber. 2. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


1. Transition fittings. 2. Dielectric fittings. 3. Mechanical sleeve seals. 4. Escutcheons.


A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."

B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."



C. Electrical Characteristics for HVAC Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.


A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for HVAC installations.

B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.



C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for HVAC items requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified.

2.2 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS

A. Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods.

B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.


A. Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.

B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents.

1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated.

a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges. b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.

C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.

F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping, unless otherwise indicated.



G. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

H. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:

1. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493. 2. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.




C. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure at 180 deg F.


a. Capitol Manufacturing Co. b. Central Plastics Company. c. Eclipse, Inc. d. Epco Sales, Inc. e. Hart Industries, International, Inc. f. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. g. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div.

D. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.


a. Calpico, Inc. b. Lochinvar Corp.

E. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.


a. Perfection Corp. b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co., Inc. d. Victaulic Co. of America.


VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 2.5 SLEEVES

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.

B. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

2.6 ESCUTCHEONS

A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening.

B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-plated finish.

C. One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw.

1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated .

D. Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw.

1. Finish: Polished chrome-plated .

E. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With spring clips and chrome-plated finish.

F. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With concealed hinge, set screw or spring clips, and chrome-plated finish.

2.7 GROUT

A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.

1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.

2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. 3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying piping systems.



B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

G. Install piping at indicated slopes.

H. Install piping free of sags and bends.

I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

J. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following:

1. New Piping:

a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type. b. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type with spring clips. c. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-

brass type with polished chrome-plated finish. d. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece or split-casting,

cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish. e. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-plate, stamped-steel

type with concealed hinge and set screw. f. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass type. g. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type with set screw

or spring clips. h. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, floor-plate

type.

M. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

N. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor and roof slabs.



O. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs.


a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.

2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed. 3. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between

sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:

a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6.

4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Refer to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation.

P. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter. 2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter.

3. Seal.

Q. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for materials.

R. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

S. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in requirements.

3.2 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION











G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.

H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

I. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:


2. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix. 3. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket

fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.

4. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.

3.3 PIPING CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals.

4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals.


VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 3.4 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are not indicated.

B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install HVAC equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.

D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.

3.5 PAINTING

A. Painting of HVAC systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 09 Sections "Interior Painting" and "Exterior Painting."

B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish.

3.6 CONCRETE BASES

A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment manufacturer's written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project. Refer to Division 03 Section “Cast-in- place concret” for concrete base requirements.

1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit.

2. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.

3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.


3.7 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES

A. Refer to Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor HVAC materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.


VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 3.8 GROUTING

A. Mix and install grout for HVAC equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors.

B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.

C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.

D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.

E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.

F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.

G. Place grout around anchors.

H. Cure placed grout.




SECTION 230513 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose, horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on ac power systems up to 600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment manufacturer for field installation.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the following:

1. Motor controllers. 2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load. 3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence. 4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with requirements in this Section except when stricter requirements are specified in HVAC equipment schedules or Sections.

2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS

A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet above sea level. Power factor at rated duty minimum 90%.

B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.

COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 230513 - 1

VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS

A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.

B. Efficiency: Energy efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1- 1998 Table 12-12.

C. Service Factor: 1.15.

D. Multispeed Motors: Separate winding for each speed.

E. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage.

F. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.

G. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating.

H. Insulation: Class F .

I. Code Letter Designation: 1. Motors Smaller than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.

J. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor frame sizes smaller than 324T.

K. Motor 1 HP and larger shall have a power factor rating of 90% to 100% at design duty.

2.4 POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer.

1. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish, designed and tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced by pulse-width modulated inverters.

2. Energy- and Premium-Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation. 3. Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation. 4. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected

motors.

2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS

A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor application:

1. Permanent-split capacitor.

B. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type.



C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.

D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type.

E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)




2. Standard: ASME B40.200. 3. Case: Cast aluminum; 9-inch nominal size unless otherwise indicated. 4. Case Form: Adjustable angle unless otherwise indicated. 5. Tube: Glass with magnifying lens and blue or red organic liquid. 6. Tube Background: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings

graduated in deg F and deg C. 7. Window: Glass . 8. Stem: Brass and of length to suit installation.

a. Design for Thermowell Installation: Bare stem. 9. Connector: 3/4 inches, with ASME B1.1 screw threads./ 10. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range or one scale division, to a maximum of

1.5 percent of scale range.

2.2 THERMOWELLS

A. Thermowells:

1. Standard: ASME B40.200. 2. Description: Pressure-tight, socket-type fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting. 3. Material for Use with Copper Tubing: CNR or CUNI. 4. Material for Use with Steel Piping: CRES or CSA. 5. Type: Stepped shank unless straight or tapered shank is indicated. 6. External Threads: NPS 1/2, NPS 3/4, or NPS 1, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads. 7. Internal Threads: 1/2, 3/4, and 1 inch, with ASME B1.1 screw threads. 8. Bore: Diameter required to match thermometer bulb or stem. 9. Insertion Length: Length required to match thermometer bulb or stem. 10. Lagging Extension: Include on thermowells for insulated piping and tubing. 11. Bushings: For converting size of thermowell's internal screw thread to size of

thermometer connection.

B. Heat-Transfer Medium: Mixture of graphite and glycerin.

2.3 PRESSURE GAGES

A. Direct-Mounted, Metal-Case, Dial-Type Pressure Gages:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. AMETEK, Inc.; U.S. Gauge. b. Ashcroft Inc. c. Marsh Bellofram. d. Trerice, H. O. Co. e. Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. f. Weiss Instruments, Inc.

2. Standard: ASME B40.100.

METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING 230519 - 2


3. Case: Liquid-filled type(s); drawn steel; 6-inch nominal diameter. 4. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube unless otherwise indicated. 5. Pressure Connection: Brass, with NPS 1/4 , ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and bottom-

outlet type unless back-outlet type is indicated. 6. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer. 7. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in psi

and kPa. 8. Pointer: Dark-colored metal. 9. Window: Glass . 10. Ring: Brass. 11. Accuracy: Grade B, plus or minus 2 percent of middle half of scale range.

2.4 GAGE ATTACHMENTS

A. Snubbers: ASME B40.100, brass; with NPS 1/4 , ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and porous-metal-type surge-dampening device. Include extension for use on insulated piping.

B. Valves: Brass ball, with NPS 1/4 , ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.

2.5 TEST PLUGS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Flow Design, Inc. 2. Miljoco Corporation. 3. National Meter, Inc. 4. Peterson Equipment Co., Inc. 5. Sisco Manufacturing Company, Inc. 6. Trerice, H. O. Co. 7. Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 8. Weiss Instruments, Inc.

B. Description: Test-station fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting.

C. Body: Brass or stainless steel with core inserts and gasketed and threaded cap. Include extended stem on units to be installed in insulated piping.

D. Thread Size: NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.

E. Minimum Pressure and Temperature Rating: 500 psig at 200 deg F.

F. Core Inserts: Chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic and EPDM self-sealing rubber.



H. Install test plugs in piping tees.

I. Install thermometers in the following locations:

1. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic zone. 2. Inlet and outlets of each chiller. 3. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic coil in air-handling units.

J. Install pressure gages in the following locations:

1. Inlet and outlet of each chiller chilled-water and and chilled watr cooling coil. 2. Suction and discharge of each pump.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Install thermometers and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and maintenance of meters, gages, machines, and equipment.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. After installation, calibrate meters according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.

3.4 THERMOMETER SCHEDULE

A. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each hydronic zone shall be one of the following: 1. Industrial-style, liquid-in-glass type. 2. Test plug with EPDM self-sealing rubber inserts.

B. Thermometers at inlets and outlets of each chiller shall be one of the following: 1. Industrial-style, liquid-in-glass type. 2. Test plug with chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic self-sealing rubber inserts.

C. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each hydronic coil in air-handling units shall be one of the following: 1. Industrial-style, liquid-in-glass type. 2. Test plug with EPDM self-sealing rubber inserts.

D. Thermometer stems shall be of length to match thermowell insertion length.

3.5 THERMOMETER SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE

A. Scale Range for Chilled-Water Piping: 0 to 100 deg F.


VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 3.6 PRESSURE-GAGE SCHEDULE

A. Pressure gages at inlet and outlet of each chiller chilled-water shall be the following:

1. Liquid-filled , direct -mounted, metal case. 2. Test plug with EPDM self-sealing rubber inserts.

B. Pressure gages at suction and discharge of each pump and compression tank shall be one of the following:

1. Liquid-filled , direct -mounted, metal case. 2. Test plug with EPDM self-sealing rubber inserts.

3.7 PRESSURE-GAGE SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE

A. Scale Range for Chilled-Water Piping: 0 to 100 psi.

B. Scale range for compression tank: 0 to 100 psi.




SECTION 230523 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Bronze angle valves. 2. Bronze ball valves. 3. Iron ball valves. 4. Bronze swing check valves. 5. Bronze gate valves. 6. Iron gate valves. 7. Bronze globe valves. 8. Iron globe valves.


1. Division 23 HVAC piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections only. 2. Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for valve tags and

schedules.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CWP: Cold working pressure.

B. EPDM: Ethylene propylene copolymer rubber.

C. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber.

D. NRS: Nonrising stem.

E. OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke.

F. RS: Rising stem.

G. SWP: Steam working pressure.

GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 230523 - 1


A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated.


A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single manufacturer.

B. ASME Compliance:

1. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria. 2. ASME B31.1 for power piping valves. 3. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.


A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:

1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends. 3. Set angle, gate, and globe valves closed to prevent rattling. 4. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces. 5. Block check valves in either closed or open position.

B. Use the following precautions during storage:

1. Maintain valve end protection. 2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew point temperature. If

outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.

C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES

A. Refer to HVAC valve schedule articles for applications of valves.

B. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures.

C. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.

D. Valve Actuator Types: 1. Handwheel: For valves other than quarter-turn types.



2. Handlever: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 and smaller. 3. Wrench: For plug valves with square heads. Furnish Owner with 1 wrench for every 5

plug valves, for each size square plug-valve head.

E. Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch stem extensions and the following features:

1. Gate Valves: With rising stem. 2. Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material, and

protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or disturbing insulation.

F. Valve-End Connections:

1. Flanged: With flanges according to ASME B16.1 for iron valves. 2. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18. 3. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.

G. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.

2.2 BRONZE ANGLE VALVES

A. Class 125, Bronze Angle Valves with Bronze Disc:


a. Hammond Valve. b. Milwaukee Valve Company. c. NIBCO, INC d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 1. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet. d. Ends: Threaded. e. Stem and Disc: Bronze. f. Packing: Asbestos free. g. Handwheel: Malleable iron or bronze.

B. Class 125, Bronze Angle Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:


a. American Valve, Inc.



b. NIBCO INC.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 2. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet. d. Ends: Threaded. e. Stem: Bronze. f. Disc: PTFE or TFE. g. Packing: Asbestos free. h. Handwheel: Malleable iron or bronze, or aluminum.

C. Class 150, Bronze Angle Valves with Bronze Disc:


a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. b. Kitz Corporation.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 1. b. CWP Rating: 300 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and union-ring bonnet. d. Ends: Threaded. e. Stem and Disc: Bronze. f. Packing: Asbestos free. g. Handwheel: Malleable iron or bronze.

D. Class 150, Bronze Angle Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:


a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. d. Hammond Valve. e. Milwaukee Valve Company. f. NIBCO INC. g. Powell Valves.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 2. b. CWP Rating: 300 psig.



c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and union-ring bonnet. d. Ends: Threaded. e. Stem: Bronze. f. Disc: PTFE or TFE. g. Packing: Asbestos free. h. Handwheel: Malleable iron or bronze.

2.3 BRONZE BALL VALVES

A. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim:


a. American Valve, Inc. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. d. Hammond Valve. e. Lance Valves; a division of Advanced Thermal Systems, Inc. f. Legend Valve. g. Milwaukee Valve Company. h. NIBCO INC. i. Red-White Valve Corporation. j. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-110. b. SWP Rating: 150 psig. c. CWP Rating: 600 psig. d. Body Design: Two piece. e. Body Material: Bronze. f. Ends: Threaded. g. Seats: PTFE or TFE. h. Stem: Bronze. i. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. j. Port: Full.

2.4 BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Class 125, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Bronze Disc:


a. American Valve, Inc.




a. American Valve, Inc. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. e. Kitz Corporation. f. Milwaukee Valve Company. g. NIBCO INC. h. Red-White Valve Corporation. i. Zy-Tech Global Industries, Inc.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 3. b. CWP Rating: 300 psig. c. Body Design: Horizontal flow. d. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze. e. Ends: Threaded. f. Disc: Bronze.

D. Class 150, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:


a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. c. Hammond Valve. d. Milwaukee Valve Company. e. NIBCO INC. f. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 4. b. CWP Rating: 300 psig. c. Body Design: Horizontal flow. d. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze. e. Ends: Threaded. f. Disc: PTFE or TFE.

2.5 BRONZE GATE VALVES

A. Class 125, RS Bronze Gate Valves:




a. American Valve, Inc. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. e. Hammond Valve. f. Kitz Corporation. g. Milwaukee Valve Company. h. NIBCO INC. i. Powell Valves. j. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. k. Zy-Tech Global Industries, Inc.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 2. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet. d. Ends: Threaded or solder joint. e. Stem: Bronze. f. Disc: Solid wedge; bronze. g. Packing: Asbestos free. h. Handwheel: Malleable iron, bronze, or aluminum.

B. Class 150, RS Bronze Gate Valves:


a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. c. Hammond Valve. d. Kitz Corporation. e. Milwaukee Valve Company. f. NIBCO INC. g. Powell Valves. h. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. i. Zy-Tech Global Industries, Inc.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 2. b. CWP Rating: 300 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and union-ring bonnet. d. Ends: Threaded. e. Stem: Bronze.



f. Disc: Solid wedge; bronze. g. Packing: Asbestos free. h. Handwheel: Malleable iron or bronze.

2.6 IRON GATE VALVES

A. Class 125, NRS, Iron Gate Valves:


a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. d. Flo Fab Inc. e. Hammond Valve. f. Kitz Corporation. g. Legend Valve. h. Milwaukee Valve Company. i. NIBCO INC. j. Powell Valves. k. Red-White Valve Corporation. l. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. m. Zy-Tech Global Industries, Inc.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-70, Type I. b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12, CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet. d. Ends: Flanged. e. Trim: Bronze. f. Disc: Solid wedge. g. Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free.

B. Class 125, OS&Y, Iron Gate Valves:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:

a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. d. Flo Fab Inc. e. Hammond Valve. f. Kitz Corporation. g. Legend Valve.



h. Milwaukee Valve Company. i. NIBCO INC. j. Powell Valves. k. Red-White Valve Corporation. l. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. m. Zy-Tech Global Industries, Inc.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-70, Type I. b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12, CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. NPS 14 to NPS 24, CWP Rating: 150 psig. d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet. e. Ends: Flanged. f. Trim: Bronze. g. Disc: Solid wedge. h. Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free.

C. Class 250, OS&Y, Iron Gate Valves:


a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. c. Hammond Valve. d. Milwaukee Valve Company. e. NIBCO INC. f. Powell Valves. g. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-70, Type I. b. NPS1 to NPS 2 CWP Rating: 300 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet. d. Ends: Flanged or threaded. e. Trim: Bronze. f. Disc: Solid wedge. g. Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free.

2.7 BRONZE GLOBE VALVES

A. Class 125, Bronze Globe Valves with Bronze Disc:




a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. c. Hammond Valve. d. Kitz Corporation. e. Milwaukee Valve Company. f. NIBCO INC. g. Powell Valves. h. Red-White Valve Corporation. i. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. j. Zy-Tech Global Industries, Inc.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 1. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet. d. Ends: Threaded or solder joint. e. Stem and Disc: Bronze. f. Packing: Asbestos free. g. Handwheel: Malleable iron or bronze.

B. Class 125, Bronze Globe Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:


a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. c. NIBCO INC. d. Red-White Valve Corporation.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 2. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet. d. Ends: Threaded or solder joint. e. Stem: Bronze. f. Disc: PTFE or TFE. g. Packing: Asbestos free. h. Handwheel: Malleable iron or bronze.

C. Class 150, Bronze Globe Valves with Nonmetallic Disc:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the followingavailable manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.



b. Hammond Valve. c. Kitz Corporation. d. Milwaukee Valve Company. e. NIBCO INC. f. Powell Valves. g. Red-White Valve Corporation. h. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. i. Zy-Tech Global Industries, Inc.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 2. b. CWP Rating: 300 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and union-ring bonnet. d. Ends: Threaded. e. Stem: Bronze. f. Disc: PTFE or TFE. g. Packing: Asbestos free. h. Handwheel: Malleable iron or bronze.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling.

B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations.

C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.

D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.

E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.


A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.



D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.

E. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows:

1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level. 2. Lift Check Valves: With stem upright and plumb.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.

3.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following:

1. Shutoff Service: Ball or gate valves. 2. Throttling Service except Steam: Globe valves, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Throttling Service, Steam: Globe valves. 4. Pump-Discharge Check Valves:

a. NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze swing check valves with bronze or nonmetallic disc, unless otherwise indicated.

b. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Iron swing check valves with lever and weight or with spring or iron, center-guided, metal or resilient-seat check valves, unless otherwise indicated.

B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted.

C. Select valves, except wafer types, with the following end connections:

1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder-joint valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below.

2. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends except where threaded valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below.

3. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends. 4. For Steel Piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends except where threaded valve-end

option is indicated in valve schedules below. 5. For Steel Piping, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends.

3.5 CHILLED-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller:

1. Bronze Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends. 2. Bronze Angle Valves: Class 125, bronze or nonmetallic disc.



3. Ball Valves: Two piece, full port, bronze with bronze trim. 4. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 125, bronze or nonmetallic disc. 5. Bronze Gate Valves: Class 125, RS, bronze. 6. Bronze Globe Valves: Class 125, bronze or nonmetallic disc.

B. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 and Larger:

1. Iron Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: May be provided with threaded ends instead of flanged ends.

2. Iron Gate Valves: Class 125, OS&Y, flanges ends.

3.6 HEATING-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE


1. Bronze Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends. 2. Bronze Angle Valves: Class 125, bronze or nonmetallic disc. 3. Ball Valves: Two piece, full port, bronze with bronze trim. 4. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 125, bronze or nonmetallic disc. 5. Bronze Gate Valves: Class 125, RS. 6. Bronze Globe Valves: Class 125, bronze or nonmetallic disc.

B. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 and Larger:

1. Iron Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: May be provided with threaded ends instead of flanged ends.

2. Iron Gate Valves: Class 125, OS&Y, flanges ends

3.7 LOW-PRESSURE STEAM VALVE SCHEDULE (15 PSIG OR LESS)


1. Bronze Angle Valves: Class 125, nonmetallic disc. 2. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 125, nonmetallic disc. 3. Bronze Gate Valves: Class 125, RS. 4. Bronze Globe Valves: Class 125, nonmetallic disc.

3.8 HIGH-PRESSURE STEAM VALVE SCHEDULE (MORE THAN 15 PSIG


1. Bronze Angle Valves: Class 125, nonmetallic disc. 2. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 150, nonmetallic disc. 3. Bronze Gate Valves: Class 150, RS, bronze. 4. Globe Valves: Class 150, bronze, nonmetallic disc.


VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 3.9 STEAM-CONDENSATE VALVE SCHEDULE


1. Bronze Angle Valves: Class 125, nonmetallic disc. 2. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 150, nonmetallic disc. 3. Bronze Gate Valves: Class 150, RS. 4. Bronze Globe Valves: Class 150, nonmetallic disc.




SECTION 230529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following hangers and supports for HVAC system piping and equipment:

1. Steel pipe hangers and supports. 2. Trapeze pipe hangers. 3. Thermal-hanger shield inserts. 4. Fastener systems. 5. Equipment supports.


1. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural-steel shapes and plates for trapeze hangers for pipe and equipment supports.

2. Division 23 Section " Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for vibration isolation devices.

3. Division 23 Section(s) "Metal Ducts " for duct hangers and supports.

1.3 DEFINITIONS (NOT USED)


A. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.

B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

1. Steel pipe hangers and supports. 2. Thermal-hanger shield inserts. 3. Powder-actuated fastener systems.

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529 - 1


B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for the following:

1. Trapeze pipe hangers. Include Product Data for components. 2. Pipe stands. Include Product Data for components.

3. Equipment supports.



A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."

B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



2.2 STEEL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. Refer to Part 3 "Hanger and Support Applications" Article for where to use specific hanger and support types.

B. [Available ]Manufacturers:

1. AAA Technology & Specialties Co., Inc. 2. Bergen-Power Pipe Supports. 3. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 4. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc. 5. Grinnell Corp. 6. National Pipe Hanger Corporation.

C. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.



D. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion for support of bearing surface of piping.

2.3 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS

A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from structural-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.

2.4 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS

A. Description: 100-psigminimum, compressive-strength insulation insert encased in sheet metal shield.


1. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc. 2. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co. 3. PHS Industries, Inc. 4. Pipe Shields, Inc.

C. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate or ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with vapor barrier.

D. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.

E. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.

F. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature.

2.5 FASTENER SYSTEMS

A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened Portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.


a. Hilti, Inc. b. ITW Ramset/Red Head. c. Masterset Fastening Systems, Inc. d. MKT Fastening, LLC. e. Powers Fasteners.



B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened Portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.


a. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. b. Empire Industries, Inc. c. Hilti, Inc. d. ITW Ramset/Red Head. e. MKT Fastening, LLC. f. Powers Fasteners.


A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural-steel shapes.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.

1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS

A. Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment.

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish.

D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.

E. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:



1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.

2. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.

F. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20.

2. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads.

G. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.

H. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer

to prevent crushing insulation. 2. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.

I. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

J. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction.


A. Steel Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure.

B. Trapeze Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers.

1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual pipe hangers.

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1.

C. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.



D. Fastener System Installation:

1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less than 4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.

2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories.

F. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.

G. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation.

b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.

c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.1 for power piping and ASME B31.9 for building services piping.

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees.

a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

b. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick. c. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.


A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to support equipment above floor.

B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.

C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.

3.4 METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports.



B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours

of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.

B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.

3.6 PAINTING

A. Touch Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.


B. Touch Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous metal are specified in Division 09 painting Sections.

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.




SECTION 230548 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Isolation pads. 2. Freestanding and restrained spring isolators. 3. Elastomeric hangers. 4. Spring hangers. 5. Pipe riser resilient supports. 6. Resilient pipe guides. 7. Seismic snubbers. 8. Restraining braces and cables. 9. Steel , vibration isolation equipment bases.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. IBC: International Building Code.

B. ICC-ES: ICC-Evaluation Service.


A. Wind-Restraint Loading:

1. Basic Wind Speed: 150 MPH. 2. Building Classification Category: II. 3. Minimum 10 lb/sq. ft. multiplied by the maximum area of the HVAC component

projected on a vertical plane that is normal to the wind direction, and 45 degrees either side of normal.

B. Seismic-Restraint Loading:

1. Site Class as Defined in the IBC: B. 2. Assigned Seismic Use Group or Building Category as Defined in the IBC: II.

VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

230548 - 1


a. Component Importance Factor: 1.0 . b. Component Response Modification Factor: 1.5. c. Component Amplification Factor: 1.0 .

3. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at Short Periods (0.2 Second): 0.167g <0.33g. 4. Design Spectral Response Acceleration at 1-Second Period: 0.067g <0.133g.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


1. Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration isolation device.

2. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each type and size of seismic-restraint component used.

3. Interlocking Snubbers: Include rating for horizontal, vertical, and combined load.

B. Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of seismic bracing for HVAC piping and equipment with other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports and seismic restraints.



E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air-mounting systems to include in operation and maintenance manuals.


A. Comply with seismic-restrain requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this section are more stringent.

B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS


1. Ace Mountings Co., Inc. 2. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. 3. California Dynamics Corporation. 4. Isolation Technology, Inc.


230548 - 2


5. Kinetics Noise Control. 6. Mason Industries. 7. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. 8. Vibration Isolation. 9. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.

B. Pads: Arranged in single or multiple layers of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad area, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized-steel baseplates, and factory cut to sizes that match requirements of supported equipment.

C. Spring Isolators: Freestanding, laterally stable, open-spring isolators.



deformation or failure. 5. Baseplates: Factory drilled for bolting to structure and bonded to 1/4-inchthick, rubber

isolator pad attached to baseplate underside. Baseplates shall limit floor load to 500 psig. 6. Top Plate and Adjustment Bolt: Threaded top plate with adjustment bolt and cap screw

to fasten and level equipment.

D. Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators with seismic or limit-stop restraint.

1. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due to weight being removed; factory-drilled baseplate bonded to 1/4-inchthick, neoprene or rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside; and adjustable equipment mounting and leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation.

2. Restraint: Seismic or limit stop as required for equipment and authorities having jurisdiction.



deformation or failure.

E. Elastomeric Hangers: Single or double-deflection type, fitted with molded, oil-resistant elastomeric isolator elements bonded to steel housings with threaded connections for hanger rods. Color-code or otherwise identify to indicate capacity range.

F. Spring Hangers: Combination coil-spring and elastomeric-insert hanger with spring and insert in compression.

1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded hanger rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular hanger-rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency.


230548 - 3




deformation or failure. 6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. Steel-washer-reinforced

cup to support spring and bushing projecting through bottom of frame. 7. Self-centering hanger rod cap to ensure concentricity between hanger rod and support

spring coil.

G. Pipe Riser Resilient Support: All-directional, acoustical pipe anchor consisting of 2 steel tubes separated by a minimum of 1/2-inchthick neoprene. Include steel and neoprene vertical-limit stops arranged to prevent vertical travel in both directions. Design support for a maximum load on the isolation material of 500 psig and for equal resistance in all directions.

H. Resilient Pipe Guides: Telescopic arrangement of 2 steel tubes or post and sleeve arrangement separated by a minimum of 1/2-inchthick neoprene. Where clearances are not readily visible, a factory-set guide height with a shear pin to allow vertical motion due to pipe expansion and contraction shall be fitted. Shear pin shall be removable and reinsertable to allow for selection of pipe movement. Guides shall be capable of motion to meet location requirements.

2.2 VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT BASES


1. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. 2. Kinetics Noise Control. 3. Mason Industries. 4. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. 5. Vibration Isolation. 6. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc.

B. Steel Base: Factory-fabricated, welded, structural-steel bases and rails.

1. Design Requirements: Lowest possible mounting height with not less than 1-inch clearance above the floor. Include equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary motor slide bases or rails.

2. Structural Steel: Steel shapes, plates, and bars complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M. Bases shall have shape to accommodate supported equipment.

3. Support Brackets: Factory-welded steel brackets on frame for outrigger isolation mountings and to provide for anchor bolts and equipment support.


230548 - 4

VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 2.3 SEISMIC AND WIND-RESTRAINT DEVICES


1. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. 2. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 3. Hilti, Inc. 4. Kinetics Noise Control. 5. Loos & Co.; Cableware Division. 6. Mason Industries. 7. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd.

B. Snubbers: Factory fabricated using welded structural-steel shapes and plates, anchor bolts, and replaceable resilient isolation washers and bushings.

C. Restraint Cables: ASTM A 603 galvanized -steel cables with end connections made of steel assemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for restraining cable service; and with a minimum of two clamping bolts for cable engagement.

D. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchor Bolts: Neoprene bushings designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of anchor bolts and studs.

E. Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene elements and steel sleeves designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of attachment devices used.

F. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant neoprene, with a flat washer face.

G. Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488. Minimum length of eight times diameter.

2.4 FACTORY FINISHES

A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested equipment before shipping.

1. Powder coating on springs and housings. 2. All hardware shall be galvanized. Hot-dip galvanize metal components for exterior use. 3. Baked enamel or powder coat for metal components on isolators for interior use. 4. Color-code or otherwise mark vibration isolation and seismic- and wind-control devices

to indicate capacity range.


230548 - 5


3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic- and wind-control devices for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations before installation.


3.2 APPLICATIONS

A. Multiple Pipe Supports: Secure pipes to trapeze member with clamps approved for application by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads within specified loading limits.

3.3 VIBRATION-CONTROL AND SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories" for installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.

B. Equipment Restraints:

1. Install seismic snubbers on HVAC equipment mounted on vibration isolators. Locate snubbers as close as possible to vibration isolators and bolt to equipment base and supporting structure.

2. Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch.

C. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.

D. Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media between anchor bolt and mounting hole in concrete base.

E. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall.

F. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.

G. Drilled-in Anchors:


230548 - 6


1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.

2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design strength.

3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor is to be fastened.

4. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench. 5. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for exterior

applications.

3.4 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION

A. Install flexible connections in piping where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent sections or branches are supported by different structural elements, and where the connections terminate with connection to equipment that is anchored to a different structural element from the one supporting the connections as they approach equipment. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Hydronic Piping" for piping flexible connections.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.



1. Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Schedule test with Owner, through Architect, before connecting anchorage device to restrained component (unless postconnection testing has been approved), and with at least seven days' advance notice.

3. Obtain Architect's approval before transmitting test loads to structure. Provide temporary load-spreading members.

4. Test at least four of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners selected by Architect.

5. Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device. 6. Measure isolator restraint clearance. 7. Measure isolator deflection. 8. Verify snubber minimum clearances. 9. If a device fails test, modify all installations of same type and retest until satisfactory

results are achieved.



230548 - 7



3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust isolators after piping system is at operating weight.

B. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during normal operation.

C. Adjust active height of spring isolators.

D. Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain air-mounting systems. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration And Training."

3.8 HVAC VIBRATION-CONTROL AND SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE SCHEDULE

A. Supported or Suspended Equipment:

1. Factory Assembled Air Factory Handling Units:

a. Welded structural steel rail with freestanding spring isolators and 1.75 in of minimum static deflection, and external mounted seismic snubbers.

2. Air Cooled Water Chiller::

a. Seismic snubbers attached to concrete piers.

3. Close Coupled Pumps and Base Mounted pumps:

a. Freestanding spring isolators, 1,0 in minimum static deflection, and external mounted seismic snubbers.

4. Centrifugal Fans:

a. Welded structural steel rail with restrained spring isolators, 2.50 in minimum static deflection, with external seismic snubbers and restrain cables.

5. Electrical Transformers:

a. Neoprene pads, 0.35 in minimum static detection, and external mounted seismic snubber.


230548 - 8


6. Exhaust Stacks:

a. Restraint Cables.



230548 - 9


PART 1 -

SECTION 230553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Equipment labels. 2. Pipe labels. 3. Duct labels. 4. Stencils. 5. Valve tags.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification material and device.

C. Equipment Label Schedule: Include a listing of all equipment to be labeled with the proposed content for each label.

D. Valve numbering scheme.

E. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.

C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553 - 1


2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS

A. Metal Labels for Equipment:

1. Material and Thickness: Stainless steel, 0.025-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.

2. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.

3. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

4. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.

B. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.

C. Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

2.2 PIPE LABELS

A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction.

B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.

C. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.

2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches high.

2.3 DUCT LABELS

A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16 inchthick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.


VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.

B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.

3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Piping Color-Coding: Painting of piping is specified in Division 09 Section "Interior Painting and /or High-Performance Coatings."

B. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:

1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.

Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch. 3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures. 4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed

piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in

areas of congested piping and equipment. 7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.

C. Pipe Label Color Schedule:

1. Chilled-Water Piping:

a. Background Color: Green. b. Letter Color: Blue .

3.4 DUCT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install plastic-laminated duct labels with permanent adhesive on air ducts in the following color codes:

1. Blue: For cold-air supply ducts. 2. Green: For exhaust-, outside-, relief-, return-, and mixed-air ducts.

3.5 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within factory-fabricated equipment units; shutoff valves; faucets; convenience and lawn-watering



hose connections; and HVAC terminal devices and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.

B. Valve-Tag Application Schedule: Tag valves according to size, shape, and color scheme and with captions similar to those indicated in the following subparagraphs:

1. Valve-Tag Size and Shape:

a. Chilled Water: 1-1/2 inches, round .

2. Valve-Tag Color:

a. Chilled Water: Natural Insert color.

3. Letter Color:

a. Chilled Water: Black .




SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes TAB to produce design objectives for the following:

1. Air Systems:

a. Constant-volume air systems. b. Variable-air-volume systems.

2. Hydronic Piping Systems:

a. Constant-flow systems.

3. Laboratory fume hood airflow balancing. 4. Space pressurization testing and adjusting. 5. Vibration measuring. 6. Sound level measuring. 7. Indoor-air quality measuring. 8. Temperature control verification. 9. Reporting results of activities and procedures specified in this Section.

B. Related Sections Include the following:

1. Division 23 Section: “ Constant volume fume hoods on site testing”.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Adjust: To regulate fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment, such as to reduce fan speed or adjust a damper.

B. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system, including submains, branches, and terminals, according to indicated quantities.

C. Draft: A current of air, when referring to localized effect caused by one or more factors of high air velocity, low ambient temperature, or direction of airflow, whereby more heat is withdrawn from a person's skin than is normally dissipated.

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 230593 - 1


D. NC: Noise criteria.

E. Procedure: An approach to and execution of a sequence of work operations to yield repeatable results.

F. RC: Room criteria.

G. Report Forms: Test data sheets for recording test data in logical order.

H. Static Head: The pressure due to the weight of the fluid above the point of measurement. In a closed system, static head is equal on both sides of the pump.

I. Suction Head: The height of fluid surface above the centerline of the pump on the suction side.

J. System Effect: A phenomenon that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system.

K. System Effect Factors: Allowances used to calculate a reduction of the performance ratings of a fan when installed under conditions different from those presented when the fan was performance tested.

L. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

M. Terminal: A point where the controlled medium, such as fluid or energy, enters or leaves the distribution system.

N. Test: A procedure to determine quantitative performance of systems or equipment.

O. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB) Firm: The entity responsible for performing and reporting TAB procedures.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: Within 15 days from Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit 2 copies of evidence that TAB firm and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.

B. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 15 days from Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit 2 copies of the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3.

C. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 30 days from Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit 2 copies of TAB strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in Part 3 "Preparation" Article. Include a complete set of report forms intended for use on this Project.

D. Certified TAB Reports: Submit two copies of reports prepared, as specified in this Section, on approved forms certified by TAB firm.

E. Sample Report Forms: Submit two sets of sample TAB report forms.

F. Warranties specified in this Section.



A. TAB Firm Qualifications: Engage a TAB firm certified by either AABC or NEBB.

B. TAB Conference: Meet with Owner's and Architect's representatives on approval of TAB strategies and procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the details. Ensure the participation of TAB team members, equipment manufacturers' authorized service representatives, HVAC controls installers, and other support personnel. Provide seven days' advance notice of scheduled meeting time and location.

1. Agenda Items: Include at least the following:

a. Submittal distribution requirements. b. The Contract Documents examination report. c. TAB plan. d. Work schedule and Project-site access requirements. e. Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors. f. Coordination of documentation and communication flow.

C. Certification of TAB Reports: Certify TAB field data reports. This certification includes the following:

1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB reports.

2. Certify that TAB team complied with approved TAB plan and the procedures specified and referenced in this Specification.

D. TAB Report Forms: Use standard forms from AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems." and/or NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems."

E. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, and Accuracy: As described in AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems and/or NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems," Section II, "Required Instrumentation for NEBB Certification."

F. Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every six months or more frequently if required by instrument manufacturer.

1. Keep an updated record of instrument calibration that indicates date of calibration and the name of party performing instrument calibration.


A. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner may occupy completed areas of building before Substantial Completion. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's operations.


VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and equipment, HVAC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC systems and equipment to support and assist TAB activities.

B. Notice: Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and times.

C. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. National Project Performance Guarantee: Provide a guarantee on AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems" forms stating that AABC will assist in completing requirements of the Contract Documents if TAB firm fails to comply with the Contract Documents. Guarantee includes the following provisions:

1. The certified TAB firm has tested and balanced systems according to the Contract Documents.

2. Systems are balanced to optimum performance capabilities within design and installation limits.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.

1. Contract Documents are defined in the General and Supplementary Conditions of Contract.

2. Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are required by the Contract Documents. Verify that quantities and locations of these balancing devices are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation.

B. Examine approved submittal data of HVAC systems and equipment.

C. Examine Project Record Documents described in Division 1 Section ”University of Puerto Rico Requireemnts”.



D. Examine design data, including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.

E. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. Calculate system effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from those presented when the equipment was performance tested at the factory. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," Sections 7 through 10; or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems--Duct Design," Sections 5 and 6. Compare this data with the design data and installed conditions.

F. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that testing, cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Sections have been performed.

G. Examine system and equipment test reports.

H. Examine HVAC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are properly installed, and that their locations are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation.

I. Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and balancing.

J. Examine HVAC equipment to ensure that clean filters have been installed, bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.

K. Examine terminal units, such as air airflow ventury terminal valves to verify that they are accessible and their controls are connected and functioning.

L. Examine strainers for clean screens and proper perforations.

M. Examine three-way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting or mixing fluid flows.

N. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.

O. Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping.

P. Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and controls.

Q. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values.


VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.

B. Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify the following:

1. Permanent electrical power wiring is complete. 2. Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air. 3. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational. 4. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed. 5. Balance and fire dampers are open. 6. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational. 7. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and

access to balancing devices is provided. 8. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be

met.

3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING

A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems" and/or NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems" SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" and this Section.

B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and balancing, close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to those removed. Restore vapor barrier and finish according to insulation Specifications for this Project.

C. Mark equipment and balancing device settings with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings.

D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units.

3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS

A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes.

B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.

C. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow measurements.

D. Check airflow patterns from the outside-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air dampers, through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.



E. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.

F. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.

G. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.

H. Check for airflow blockages.

I. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.

J. Check for proper sealing of air-handling unit components.

K. Check for proper sealing of air duct system.

3.5 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS

A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by fan manufacturer.

1. Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure as follows:

a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practicable and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.

b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection. c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as

possible, upstream from flexible connection and downstream from duct restrictions.

d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum that houses the fan.

2. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-handling unit, rooftop unit, and other air-handling and -treating equipment.

a. Simulate dirty filter operation and record the point at which maintenance personnel must change filters.

3. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices such as sound traps, under final balanced conditions.

4. Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in design static pressures versus actual static pressures. Compare actual system effect factors with calculated system effect factors to identify where variations occur. Recommend corrective action to align design and actual conditions.

5. Obtain approval from Owner representative for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than indicated speed. Make required adjustments to pulley sizes, motor sizes, and electrical connections to accommodate fan-speed changes.

6. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full cooling, f and any other operating modes to determine the maximum required brake horsepower.



B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.

1. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper and adjust volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.

a. Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow for that zone.

2. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.

C. Measure terminal outlets and inlets without making adjustments.

1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written instructions and calculating factors.

D. Adjust terminal outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances of indicated values. Make adjustments using volume dampers rather than extractors and the dampers at air terminals.

1. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the Contract Documents.

2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.

3.6 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-AIR-VOLUME TERMINAL UNIT SYSTEMS

A. Pressure-Independent, Constant-Air-Volume Systems: After the fan systems have been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:

1. Set outdoor-air dampers at maximun, and return- and exhaust-air dampers at a position that simulates full-cooling load.

2. Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply-fan airflow and static pressure. Measure static pressure. Adjust system static pressure so the entering static pressure for the critical terminal unit is not less than the sum of terminal-unit manufacturer's recommended minimum inlet static pressure plus the static pressure needed to overcome terminal-unit discharge system losses.

3. Measure total system airflow. Adjust to within indicated airflow. 4. Set terminal units at maximum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the

designed maximum airflow. Use terminal-unit manufacturer's written instructions to make this adjustment. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from terminal units as described for constant-volume air systems.

5. Remeasure the exhaust airflow to the fan while operating at maximum exhaust airflow and minimum outside airflow. Adjust the fan and balance the exhaust-air ducts and inlets as described for constant-volume air systems.



6. Measure static pressure at the most critical terminal unit and adjust the static-pressure controller at the main supply-air sensing station to ensure that adequate static pressure is maintained at the most critical unit.

7. Record the final fan performance data.

3.7 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

A. Prepare test reports with pertinent design data and number in sequence starting at pump to end of system. Check the sum of branch-circuit flows against approved pump flow rate. Correct variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent.

B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" piping layouts.

C. Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in addition to the general preparation procedures specified above:

1. Open all manual valves for maximum flow. 2. Check expansion tank liquid level. 3. Check makeup-water-station pressure gage for adequate pressure for highest vent. 4. Check flow-control valves for specified sequence of operation and set at indicated flow. 5. Set differential-pressure control valves at the specified differential pressure. Do not set at

fully closed position when pump is positive-displacement type unless several terminal valves are kept open.

6. Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to heat exchangers. 7. Check pump-motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow-balancing device so

motor nameplate rating is not exceeded. 8. Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually operated.

3.8 PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

A. Measure water flow at pumps. Use the following procedures, except for positive-displacement pumps:

1. Verify impeller size by operating the pump with the discharge valve closed. Read pressure differential across the pump. Convert pressure to head and correct for differences in gage heights. Note the point on manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow and verify that the pump has the intended impeller size.

2. Check system resistance. With all valves open, read pressure differential across the pump and mark pump manufacturer's head-capacity curve. Adjust pump discharge valve until indicated water flow is achieved.

3. Verify pump-motor brake horsepower. Calculate the intended brake horsepower for the system based on pump manufacturer's performance data. Compare calculated brake horsepower with nameplate data on the pump motor. Report conditions where actual amperage exceeds motor nameplate amperage.

4. Report flow rates that are not within plus or minus 5 percent of design.

B. Set calibrated balancing valves, if installed, at calculated presettings.



C. Measure flow at all stations and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first balance.

1. System components that have Cv rating or an accurately cataloged flow-pressure-drop relationship may be used as a flow-indicating device.

D. Measure flow at main balancing station and set main balancing device to achieve flow that is 5 percent greater than indicated flow.

E. Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of indicated flow rate as follows:

1. Determine the balancing station with the highest percentage over indicated flow. 2. Adjust each station in turn, beginning with the station with the highest percentage over

indicated flow and proceeding to the station with the lowest percentage over indicated flow.

3. Record settings and mark balancing devices.

F. Measure pump flow rate and make final measurements of pump amperage, voltage, rpm, pump heads, and systems' pressures and temperatures including outdoor-air temperature.

G. Measure the differential-pressure control valve settings existing at the conclusions of balancing.

3.9 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT EXCHANGERS

A. Measure water flow through all circuits.

B. Adjust water flow to within specified tolerances.

C. Measure inlet and outlet water temperatures.

3.10 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS

A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:

1. Manufacturer, model, and serial numbers. 2. Motor horsepower rating. 3. Motor rpm. 4. Efficiency rating. 5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase. 6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase. 7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating.

B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass for the controller to prove proper operation. Record observations, including controller manufacturer, model and serial numbers, and nameplate data.


VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 3.11 PROCEDURES FOR CHILLERS

A. Balance water flow through each evaporator to within specified tolerances of indicated flow with all pumps operating. With only one chiller operating in a multiple chiller installation, do not exceed the flow for the maximum tube velocity recommended by the chiller manufacturer. Measure and record the following data with each chiller operating at design conditions:

1. Evaporator-water entering and leaving temperatures, pressure drop, and water flow. 2. Evaporator and condenser refrigerant temperatures and pressures, using instruments

furnished by chiller manufacturer. 3. Power factor if factory-installed instrumentation is furnished for measuring kilowatt. 4. Kilowatt input if factory-installed instrumentation is furnished for measuring kilowatt. 5. Capacity: Calculate in tons of cooling. 6. If air-cooled chillers, verify condenser-fan rotation and record fan and motor data

including number of fans and entering- and leaving-air temperatures.

3.12 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT-TRANSFER COILS

A. Water Coils: Measure the following data for each coil:

1. Entering- and leaving-water temperature. 2. Water flow rate. 3. Water pressure drop. 4. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air. 5. Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air for cooling coils. 6. Airflow. 7. Air pressure drop.

B. Electric-Heating Coils: Measure the following data for each coil:

1. Nameplate data. 2. Airflow. 3. Entering- and leaving-air temperature at full load. 4. Voltage and amperage input of each phase at full load and at each incremental stage. 5. Calculated kilowatt at full load. 6. Fuse or circuit-breaker rating for overload protection.

3.13 PROCEDURES FOR LABORATORY FUME HOODS

A. See Specification Section 230594: “Constant Volume Fume Hoods On Site Testing”

3.14 PROCEDURES FOR SPACE PRESSURIZATION MEASUREMENTS AND ADJUSTMENTS

A. Before testing for space pressurization, observe the space to verify the integrity of the space boundaries. Verify that windows and doors are closed and applicable safing, gaskets, and



sealants are installed. Report deficiencies and postpone testing until after the reported deficiencies are corrected.

B. Measure, adjust, and record the pressurization of each room, each zone, and each building by adjusting the supply, return, and exhaust airflows to achieve the indicated conditions.

C. Measure space pressure differential where pressure is used as the design criteria, and measure airflow differential where differential airflow is used as the design criteria for space pressurization.

1. For pressure measurements, measure and record the pressure difference between the intended spaces at the door with all doors in the space closed. Record the high-pressure side, low-pressure side, and pressure difference between each adjacent space.

2. For applications with cascading levels of space pressurization, begin in the most critical space and work to the least critical space.

3. Test room pressurization first, then zones, and finish with building pressurization.

D. To achieve indicated pressurization, set the supply airflow to the indicated conditions and adjust the exhaust and return airflow to achieve the indicated pressure or airflow difference.

E. In spaces that employ multiple modes of operation, such as normal mode and emergency mode or occupied mode and unoccupied mode, measure, adjust, and record data for each operating mode.

F. Record indicated conditions and corresponding initial and final measurements. Report deficiencies.

3.15 PROCEDURES FOR VIBRATION MEASUREMENTS

A. Use a vibration meter meeting the following criteria:

1. Solid-state circuitry with a piezoelectric accelerometer. 2. Velocity range of 0.1 to 10 inches per second. 3. Displacement range of 1 to 100 mils. 4. Frequency range of at least 0 to 1000 Hz. 5. Capable of filtering unwanted frequencies.

B. Calibrate the vibration meter before each day of testing.

1. Use a calibrator provided with the vibration meter. 2. Follow vibration meter and calibrator manufacturer's calibration procedures.

C. Perform vibration measurements when other building and outdoor vibration sources are at a minimum level and will not influence measurements of equipment being tested.

1. Turn off equipment in the building that might interfere with testing. 2. Clear the space of people.



D. Perform vibration measurements after air and water balancing and equipment testing is complete.

E. Clean equipment surfaces in contact with the vibration transducer.

F. Position the vibration transducer according to manufacturer's written instructions and to avoid interference with the operation of the equipment being tested.

G. Measure and record vibration on rotating equipment over 3 hp.

H. Measure and record equipment vibration, bearing vibration, equipment base vibration, and building structure vibration. Record velocity and displacement readings in the horizontal, vertical, and axial planes.

1. Pumps:

a. Pump Bearing: Drive end and opposite end. b. Motor Bearing: Drive end and opposite end. c. Pump Base: Top and side. d. Building: Floor. e. Piping: To and from the pump after flexible connections.

2. Fans and HVAC Equipment with Fans:

a. Fan Bearing: Drive end and opposite end. b. Motor Bearing: Drive end and opposite end. c. Equipment Casing: Top and side. d. Equipment Base: Top and side. e. Building: Floor. f. Ductwork: To and from equipment after flexible connections. g. Piping: To and from equipment after flexible connections.

3. Chillers and HVAC Equipment with Compressors:

a. Compressor Bearing: Drive end and opposite end. b. Motor Bearing: Drive end and opposite end. c. Equipment Casing: Top and side. d. Equipment Base: Top and side. e. Building: Floor. f. Piping: To and from equipment after flexible connections.

I. For equipment with vibration isolation, take floor measurements with the vibration isolation blocked solid to the floor and with the vibration isolation floating. Calculate and report the differences.

J. Inspect, measure, and record vibration isolation.

1. Verify that vibration isolation is installed in the required locations. 2. Verify that installation is level and plumb. 3. Verify that isolators are properly anchored.



4. For spring isolators, measure the compressed spring height, the spring OD, and the travel-to-solid distance.

5. Measure the operating clearance between each inertia base and the floor or concrete base below. Verify that there is unobstructed clearance between the bottom of the inertia base and the floor.

3.16 PROCEDURES FOR SOUND-LEVEL MEASUREMENTS

A. Perform sound-pressure-level measurements with an octave-band analyzer complying with ANSI S1.4 for Type 1 sound-level meters and ANSI S1.11 for octave-band filters. Comply with requirements in ANSI S1.13, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Calibrate sound meters before each day of testing. Use a calibrator provided with the sound meter complying with ANSI S1.40 and that has NIST certification.

C. Use a microphone that is suitable for the type of sound levels measured. For areas where air velocities exceed 100 fpm, use a windscreen on the microphone.

D. Perform sound-level testing after air and water balancing and equipment testing are complete.

E. Close windows and doors to the space.

F. Perform measurements when the space is not occupied and when the occupant noise level from other spaces in the building and outside are at a minimum.

G. Clear the space of temporary sound sources so unrelated disturbances will not be measured. Position testing personnel during measurements to achieve a direct line-of-sight between the sound source and the sound-level meter.

H. Take sound measurements at a height approximately 48 inches above the floor and at least 36 inches from a wall, column, and other large surface capable of altering the measurements.

I. Take sound measurements in dBA and in each of the 8 unweighted octave bands in the frequency range of 63 to 8000 Hz.

J. Take sound measurements with the HVAC systems off to establish the background sound levels and take sound measurements with the HVAC systems operating.

1. Calculate the difference between measurements. Apply a correction factor depending on the difference and adjust measurements.

K. Perform sound testing at two locations on Project for each of the following space types. For each space type tested, select a measurement location that has the greatest sound level. If testing multiple locations for each space type, select at least one location that is near and at least one location that is remote from the predominant sound source.

1. Veterinarian’s general office. 2. Clinical lab. 3. Holding room.



4. Treatment and preparation room. 5. ICU-Room and quarantine room. 6. Neonatal room and imaging room. 7. Sound or vibration sensitive laboratory. 8. Surgery room and imaging room. 9. Holding rooms. 10. Each space with an indicated noise criterion of RC or NC 35 and lower that is adjacent to

a mechanical equipment room or roof mounted equipment. 11. Inside each mechanical equipment room. 12. Conference room, laboratory, autoclave and work stations. 13. Interior corridors.

3.17 PROCEDURES FOR INDOOR-AIR QUALITY MEASUREMENTS

A. After air balancing is complete and with HVAC systems operating at indicated conditions, perform indoor-air quality testing.

B. Observe and record the following conditions for each HVAC system:

1. The distance between the outside-air intake and the closest exhaust fan discharge, cooling tower, flue termination, or vent termination.

2. Specified filters are installed. Check for leakage around filters. 3. Cooling coil drain pans have a positive slope to drain. 4. Cooling coil condensate drain trap maintains an air seal. 5. Evidence of water damage. 6. Insulation in contact with the supply, return, and outside air is dry and clean.

C. Measure and record indoor conditions served by each HVAC system. Make measurements at multiple locations served by the system if required to satisfy the following:

1. Most remote area. 2. One location per floor.

D. Measure and record the following indoor conditions for each location two times at two-hour intervals, and in accordance with ASHRAE 113:

1. Temperature. 2. Relative humidity. 3. Air velocity. 4. Concentration of carbon dioxide (ppm). 5. Concentration of carbon monoxide (ppm). 6. Nitrogen oxides (ppm). 7. Formaldehyde (ppm).

3.18 TEMPERATURE-CONTROL VERIFICATION

A. Verify that controllers are calibrated and commissioned.



B. Check transmitter and controller locations and note conditions that would adversely affect control functions.

C. Record controller settings and note variances between set points and actual measurements.

D. Check the operation of limiting controllers (i.e., high- and low-temperature controllers).

E. Check free travel and proper operation of control devices such as damper and valve operators.

F. Check the sequence of operation of control devices. Note air pressures and device positions and correlate with airflow and water flow measurements. Note the speed of response to input changes.

G. Check the interaction of electrically operated switch transducers.

H. Check the interaction of interlock and lockout systems.

I. Check main control supply-air pressure and observe compressor and dryer operations.

J. Record voltages of power supply and controller output. Determine whether the system operates on a grounded or nongrounded power supply.

K. Note operation of electric actuators using spring return for proper fail-safe operations

3.19 TOLERANCES

A. Set HVAC system airflow and water flow rates within the following tolerances:

1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus 5 to plus 10 percent. 2. Air Outlets and Inlets: 0 to minus 10 percent. 3. Heating-Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 10 percent. 4. Cooling-Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 5 percent.

3.20 REPORTING

A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems' balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and balancing devices.

3.21 FINAL REPORT

A. General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter-quality font, on standard bond paper, in three-ring binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems.



B. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer.

1. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.

C. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field report data, include the following:

1. Pump curves. 2. Fan curves. 3. Manufacturers' test data. 4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers. 5. Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not include Shop Drawings

and Product Data.

D. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data in the final report, as applicable:

1. Title page. 2. Name and address of TAB firm. 3. Project name. 4. Project location. 5. Architect's name and address. 6. Engineer's name and address. 7. Contractor's name and address. 8. Report date. 9. Signature of TAB firm who certifies the report. 10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report.

Number each page in the report. 11. Summary of contents including the following:

a. Indicated versus final performance. b. Notable characteristics of systems. c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract

Documents.

12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment. 13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer, type size, and fittings. 14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports varies from indicated

values. 15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following:

a. Settings for outside-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers. b. Conditions of filters. c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions. d. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter. e. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller. f. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.

E. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present each system with single-line diagram and include the following:



1. Quantities of outside, supply, return, and exhaust airflows. 2. Water and steam flow rates. 3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes. 4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations. 5. Terminal units. 6. Balancing stations. 7. Position of balancing devices.

F. Air-Handling Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the following:

1. Unit Data: Include the following:

a. Unit identification. b. Location. c. Make and type. d. Model number and unit size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Unit arrangement and class. g. Discharge arrangement. h. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. i. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in inches. j. Number of belts, make, and size. k. Number of filters, type, and size.

2. Motor Data:

a. Make and frame type and size. b. Horsepower and rpm. c. Volts, phase, and hertz. d. Full-load amperage and service factor. e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. f. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in inches.

3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):

a. Total airflow rate in cfm. b. Total system static pressure in inches wg. c. Fan rpm. d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg. e. Filter static-pressure differential in inches wg. f. Cooling coil static-pressure differential in inches wg. g. Outdoor airflow in cfm. h. Outdoor-air damper position.

G. Apparatus-Coil Test Reports:

1. Coil Data:

a. System identification. b. Location.



c. Coil type. d. Number of rows. e. Fin spacing in fins per inch o.c. f. Make and model number. g. Face area in sq. ft.. h. Tube size in NPS. i. Tube and fin materials. j. Circuiting arrangement.


a. Airflow rate in cfm. b. Average face velocity in fpm. c. Air pressure drop in inches wg. d. Outdoor-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. e. Entering-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. f. Leaving-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg F. g. Water flow rate in gpm. h. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig. i. Entering-water temperature in deg F. j. Leaving-water temperature in deg F.

H. Electric-Coil Test Reports: For electric reheat, duct coils, installed as a part of constant volume air terminal units in central-station air-handling units, include the following:

1. Unit Data:

a. System identification. b. Location. c. Coil identification. d. Capacity in Btuh. e. Number of stages. f. Connected volts, phase, and hertz. g. Rated amperage. h. Airflow rate in cfm. i. Face area in sq. ft.. j. Minimum face velocity in fpm.


a. Heat output in Btuh. b. Airflow rate in cfm. c. Air velocity in fpm. d. Entering-air temperature in deg F. e. Leaving-air temperature in deg F. f. Voltage at each connection. g. Amperage for each phase.

I. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:



1. Fan Data:

a. System identification. b. Location. c. Make and type. d. Model number and size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Arrangement and class. g. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. h. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in inches.

2. Motor Data:

a. Make and frame type and size. b. Horsepower and rpm. c. Volts, phase, and hertz. d. Full-load amperage and service factor. e. Sheave make, size in inches, and bore. f. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in inches. g. Number of belts, make, and size.


a. Total airflow rate in cfm. b. Total system static pressure in inches wg. c. Fan rpm. d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg. e. Suction static pressure in inches wg.

J. Round , and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid representing the duct cross-section and record the following:

1. Report Data:

a. System and air-handling unit number. b. Location and zone. c. Traverse air temperature in deg F. d. Duct static pressure in inches wg. e. Duct size in inches. f. Duct area in sq. ft.. g. Indicated airflow rate in cfm. h. Indicated velocity in fpm. i. Actual airflow rate in cfm. j. Actual average velocity in fpm. k. Barometric pressure in psig.

K. Air-Terminal-Device Reports: (Diffusers, Registers and Grilles)

1. Unit Data:



a. System and air-handling unit identification. b. Location and zone. c. Test apparatus used. d. Area served. e. Air-terminal-device make. f. Air-terminal-device number from system diagram. g. Air-terminal-device type and model number. h. Air-terminal-device size. i. Air-terminal-device effective area in sq. ft..


a. Airflow rate in cfm. b. Air velocity in fpm. c. Preliminary airflow rate as needed in cfm. d. Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm. e. Final airflow rate in cfm. f. Final velocity in fpm. g. Space temperature in deg F.

L. Packaged Chiller Reports:

1. Unit Data:

a. Unit identification. b. Make and model number. c. Manufacturer's serial number. d. Refrigerant type and capacity in gal.. e. Starter type and size. f. Starter thermal protection size. g. Compressor make and model number. h. Compressor manufacturer's serial number.

2. Air-Cooled Condenser Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):

a. Refrigerant pressure in psig. b. Refrigerant temperature in deg F. c. Entering- and leaving-air temperature in deg F.

3. Evaporator Test Reports (Indicated and Actual Values):

a. Refrigerant pressure in psig. b. Refrigerant temperature in deg F. c. Entering-water temperature in deg F. d. Leaving-water temperature in deg F. e. Entering-water pressure in feet of head or psig. f. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig.

4. Compressor Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):



a. Suction pressure in psig. b. Suction temperature in deg F. c. Discharge pressure in psig. d. Discharge temperature in deg F. e. Oil pressure in psig. f. Oil temperature in deg F. g. Voltage at each connection. h. Amperage for each phase. i. Kilowatt input. j. Crankcase heater kilowatt. k. Chilled-water control set point in deg F. l. Condenser-water control set point in deg F. m. Refrigerant low-pressure-cutoff set point in psig. n. Refrigerant high-pressure-cutoff set point in psig.

5. Refrigerant Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):

a. Oil level. b. Refrigerant level. c. Relief valve setting in psig. d. Unloader set points in psig. e. Percentage of cylinders unloaded. f. Low-temperature-cutoff set point in deg F.

M. Pump Test Reports: Calculate impeller size by plotting the shutoff head on pump curves and include the following:

1. Unit Data:

a. Unit identification. b. Location. c. Service. d. Make and size. e. Model and serial numbers. f. Water flow rate in gpm. g. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig. h. Required net positive suction head in feet of head or psig. i. Pump rpm. j. Impeller diameter in inches. k. Motor make and frame size. l. Motor horsepower and rpm. m. Voltage at each connection. n. Amperage for each phase. o. Full-load amperage and service factor. p. Seal type.


a. Static head in feet of head or psig. b. Pump shutoff pressure in feet of head or psig.



c. Actual impeller size in inches. d. Full-open flow rate in gpm. e. Full-open pressure in feet of head or psig. f. Final discharge pressure in feet of head or psig. g. Final suction pressure in feet of head or psig. h. Final total pressure in feet of head or psig. i. Final water flow rate in gpm. j. Voltage at each connection. k. Amperage for each phase.

N. Instrument Calibration Reports:

1. Report Data:

a. Instrument type and make. b. Serial number. c. Application. d. Dates of use. e. Dates of calibration.

3.22 INSPECTIONS

A. Initial Inspection:

1. After testing and balancing are complete, operate each system and randomly check measurements to verify that the system is operating according to the final test and balance readings documented in the Final Report.

2. Randomly check the following for each system:

a. Measure airflow of at least 10 percent of air outlets. b. Measure water flow of at least 5 percent of terminals. c. Measure room temperature at each thermostat/temperature sensor. Compare the

reading to the set point. d. Measure sound levels at two locations. e. Measure space pressure of at least 10 percent of locations. f. Verify that balancing devices are marked with final balance position. g. Note deviations to the Contract Documents in the Final Report.

B. Final Inspection:

1. After initial inspection is complete and evidence by random checks verifies that testing and balancing are complete and accurately documented in the final report, request that a final inspection be made by Owner representative and Architect.

2. TAB firm test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection in the presence of Owner representative and Architect.

3. Owner representative and Architect shall randomly select measurements documented in the final report to be rechecked. The rechecking shall be limited to either 10 percent of the total measurements recorded, or the extent of measurements that can be accomplished in a normal 8-hour business day.



4. If the rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the final report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as "FAILED."

5. If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall be considered incomplete and shall be rejected.

6. TAB firm shall recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final report and balancing device settings to include all changes and resubmit the final report.

7. Request a second final inspection. If the second final inspection also fails, Owner shall contract the services of another TAB firm to complete the testing and balancing in accordance with the Contract Documents and deduct the cost of the services from the final payment.




SECTION 230594 - CONSTANT VOLUME FUME HOODS ON SITE TESTING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Tests identified below, other than the ANSI/ASRAE 110 test, were created by Farhad Memarzadeh of the National Institutes of Health in 1997 and further revised by Memarzadeh and Brightbill in 1999.

2. On site testing shall not start until testing, adjusting and balancing of the air and water systems, calibration and tuning of controls systems, off site testing of fume hoods and commissioning are complete and the facility is ready for occupancy.

1.3 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:

A. The work of this section consists of on site testing the performance of constant volume chemical fume hoods.

B. This section specifies procedures that are common to the scope of Division 11 Section - Laboratory Hoods with Vertical Sash.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. TESTING EQUIPMENT AND FACILITIES

1. Specification sheets on all equipment proposed for on site testing specified in Part III of this section.

2. Sample test reports for approval. Contractor shall demonstrate the ability to perform necessary calculations on site the day of the test for the on site testing requirements

B. LIST OF HOODS

1. Submit list of hoods to project officer a minimum of two weeks prior to start of testing. Project officer will check which hoods are to be tested and return submittal. Fifty percent of hoods will be tested.

C. CERTIFICATIONS

CONSTANT VOLUME FUME HOODS ON SITE TESTING 230594 - 1


1. Submit test data attesting that each type of hood to be provided has been tested as installed in accordance with the Modified ANSI/ASHRAE 110-2003 and meets the requirements of this specification. Values of all required measurements and calculations shall be included.

D. TESTING AGENCY STATEMENT OF QUALIFICATIONS

1. Submit documentation of company experience and registration of the individuals supervising test.


A. Testing agency for on site testing shall be independent of both the fume hood control system manufacturer and the fume hood manufacturer.

B. Independent testing agency shall be approved by the NIH project officer. Testing agency shall submit Statement of Qualifications demonstrating experience relating to fume hood testing. As a minimum testing agency shall:

1. Have a registered Professional Engineer or Industrial Hygienist supervising the testing 2. Demonstrate prior experience with indicated tests.

1.6 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS

A. ANSI/ASHRAE 110-1999 Standard for Testing Performance of Fume Hoods

B. National Fire Protection Association NFPA 45 - Fire Protecting for Laboratories Using Chemicals

C. ANSI/AIHA Z9.5 Laboratory Ventilation Standard

D. Memarzadeh, F.: Methodology for Optimization of Laboratory Hood Containment, Volumes I and II. Bethesda, MD: National Institutes of Health, 1996.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TEST AND MEASUREMENT EQUIPMENT

A. Anemometers:

1. Accuracy: +-5% of reading 2. Internal Time Constant: greater than or equal 100 ms 3. Definitions:

a. The Internal Time Constant (ITC) is the amount of time it takes the sensor to respond 63% of the way to a step change.



b. The Response Time is the length of time to get to within the stated accuracy of the sensor.

c. Response time = ITC * 3 or 5 depending on what accuracy. Example: If the Response Time is 200ms, the ITC + 40 - ms.

B. Tracer Gas Ejector in accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE 110

C. Tracer Gas (SF6) Sensor:

1. Sensitivity: 0.01 to 100 ppm 2. Accuracy:

a. Above 0.1 ppm: ±10% of reading b. Below 0.1 ppm: ±25% of reading

D. Data Acquisition System: minimum 6 channel system capable of simultaneous sampling at 10 Hz or greater

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FUME HOOD CONTAINMENT TESTING (ON SITE)

A. General: Constant volume fume hoods shall be tested as installed to assess the level of containment. Testing shall be conducted as outlined below for 50% of the hoods provided in the project. The project officer shall select which hoods are to be tested.

B. Testing shall be conducted in accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE 110 - Method of Testing Performance of Laboratory Fume Hoods with the following modifications. This is primarily a test of the hood and laboratory configuration.

1. Hoods shall be tested with simulated apparatus. This apparatus shall consist of: two each 3.8 L round paint cans, one 300mm by 300mm by 300mm cardboard box, three each 150mm by 150mm by 300mm cardboard boxes. These items shall be provided by the contractor and be positioned from 150mm to 250mm behind the sash, randomly distributed, and supported off the work surface by 50mm by 50mm blocks.

2. The test gas for the tracer gas performance rating and sash movement performance tests shall have a 6 LPM flow rate.

3. The tracer gas and rapid walk-by test will be conducted only at the center position for the manikin.

4. Tracer gas test duration for performance rating test shall be 5 minutes. 5. At the conclusion of each 5-minute test there will be three sash movement performance

tests (also called rapid walk-by) at 300mm behind the manikin. Each test shall be spaced 30 seconds apart.

6. There will be a minimum of three and a maximum of five people in the test room during the test procedure.

7. Representatives of the NIH will witness the tests. 8. Test of Alarm: Shut off the fume hood exhaust and verify that the individual fume hood

alarm activates.



9. Test individual controls: Test any controls that are provided at the fume hood such as unoccupied cycle override, alarm override, etc.

C. The following measurements shall be taken, recorded in the certification submittal and must meet the listed criteria:

1. Sash design position or positions: 457 mm 2. Face velocities at each grid point with sash in operating position; Velocity points shall be

labeled FVm1, FVm2, FVm3, FVm4, FVm5, FVm6, FVm7, FVm8, FVm9, FVm10, FVm11 and FVm12. (8 points for 1200 mm hoods and 12 points for 1800 mm hoods.) FV shall be sampled at 10 Hz for 5 seconds. No velocity reading shall be below 0.41 mps or above 0.61 mps. This maximum and minimum is to be worst case actual not as measured. Measured are to be adjusted for accuracy of test instrument to get worst case actual. Average shall be recorded for each point. Extremes shall also be recorded for use in calculating Turbulence Intensity.

3. Face velocity for sash at 50% (test and label points and take averages similar to test at operating position): 0.41 to 0.76 mps

4. Face velocity for sash at 25% (test and label points and take averages similar to test at operating position): 0.41 to 1.52 mps

5. Tracer gas performance rating: 0.05 ppm 6. Sash Movement Performance Rating (Also called walk-by test): 0.10 ppm returning to

0.05 ppm within 15 seconds. (Separate readings for each walk-by.) 7. Percentage of auxiliary air supply: 0%. (Auxiliary air hoods are not allowed.) 8. Static Pressure Loss (hood static pressure): Not more than 124 Pa at 0.51 mps face

velocity. 9. Volumetric flow rate: Criteria for volumetric flow rate shall be in l/s calculated based on

0.51 mps with the sash in the operating position. Typically it will be around 220 l/s for a 1200 mm hood.

D. The following values shall be calculated, recorded in the certification submittal and must meet the listed criteria.

1. Steady State Face Velocity Actual (SSFVa): 0.51 mps (plus or minus 10%). Average of all grid points with each point averaged over 5 seconds. This shall be done at operating, 50% and 25% sash positions.

2. Steady State Face Velocity Measured (SSFVm): 0.51 mps (plus or minus 10%). Volumetric flow rate measured in exhaust duct at two diameters downstream of hood connection divided by face opening area.

3. Turbulence Intensity: (no pass/fail requirement) Root mean square of fluctuation in face velocity measurements. (See 5.1.c for equation.)

4. Box Leakage Factor/Sash Leakage Factor: (no pass/fail requirement) Value taken from graph. See 5.1.c.

5. The following further defines the above requirements.

a. Face Velocity Parameters shall include:

1) Measured Face Velocity (FVm expressed in m/s): Face velocity shall be measured in the plane of the sash at each grid point. Three sensors shall be used simultaneously at each point. Samples for each sensor shall be recorded simultaneously at no less than 10 Hz for 5 seconds. The sensors



shall be point sensors located in a grid. Grid points shall be evenly spaced with no more than 300 mm between points. Rotate sensors so that each grid point has three readings; i.e. eight sets of three readings are taken in 1200 mm hoods and 12 sets of three readings are taken in 1800 mm hoods. Averages shall be calculated to assess overall measured face velocity, however individual sensor samples shall be used in calculating Turbulence Intensity (TI).

2) Steady State Face Velocity (SSFV): The average of all sampled face velocities for a 5 second period. SSFVs will be determined for both measured face velocity and calculated face velocity.

3) Turbulence Intensity (TI expressed in m/s): Calculated root mean square of the fluctuating face velocity determined using FVm, calculated as follows:

a) TI = [SUM1 to n((FVm1-SSFV)2+…+(FVmn-SSFV)2)]1/2 b) The most extreme values of FV taken during the sample period shall

be used. This value shall be calculated for each of the steady state conditions preceding and following each sash movement performance test. This shall be correlated to a "Sash Leakage Factor" using the following graph of the installation using the Methodology for Optimization of Laboratory Fume Hood Containment" (MOLHC) by NIH Office of the Director, Farhad Memarzadeh principal investigator. While this value does not have a pass/fail requirement, it is the fundamental indicator of containment and therefore shall be clearly reported.

Projected Sash Leakage

0

0.001

0.002

0.003

0.004

0.005

0.006

0.007

0.008

0.009

0.01

0 0.05 0.1 0.15 0.2 0.25

Sash Turbulence Intensity (m/s)

Sash

Lea

kage

Fac

tor (

%)

4) Hood Static Pressure: Take traverse readings to measure exhaust rate and measure the hood static pressure two straight-line duct diameters downstream from the point of connection between the hood and the exhaust



line. The readings shall be taken with a face velocity of .51 m/s ±.05 m/s at the full open sash position. (Open sash typically is 18" to 22").

5) Test Execution: Testing agency shall be equipped to execute the testing and assess all performance parameters on site the day of the test.

6) Test Documentation: All testing, calculated, and recorded parameters shall be presented in a report that shows the recorded parameters graphically and tabulates and summarizes all the results. Performance of the hood, the hood controls, and the laboratory in general shall be described and summarized.




SECTION 230700 - HVAC INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Insulation Materials:

a. Cellular glass. b. Flexible elastomeric. c. Mineral fiber.

2. Insulating cements. 3. Adhesives. 4. Mastics. 5. Lagging adhesives. 6. Sealants. 7. Factory-applied jackets. 8. Field-applied jackets. 9. Tapes. 10. Securements. 11. Corner angles.


1. Division 22 Section "Plumbing Insulation." 2. Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts" for mineral fiber insulation. 3. Division 23 Section: “Hydronic Piping” for Chilled Water Buffer Tank Insulation.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any).

B. LEED Submittal:


HVAC INSULATION 230700 - 1


C. Shop Drawings:

1. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each type of insulation.

2. Detail removable insulation at piping specialties, equipment connections, and access panels.

3. Detail application of field-applied jackets. 4. Detail application at linkages of control devices. 5. Detail field application for each equipment type.

D. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

E. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests and test methods employed.

F. Field quality-control reports.



B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.


2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index of 150 or less.



1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."



B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application, duct Installer for duct insulation application, and equipment Installer for equipment insulation application. Before preparing piping and ductwork Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.

C. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing.

1.7 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Comply with requirements in Part 3 schedule articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.



D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795.

E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process.

F. Cellular Glass: Inorganic, incombustible, foamed or cellulated glass with annealed, rigid, hermetically sealed cells. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.


a. Cell-U-Foam Corporation; Ultra-CUF. b. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Foamglas Super K.

2. Block Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type I.



3. Special-Shaped Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type III. 4. Board Insulation: ASTM C 552, Type IV. 5. Preformed Pipe Insulation without Jacket: Comply with ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 1. 6. Preformed Pipe Insulation with Factory-Applied Pitt wrap CW30 jacket: Comply with

ASTM C 552, Type II, Class 2. 7. Factory fabricate shapes according to ASTM C 450 and ASTM C 585.

G. Flexible Elastomeric: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the followingavailable products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aerocel. b. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex. c. RBX Corporation; Insul-Sheet 1800 and Insul-Tube 180.

H. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type III with factory-applied FSK jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.


a. CertainTeed Corp.; Duct Wrap. b. Johns Manville; Microlite. c. Knauf Insulation; Duct Wrap. d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley Wrap. e. Owens Corning; All-Service Duct Wrap.

I. Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IB. For duct and plenum applications, provide insulation with factory-applied FSK jacket. For equipment applications, provide insulation with factory-applied ASJ. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following gavailable products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. CertainTeed Corp.; Commercial Board. b. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; FBX. c. Johns Manville; 800 Series Spin-Glas. d. Knauf Insulation; Insulation Board. e. Manson Insulation Inc.; AK Board. f. Owens Corning; Fiberglas 700 Series.

J. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:




a. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; Coreplus 1200. b. Johns Manville; Micro-Lok. c. Knauf Insulation; 1000 Pipe Insulation. d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley-K. e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation.

2. Type I, 850 deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ-SSL. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

K. Mineral-Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Semirigid board material with factory-applied ASJ complying with ASTM C 1393, Type II or Type IIIA Category 2, or with properties similar to ASTM C 612, Type IB. Nominal density is 2.5 lb/cu. ft. or more. Thermal conductivity (k-value) at 100 deg F is 0.29 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F or less. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.


a. CertainTeed Corp.; CrimpWrap. b. Johns Manville; MicroFlex. c. Knauf Insulation; Pipe and Tank Insulation. d. Manson Insulation Inc.; AK Flex. e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe and Tank Insulation.


A. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 195.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following[available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Insulco, Division of MFS, Inc.; Triple I. b. P. K. Insulation Mfg. Co., Inc.; Super-Stik.

B. Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 196.


a. P. K. Insulation Mfg. Co., Inc.; Thermal-V-Kote.



C. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C 449/C 449M.


a. Insulco, Division of MFS, Inc.; SmoothKote. b. P. K. Insulation Mfg. Co., Inc.; PK No. 127, and Quik-Cote. c. Rock Wool Manufacturing Company; Delta One Shot.

2.3 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Cellular-Glass Adhesive: Solvent-based resin adhesive, with a service temperature range of minus 75 to plus 300 deg F.


a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-96. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 81-33.


C. Flexible Elastomeric and Polyolefin Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I.


a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aeroseal. b. Armacell LCC; 520 Adhesive. c. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-75. d. RBX Corporation; Rubatex Contact Adhesive.


D. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.






E. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.




F. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.


a. Dow Chemical Company (The); 739, Dow Silicone. b. Johns-Manville; Zeston Perma-Weld, CEEL-TITE Solvent Welding Adhesive. c. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; Welding Adhesive. d. Speedline Corporation; Speedline Vinyl Adhesive.


2.4 MASTICS

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL-C-19565C, Type II.

B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below ambient services.




a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-35. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-90. c. ITW TACC, Division of Illinois Tool Works; CB-50. d. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 590. e. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-40. f. Vimasco Corporation; 749.

2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film thickness.

3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F. 4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 59 percent by volume and 71 percent by weight. 5. Color: White.

2.5 LAGGING ADHESIVES

A. Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C Class I, Grade A and shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following

available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-52. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 81-42. c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 130. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 11-30. e. Vimasco Corporation; 136.

2. Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere fire-resistant lagging cloths over duct, equipment, and pipe insulation.

3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 180 deg F. 4. Color: White.

2.6 SEALANTS

A. Joint Sealants:

1. Joint Sealants for Cellular-Glass Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-76. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-45. c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 405. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05.



e. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation; Pittseal 444. f. Vimasco Corporation; 750.

B. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:


a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-76-8. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 95-44. c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 405. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05. e. Vimasco Corporation; 750.

2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 5. Color: Aluminum. 6. For indoor applications, use sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when

calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

C. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:


a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-76.

2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 5. Color: White. 6. For indoor applications, use sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when


2.7 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:

1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.



4. PVDC Jacket for Indoor Applications: 4-mil- thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier film with a permeance at 0.02 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96 and with a flame-spread index of 5 and a smoke-developed index of 20 when tested according to ASTM E 84.

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1) Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Film and Saran 560 Vapor Retarder Film.

5. PVDC Jacket for Outdoor Applications: 6-mil- thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier film with a permeance at 0.01 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96 and with a flame-spread index of 5 and a smoke-developed index of 25 when tested according to ASTM E 84.


1) Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Film and Saran 560 Vapor Retarder Film.

2.8 FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.

B. PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. Thickness is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.


a. Johns Manville; Zeston. b. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; FG Series. c. Proto PVC Corporation; LoSmoke. d. Speedline Corporation; SmokeSafe.

2. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer. 3. Color: White. 4. Factory-fabricated fitting covers to match jacket if available; otherwise, field fabricate.

a. Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges, unions, reducers, end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap and supply covers for lavatories.



5. Factory-fabricated tank heads and tank side panels.

C. Metal Jacket:


a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; Metal Jacketing Systems. b. PABCO Metals Corporation; Surefit. c. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate.

2. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105 or 5005, Temper H-14.

a. Sheet and roll stock ready for shop or field sizing. b. Finish and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules. c. Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil- thick, heat-bonded

polyethylene and kraft paper. d. Factory-Fabricated Fitting Covers:

1) Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket. 2) Preformed 2-piece or gore, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius

elbows. 3) Tee covers. 4) Flange and union covers. 5) End caps. 6) Beveled collars. 7) Valve covers. 8) Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory-fabricated fitting covers are not

available.

2.9 TAPES

A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136.


a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0835. b. Compac Corp.; 104 and 105. c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 428 AWF ASJ. d. Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus/SQ.

2. Width: 3 inches. 3. Thickness: 11.5 mils. 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.



5. Elongation: 2 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width. 7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.

B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136.


a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0827. b. Compac Corp.; 110 and 111. c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 491 AWF FSK. d. Venture Tape; 1525 CW, 1528 CW, and 1528 CW/SQ.

2. Width: 3 inches. 3. Thickness: 6.5 mils. 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width. 7. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.

C. PVC Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive. Suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.


a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0555. b. Compac Corp.; 130. c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 370 White PVC tape. d. Venture Tape; 1506 CW NS.

2. Width: 2 inches. 3. Thickness: 6 mils. 4. Adhesion: 64 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 500 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 18 lbf/inch in width.

D. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive.


a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0800. b. Compac Corp.; 120. c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 488 AWF.



d. Venture Tape; 3520 CW.

2. Width: 2 inches. 3. Thickness: 3.7 mils. 4. Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 5 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 34 lbf/inch in width.

2.10 SECUREMENTS

A. Bands:


a. Childers Products; Bands. b. PABCO Metals Corporation; Bands. c. RPR Products, Inc.; Bands.

2. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 ; 0.015 inch thick, 1/2 inch wide with wing or closed seal.

B. Insulation Pins and Hangers:

1. Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.


1) AGM Industries, Inc.; CWP-1. 2) GEMCO; CD. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; CD. 4) Nelson Stud Welding; TPA, TPC, and TPS.

2. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch galvanized carbon-steel washer.


1) AGM Industries, Inc.; CWP-1. 2) GEMCO; Cupped Head Weld Pin. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Cupped Head.



4) Nelson Stud Welding; CHP.

3. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inchthick, galvanized-steel sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.


1) AGM Industries, Inc.; RC-150. 2) GEMCO; R-150. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; WA-150. 4) Nelson Stud Welding; Speed Clips.

b. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations.

C. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- wide, stainless steel or Monel.

2.11 CORNER ANGLES

A. Aluminum Corner Angles: 0.040 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, aluminum according to ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105 or 5005; Temper H-14.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.


2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry. 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION


B. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. Comply with requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.

C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.


VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of equipment, ducts and fittings, and piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.

B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of equipment, duct system, and pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.



E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.

G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.

1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor

legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.

3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.

K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.

L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:






a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.

4. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor seal.

5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to duct and pipe flanges and fittings.

M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.

N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.

O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.

P. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:

1. Vibration-control devices. 2. Testing agency labels and stamps. 3. Nameplates and data plates.

3.4 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface

and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing.

4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.



2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches.

4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.

D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

E. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions. Terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper sleeves to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches.

1. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping"irestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers.

F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:

1. Duct: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations that are not fire rated. For penetrations through fire-rated assemblies, terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves and externally insulate damper sleeve beyond floor to match adjacent duct insulation. Overlap damper sleeve and duct insulation at least 2 inches.

2. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations. 3. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in

Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

3.5 EQUIPMENT, TANK, AND VESSEL INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Mineral Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation Installation for Tanks and Vessels: Secure insulation with adhesive and anchor pins and speed washers.

1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of tank and vessel surfaces.

2. Groove and score insulation materials to fit as closely as possible to equipment, including contours. Bevel insulation edges for cylindrical surfaces for tight joints. Stagger end joints.

3. Protect exposed corners with secured corner angles. 4. Install adhesively attached or self-sticking insulation hangers and speed washers on sides

of tanks and vessels as follows:

a. Do not weld anchor pins to ASME-labeled pressure vessels. b. Select insulation hangers and adhesive that are compatible with service

temperature and with substrate. c. On tanks and vessels, maximum anchor-pin spacing is 3 inches from insulation end

joints, and 16 inches o.c. in both directions. d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation.



e. Cut and miter insulation segments to fit curved sides and domed heads of tanks and vessels.

f. Impale insulation over anchor pins and attach speed washers. g. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with


5. Secure each layer of insulation with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation materials.

6. Where insulation hangers on equipment and vessels are not permitted or practical and where insulation support rings are not provided, install a girdle network for securing insulation. Stretch prestressed aircraft cable around the diameter of vessel and make taut with clamps, turnbuckles, or breather springs. Place one circumferential girdle around equipment approximately 6 inches from each end. Install wire or cable between two circumferential girdles 12 inches o.c. Install a wire ring around each end and around outer periphery of center openings, and stretch prestressed aircraft cable radially from the wire ring to nearest circumferential girdle. Install additional circumferential girdles along the body of equipment or tank at a minimum spacing of 48 inches o.c. Use this network for securing insulation with tie wire or bands.

7. Stagger joints between insulation layers at least 3 inches. 8. Install insulation in removable segments on equipment access doors, manholes,

handholes, and other elements that require frequent removal for service and inspection. 9. Bevel and seal insulation ends around ASME stamps, and nameplates. 10. For equipment with surface temperatures below ambient, apply mastic to open ends,

joints, seams, breaks, and punctures in insulation.

B. Insulation Installation on Pumps:

1. Fabricate metal boxes lined with insulation. Fit boxes around pumps and coincide box joints with splits in pump casings. Fabricate joints with outward bolted flanges. Bolt flanges on 6-inch centers, starting at corners. Install 3/8-inch- diameter fasteners with wing nuts. Alternatively, secure the box sections together using a latching mechanism.

2. Fabricate boxes from galvanized steel , at least 0.060 inch thick. 3. For below ambient services, install a vapor barrier at seams, joints, and penetrations.

Seal between flanges with replaceable gasket material to form a vapor barrier.

3.6 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.

B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:

1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular



surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.

3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive.

4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement.

5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier.

6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.

7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below ambient services and a breather mastic for above ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.

8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC tape.

9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "UNION." Match size and color of pipe labels.

C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes, vessels, and equipment. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.

D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the following:

1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe insulation.

2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.



3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges except divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.

4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish.

5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed surfaces with a metal jacket.

3.7 CELLULAR-GLASS INSULATION INSTALLATION


1. Secure each layer of insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.


3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient services, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.

4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient services, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:

1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the

thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of

adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of cellular-glass block insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation.

4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:

1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2. When preformed sections of insulation are not available, install mitered sections of cellular-glass insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.

D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:

1. Install preformed sections of cellular-glass insulation to valve body. 2. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without

disturbing insulation. 3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.


VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 3.8 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.


1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the


adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation.

4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.


1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation. 2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to

eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.


1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when available.

2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.

3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's

recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.

3.9 MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION INSTALLATION


1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.


3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient surfaces, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.

4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.




1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the


adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation. 4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least

1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.



2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.



2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve body.

3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.

4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.

E. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins.

1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.

2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions.

3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows:

a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c.

b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.

c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums. d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers. f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with




4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from 1 edge and 1 end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.

a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-barrier seal.

b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to 2 times the insulation thickness but not less than 3 inches.

5. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints. At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c.

6. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.

7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-inch- wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.

F. Board Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins.

1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.

2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions.

3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows:

a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c.

b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, space pins 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.

c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums. d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. e. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with


4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from 1 edge and 1 end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1 inch o.c.



Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.

a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-barrier seal.

b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to 2 times the insulation thickness but not less than 3 inches.

5. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible to outside and inside radius of elbows. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.

6. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-inch- wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.

3.10 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION

A. Where glass-cloth jackets are indicated, install directly over bare insulation or insulation with factory-applied jackets.

1. Draw jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch overlap at seams and joints. 2. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inchthick coats of lagging adhesive. 3. Completely encapsulate insulation with coating, leaving no exposed insulation.

B. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows:

1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight. 2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket. 3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 4. Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch- wide joint strips at

end joints. 5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation

with vapor-barrier mastic.

C. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints; for horizontal applications, install with longitudinal seams along top and bottom of tanks and vessels. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the finish bead along seam and joint edge.

D. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12 inches o.c. and at end joints.



E. Where PVDC jackets are indicated, install as follows:

1. Apply three separate wraps of filament tape per insulation section to secure pipe insulation to pipe prior to installation of PVDC jacket.

2. Wrap factory-presized jackets around individual pipe insulation sections with one end overlapping the previously installed sheet. Install presized jacket with an approximate overlap at butt joint of 2 inches over the previous section. Adhere lap seal using adhesive or SSL, and then apply 1-1/4 circumferences of appropriate PVDC tape around overlapped butt joint.

3. Continuous jacket can be spiral wrapped around a length of pipe insulation. Apply adhesive or PVDC tape at overlapped spiral edge. When electing to use adhesives, refer to manufacturer's written instructions for application of adhesives along this spiral edge to maintain a permanent bond.

4. Jacket can be wrapped in cigarette fashion along length of roll for insulation systems with an outer circumference of 33-1/2 inches or less. The 33-1/2-inch- circumference limit allows for 2-inch- overlap seal. Using the length of roll allows for longer sections of jacket to be installed at one time. Use adhesive on the lap seal. Visually inspect lap seal for "fishmouthing," and use PVDC tape along lap seal to secure joint.

5. Repair holes or tears in PVDC jacket by placing PVDC tape over the hole or tear and wrapping a minimum of 1-1/4 circumferences to avoid damage to tape edges.

3.11 FINISHES

A. Duct, Equipment, and Pipe Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Division 09 painting Sections.

1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof.

a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size.

B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.

C. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. Vary first and second coats to allow visual inspection of the completed Work.

D. Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets.

3.12 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation:

1. Indoor, concealed supply, and constant volume supply air terminal valves. 2. Indoor, exposed supply.

B. Items Not Insulated:



1. Exhaust- ducts. 2. Sound attenuators. 3. Factory-insulated plenums and casings. 4. Flexible connectors. 5. Vibration-control devices. 6. Factory-insulated access panels and doors.

3.13 INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Concealed, round and rectangular, supply-air duct and constant volume supply air terminal valves insulation shall be the following:

1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 1-1/2 inches thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.

B. Exposed, rectangular, supply-air duct insulation shall be one of the following: 1. Mineral-Fiber Board: 1-1/2 inches thick and 2-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.

3.14 EQUIPMENT INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Insulation materials and thicknesses are identified below. If more than one material is listed for a type of equipment, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

B. Insulate indoor and outdoor equipment in paragraphs below that is not factory insulated.

C. Chilled-water pump insulation shall be the following:

1. Cellular Glass: 2 inches thick.

D. Chilled-water expansion/compression tank, air separator and buffer tank insulation shall be one of the following:

1. Flexible Elastomeric: 1 ½ inches thick. 2. Cellular Glass: 2 inches thick.

3.15 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:

1. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces. 2. Underground piping. 3. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.


VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 3.16 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Condensate and Equipment Drain Water below 60 Deg F:



B. Chilled Water above 40 Deg F:

1. NPS 8 and Smaller: Insulation shall be the following:

a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I : 1-1/2 inches thick.

3.17 OUTDOOR, ABOVEGROUND PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Chilled Water and Brine:



3.18 INDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE

A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.

B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

C. Equipment, Exposed, up to 48 Inches in Diameter or with Flat Surfaces up to 72 Inches:

1. Aluminum, Smooth with Z-Shaped Locking Steam : 0.0020 inch thick.

3.19 OUTDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE

A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.

B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

C. Piping, Exposed, chilled water pumps, air separator, chilled water expansion/compression tank, and buffer tank.

1. Aluminum, Smooth with Z-Shaped Locking Seam: 0.016 inch thick.




SECTION 230800 - COMMISSIONING OF HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes commissioning process requirements for HVAC&R systems, assemblies, and equipment.


1. Division 01 Section "General Commissioning Requirements" for general commissioning process requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS



C. HVAC&R: Heating, Ventilating, Air Conditioning, and Refrigeration.





C. Attend testing, adjusting, and balancing review and coordination meeting.

D. Participate in HVAC&R systems, assemblies, equipment, and component maintenance orientation and inspection as directed by the CxA.


COMMISSIONING OF HVAC 230800 - 1



1.5 CxA'S RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Provide Project-specific construction checklists and commissioning process test procedures for actual HVAC&R systems, assemblies, equipment, and components to be furnished and installed as part of the construction contract.


C. Verify testing, adjusting, and balancing of Work are complete.






3. Process and schedule for completing construction checklists and manufacturer's prestart and startup checklists for HVAC&R systems, assemblies, equipment, and components to be verified and tested.

4. Certificate of completion certifying that installation, prestart checks, and startup procedures have been completed.

5. Certificate of readiness certifying that HVAC&R systems, subsystems, equipment, and associated controls are ready for testing.

6. Test and inspection reports and certificates. 7. Corrective action documents. 8. Verification of testing, adjusting, and balancing reports.

1.7 SUBMITTALS


B. Certificates of completion of installation, prestart, and startup activities.


VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Certify that HVAC&R systems, subsystems, and equipment have been installed, calibrated, and started and are operating according to the Owner’s Project Requirements.

B. Certify that HVAC&R instrumentation and control systems have been completed and calibrated, that they are operating according to the Owner’s Project Requirements, and that pretest set points have been recorded.

C. Certify that testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures have been completed and that testing, adjusting, and balancing reports have been submitted, discrepancies corrected, and corrective work approved.

D. Set systems, subsystems, and equipment into operating mode to be tested (e.g., normal shutdown, normal auto position, normal manual position, unoccupied cycle, emergency power, and alarm conditions).

E. Inspect and verify the position of each device and interlock identified on checklists.

F. Check safety cutouts, alarms, and interlocks with smoke control and life-safety systems during each mode of operation.

G. Testing Instrumentation: Install measuring instruments and logging devices to record test data as directed by the CxA.

3.2 Testing AND BALANCING VERIFICATION

A. Prior to performance of testing and balancing Work, provide copies of reports, sample forms, checklists, and certificates to the CxA.

B. Notify the CxA at least 7 days in advance of testing and balancing Work, and provide access for the CxA to witness testing and balancing Work.

C. Provide technicians, instrumentation, and tools to verify testing and balancing of HVAC&R systems at the direction of the CxA.

1. The testing and balancing Subcontractor shall use the same instruments (by model and serial number) that were used when original data were collected.

2. Failure of an item includes, other than sound, a deviation of more than 10 percent. Failure of more than 10 percent of selected items shall result in rejection of final testing, adjusting, and balancing report. For sound pressure readings, a deviation of 3 dB shall result in rejection of final testing. Variations in background noise must be considered.



3. Remedy the deficiency and notify the CxA so verification of failed portions can be performed.

3.3 GENERAL TESTING REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide technicians, instrumentation, and tools to perform commissioning test at the direction of the CxA.

B. Scope of HVAC&R testing shall include entire HVAC&R installation, from central equipment for heat generation and refrigeration through distribution systems to each conditioned space. Testing shall include measuring capacities and effectiveness of operational and control functions.

C. Test all operating modes, interlocks, control responses, and responses to abnormal or emergency conditions, and verify proper response of building automation system controllers and sensors.

D. The CxA along with the HVAC&R Subcontractor, testing and balancing Subcontractor, and HVAC&R Instrumentation and Control Subcontractor shall prepare detailed testing plans, procedures, and checklists for HVAC&R systems, subsystems, and equipment.

E. Tests will be performed using design conditions whenever possible.

F. Simulated conditions may need to be imposed using an artificial load when it is not practical to test under design conditions. Before simulating conditions, calibrate testing instruments. Provide equipment to simulate loads. Set simulated conditions as directed by the CxA and document simulated conditions and methods of simulation. After tests, return settings to normal operating conditions.

G. The CxA may direct that set points be altered when simulating conditions is not practical.

H. The CxA may direct that sensor values be altered with a signal generator when design or simulating conditions and altering set points are not practical.

I. If tests cannot be completed because of a deficiency outside the scope of the HVAC&R system, document the deficiency and report it to the Owner. After deficiencies are resolved, reschedule tests.

J. If the testing plan indicates specific seasonal testing, complete appropriate initial performance tests and documentation and schedule seasonal tests.

3.4 HVAC&R SYSTEMS, SUBSYSTEMS, AND EQUIPMENT TESTING PROCEDURES

A. Boiler Testing and Acceptance Procedures: Testing requirements are specified in Division 23 boiler Sections. Provide submittals, test data, inspector record, and boiler certification to the CxA.



B. HVAC&R Instrumentation and Control System Testing: Field testing plans and testing requirements are specified in Division 23 Sections "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC" and "Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls." Assist the CxA with preparation of testing plans.

C. Pipe system cleaning, flushing, hydrostatic tests, and chemical treatment requirements are specified in Division 23 piping Sections. HVAC&R Subcontractor shall prepare a pipe system cleaning, flushing, and hydrostatic testing plan. Provide cleaning, flushing, testing, and treating plan and final reports to the CxA. Plan shall include the following:

1. Sequence of testing and testing procedures for each section of pipe to be tested, identified by pipe zone or sector identification marker. Markers shall be keyed to Drawings for each pipe sector, showing the physical location of each designated pipe test section. Drawings keyed to pipe zones or sectors shall be formatted to allow each section of piping to be physically located and identified when referred to in pipe system cleaning, flushing, hydrostatic testing, and chemical treatment plan.

2. Description of equipment for flushing operations. 3. Minimum flushing water velocity. 4. Tracking checklist for managing and ensuring that all pipe sections have been cleaned,

flushed, hydrostatically tested, and chemically treated.

D. Energy Supply System Testing: Provide technicians, instrumentation, tools, and equipment to test performance of systems and equipment at the direction of the CxA. The CxA shall determine the sequence of testing and testing procedures for each equipment item and pipe section to be tested.

E. Refrigeration System Testing: Provide technicians, instrumentation, tools, and equipment to test performance of chillers and pumps. The CxA shall determine the sequence of testing and testing procedures for each equipment item and pipe section to be tested.

F. HVAC&R Distribution System Testing: Provide technicians, instrumentation, tools, and equipment to test performance of supply and exhaust air, steam, and hydronic distribution systems; special exhaust; and other distribution systems, including automatic controls.

G. Vibration and Sound Tests: Provide technicians, instrumentation, tools, and equipment to test performance of vibration isolation and seismic controls.

H. HVAC systems: Refer to drawing: M-0.




SECTION 230900 - INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes control equipment for HVAC systems and components, including control components for terminal heating and cooling units not supplied with factory-wired controls.


1. Division 23 Section "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping" for measuring equipment that relates to this Section.

2.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. DDC: Direct digital control.

B. I/O: Input/output.

C. LonWorks: A control network technology platform for designing and implementing interoperable control devices and networks.

D. MS/TP: Master slave/token passing.

E. PC: Personal computer.

F. PID: Proportional plus integral plus derivative.

G. RTD: Resistance temperature detector.

1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

A. Comply with the following performance requirements:

1. Graphic Display: Display graphic with minimum 20 dynamic points with current data within 10 seconds.

2. Graphic Refresh: Update graphic with minimum 20 dynamic points with current data within 8 seconds.

INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900 - 1


3. Object Command: Reaction time of less than two seconds between operator command of a binary object and device reaction.

4. Object Scan: Transmit change of state and change of analog values to control units or workstation within six seconds.

5. Alarm Response Time: Annunciate alarm at workstation within 45 seconds. Multiple workstations must receive alarms within five seconds of each other.

6. Program Execution Frequency: Run capability of applications as often as five seconds, but selected consistent with mechanical process under control.

7. Performance: Programmable controllers shall execute DDC PID control loops, and scan and update process values and outputs at least once per second.

8. Reporting Accuracy and Stability of Control: Report values and maintain measured variables within tolerances as follows:

a. Water Temperature: Plus or minus 1 deg F. b. Water Flow: Plus or minus 5 percent of full scale. c. Water Pressure: Plus or minus 2 percent of full scale. d. Space Temperature: Plus or minus 1 deg F. e. Ducted Air Temperature: Plus or minus 1 deg F. f. Outside Air Temperature: Plus or minus 2 deg F. g. Dew Point Temperature: Plus or minus 3 deg F. h. Temperature Differential: Plus or minus 0.25 deg F. i. Relative Humidity: Plus or minus 5 percent. j. Airflow (Pressurized Spaces): Plus or minus 3 percent of full scale. k. Airflow (Measuring Stations): Plus or minus 5 percent of full scale. l. Airflow (Terminal): Plus or minus 10 percent of full scale. m. Air Pressure (Space): Plus or minus 0.01-inch wg. n. Air Pressure (Ducts): Plus or minus 0.1-inch wg. o. Carbon Monoxide: Plus or minus 5 percent of reading. p. Carbon Dioxide: Plus or minus 50 ppm. q. Electrical: Plus or minus 5 percent of reading.

1.5 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION: AS INDICATED ON THE CONTROL DRAWINGS

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical literature for each control device. Indicate dimensions, capacities, performance characteristics, electrical characteristics, finishes for materials, and installation and startup instructions for each type of product indicated.

1. DDC System Hardware: Bill of materials of equipment indicating quantity, manufacturer, and model number. Include technical data for operator workstation equipment, interface equipment, control units, transducers/transmitters, sensors, actuators, valves, relays/switches, control panels, and operator interface equipment.

2. Control System Software: Include technical data for operating system software, operator interface, color graphics, and other third-party applications.

3. Controlled Systems: Instrumentation list with element name, type of device, manufacturer, model number, and product data. Include written description of sequence of operation including schematic diagram.



B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

1. Bill of materials of equipment indicating quantity, manufacturer, and model number. 2. Schematic flow diagrams showing fans, pumps, coils, dampers, valves, and control

devices. 3. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. 4. Details of control panel faces, including controls, instruments, and labeling. 5. Written description of sequence of operation. 6. Schedule of dampers including size, leakage, and flow characteristics. 7. Schedule of valves including flow characteristics. 8. DDC System Hardware:

a. Wiring diagrams for control units with termination numbers. b. Schematic diagrams and floor plans for field sensors and control hardware. c. Schematic diagrams for control, communication, and power wiring, showing trunk

data conductors and wiring between operator workstation and control unit locations.

9. Control System Software: List of color graphics indicating monitored systems, data (connected and calculated) point addresses, output schedule, and operator notations.

10. Controlled Systems:

a. Schematic diagrams of each controlled system with control points labeled and control elements graphically shown, with wiring.

b. Scaled drawings showing mounting, routing, and wiring of elements including bases and special construction.

c. Written description of sequence of operation including schematic diagram. d. Points list.

C. Data Communications Protocol Certificates: Certify that each proposed DDC system component complies with ASHRAE 135.

D. Data Communications Protocol Certificates: Certify that each proposed DDC system component complies with LonWorks.

E. Samples for Initial Selection: For each color required, of each type of thermostat or sensor cover with factory-applied color finishes.

F. Samples for Verification: For each color required, of each type of thermostat or sensor cover.

G. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation: Include the following:

1. Software operating and upgrade manuals. 2. Program Software Backup: On a magnetic media or compact disc, complete with data

files. 3. Device address list. 4. Printout of software application and graphic screens. 5. Software license required by and installed for DDC workstations and control systems.



H. Software Upgrade Kit: For Owner to use in modifying software to suit future systems revisions or monitoring and control revisions.

I. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer.

J. Field quality-control test reports.

K. Operation and Maintenance Data: For HVAC instrumentation and control system to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Maintenance instructions and lists of spare parts for each type of control device and compressed-air station.

2. Interconnection wiring diagrams with identified and numbered system components and devices.

3. Keyboard illustrations and step-by-step procedures indexed for each operator function. 4. Inspection period, cleaning methods, cleaning materials recommended, and calibration

tolerances. 5. Calibration records and list of set points.


A. Installer Qualifications: Automatic control system manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of system components required for this Project.


C. Comply with ASHRAE 135 for DDC system components.


A. Factory-Mounted Components: Where control devices specified in this Section are indicated to be factory mounted on equipment, arrange for shipping of control devices to equipment manufacturer.

B. System Software: Update to latest version of software at Project completion.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate location of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with plans and room details before installation.

B. Coordinate equipment with Division 28 Section "Access Control" to achieve compatibility with equipment that interfaces with that system.



C. Coordinate equipment with Division 26 Section "Network Lighting Controls" to achieve compatibility with equipment that interfaces with that system.

D. Coordinate equipment with Division 28 Section "Fire Detection and Alarm" to achieve compatibility with equipment that interfaces with that system.

E. Coordinate supply of conditioned electrical branch circuits for control units and operator workstation.

F. Coordinate equipment with Division 26 Section "Panelboards" to achieve compatibility with starter coils and annunciation devices.

G. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Replacement Materials: One replacement diaphragm or relay mechanism for each unique valve motor, controller, thermostats or temperature sensor.

2. Maintenance Materials: Three thermostat adjusting key(s).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



2.2 CONTROL SYSTEM

A. Available Manufacturers:

1. Alerton Inc. 2. American Auto-Matrix. 3. Andover Controls Corporation. 4. Automated Logic Corporation. 5. Delta Controls Inc. 6. Electronic Systems USA, Inc.



7. Functional Devices Inc. 8. Heat-Timer Corporation. 9. Honeywell International Inc.; Home & Building Control. 10. Impact Energy Controls Corp. 11. Invensys Building Systems. 12. Johnson Controls, Inc.; Controls Group. 13. KMC Controls/Kreuter Manufacturing Company. 14. Luwa USA, Inc.; Textile Air Engineering. 15. Staefa Control System Inc.; Siemens Building Technologies, Inc.

B. Control system shall consist of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface equipment, other apparatus, and accessories to control mechanical systems.

C. Control system shall consist of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface equipment, other apparatus, accessories, and software connected to distributed controllers operating in multiuser, multitasking environment on token-passing network and programmed to control mechanical systems. An operator workstation permits interface with the network via dynamic color graphics with each mechanical system, building floor plan, and control device depicted by point-and-click graphics.

D. Control system shall include the following: 1. Building lighting control system specified in Division 26 Section "Network Lighting

Controls." 2. Fire alarm system specified in Division 28 Section "Fire Detection and Alarm."

E. Furnished constant volume air terminal units DDC equipment and sensors to the air terminal manufacturer for factory mounting of the controls. See requirements on control drawings.

F. Provide control interfaces required to interface DDC control system with Carrier Air Cooled chiller integral controls.

2.3 DDC EQUIPMENT

A. Operator Workstation: One PC-based microcomputer(s) with minimum configuration as follows:

1. Motherboard: With 8 integrated USB 2.0 ports, integrated Intel Pro 10/100 (Ethernet), integrated audio, bios, and hardware monitoring.

2. Processor: Intel Pentium 4 Dual core processor 1500 MHz. 3. Random-Access Memory: 2.00 GB. 4. Graphics: Video adapter, minimum 1280 x 1024 1600 x 1200 pixels, 64Insert number-

MB video memory, with TV out. 5. Monitor: 17 inches Insert size, LCD color. 6. Keyboard: QWERTY, 105 keys in ergonomic shape. 7. Floppy-Disk Drive: 1.44 MB. 8. Hard-Disk Drive: 320 GB. 9. DVD CD-ROM Read/Write Drive: 48x24x48. 10. Mouse: Three button, optical. 11. Uninterruptible Power Supply: 2kVa.



12. Operating System: Microsoft Windows 7 .

a. ASHRAE 135 Compliance: Workstation shall use ASHRAE 135 protocol and communicate using ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) datalink/physical layer protocol.

b. LonWorks Compliance: Control units shall use LonTalk protocol and communicate using EIA/CEA 709.1 datalink/physical layer protocol.

13. Printer: Black-and-white, laser-jet type as follows: a. Resolution 1600 dpi, 20 ppm output. b. Paper Handling: Minimum of 250sheet trays.

14. Application Software:

a. I/O capability from operator station. b. System security for each operator via software password and access levels. c. Automatic system diagnostics; monitor system and report failures. d. Database creation and support. e. Automatic and manual database save and restore. f. Dynamic color graphic displays with up to 10<Insert number> screen displays at

once. g. Custom graphics generation and graphics library of HVAC equipment and

symbols. h. Alarm processing, messages, and reactions. i. Trend logs retrievable in spreadsheets and database programs. j. Alarm and event processing. k. Object and property status and control. l. Automatic restart of field equipment on restoration of power. m. Data collection, reports, and logs. Include standard reports for the following:

1) Current values of all objects. 2) Current alarm summary. 3) Disabled objects. 4) Alarm lockout objects. 5) Logs.

n. Custom report development. o. Utility and weather reports. p. Workstation application editors for controllers and schedules. q. Maintenance management.

15. Custom Application Software:

a. English language oriented. b. Full-screen character editor/programming environment. c. Allow development of independently executing program modules with

debugging/simulation capability. d. Support conditional statements. e. Support floating-point arithmetic with mathematic functions. f. Contains predefined time variables.



B. Diagnostic Terminal Unit: Portable notebook-style, PC-based microcomputer terminal capable of accessing system data by connecting to system network with minimum configuration as follows:

1. System: With one integrated USB 2.0 port, integrated Intel Pro 10/100 (Ethernet), integrated audio, bios, and hardware monitoring.

2. Processor: Intel Pentium 4, 3. Random-Access Memory: 128MB. 4. Graphics: Video adapter, minimum 800 x 600 pixels, 64-MB video memory. 5. Monitor: 17 inches , LCD color. 6. Keyboard: QWERTY 105 keys in ergonomic shape. 7. Floppy-Disk Drive: 1.44 MB. 8. Hard-Disk Drive: 80 GB. 9. CD-ROM Read/Write Drive: 48x24x48. 10. Pointing Device: Touch pad or other internal device.

C. Control Units: Modular, comprising processor board with programmable, nonvolatile, random-access memory; local operator access and display panel; integral interface equipment; and backup power source.

1. Units monitor or control each I/O point; process information; execute commands from other control units, devices, and operator stations; and download from or upload to operator workstation or diagnostic terminal unit.

2. Stand-alone mode control functions operate regardless of network status. Functions include the following:

a. Global communications. b. Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse I/O. c. Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points. d. Software applications, scheduling, and alarm processing. e. Testing and developing control algorithms without disrupting field hardware and

controlled environment.

3. Standard Application Programs:

a. Electric Control Programs: Demand limiting, duty cycling, automatic time scheduling, start/stop time optimization, night setback/setup, on-off control with differential sequencing, staggered start, antishort cycling, PID control, DDC with fine tuning, and trend logging.

b. HVAC Control Programs: Optimal run time, supply-air reset, and enthalpy switchover.

c. Chiller Control Programs: Control function of condenser-water reset, chilled-water reset, and equipment sequencing.

d. Programming Application Features: Include trend point; alarm processing and messaging; weekly, monthly, and annual scheduling; energy calculations; run-time totalization; and security access.

e. Remote communications. f. Maintenance management. g. Units of Measure: Inch-pound and SI (metric).



4. Local operator interface provides for download from or upload to operator workstation or diagnostic terminal unit.

5. ASHRAE 135 Compliance: Control units shall use ASHRAE 135 protocol and communicate using ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) datalink/physical layer protocol.

6. LonWorks Compliance: Control units shall use LonTalk protocol and communicate using EIA/CEA 709.1 datalink/physical layer protocol.

D. Local Control Units: Modular, comprising processor board with electronically programmable, nonvolatile, read-only memory; and backup power source.

1. Units monitor or control each I/O point, process information, and download from or upload to operator workstation or diagnostic terminal unit.

2. Stand-alone mode control functions operate regardless of network status. Functions include the following:

a. Global communications. b. Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse I/O. c. Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points.

3. Local operator interface provides for download from or upload to operator workstation or diagnostic terminal unit.

4. ASHRAE 135 Compliance: Control units shall use ASHRAE 135 protocol and communicate using ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) datalink/physical layer protocol.

5. LonWorks Compliance: Control units shall use LonTalk protocol and communicate using EIA/CEA 709.1 datalink/physical layer protocol.

E. I/O Interface: Hardwired inputs and outputs may tie into system through controllers. Protect points so that shorting will cause no damage to controllers.

1. Binary Inputs: Allow monitoring of on-off signals without external power. 2. Pulse Accumulation Inputs: Accept up to 10 pulses per second. 3. Analog Inputs: Allow monitoring of low-voltage (0- to 10-V dc), current (4 to 20 mA),

or resistance signals. 4. Binary Outputs: Provide on-off or pulsed low-voltage signal, selectable for normally

open or normally closed operation with three-position (on-off-auto) override switches and status lights.

5. Analog Outputs: Provide modulating signal, either low voltage (0- to 10-V dc) or current (4 to 20 mA) with status lights, two-position (auto-manual) switch, and manually adjustable potentiometer.

6. Tri-State Outputs: Provide two coordinated binary outputs for control of three-point, floating-type electronic actuators.

7. Universal I/Os: Provide software selectable binary or analog outputs.

F. Power Supplies: Transformers with Class 2 current-limiting type or overcurrent protection; limit connected loads to 80 percent of rated capacity. DC power supply shall match output current and voltage requirements and be full-wave rectifier type with the following:

1. Output ripple of 5.0 mV maximum peak to peak. 2. Combined 1 percent line and load regulation with 100-mic.sec. response time for 50

percent load changes.



3. Built-in overvoltage and overcurrent protection and be able to withstand 150 percent overload for at least 3 seconds without failure.

G. Power Line Filtering: Internal or external transient voltage and surge suppression for workstations or controllers with the following:

1. Minimum dielectric strength of 1000 V. 2. Maximum response time of 10 nanoseconds. 3. Minimum transverse-mode noise attenuation of 65 dB. 4. Minimum common-mode noise attenuation of 150 dB at 40 to 100 Hz.

2.4 UNITARY CONTROLLERS

A. Unitized, capable of stand-alone operation with sufficient memory to support its operating system, database, and programming requirements, and with sufficient I/O capacity for the application.

1. Configuration: Local keypad and display; diagnostic LEDs for power, communication, and processor; wiring termination to terminal strip or card connected with ribbon cable; memory with bios; and 72 -hour battery backup.

2. Operating System: Manage I/O communication to allow distributed controllers to share real and virtual object information and allow central monitoring and alarms. Perform scheduling with real-time clock. Perform automatic system diagnostics; monitor system and report failures.

3. ASHRAE 135 Compliance: Communicate using read (execute and initiate) and write (execute and initiate) property services defined in ASHRAE 135. Reside on network using MS/TP datalink/physical layer protocol and have service communication port for connection to diagnostic terminal unit.

4. LonWorks Compliance: Communicate using EIA/CEA 709.1 datalink/physical layer protocol using LonTalk protocol.

5. Enclosure: Dustproof rated for operation at 32 to 120 deg F. 6. Enclosure: Waterproof rated for operation at 40 to 150 deg F.

2.5 ELECTRONIC SENSORS

A. Description: Vibration and corrosion resistant; for wall, immersion, or duct mounting as required.

B. Thermistor Temperature Sensors and Transmitters:


a. BEC Controls Corporation. b. Ebtron, Inc. c. Heat-Timer Corporation. d. I.T.M. Instruments Inc. e. MAMAC Systems, Inc. f. RDF Corporation.



2. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.5 deg F at calibration point. 3. Wire: Twisted, shielded-pair cable. 4. Insertion Elements in Ducts: Single point, 8 inches long; use where not affected by

temperature stratification or where ducts are smaller than 9 sq. ft.. 5. Averaging Elements in Ducts: 36 inches long, flexible ; use where prone to temperature

stratification or where ducts are larger than 10 sq. ft.. 6. Insertion Elements for Liquids: Brass or stainless-steel socket with minimum insertion

length of 2-1/2 inches. 7. Room Sensor Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers.

a. Set-Point Adjustment: Concealed. b. Set-Point Indication: Keyed. c. Thermometer: Concealed . d. Color: White e. Orientation: Horizontal.

8. Outside-Air Sensors: Watertight inlet fitting, shielded from direct sunlight.

C. RTDs and Transmitters:

1. Manufacturers:

a. BEC Controls Corporation. b. MAMAC Systems, Inc. c. RDF Corporation.

2. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.2 percent at calibration point. 3. Wire: Twisted, shielded-pair cable. 4. Insertion Elements in Ducts: Single point, 8 incheslong; use where not affected by

temperature stratification or where ducts are smaller than 9 sq. ft. (0.84 sq. m). 5. Averaging Elements in Ducts: 24 inches; use where prone to temperature stratification or

where ducts are larger than 9 sq. ft.; length as required. 6. Insertion Elements for Liquids: Brass socket with minimum insertion length of 2-1/2

inches. 7. Room Sensor Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers.

a. Set-Point Adjustment: Concealed. b. Set-Point Indication: Exposed. c. Thermometer: ExposedRed-reading glass. d. Color: Manufacturer’s Standard. e. Orientation: Vertical.

8. Outside-Air Sensors: Watertight inlet fitting, shielded from direct sunlight. 9. Room Security Sensors: Stainless-steel cover plate with insulated back and security

screws.

D. Humidity Sensors: Bulk polymer sensor element.




a. BEC Controls Corporation. b. General Eastern Instruments. c. MAMAC Systems, Inc. d. ROTRONIC Instrument Corp. e. TCS/Basys Controls. f. Vaisala.

2. Accuracy: 2 percent full range with linear output. 3. Room Sensor Range: 20 to 80 percent relative humidity. 4. Room Sensor Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers.

a. Set-Point Adjustment: Concealed. b. Set-Point Indication: Exposed. c. Thermometer: Exposed. d. Color: White. e. Orientation: Vertical.

5. Duct Sensor: 20 to 80 percent relative humidity range with element guard and mounting plate.

E. Pressure Transmitters/Transducers:

1. Manufacturers:

a. BEC Controls Corporation. b. General Eastern Instruments. c. MAMAC Systems, Inc. d. ROTRONIC Instrument Corp. e. TCS/Basys Controls. f. Vaisala.

2. Static-Pressure Transmitter: Nondirectional sensor with suitable range for expected input, and temperature compensated.

a. Accuracy: 2 percent of full scale with repeatability of 0.5 percent. b. Output: 4 to 20 mA. c. Building Static-Pressure Range: 0- to 0.25-inch wg. d. Duct Static-Pressure Range: 0- to 5-inch wg.

3. Water Pressure Transducers: Stainless-steel diaphragm construction, suitable for service; minimum 150-psig operating pressure; linear output 4 to 20 mA.

4. Water Differential-Pressure Transducers: Stainless-steel diaphragm construction, suitable for service; minimum 150-psig operating pressure and tested to 300-psig ;linear output 4 to 20 mA.

5. Differential-Pressure Switch (Air or Water): Snap acting, with pilot-duty rating and with suitable scale range and differential.

F. Room Sensor Cover Construction: Manufacturer's standard locking covers.

1. Set-Point Adjustment: Concealed.



2. Set-Point Indication: Concealed. 3. Thermometer: Concealed. 4. Color: White 5. Orientation: Horizontal.

G. Room sensor accessories include the following: 1. Guards: Locking; heavy-duty, transparent plastic; mounted on separate base. 2. Adjusting Key: As required for calibration and cover screws.

H. Remote Bulb Electronic Stand-Alone Analog Controllers: Standard NEMA 4X type, 24 voltage relay output and input and proportional outputs.

1. Sensor Element: 1097 ohms PTC at 77 deg F. 2. Bulb Size: ¼ “ diameter x 2” Long. 3. Set Point: -40°F to 240°F. 4. Accuracy: ± 1°F. 5. Throttling: 1°F to 150°F (adjustable) range.

2.6 STATUS SENSORS

A. Status Inputs for Fans: Differential-pressure switch with pilot-duty rating and with adjustable range of 0- to 5-inch wg.

B. Status Inputs for Pumps: Differential-pressure switch with pilot-duty rating and with adjustable pressure-differential range of 8 to 60 psig, piped across pump.

C. Status Inputs for Electric Motors: Comply with ISA 50.00.01, current-sensing fixed- or split-core transformers with self-powered transmitter, adjustable and suitable for 175 percent of rated motor current.

D. Current Switches: Self-powered, solid-state with adjustable trip current, selected to match current and system output requirements.

E. Electronic Valve/Damper Position Indicator: Visual scale indicating percent of travel and 2- to 10-V dc, feedback signal.

F. Water-Flow Switches: Bellows-actuated mercury or snap-acting type with pilot-duty rating, stainless-steel or bronze paddle, with appropriate range and differential adjustment, in NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure.


a. BEC Controls Corporation. b. I.T.M. Instruments Inc.


VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 2.7 THERMOSTATS


1. Erie Controls. 2. Danfoss Inc.; Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Div. 3. Heat-Timer Corporation. 4. Sauter Controls Corporation. 5. tekmar Control Systems, Inc. 6. Theben AG - Lumilite Control Technology, Inc.

B. Combination Thermostat and Fan Switches: Two-Pole, open contacts line-voltage thermostat with push-button or lever-operated fan switch. Listed for electrical rating with concealed set-point adjustment, 55 to 110 deg F set point range and 2 deg F maximum differential.

C. Immersion Thermostat: Remote-bulb or bimetal rod-and-tube type, proportioning action with adjustable throttling range and adjustable set point.

D. Airstream Thermostats: Two-pipe, fully proportional, single-temperature type; with adjustable set point in middle of range, adjustable throttling range, plug-in test fitting or permanent pressure gage, remote bulb, bimetal rod and tube, or averaging element.

2.8 HUMIDISTATS

A. [Available ]Manufacturers:

1. MAMAC Systems, Inc. 2. ROTRONIC Instrument Corp.

B. Duct-Mounting Humidistats: Electric insertion, 2-position type with adjustable, 2 percent throttling range, 20 to 80 percent operating range, and single- or double-pole contacts.

2.9 ACTUATORS

A. Electronic Actuators: Direct-coupled type designed for minimum 60,000 full-stroke cycles at rated torque.


a. Belimo Aircontrols (USA), Inc.

2. Valves: Size for torque required for valve close off at maximum pump differential pressure.

3. Dampers: Size for running torque calculated as follows:

a. Parallel-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 7 inch-lb/sq. ft. of damper. b. Opposed-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 5 inch-lb/sq. ft. of damper.



4. Coupling: V-bolt and V-shaped, toothed cradle. 5. Overload Protection: Electronic overload or digital rotation-sensing circuitry. 6. Fail-Safe Operation: Mechanical, spring-return mechanism. Provide external, manual

gear release on nonspring-return actuators. 7. Power Requirements (Two-Position Spring Return): 24-V ac. 8. Power Requirements (Modulating): Maximum 10 VA at 24-V ac or 8 W at 24-V dc. 9. Proportional Signal: 2- to 10-V dc or 4 to 20 mA, and 2- to 10-V dc position feedback

signal. 10. Temperature Rating: 40 to 104 deg F. 11. Run Time: 12 seconds open, 5 seconds closed.

2.10 CONTROL VALVES


1. Danfoss Inc.; Air Conditioning & Refrigeration Div. 2. Erie Controls. 3. Hayward Industrial Products, Inc. 4. Magnatrol Valve Corporation. 5. Neles-Jamesbury. 6. Parker Hannifin Corporation; Skinner Valve Division. 7. Pneuline Controls. 8. Sauter Controls Corporation.

B. Control Valves: Factory fabricated, of type, body material, and pressure class based on maximum pressure and temperature rating of piping system, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Sizing: 3-psig maximum pressure drop at design flow rate or the following:

a. Three-Way Modulating: Twice the load pressure drop, but not more than value specified above.

2. Flow Characteristics: Two-way valves shall have equal percentage characteristics; three-way valves shall have linear characteristics.

3. Close-Off (Differential) Pressure Rating: Combination of actuator and trim shall provide minimum close-off pressure rating of 150 percent of total system (pump) head for two-way valves and 100 percent of pressure differential across valve or 100 percent of total system (pump) head.

C. Steam system globe valves shall have the following characteristics:

1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Class 125 bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, renewable composition disc, and screwed ends with backseating capacity repackable under pressure.

2. Internal Construction: Replaceable plugs and stainless-steel seats.

a. Single-Seated Valves: Cage trim provides seating and guiding surfaces for plug on top and bottom of guided plugs.



3. Double-Seated Valves: Balanced plug; cage trim provides seating and guiding surfaces for plugs on top and bottom of guided plugs.Sizing: For pressure drop based on the following services:

a. Two Position: 20 percent of inlet pressure. b. Modulating 15-psig Steam: 80 percent of inlet steam pressure. c. Modulating 16- to 50-psig Steam: 50 percent of inlet steam pressure. d. Modulating More Than 50-psig Steam: As indicated.

2.11 DAMPERS


1. Air Balance Inc. 2. Don Park Inc.; Autodamp Div. 3. TAMCO (T. A. Morrison & Co. Inc.). 4. United Enertech Corp. 5. Vent Products Company, Inc.

B. Dampers: AMCA-rated, parallel blade design; 0.108-inch- minimum thick, galvanized-steel or 0.125-inch- minimum thick, extruded-aluminum frames with holes for duct mounting; damper blades shall not be less than

VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install software in control units and operator workstation(s). Implement all features of programs to specified requirements and as appropriate to sequence of operation.

B. Connect and configure equipment and software to achieve sequence of operation specified.

C. Verify location of thermostats, and other exposed control sensors with Drawings and room details before installation. Install devices [48 inches] [60 inches] above the floor.

1. Install averaging elements in ducts and plenums in crossing or zigzag pattern.

D. Install guards on thermostats in the following locations:

1. Entrances. 2. Public areas. 3. Where indicated.

E. Install automatic dampers according to Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories."

F. Install damper motors on outside of duct in warm areas, not in locations exposed to outdoor temperatures.

G. Install labels and nameplates to identify control components according to Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

H. Install hydronic instrument wells, valves, and other accessories according to Division 23 Section "Hydronic Piping."

I. Install duct volume-control dampers according to Division 23 Sections specifying air ducts.

J. Install electronic and fiber-optic cables according to Division 27 Section "Communications Horizontal Cabling."

3.3 ELECTRICAL WIRING AND CONNECTION INSTALLATION

A. Install raceways, boxes, and cabinets according to Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems."

B. Install building wire and cable according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

C. Install signal and communication cable according to Division 27 Section "Communications Horizontal Cabling."

1. Conceal cable, except in mechanical rooms and areas where other conduit and piping are exposed.

2. Install exposed cable in raceway. 3. Install concealed cable in raceway.



4. Bundle and harness multiconductor instrument cable in place of single cables where several cables follow a common path.

5. Fasten flexible conductors, bridging cabinets and doors, along hinge side; protect against abrasion. Tie and support conductors.

6. Number-code or color-code conductors for future identification and service of control system, except local individual room control cables.

7. Install wire and cable with sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for vibration of piping and equipment.

D. Connect manual-reset limit controls independent of manual-control switch positions. Automatic duct heater resets may be connected in interlock circuit of power controllers.

E. Connect hand-off-auto selector switches to override automatic interlock controls when switch is in hand position.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect[, test, and adjust] field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections[, and to assist in field testing]. Report results in writing.

B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. 3. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest

until no leaks exist. 4. Pressure test control air piping at 30 psig or 1.5 times the operating pressure for 24 hours,

with maximum 5-psig loss. 5. Pressure test high-pressure control air piping at 150 psig and low-pressure control air

piping at 30 psig for 2 hours, with maximum 1-psig loss. 6. Test calibration of electronic controllers by disconnecting input sensors and stimulating

operation with compatible signal generator. 7. Test each point through its full operating range to verify that safety and operating control

set points are as required. 8. Test each control loop to verify stable mode of operation and compliance with sequence

of operation. Adjust PID actions. 9. Test each system for compliance with sequence of operation. 10. Test software and hardware interlocks.

C. DDC Verification:

1. Verify that instruments are installed before calibration, testing, and loop or leak checks. 2. Check instruments for proper location and accessibility. 3. Check instrument installation for direction of flow, elevation, orientation, insertion depth,

and other applicable considerations. 4. Check instrument tubing for proper fittings, slope, material, and support. 5. Check installation of air supply for each instrument.



6. Check flow instruments. Inspect tag number and line and bore size, and verify that inlet side is identified and that meters are installed correctly.

7. Check pressure instruments, piping slope, installation of valve manifold, and self-contained pressure regulators.

8. Check temperature instruments and material and length of sensing elements. 9. Check control valves. Verify that they are in correct direction. 10. Check air-operated dampers. Verify that pressure gages are provided and that proper

blade alignment, either parallel or opposed, has been provided. 11. Check DDC system as follows:

a. Verify that DDC controller power supply is from emergency power supply, if applicable.

b. Verify that wires at control panels are tagged with their service designation and approved tagging system.

c. Verify that spare I/O capacity has been provided. d. Verify that DDC controllers are protected from power supply surges.

D. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment and repeat testing procedures.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Calibrating and Adjusting:

1. Calibrate instruments. 2. Make three-point calibration test for both linearity and accuracy for each analog

instrument. 3. Calibrate equipment and procedures using manufacturer's written recommendations and

instruction manuals. Use test equipment with accuracy at least double that of instrument being calibrated.

4. Control System Inputs and Outputs:

a. Check analog inputs at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span. b. Check analog outputs using milliampere meter at 0, 50, and 100 percent output. c. Check digital inputs using jumper wire. d. Check digital outputs using ohmmeter to test for contact making or breaking. e. Check resistance temperature inputs at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span using a

precision-resistant source.

5. Flow:

a. Set differential pressure flow transmitters for 0 and 100 percent values with 3-point calibration accomplished at 50, 90, and 100 percent of span.

b. Manually operate flow switches to verify that they make or break contact.

6. Pressure:

a. Calibrate pressure transmitters at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span. b. Calibrate pressure switches to make or break contacts, with adjustable differential

set at minimum.



7. Temperature:

a. Calibrate resistance temperature transmitters at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span using a precision-resistance source.

b. Calibrate temperature switches to make or break contacts.

8. Stroke and adjust control valves and dampers without positioners, following the manufacturer's recommended procedure, so that valve or damper is 100 percent open and closed.

9. Stroke and adjust control valves and dampers with positioners, following manufacturer's recommended procedure, so that valve and damper is 0, 50, and 100 percent closed.

10. Provide diagnostic and test instruments for calibration and adjustment of system. 11. Provide written description of procedures and equipment for calibrating each type of

instrument. Submit procedures review and approval before initiating startup procedures.

B. Adjust initial temperature and humidity set points.

C. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to three visits to Project during other than normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain HVAC instrumentation and controls. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."



VETERINARY CLINIC CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO SECTION 230995 - LABORATORY AIRFLOW VENTURI AIR TERMINAL VALVES PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specifications Sections, apply to this section.

1.2 SUMMARY.

A. A Laboratory Airflow Control System (LACS) shall be furnished and installed under this section. The LACS shall be capable of operating as a system integrated with the Building Management System (BMS).

1.3 REFERENCES.

A. Abbreviations and Acronyms

1. ATC – Advanced Temperature Control 2. BMS – Building Management System 3. LACS – Laboratory Airflow Control System 4. UBC – Usage Based Controls 5. CAV – Constant Air Volume

B. Reference Standards

1. Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute 2. ARI 880 Performance Rating of Air Terminals 3. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air Conditioning Engineers / American

National Standards Institute 4. ASHRAE/ANSI Standard 130, Methods for Testing Air Terminal Units 5. American National Standards Institute / American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and

Air Conditioning Engineers 6. ANSI/ASHRAE 135-2001: BACnet® - A Data Communication Protocol for Building

Automation Systems (including Standard and all published Addenda)

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include rated capacities, sound-power ratings and accessories.

1. Product Data Sheets

LABORATORY AIRFLOW VENTURI AIR TERMINAL VALVES 230995 - 1


2. Equipment Schedule Sheets containing Room#, Tag#, Min/Max flows, Catalog# and other configuration data as required to provide a fully engineered LACS.

3. Installation Instructions 4. Project-specific Wiring Diagrams 5. Points Lists

B. LEED Submittal:

1. Product Data for Prerequisite EQ 1: Documentation indicating that units comply with ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment."

C. Shop Drawings: For flow venturi valves. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.


2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. 3. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment.


E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For flow venturi valves to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Instructions for resetting minimum and maximum air volumes. 2. Instructions for adjusting software set points.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and maintenance manuals, including as-built wiring diagrams and component lists, shall be provided as closeout submittals.


A. Certifications

1. The laboratory airflow system provider shall be an entity that designs, develops, manufactures and sells products and services to control the environment and airflow of critical spaces using a Quality Management System registered to ISO 9001:2008.

B. ASHRAE Compliance : Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004 Section 5- “Systems and Equipment” Section 7 - “Construction and System Start-Up”.



2.1


A. Storage and Handling Requirements

1. Prior to installation, the LACS shall be stored in dry conditions within an environment complying with LACS product specifications as shown on product data sheets within the submittals.

2. The LACS products shall be handled and transported in a manner consistent trade practices for control systems and instruments.

1.8 SITE CONDITIONS

A. The ambient environmental conditions during installation and operation shall comply with LACS product specifications as shown on the product data sheets within the submittals.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Warranty on Air Flow Venturi valves and controls manufactured equipment shall commence upon the date of shipment and extend for a period of 36 months, wherein any defects in materials or LACS performance shall be repaired by the supplier at no cost to the owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

LABORATORY AIRFLOW CONTROL SYSTEMS (LACS)

A. A LACS shall be furnished and installed to control the airflow into and out of clinic rooms as indicated on drawings. The LACS shall be capable of operating as a system integrated with the Building Management System (BMS).

B. AIRFLOW CONTROL DEVICE - GENERAL

1. The airflow control device shall be a Venturi Valve. 2. The airflow control device shall be pressure independent over its specified differential

static pressure operating range. An integral pressure independent assembly shall respond and maintain specific airflow within one second of a change in duct static pressure irrespective of the magnitude of pressure and/or flow change or quantity of airflow controllers on a manifolded system.

3. The airflow control device shall maintain accuracy within ±5% of signal over an airflow turndown range of no less than:

a. 7 to 1 (low pressure all valve sizes) b. 11 to 1 (low pressure w/o 14” valve)

4. No minimum entrance or exit duct diameters shall be required to ensure accuracy and/or pressure independence.



5. No rotational/axial orientation requirements shall be required to ensure accuracy and/or pressure independence.

6. The airflow control device shall maintain pressure independence regardless of loss of power.

7. The airflow control device shall be constructed of one of the following \types:

a. Class A—The airflow control device for non-corrosive airstreams, such as supply and general exhaust, shall be constructed of 16-gauge aluminum. The device's shaft and internal “S” link shall be made of 316 stainless steel. The shaft support brackets shall be made of galvaneal (non shutoff valves). The pivot arm shall be made of aluminum (for non shutoff valves). The pressure independent springs shall be a spring-grade stainless steel. All shaft bearing surfaces shall be made of a PP (polypropylene) or PPS (polyphenylene sulfide) composite.

b. Class B—The airflow control device for corrosive airstreams, such as fume hoods and biosafety cabinets, shall have a baked-on, corrosion-resistant phenolic coating. The device's shaft shall be made of 316 stainless steel with a Teflon coating. The shaft support brackets shall be made of 316 stainless steel. The pivot arm and internal “S” link shall be made of 316 or 303 stainless steel. The pressure independent springs shall be a spring-grade stainless steel. The internal nuts, bolts and rivets shall be stainless steel. All shaft bearing surfaces shall be made of PP (polypropylene) or PPS (polyphenylene sulfide) composite.

8. The controller for the airflow control devices shall be microprocessor based and operate using peer-to-peer control architecture. The room-level airflow control devices shall function as a standalone network.

9. The room-level control network shall utilize a LonTalk communications protocol. 10. There shall be no reliance on external or building-level control devices to perform room-

level control functions. Each room control system shall have the capability of performing, pressurization control, temperature control, and implement occupancy and emergency mode control schemes.

11. The LACS shall have the option of digital integration with the BMS. 12. Certification

a. Each airflow control device shall be factory characterized to the job specific airflows as detailed on the plans and specifications using NIST traceable air stations and instrumentation having a combined accuracy of no more than ±1% of signal (5,000 to 250cfm), ±2% of signal (249 to 100cfm) and ±3% of signal (199 to 35cfm). Electronic airflow control devices shall be further characterized and their accuracy verified to ±5% of signal at a minimum of 48 different airflows across the full operating range of the device.

b. Each airflow control device shall be marked with device-specific factory characterization data. At a minimum, it should include the room number, tag number, serial number, model number, eight-point characterization information (for electronic devices), date of manufacture and quality control inspection numbers. All information shall be stored by the manufacturer for use with as-built documentation. Characterization data shall be stored indefinitely by the manufacturer and backed up off site for catastrophic event recovery.

C. EXHAUST AND SUPPLY AIRFLOW DEVICE CONTROLLER



1. The airflow control device shall be a microprocessor-based design and shall use closed loop control to linearly regulate airflow based on a digital control signal. The device shall generate a digital feedback signal that represents its airflow.

2. The airflow control device shall store its control algorithms in non-volatile, re-writeable memory. The device shall be able to stand-alone or to be networked with other room-level digital airflow control devices using an industry standard protocol.

3. Room-level control functions shall be embedded in and carried out by the airflow device controller using distributed control architecture. Critical control functions shall be implemented locally; no room-level controller shall be required.

4. The airflow control device shall use industry standard 24 VAC power. 5. The airflow control device shall have provisions to connect a notebook PC

commissioning tool and every node on the network shall be accessible from any point in the system.

6. The airflow control device shall have built-in integral input/output connections that address fume hood control, temperature control, emergency control, and non-network sensors switches and control devices. At a minimum, the airflow controller shall have:

a. Three universal inputs capable of accepting 0 to 10 VAC, 4 to 20 mA, 0 to 65 K ohms, or Type 2 or Type 3 10 K ohm @ 25 degree C thermistor temperature sensors.

b. One digital input capable of accepting a dry contact or logic level signal input. c. Two analog outputs capable of developing either a 0 to 10 VAC or 4 to 20 mA

linear control signal. d. One Form C (SPDT) relay output capable of driving up to 1 A @ 24 VAC/VAC.

7. The airflow control device shall meet FCC Part 15 Subpart J Class A, CE, and CSA Listed per file #228219.

D. LABORATORY AIRFLOW CONTROL DEVICE

1. The airflow control device shall maintain a temperature set point by controlling the airflow and the reheat in response to a room temperature sensor. An additional output shall be provided for supplementary cooling or heating of the office space. If the office airflow supply device is not required for make-up airflow control for fume hoods, then the one-second speed of response and fail-safe conditions required of the LACS shall not apply.

2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufactures List: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following available manufacturers:

1. Phoenix Controls Corporation, Tek Air, Triatek, or Siemens with venturi valves.

a. Experience

1) The LACS manufacturer shall provide a list of at least three similar LACS installed in the state or province as part of this proposal.



2) The LACS manufacturer shall provide the names, addresses and telephone numbers of the consulting engineer and the owner’s representative for each of these installations. It is understood that these individuals may be contacted regarding timely delivery, the quality of installation, the operation and performance of the equipment and the service requirements for each installation. Unsatisfactory performance or inability to provide references shall be grounds for rejection.

B. The LACS shall maintain specific airflow (±5% of signal) with a minimum turndown as specified in 2.1.B.4 to ensure accurate pressurization at low airflow and guarantee the maximum system diversity and energy efficiency.

C. Airflow Control Sound Specification

1. The LACS manufacturer shall provide comprehensive sound power level data for each size airflow control device. All data shall be obtained from testing in accordance with ASHRAE/ANSI Standard 130, Methods of Testing Air Terminal Units.

2. All proposed airflow control devices shall include discharge, exhaust and radiated sound power level performance.

2.3 OPERATION SEQUENCES

A. Volumetric Offset Pressurization Control: The laboratory control system shall control supply and auxiliary exhaust airflow devices in order to maintain a volumetric offset (either positive or negative). Offset shall be maintained regardless of any change in flow or static pressure. This offset shall be field adjustable and represents the volume of air, which will enter (or exit) the room from the corridor or adjacent spaces.

B. The pressurization control algorithm shall sum the flow values of all supply and exhaust airflow devices and command appropriate controlled devices to new set points to maintain the desired offset. The offset shall be adjustable. The pressurization control algorithm shall consider both networked devices, as well as:

1. Up to three non-networked devices providing a linear analog flow signal. 2. Any number of constant volume devices where the total of supply devices and the total of

exhaust devices may be factored into the pressurization control algorithm. Volumetric offset shall be the only acceptable means of controlling room pressurization. The volumetric offset control algorithm shall support the ability to regulate the distribution of total supply flow across multiple supply airflow control devices in order to optimize air distribution in the space.

C. Temperature Control

1. Standard Primary Temperature Control: The laboratory control system shall regulate the space temperature through a combination of volumetric thermal override and control of reheat coils and/or auxiliary temperature control devices. The laboratory control system shall support up to four separate temperature zones for each pressurization zone. Each zone shall have provisions for monitoring up to five temperature inputs and calculating a



straight-line average to be used for control purposes. Separate cooling and heating set points shall be writeable from the BMS, with the option of a local offset adjustment. Temperature control shall be implemented through the use of independent primary cool-ing and heating control functions, as well as an auxiliary temperature control function, which may be used for either supplemental cooling or heating. Cooling shall be provided as a function of thermal override of conditioned air with both supply and exhaust airflow devices responding simultaneously so as to maintain the desired offset. Heating shall be provided through modulating control of a properly sized reheat coil.

D. Fume Hood Control: Airflow devices intended to control the face velocity of a fume hood shall have the ability to interface directly with the fume hood monitoring device. The airflow control device shall:

1. Accept command inputs to regulate the flow accordingly and make this command value available to the BMS.

2. Provide a flow feedback signal to the fume hood monitor, which may be used for calculating face velocity or to confirm the airflow device has achieved the proper flow rate and make this value available to the BMS.

E. The laboratory control system shall be segregated into subnets to isolate network communications to ensure room-level control functions and BMS communications are carried out reliably. Each laboratory space or pressurization zone shall be its own subnet. Commercially available routers shall be used to provide this isolation.

F. The LACS shall support at least 20 networked devices in each pressurized zone.

G. All points shall be available through the interface to the BMS for trending, archiving, graphics, alarm notification and status reports. LACS performance (speed, stability and accuracy) shall be unaffected by the quantity of points being monitored, processed or controlled.

H. Refer to the BMS specification for the required input/output summary for the necessary points to be monitored and/or controlled.

2.4 INTERFACE TO BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS

A. The LACS network shall have the capability of digitally interfacing with the BMS. The required software interface drivers shall be developed and housed in a dedicated interface device furnished by the LACS supplier.

B. All room-level points shall be available to the BMS for monitoring or trending as shown in Table 1. The LACS server shall maintain a cache of all points to be monitored by the BMS. The room-level airflow control devices shall update this cache continually.

C. The building-level network shall be a high-speed LonTalk (1.25 Mbps) communications protocol. The building-level network shall support up to 100 subnets or pressurization zones, or 6,000 data points.

D. A commercially available interface card shall be provided with the LACS server in order to connect to the building-level network.



E. A commercially available network interface card shall be provided with the LACS server to interface with the BMS.

Table 1. Integration Points List Point Description Read/Write Point Description Read/Write

Valve-Level (per Valve) Temperature Control (per Zone) Flow Set Point Read Only Space Temperature Read Only

Flow Feedback Read Only Discharge Air Temperature Read Only

Flow Alarm Read Only Duct Temperature Read Only User Definable Inputs/Outputs Read/Write User Definable Alarm Points Read Only Zone Balance Control (per Zone) Occupied Min Ventilation Rate Read/Write

Heating Demand Read Only Offset Set Point Read/Write MAV Command & Feed-back

Read Only

GEX Command & Feedback Read Only Total Hood Flow Feedback Read Only

Fume Hood Control (per Hood Valve) Read/Write Emergency Mode State Read Only

2.5 ADVANCED PRESSURE MONITOR (SENSOR, TRANSMITTER, DISPLAY)

A. Provide pressure-to-current transmitters with the following minimum specifications:

1. Color, touch-screen display 2. Resistant to spray washdown (IP-54 rated) 3. Multi-function input signal of 0-10VAC, 0-5VAC or 4-20 mA 4. Standard accuracy RSS of at least +/-0.5% full scale (non-linearity, hysteresis and non-

repeatability) 5. Integral zero and span adjustment 6. Temperature effect on zero/span shift ±0.03 % FS/°F 7. Pressure ranges, selected by engineer shall be up to (-1.0" to +1.0") 8. Temperature Range: 32 to 120 deg. F 9. Programmable visual alarm and adjustable audible alarm 10. Alarm contact output, SPDT, contact rating of 2.0A @ 30VAC/VAC, 0.6A @ 125VAC

B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to comply with the requirements provide products by one of the following:

1. Phoenix Controls model APM200 or Siemens Model DPM. 2. Sensors are required as indicated on the drawings


VETERINARY CLINIC CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 2.6 ROOM AIR PRESSURE SENSOR PLATE

A. Provide shielded static air probes for sensing room pressure levels. Probes shall be flush-mounted in a standard 2" x 4" electrical box.

B. The pressure-sensing tubing shall be connected to the top of the probe with quarter-inch tubing. Tubing shall also be extended from the pressure sensor to a stable common pressure reference port.

C. The exact placement of the sensor plates and means of establishing a stable common reference pressure shall be determined by the Architect

2.7 PRESSURE

A. Door status switches with SPDT form C contacts with the following ratings shall be provided:

1. The maximum switching voltage is 30 volts at 0.1 A. 2. The maximum switching current is 0.25 A at 12 V.

B. Door switches shall be installed and mounted per the manufacturer’s recommendation.

C. Acceptable Manufactures:

1. GE Sentrol wide gap switch model 1078 series, or equal.

2.8 COORDINATION

A. The LACS factory authorized representative shall coordinate all details of the installation with the successful mechanical contractor. This effort shall include complete coordination of the sheet metal layout drawings to assure that the ductwork layout and sizing is based on the actual sizes of the airflow control valves for this project.

2.9 PRE INSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. The LACS factory authorized representative shall review the proper installation of the system with the sheet metal contractor and the building management system (BMS) contractor.

B. Project Installation Phase – The LACS representative shall make periodic visits to the project jobsite to assure that the system is being installed properly to assure optimal performance and that the location and orientation of the control valves is consistent for proper operation and future owner maintenance. Any discrepancies shall first be brought to the attention of the appropriate subcontractor. If no action is taken by said contractor, the representative shall bring these issues to the project manager, engineer or owner’s representative for resolution.



2.1

PART 3 - EXECUTION

INSTALLATION

A. Install Venturi Valves units according to NFPA 90A, "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."

B. Install Venturi Valves units level and plumb. Maintain sufficient clearance for normal service and maintenance.

C. Install wall-mounted temperature sensors.


A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 4, "Hangers and Supports."

B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.

1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete. 2. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured. 3. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes and for

slabs more than 4 inches thick. 4. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes and

for slabs less than 4 inches thick. 5. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints.

C. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.

D. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect ducts to Venturi Valves units according to Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts."

B. Make connections to air terminal units with flexible connectors complying with requirements in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories."

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Label each Venturi Valve unit with plan number, nominal airflow, and maximum and minimum factory-set airflows. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for equipment labels and warning signs and labels.




B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform tests and inspections.


D. Tests and Inspections:

1. After installing Venturi Valves units and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements.

2. Leak Test: After installation, fill water coils and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.


E. Venturi Valves unit will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.6 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Perform startup service shall be provide by a factory-authorized representative of the LACS’ manufacturer.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Verify that inlet duct connections are as recommended by Venturi Valve unit

manufacturer to achieve proper performance. 3. Verify that controls and control enclosure are accessible. 4. Verify that control connections are complete. 5. Verify that nameplate and identification tag are visible. 6. Verify that controls respond to inputs as specified. 7. Calibrate the fume hoods monitor and any combination sash sensing equipment. 8. Provide electronic verification of air flow (fume hood exhaust, supply, general exhaust),

system programming and integration to the BMS. 3.8 DEMOSTRATION

A. Training



1. The LACS supplier shall furnish a minimum of eight hours of owner training by factory trained and certified personnel. The training will provide an overview of the job specific airflow control components, verification of initial fume hood monitor calibration, general procedures for verifying airflows of air valves and general troubleshooting procedures.

2. Operation and maintenance manuals, including as-built wiring diagrams and component lists, shall be provided for each training attendee.




SECTION 231126 - FACILITY LIQUEFIED-PETROLEUM GAS PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Pipes, tubes, and fittings. 2. Piping specialties. 3. Piping and tubing joining materials. 4. Valves. 5. Pressure regulators. 6. Service meters. 7. Concrete bases.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.



D. LPG: Liquefied-petroleum gas.


A. Minimum Operating-Pressure Ratings:

1. For Piping Containing Only Vapor:

a. Piping and Valves: 125 psig unless otherwise indicated.

2. For Piping Containing Liquid:

FACILITY LIQUEFIED-PETROLEUM GAS PIPING 231126 - 1


a. Piping between Shutoff Valves: 350 psig unless otherwise indicated. b. Piping Other Than Above: 250 psig unless otherwise indicated. c. Valves and Fittings: 250 psig unless otherwise indicated.

3. Minimum Operating Pressure of Service Meter: 5 psig .

B. LPG System Pressure within Buildings: One pressure range. 0.5 psig or less .

C. Delegated Design: Design restraints and anchors for LPG piping and equipment, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

D. Seismic Performance: Vaporizers and storage container supports shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7 and IBC 2006, Seismic Zone # 3.

1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."

1.5 SUBMITTALS


1. Piping specialties. 2. Valves. Include pressure rating, capacity, settings, and electrical connection data of

selected models. 3. Pressure regulators. Indicate pressure ratings and capacities. 4. Service meters. Indicate pressure ratings and capacities. Include bypass fittings and

meter bars supports. 5. Dielectric fittings.

B. Shop Drawings: For facility LPG piping layout. Include plans, piping layout and elevations, sections, and details for fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers, supports for multiple pipes, alignment guides, expansion joints and loops, and attachments of the same to building structure. Detail location of anchors, alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops.

1. Shop Drawing Scale: 1/4 inch per foot. 2. Detail mounting, supports, and valve arrangements for service meter assembly and

pressure regulator assembly.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For LPG piping and equipment indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Detail fabrication and assembly of seismic restraints. 2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting seismic restraints.

D. Coordination Drawings: Plans and details, drawn to scale, on which LPG piping is shown and coordinated with other installations, using input from installers of the items involved.



E. Site Survey: Plans, drawn to scale, on which LPG piping is shown and coordinated with other services and utilities.

F. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer.

G. Seismic Qualification Certificates: Submit certification that vaporizer, air mixer, storage container supports, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment." Include the following:




H. Welding certificates.

I. Field quality-control reports.

J. Operation and Maintenance Data: For LPG equipment and accessories to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Steel Support Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.


A. Handling Flammable Liquids: Remove and dispose of liquids from existing LPG piping according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.


VETERINARY CLINIC CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Perform site survey, research public utility records, and verify existing utility locations. Contact utility-locating service for area where Project is located.

1.9 COORDINATION


B. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for valves installed concealed behind finished surfaces. Comply with requirements in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedules 40 and 80, Type E, Grade B.

1. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern. 2. Wrought-Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M for butt welding and socket

welding. 3. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint,

and threaded ends. 4. Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, minimum Class 150,

including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings:

a. Material Group: 1.1. b. End Connections: Threaded or butt welding to match pipe. c. Lapped Face: Not permitted underground. d. Gasket Materials: ASME B16.20, metallic, flat, asbestos free, aluminum o-rings,

and spiral-wound metal gaskets. e. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel aboveground, and stainless steel

underground.

5. Protective Coating for Underground Piping: Factory-applied, three-layer coating of epoxy, adhesive, and PE.

a. Joint Cover Kits: Epoxy paint, adhesive, and heat-shrink PE sleeves.

2.2 PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Flexible Piping Joints:

1. Approved for LPG service.



2. Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire-reinforcing protective jacket. 3. Minimum working pressure of 250 psig and 250 deg F operating temperature. 4. Flanged- or threaded-end connections to match equipment connected and shall be capable

of minimum 3/4-inch misalignment. 5. Maximum 36-inch length for liquid LPG lines.

B. Appliance Flexible Connectors:

1. Indoor, Fixed-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.24. 2. Indoor, Movable-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.69. 3. Outdoor, Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.75. 4. Corrugated stainless-steel tubing with polymer coating. 5. Operating-Pressure Rating: 0.5 psig. 6. End Fittings: Zinc-coated steel. 7. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1. 8. Maximum Length: 72 inches.

C. Quick-Disconnect Devices: Comply with ANSI Z21.41.

1. Copper-alloy convenience outlet and matching plug connector. 2. Nitrile seals. 3. Hand operated with automatic shutoff when disconnected. 4. For indoor or outdoor applications. 5. Adjustable, retractable restraining cable.

D. Y-Pattern Strainers:

1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection. 2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2 and

larger. 3. Strainer Screen: 40 -mesh startup strainer and perforated stainless-steel basket with 50

percent free area. 4. CWP Rating: 125 psig.

E. Weatherproof Vent Cap: Cast- or malleable-iron increaser fitting with corrosion-resistant wire screen, with free area at least equal to cross-sectional area of connecting pipe and threaded-end connection.


A. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for LPG.

B. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.


VETERINARY CLINIC CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 2.4 MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVES

A. See "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles for where each valve type is applied in various services.

B. Metallic Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller for Liquid Service: Comply with ASME B16.33 and UL 842.

1. CWP Rating: 250 psig. 2. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1. 3. Socket ends for brazed joints. 4. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground Manual Gas

Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles.

5. Listing by CSA or agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for valves 1 inch and smaller.

6. Valves 1-1/4 inch and larger shall be suitable for LPG service, with "WOG" indicated on valve body.

C. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller for Vapor Service: Comply with ASME B16.33.

1. CWP Rating: 125 psig. 2. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1. 3. Dryseal Threads on Flare Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.3. 4. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground Manual Gas


5. Listing: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for valves 1 inch and smaller.

6. Service Mark: Valves 1-1/4 inch to NPS 2 shall have initials "WOG" permanently marked on valve body.

D. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Comply with ASME B16.38.

1. CWP Rating: 125 psig. 2. Flanged Ends: Comply with ASME B16.5 for steel flanges. 3. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground Manual Gas


4. Service Mark: Initials "WOG" shall be permanently marked on valve body.

E. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110.


a. BrassCraft Manufacturing Company; a Masco company.



b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div. c. Lyall, R. W. & Company, Inc. d. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. e. Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company.

2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. 3. Ball: Chrome-plated bronze. 4. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof. 5. Seats: Reinforced TFE; blowout proof. 6. Packing: Threaded-body packnut design with adjustable-stem packing. 7. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff

Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 8. CWP Rating: 600 psig. 9. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction. 10. Service: Suitable for LPG service with "WOG" indicated on valve body.

F. Bronze Plug Valves: MSS SP-78.


a. Lee Brass Company. b. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.

2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. 3. Plug: Bronze. 4. Ends: Threaded, socket, or flanged as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff

Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 5. Operator: Square head or lug type with tamperproof feature where indicated. 6. Pressure Class: 125 psig. 7. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to


G. Cast-Iron, Nonlubricated Plug Valves: MSS SP-78.


a. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. b. Mueller Co.; Gas Products Div. c. Xomox Corporation; a Crane company.

2. Body: Cast iron, complying with ASTM A 126, Class B. 3. Plug: Bronze or nickel-plated cast iron. 4. Seat: Coated with thermoplastic. 5. Stem Seal: Compatible with LPG.



6. Ends: Threaded or flanged as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles.

7. Operator: Square head or lug type with tamperproof feature where indicated. 8. Pressure Class: 125 psig. 9. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to


H. Valve Boxes:

1. Cast-iron, two-section box. 2. Top section with cover with "GAS" lettering. 3. Bottom section with base to fit over valve and barrel a minimum of 5 inches in diameter. 4. Adjustable cast-iron extensions of length required for depth of bury. 5. Include tee-handle, steel operating wrench with socket end fitting valve nut or flat head

and with stem of length required to operate valve.

2.5 EARTHQUAKE VALVES

A. Earthquake Valves: Comply with ASCE 25.


a. Pacific Seismic Products, Inc.

2. Listing: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Maximum Operating Pressure: 0.5 psig .

5.


1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work, include but are not limited to the following:

a. Actaris. b. American Meter Company. c. Eclipse Combustion, Inc. d. Fisher Control Valves and Regulators; Division of Emerson Process Management. e. Invensys. f. Maxitrol Company. g. Richards Industries; Jordan Valve Div.

2. Body and Diaphragm Case: Cast iron or die-cast aluminum. 3. Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable. 4. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel. 5. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber resistant to gas impurities, abrasion, and deformation at the

valve port. 6. Orifice: Aluminum; interchangeable. 7. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon. 8. Single-port, self-contained regulator with orifice no larger than required at maximum

pressure inlet and no pressure sensing piping external to the regulator. 9. Pressure regulator shall maintain discharge pressure setting downstream and not exceed

150 percent of design discharge pressure at shutoff. 10. Overpressure Protection Device: Factory mounted on pressure regulator. 11. Atmospheric Vent: Factory- or field-installed, stainless-steel screen in opening if not

connected to vent piping. 12. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 2 psig .

2.7 SERVICE METERS

A. Diaphragm-Type Service Meters: Comply with ANSI B109.1 and ANSI B109.2.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work, include but are not limited to the following:

a. Actaris. b. American Meter Company. c. Invensys.

2. Case: Die-cast aluminum. 3. Connections: Steel threads. 4. Diaphragm: Synthetic fabric. 5. Diaphragm Support Bearings: Self-lubricating. 6. Compensation: Continuous temperature and pressure. 7. Meter Index: Cubic Feet. 8. Meter Case and Index: Tamper resistant. 9. Remote meter reader compatible. 10. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 100 psig.



11. Pressure Loss: Maximum 0.5-inch wg . 12. Accuracy: Maximum plus or minus 1.0 percent.

B. Service-Meter Bars:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to the following:

a. Actaris. b. American Meter Company. c. Lyall, R. W. & Company, Inc. d. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. e. Mueller Co.; Gas Products Div. f. Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company.

2. Malleable- or cast-iron frame for supporting service meter. 3. Include offset swivel pipes, meter nuts with o-ring seal, and factory- or field-installed

dielectric unions. 4. Omit meter offset swivel pipes if service-meter bar dimensions match service-meter

connections.

C. Service-Meter Bypass Fittings:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to the following:

a. Lyall, R. W. & Company, Inc. b. Williamson, T. D., Inc.

2. Ferrous, tee, pipe fitting with capped side inlet for temporary LPG supply. 3. Integral ball-check bypass valve.


A. Dielectric Unions:


a. Capitol Manufacturing Company. b. Central Plastics Company. c. Hart Industries International, Inc. d. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. e. Watts Regulator Co.; Division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. f. Wilkins; Zurn Plumbing Products Group.



2. Minimum Operating-Pressure Rating: 150 psig. 3. Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials. 4. Insulating materials suitable for LPG. 5. Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, brazed-joint,

plain, or welded end connections that match piping system materials.

B. Dielectric Flanges:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following::

a. Capitol Manufacturing Company. b. Central Plastics Company. c. Watts Regulator Co.; Division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. d. Wilkins; Zurn Plumbing Products Group.

2. Minimum Operating-Pressure Rating: 150 psig. 3. Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials. 4. Insulating materials suitable for LPG. 5. Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, brazed-joint,


C. Dielectric-Flange Kits:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following::

a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico Inc. c. Central Plastics Company. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Minimum Operating-Pressure Rating: 150 psig. 3. Companion-flange assembly for field assembly. 4. Include flanges, full-face- or ring-type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or PE bolt

sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers. 5. Insulating materials suitable for LPG. 6. Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, brazed-joint,



A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant PE film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches deep; colored yellow.


VETERINARY CLINIC CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for LPG piping system to verify actual locations of piping connections before equipment installation.


3.2 EARTHWORK

A. Comply with requirements in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.

3.3 PREPARATION

A. Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off LPG to premises or piping section.

B. Inspect LPG piping according to NFPA 58 and the International Fuel Gas Code to determine that LPG utilization devices are turned off in piping section affected.

C. Comply with NFPA 58 and the International Fuel Gas Code requirements for prevention of accidental ignition.

3.4 OUTDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NFPA 58 and the International Fuel Gas Code requirements for installation and purging of LPG piping.

B. Install underground, LPG piping buried at least 36 inches below finished grade. Comply with requirements in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.

1. If LPG piping is installed less than 36 inches below finished grade, install it in containment conduit.

C. Install underground, LPG piping according to ASTM D 2774.

D. Steel Piping with Protective Coating:

1. Apply joint cover kits to pipe after joining to cover, seal, and protect joints. 2. Repair damage to PE coating on pipe as recommended in writing by protective coating

manufacturer. 3. Replace pipe having damaged PE coating with new pipe.

E. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.



F. Joints for connection to inlets and outlets on vaporizers, air mixers, regulators, and valves may be flanged or threaded to match the equipment.

G. Install pressure gage upstream and downstream from each service regulator. Pressure gages are specified in Division 23 Section "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping."

3.5 INDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NFPA 58 and the International Fuel Gas Code for installation and purging of LPG piping.

B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

C. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, sleeves, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations.

D. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

E. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

F. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

G. Locate valves for easy access.

H. Install LPG piping at uniform grade of 2 percent down toward drip and sediment traps.

I. Install piping free of sags and bends.

J. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

K. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

L. Comply with requirements in Sections specifying gas-fired appliances and equipment for roughing-in requirements.

M. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect, including service-meter outlets. Locate where readily accessible to permit cleaning and emptying. Do not install where condensate is subject to freezing.

1. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped. Use nipple a minimum length of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches long and same size as connected pipe. Install with space below bottom of drip to remove plug or cap.



Y. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Division 22 Section "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."

3.6 SERVICE-METER ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION

A. Install service-meter assemblies aboveground, on concrete bases.

B. Install metal shutoff valves upstream from service regulators. Shutoff valves are not required at second regulators if two regulators are installed in series.

C. Install strainer on inlet of service-pressure regulator and meter set.

D. Install service regulators mounted outside with vent outlet horizontal or facing down. Install screen in vent outlet if not integral with service regulator.

E. Install metal shutoff valves upstream from service meters. Install dielectric fittings downstream from service meters.

F. Install service meters downstream from pressure regulators.

G. Install metal bollards to protect meter assemblies. Comply with requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for pipe bollards.


A. Install manual gas shutoff valve for each gas appliance ahead of corrugated stainless-steel tubing, aluminum, or copper connector.

B. Install underground valves with valve boxes.

C. Install regulators and overpressure protection devices with maintenance access space adequate for servicing and testing.

D. Install earthquake valves aboveground outside buildings according to listing.

3.8 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

C. Threaded Joints:

1. Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads complying with ASME B1.20.1. 2. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. 3. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID of pipe.



4. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dryseal threading is specified.


D. Welded Joints:

1. Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processes and welding operators.

2. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. 3. Patch factory-applied protective coating as recommended by manufacturer at field welds

and where damage to coating occurs during construction.

E. Flanged Joints: Install gasket material, size, type, and thickness appropriate for LPG service. Install gasket concentrically positioned.


A. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

B. Comply with requirements for pipe hangers and supports specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

C. Install adjustable roller hangers MSS Type 44 and spring hangers for individual piping inside mechanical room.

D. Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:

1. NPS 1 and Smaller: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 2. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 4. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. 5. NPS 4 and Larger: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 5/8 inch.

3.10 CONNECTIONS

A. Connect to utility's gas main according to utility's procedures and requirements.

B. Install LPG piping electrically continuous, and bonded to gas appliance equipment grounding conductor of the circuit powering the appliance according to NFPA 70.

C. Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance of appliances.



D. Connect piping to appliances using manual gas shutoff valves and unions. Install valve within 72 inches of each gas-fired appliances and equipment. Install union between valve and appliances or equipment.

E. Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting with capped nipple in bottom to form drip, as close as practical to inlet of each appliance.


A. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for piping and valve identification.

B. Install detectable warning tape directly above gas piping, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches below subgrade under pavements and slabs.

3.12 PAINTING

A. Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for painting interior and exterior LPG piping.

B. Paint exposed, exterior metal piping, valves, service regulators, service meters and meter bars, earthquake valves, and piping specialties, except components with factory-applied paint or protective coating.

1. Alkyd System: MPI EXT 5.1D.

a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Exterior alkyd enamel flat . d. Color: Gray.

C. Paint exposed, interior metal piping, valves, service regulators, service meters and meter bars, earthquake valves, and piping specialties, except components with factory-applied paint or protective coating.

1. Alkyd System: MPI INT 5.1E.

a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior alkyd matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior alkyd (flat) . d. Color: Gray.

D. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-applied finishes with materials and by procedures to match original factory finish.


VETERINARY CLINIC CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 3.13 CONCRETE BASES

A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to seismic codes at Project.

1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit.

2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of the base.

3. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.

4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 6. Use , 28-day, compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as specified in

Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."




1. Test, inspect, and purge LPG according to NFPA 58 and the International Fuel Gas Code and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

C. LPG piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


3.15 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain LPG equipment.

3.16 OUTDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Underground LPG liquid pipingshall be the following:

1. Schedule 40 steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints, or. Coat pipe and fittings with protective coating for steel piping.

B. Aboveground LPG liquid pipingshall be the following:

1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Schedule 40 steel pipe, malleable-iron threaded fittings and threaded joints. Coat pipe and fittings with protective coating for steel piping.



2. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Schedule 40, steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints, or mechanical couplings. Coat pipe and fittings with protective coating for steel piping.

3.17 INDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE FOR SYSTEM PRESSURES LESS THAN 0.5 PSIG

A. Aboveground, branch piping NPS 2 and smaller shall be the following:

1. Schedule 40, steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints.

B. Aboveground, distribution piping shall be the following:

1. Schedule 40, steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints. 2. Schedule 40, steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints.

3.18 UNDERGROUND MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Connections to Existing Gas Piping: Use valve and fitting assemblies made for tapping utility's gas mains and listed by an NRTL.

B. Underground Vapor Piping: 1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze, nonlubricated plug valves. 2. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Cast-iron, nonlubricated plug valves.

3.19 ABOVEGROUND MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Aboveground Liquid Piping:

1. Two-piece, full -port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim.

B. Valves for pipe NPS 2 and smaller at service meter shall be one of the following: 1. Two-piece, full -port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. 2. Bronze plug valve.

C. Valves for pipe NPS 2-1/2 and larger at service meter shall be the following:

1. Two-piece, full -port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. 2. Bronze plug valve. 3. Cast-iron, nonlubricated plug valve.

D. Distribution piping valves for pipe NPS 2 and smaller shall be one of the following: 1. Two-piece, full -port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. 2. Bronze plug valve.

E. Distribution piping valves for pipe NPS 2-1/2 and larger shall be one of the following:

1. Two-piece, full -port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. 2. Bronze plug valve.



3. Cast-iron, nonlubricated plug valve.

F. Valves in branch piping for single appliance shall be one of the following: 1. Two-piece, full -port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. 2. Bronze plug valve.




SECTION 232113 - HYDRONIC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes pipe and fitting materials, joining methods, special-duty valves, and specialties for the following:

1. Chilled-water piping. 2. Makeup-water piping. 3. Condensate-drain piping. 4. Blowdown-drain piping. 5. Air-vent piping. 6. Air-control devices. 7. Chilled-water buffer tank.


1. Division 23 Section "Scroll Water Chillers" for pumps, motors, and accessories for hydronic piping.


A. Hydronic piping components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure and temperature:

1. Chilled-Water Piping: 100 psig at 50 deg F. 2. Makeup-Water Piping: 80 psig at 150 deg F . 3. Condensate-Drain Piping: 150 deg F . 4. Air-Vent Piping: 200 deg F.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


1. Valves. Include flow and pressure drop curves based on manufacturer's testing for calibrated-orifice balancing valves and automatic flow-control valves.

2. Air control devices. 3. Chemical treatment.

HYDRONIC PIPING 232113 - 1


4. Steel and Cooper Pipes and fittings. 5. Air Control Devices. 6. Expansion tank and air separator. 7. Buffer tank. 8. Chemical treatmet. 9. Hydronic specialties.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail, at 1/4 scale, the piping layout, fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers, supports for multiple pipes, alignment guides, expansion joints and loops, and attachments of the same to the building structure. Detail location of anchors, alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops.


D. Qualification Data: For Installer.


F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air control devices, hydronic specialties, and special-duty valves to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

G. Water Analysis: Submit a copy of the water analysis to illustrate water quality available at Project site.


A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.



C. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label. Fabricate and stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 01.

1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Water-Treatment Chemicals: Furnish enough chemicals for initial system startup and for preventive maintenance for one year from date of Substantial Completion.




A. Drawn-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L.

B. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.

C. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.

2.2 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Carbon Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, black steel schedule 40 with beveled ends; type “E” electrical resistance welded, grade B and wall thickness as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article.

B. Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4; Classes 125 and 250 as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article.

C. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Classes 150 and 300 as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article.

D. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Classes 150, 250, and 300 as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article.

E. Cast-Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Classes 25, 125, and 250; raised ground face, and bolt holes spot faced as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article.

F. Wrought-Steel Fittings: ANSI B 16.9 ASTM A 234, grade WPB, long radius ells wall thickness to match adjoining pipe.

G. Weld-o-lets and thread-o-lets permitted if branch at least 2 pipe sizes smaller than main, wall thickness to match adjoining pipe.

H. Wrought Cast- and Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings:

1. Material Group: 1.1. 2. End Connections: Butt welding. 3. Facings: Raised face.


A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents.

1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated.



a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges. b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.

B. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.

D. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for joining copper with copper; or BAg-1, silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel.

E. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.


A. Description: Combination fitting of copper-alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder-joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.


C. Dielectric Unions:



a. Capitol Manufacturing Company. b. Central Plastics Company. c. Hart Industries International, Inc. d. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. e. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; AquaSpec Commercial Products Division.

3. Factory-fabricated union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure at 180 deg F.

D. Dielectric Couplings:


a. Calpico, Inc. b. Lochinvar Corporation.

2. Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 300-psigminimum working pressure at 225 deg F.



E. Dielectric Nipples:


a. Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company. b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. d. Victaulic Company of America.

2. Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psigminimum working pressure at 225 deg F.

2.5 VALVES

A. Gate, Globe, Check, and Ball, Valves: Comply with requirements specified in Division 23 Section "General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping."

B. Automatic Temperature-Control Valves, Actuators, and Sensors: Comply with requirements specified in Division 23 Section "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC."

C. Bronze, Calibrated-Orifice, Balancing Valves:


a. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. b. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries. c. Flow Design Inc. d. Gerand Engineering Co. e. Griswold Controls. f. Taco.

2. Body: Bronze, ball or plug type with calibrated orifice or venturi. 3. Ball: Brass or stainless steel. 4. Plug: Resin. 5. Seat: PTFE. 6. End Connections: Threaded or socket. 7. Pressure Gage Connections: Integral seals for portable differential pressure meter. 8. Handle Style: Lever, with memory stop to retain set position. 9. CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig. 10. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.

D. Cast-Iron or Steel, Calibrated-Orifice, Balancing Valves:




a. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. b. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries. c. Flow Design Inc. d. Gerand Engineering Co. e. Griswold Controls. f. Taco. g. Tour & Andersson; available through Victaulic Company of America.

2. Body: Cast-iron or steel body, ball, plug, or globe pattern with calibrated orifice or venturi.

3. Ball: Brass or stainless steel. 4. Stem Seals: EPDM O-rings. 5. Disc: Glass and carbon-filled PTFE. 6. Seat: PTFE. 7. End Connections: Flanged. 8. Pressure Gage Connections: Integral seals for portable differential pressure meter. 9. Handle Style: Lever, with memory stop to retain set position. 10. CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig. 11. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.

2.6 AIR CONTROL DEVICES


1. Amtrol, Inc. 2. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. 3. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries. 4. Taco.

B. Manual Air Vents:

1. Body: Bronze. 2. Internal Parts: Nonferrous. 3. Operator: Screwdriver or thumbscrew. 4. Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2. 5. Discharge Connection: NPS 1/8. 6. CWP Rating: 150 psig. 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 225 deg F.

C. Automatic Air Vents:

1. Body: Bronze or cast iron. 2. Internal Parts: Nonferrous. 3. Operator: Noncorrosive metal float.



4. Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2. 5. Discharge Connection: NPS 1/4. 6. CWP Rating: 150 psig. 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F.

D. Diaphragm-Type Expansion Tanks:

1. Tank: Welded steel, rated for 125-psig working pressure and 240 deg F maximum operating temperature. Factory test with taps fabricated and supports installed and labeled according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.

2. Diaphragm: Heavy duty butyl rubber securely sealed into tank to separate air charge from system water to maintain required expansion capacity.

3. Air-Charge Fittings: Schrader valve, stainless steel with EPDM seats.

E. Tangential-Type Air Separators:

1. Tank: Welded steel; ASME constructed and labeled for 125-psig minimum working pressure and 375 deg F maximum operating temperature.

2. Air Collector Tube: Perforated stainless steel, constructed to direct released air into expansion tank.

3. Tangential Inlet and Outlet Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged connections for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

4. Blowdown Connection: Threaded. 5. Size: Match system flow capacity.

F. Air Purgers:

1. Body: Cast iron with internal baffles that slow the water velocity to separate the air from solution and divert it to the vent for quick removal.

2. Maximum Working Pressure: 150 psig. 3. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.

G. Chilled-Water Buffer Tank:

1. Tank: Welded steel; ASME constructed and labeled for 125-psig minimum working pressure and 400 deg F maximum operating temperature.

2. Internal Baffle: Divider plate to ensure there is not stratification and that water entering tank is adequately mixed with liquid in the tank.

3. Tangential Inlet and Outlet Connections: Flanged connections for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 4. Blowdown Connection: Threaded. 5. Airvent and legs for vertical installation. 6. Insulation: Factory applied 1 ½ ” thick flexible elastromeric thermal insulation black in

color or 3 1/8” thick low density flame-retardant polyurethane foam with PVC leather-vinyl cover.

7. Outdoor Field Applied Jacket: Aluminum smooth, with Z-shapped locking seams: 0.016 inch thick.


VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 2.7 CHEMICAL TREATMENT

A. Bypass Chemical Feeder: Welded steel construction; 125-psig working pressure; 5-gal. capacity; with fill funnel and inlet, outlet, and drain valves.

1. Chemicals: Specially formulated, based on analysis of makeup water, to prevent accumulation of scale and corrosion in piping and connected equipment.

2.8 HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES


1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection. 2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2 and

larger. 3. Strainer Screen: 40mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket with 50

percent free area. 4. CWP Rating: 125 psig.

B. Stainless-Steel Bellow, Flexible Connectors:

1. Body: Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire-reinforcing protective jacket.

2. End Connections: Threaded or flanged to match equipment connected. 3. Performance: Capable of 3/4-inch misalignment. 4. CWP Rating: 150 psig. 5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Chilled-water piping, aboveground, NPS 2and smaller shall be the following:

1. Schedule 40 steel pipe; Class 125, cast-ironfittings; and threaded joints.

B. Chilled-water piping, above ground, NPS 2-1/2 and larger shall be the following:

1. Schedule 40 steel pipe, wrought-steel fittings and wrought-cast or forged-steel flanges and flange fittings, and welded and flanged joints.

C. Makeup-water piping and condensate drain piping installed aboveground shall be the following:

D. Type L, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered joints.Condensate-Drain Piping: Type L, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered joints.



H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

I. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

J. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

K. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of valves.

L. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 ball valve, and short NPS 3/4 threaded nipple with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system drainage.

M. Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow.

N. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up.

O. Install branch connections to mains using [mechanically formed] tee fittings in main pipe, with the branch connected to the bottom of the main pipe. For up-feed risers, connect the branch to the top of the main pipe.

P. Install valves according to Division 23 Section "General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping."

Q. Install unions in piping, NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to valves, at final connections of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.

R. Install flanges in piping, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, at final connections of equipment and elsewhere as indicated.

S. Install strainers on inlet side of each control valve, pressure-reducing valve, solenoid valve, in-line pump, and elsewhere as indicated. Install NPS 3/4 nipple and ball valve in blowdown connection of strainers NPS 2 and larger. Match size of strainer blowoff connection for strainers smaller than NPS 2.

T. Identify piping as specified in Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

U. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.

V. Retain first paragraph below for piping that penetrates an exterior concrete wall or concrete slab.

W. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs.

X. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors


VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 3.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hanger, support, and anchor devices are specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment." Comply with the following requirements for maximum spacing of supports.

B. Install the following pipe attachments:

1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 20 feet long. 2. Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual piping inside of mechanical

rooms and individual horizontal piping 20 feet or longer. 3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet or longer,

supported on a trapeze. 4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs. 5. Provide copper-clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact with

copper pipe.

C. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:

1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 2. NPS 1: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 3. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 4. NPS 2: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 5. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 11 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 6. NPS 3: Maximum span, 12 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 7. NPS 4: Maximum span, 14 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch.

D. Install hangers for drawn-temper copper piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:

1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 5 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 2. NPS 1: Maximum span, 6 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.

E. Support vertical runs at roof, at each floor, and at 10-foot intervals between floors.

3.5 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION











G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.

H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

3.6 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION

A. Install manual air vents at high points in piping, at heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere as required for system air venting.

B. Install automatic air vents at high points of system piping in mechanical equipment rooms only. Manual vents at heat-transfer coils and elsewhere as required for air venting.

C. Install piping from boiler air outlet, air separator, or air purger to expansion tank with a 2 percent upward slope toward tank.

D. Install in-line air separators in pump suction. Install drain valve on air separators NPS 2 and larger.

E. Install tangential air separator in pump suction. Install blowdown piping with gate or full-port ball valve; extend full size to nearest floor drain.

F. Install bypass chemical feeders in each hydronic system where indicated, in upright position with top of funnel not more than 48 inches above the floor. Install feeder in minimum NPS 3/4 bypass line, from main with full-size, full-port, ball valve in the main between bypass connections. Install NPS 3/4 pipe from chemical feeder drain, to nearest equipment drain and include a full-size, full-port, ball valve.

G. Install compression tanks on the flooror supported from slab above as indicated on the drawings. Vent and purge air from hydronic system, and ensure tank is properly charged with air to suit system Project requirements.


VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 3.7 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

A. Sizes for supply and return piping connections shall be the same as or larger than equipment connections.

B. Install control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment.

C. Install bypass piping with globe valve around control valve. If parallel control valves are installed, only one bypass is required.

3.8 CHEMICAL TREATMENT

A. Perform an analysis of makeup water to determine type and quantities of chemical treatment needed to keep system free of scale, corrosion, and fouling, and to sustain the following water characteristics:

1. pH: 9.0 to 10.5. 2. "P" Alkalinity: 100 to 500 ppm. 3. Boron: 100 to 200 ppm . 4. Chemical Oxygen Demand: Maximum 100 ppm . 5. Corrosion Inhibitor:

a. Sodium Nitrate: 1000 to 1500 ppm. b. Molybdate: 200 to 300 ppm . c. Chromate: 200 to 300 ppm . d. Sodium Nitrate Plus Molybdate: 100 to 200 ppm each. e. Chromate Plus Molybdate: 50 to 100 ppmeach.

6. Soluble Copper: Maximum 0.20 ppm . 7. Tolyiriazole Copper and Yellow Metal Corrosion Inhibitor: Minimum 10 ppm. 8. Total Suspended Solids: Maximum 10 ppm . 9. Ammonia: Maximum 20 ppm. 10. Free Caustic Alkalinity: Maximum 20 ppm . 11. Microbiological Limits:

a. Total Aerobic Plate Count: Maximum 1000organisms/ml. b. Total Anaerobic Plate Count: Maximum 100organisms/ml. c. Nitrate Reducers: 100 organisms/ml. d. Sulfate Reducers: Maximum 0organisms/ml. e. Iron Bacteria: Maximum 0 organisms/ml.

B. Fill system with fresh water and add liquid alkaline compound with emulsifying agents and detergents to remove grease and petroleum products from piping. Circulate solution for a minimum of 24 hours, drain, clean strainer screens, and refill with fresh water.

C. Add initial chemical treatment and maintain water quality in ranges noted above for the first year of operation.



A. Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows:

1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test. 2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test

pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing. 3. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water; then remove and clean or replace

strainer screens. 4. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be

capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged joints to isolate equipment.

5. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure, to protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test.

B. Perform the following tests on hydronic piping:

1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage due to freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping may be used.

2. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release air. Use drains installed at low points for complete draining of test liquid.

3. Isolate expansion tanks and determine that hydronic system is full of water. 4. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the

system's working pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength or 1.7 times "SE" value in Appendix A in ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping."

5. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.

6. Prepare written report of testing.

C. Perform the following before operating the system:

1. Open manual valves fully. 2. Inspect pumps for proper rotation. 3. Set makeup pressure-reducing valves for required system pressure. 4. Inspect air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed and operating

freely (automatic type), or bleed air completely (manual type). 5. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow. 6. Inspect and set operating temperatures of hydronic equipment, such as boilers, chillers,

cooling towers, to specified values. 7. Verify lubrication of motors and bearings.




SECTION 232500 – HVAC AND STEAM BOILERS WATER TREATMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following water-treatment systems:

1. Bypass chemical-feed equipment and controls. 2. Chemical treatment test equipment. 3. HVAC water-treatment chemicals. 4. Automatic chemical feed equipment.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EEPROM: Electrically erasable, programmable read-only memory.

B. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or for remote-control, signaling power-limited circuits.

C. RO: Reverse osmosis.

D. TDS: Total dissolved solids.

E. UV: Ultraviolet.


A. Water quality for HVAC and steam boilers systems shall minimize corrosion, scale buildup, and biological growth for optimum efficiency of HVAC equipment without creating a hazard to operating personnel or the environment.

B. Base HVAC and steam boilers water treatment on quality of water available at Project site, HVAC and steam boilers system equipment material characteristics and functional performance characteristics, operating personnel capabilities, and requirements and guidelines of authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Closed hydronic systems, including chilled water , shall have the following water qualities:

1. pH: Maintain a value within 9.0 to 10.5.

HVAC AND STEAM BOILERS WATER TREATMENT 232500 - 1


2. "P" Alkalinity: Maintain a value within 100 to 500 ppm. 3. Boron: Maintain a value within 100 to 200 ppm. 4. Chemical Oxygen Demand: Maintain a maximum value of 100 ppm. 5. Soluble Copper: Maintain a maximum value of 0.20 ppm. 6. TDS: Maintain a maximum value of 10 ppm. 7. Ammonia: Maintain a maximum value of 20 ppm. 8. Free Caustic Alkalinity: Maintain a maximum value of 20 ppm. 9. Microbiological Limits:

a. Total Aerobic Plate Count: Maintain a maximum value of 1000 organisms/ml. b. Total Anaerobic Plate Count: Maintain a maximum value of 100 organisms/ml. c. Nitrate Reducers: Maintain a maximum value of 100 organisms/ml. d. Sulfate Reducers: Maintain a maximum value of 0 organisms/ml. e. Iron Bacteria: Maintain a maximum value of 0 organisms/ml.

D. Steam boiler and steam condensate.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories for the following products:

1. Bypass feeders. 2. pH controllers. 3. TDS controllers. 4. Chemical test equipment. 5. Chemical Solutions tanks 6. Injection pumps.. 7. Chemical material safety data sheets.

B. Shop Drawings: Pretreatment and chemical treatment equipment showing tanks, by-pass feeder chemical tanks maintenance space required, and piping connections to HVAC systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Power and control wiring.

C. Field quality-control test reports.

D. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that by-pass feeder chemical tanks and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment." Include the following:







E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For sensors, by-pass feeder, chemical tank, metering equipment, and controllers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

F. Other Informational Submittals:

1. Water-Treatment Program: Written sequence of operation on an annual basis for the application equipment required to achieve water quality defined in the "Performance Requirements" Article above.

2. Water Analysis: Illustrate water quality available at Project site. 3. Passivation Confirmation Report: Verify passivation of galvanized-steel surfaces, and

confirm this observation in a letter to Architect.


A. HVAC and Steam Boiler Water-Treatment Service Provider Qualifications: An experienced HVAC water-treatment service provider capable of analyzing water qualities, installing water-treatment equipment, and applying water treatment as specified in this Section.


1.7 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Scope of Maintenance Service: Provide chemicals and service program to maintain water conditions required above to inhibit corrosion, scale formation, and biological growth for cooling, chilled-water piping, steam and condensate piping and equipment. Services and chemicals shall be provided for a period of one year from date of Substantial Completion, and shall include the following:

1. Initial water analysis and HVAC and steam boiler water-treatment recommendations. 2. Startup assistance for Contractor to flush the systems, clean with detergents, and initially

fill systems with required chemical treatment prior to operation. 3. Periodic field service and consultation. 4. Customer report charts and log sheets. 5. Laboratory technical analysis. 6. Analyses and reports of all chemical items concerning safety and compliance with

government regulations.


VETERINARY CLINIC CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following, with representative in Puerto Rico: 1. ARC Water Treatment Co. Maryaland.Anderson Chemical Co, Inc. 2. Aqua-Chem, Inc.; Cleaver-Brooks Div. 3. Barclay Chemical Co.; Water Management, Inc. 4. GE Betz. 5. GE Osmonics. 6. H-O-H Chemicals, Inc. 7. Metro Group. Inc. (The); Metropolitan Refining Div. 8. ONDEO Nalco Company.

2.2 MANUAL CHEMICAL-FEED EQUIPMENT

A. Bypass Feeders: Steel, with corrosion-resistant exterior coating, minimum 3-1/2-inch fill opening in the top, and NPS 3/4 bottom inlet and top side outlet. Quarter turn or threaded fill cap with gasket seal and diaphragm to lock the top on the feeder when exposed to system pressure in the vessel.

1. Capacity: 5 gal.. 2. Minimum Working Pressure: 125 psig .

2.3 AUTOMATIC CHEMICAL-FEED EQUIPMENT

A. Chemical Solution Tanks:

1. Chemical-resistant reservoirs fabricated from high-density opaque polyethylene with minimum 110 percent containment vessel.

2. Molded cover with recess for mounting pump. 3. Capacity: 50 gal..

B. Chemical Solution Injection Pumps:

1. Self-priming, positive-displacement; rated for intended chemical with minimum 25 percent safety factor for design pressure and temperature.

2. Adjustable flow rate. 3. Metal and thermoplastic construction. 4. Built-in relief valve. 5. Fully enclosed, continuous-duty, single-phase motor. Comply with requirements in

Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

C. Chemical Solution Tubing: Polyethylene tubing with compression fittings and joints except ASTM A 269, Type 304, stainless steel for steam boiler injection assemblies.



D. Injection Assembly:

1. Quill: Minimum NPS 1/2 with insertion length sufficient to discharge into at least 25 percent of pipe diameter.

2. Ball Valve: Two-piece, stainless steel as described in "Stainless-Steel Pipes and Fittings" Article below; and selected to fit quill.

3. Packing Gland: Mechanical seal on quill of sufficient length to allow quill removal during system operation.

4. Assembly Pressure/Temperature Rating: Minimum 600 psig at 200 deg F.

2.4 STAINLESS-STEEL PIPES AND FITTINGS

A. Stainless-Steel Tubing: Comply with ASTM A 269, Type 316.

B. Stainless-Steel Fittings: Complying with ASTM A 815/A 815M, Type 316, Grade WP-S.

C. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Stainless-Steel Ball Valves: ASTM A 351, Type 316 stainless-steel body; ASTM A 276, Type 316 stainless-steel stem and vented ball, carbon-filled TFE seats, threaded body design with adjustable stem packing, threaded ends, and 250-psig SWP and 600-psig CWP ratings.

2.5 CHEMICAL TREATMENT TEST EQUIPMENT

A. Test Kit: Manufacturer-recommended equipment and chemicals in a wall-mounting cabinet for testing pH, TDS, inhibitor, chloride, alkalinity, and hardness; sulfite and testable polymer tests for high-pressure boilers, and oxidizing biocide test for open cooling systems.

B. Sample Cooler:

1. Tube: Sample.

a. Size: NPS 1/4 tubing. b. Material: ASTM A 666, Type 316 stainless steel. c. Pressure Rating: Minimum 2000 psig. d. Temperature Rating: Minimum 850 deg F.

2. Shell: Cooling water.

a. Material: ASTM A 666, Type 304 stainless steel. b. Pressure Rating: Minimum 250 psig. c. Temperature Rating: Minimum 450 deg F.

3. Capacities and Characteristics:

a. Tube: Sample.

1) Flow Rate: 0.25 gpm. 2) Entering Temperature: 400 deg F.



3) Leaving Temperature: 88 deg F. 4) Pressure Loss: 6.5 psig.

b. Shell: Cooling water.

1) Flow Rate: 3 gpm. 2) Entering Temperature: 70 deg F. 3) Pressure Loss: 1.0 psig.

C. Corrosion Test-Coupon Assembly: Constructed of corrosive-resistant material, complete with piping, valves, and mild steel and copper coupons. Locate copper coupon downstream from mild steel coupon in the test-coupon assembly.

1. Two -station rack for closed-loop systems.

2.6 CHEMICALS

A. Chemicals shall be as recommended by water-treatment system manufacturer that are compatible with piping system components and connected equipment, and that can attain water quality specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WATER ANALYSIS

A. Perform an analysis of supply water to determine quality of water available at Project site and make recommendations to the Owner.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install chemical application equipment on concrete bases, level and plumb. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. Arrange units so controls and devices that require servicing are accessible. Anchor chemical tanks and floor-mounting accessories to substrate.

B. Install seismic restraints for equipment and floor-mounting accessories and anchor to building structure. Refer to Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for seismic restraints.

C. Install water testing equipment on wall near water chemical application equipment.

D. Install interconnecting control wiring for chemical treatment controls and sensors.

E. Bypass Feeders: Install in closed hydronic systems, including chilled water, and equipped with the following:

1. Install bypass feeder in a bypass circuit around circulating pumps, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.



2. Install water meter in makeup water supply. 3. Install test-coupon assembly in bypass circuit around circulating pumps, unless otherwise

indicated on Drawings. 4. Install a gate or full-port ball isolation valves on inlet, outlet, and drain below feeder

inlet. 5. Install a swing check on inlet after the isolation valve.

F. Install automatic chemical-feed equipment for steam boiler and steam condensate systems and include the following:

1. Install makeup water softener. 2. Install water meter in makeup water supply. 3. Install injection pumps and solution tanks with injection timer sensing contacts in water

meter.

a. Pumps shall operate for timed interval when contacts close at water meter in makeup water supply connection. Injection pump shall discharge into boiler feedwater tank or feedwater supply connection at boiler.

4. Install test equipment and furnish test-kit to Owner.

3.3 CONNECTIONS



C. Make piping connections between HVAC and steam boiler water-treatment equipment and dissimilar-metal piping with dielectric fittings. Dielectric fittings are specified in Division 23 Section "Common Work Results for HVAC."

D. Install shutoff valves on HVAC and steam boiler water-treatment equipment inlet and outlet. Metal general-duty valves are specified in Division 23 Section "General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping."

E. Refer to Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for backflow preventers required in makeup water connections to potable-water systems.

F. Confirm applicable electrical requirements in Division 26 Sections for connecting electrical equipment.

G. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

H. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."



A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. Report results in writing.

B. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.



1. Inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including piping and electrical connections.

2. Inspect piping and equipment to determine that systems and equipment have been cleaned, flushed, and filled with water, and are fully operational before introducing chemicals for water-treatment system.

3. Place HVAC water-treatment system into operation and calibrate controls during the preliminary phase of HVAC systems' startup procedures.

4. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is tested and satisfactory test results are achieved.

5. Test for leaks and defects. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

6. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, water piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that has been covered or concealed before it has been tested and approved.

7. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow test pressure to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects.

8. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping until no leaks exist.


E. Sample boiler water at one-week intervals after boiler startup for a period of five weeks, and prepare test report advising Owner of changes necessary to adhere to Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article for each required characteristic. Sample boiler water at eight -week intervals following the testing noted above to show that automatic chemical-feed systems are maintaining water quality within performance requirements specified in this Section.

F. At six -week intervals following Substantial Completion, perform separate water analyses on hydronic systems to show that automatic chemical-feed systems are maintaining water quality within performance requirements specified in this Section. Submit written reports of water analysis advising Owner of changes necessary to adhere to Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article.

G. Comply with ASTM D 3370 and with the following standards:



1. Silica: ASTM D 859. 2. Steam System: ASTM D 1066. 3. Acidity and Alkalinity: ASTM D 1067. 4. Iron: ASTM D 1068. 5. Water Hardness: ASTM D 1126.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain HVAC water-treatment systems and equipment. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."

B. Training: Provide a "how-to-use" self-contained breathing apparatus video that details exact operating procedures of equipment.




SECTION 233113 - METAL DUCTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Single-wall rectangular ducts and fittings. 2. Sheet metal materials. 3. Sealants and gaskets. 4. Hangers and supports.


1. Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing requirements for metal ducts.

2. Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, duct-mounting access doors and panels, and turning vanes.


A. Delegated Duct Design: Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam and joint construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and performance requirements and design criteria indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article.

B. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004.

C. Seismic Restrain Devices: Shall comply with SMACNA’s “Seismic Restrain Manual Guide Lines for Mechanical Systems”.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of the following products:

1. Liners and adhesives. 2. Sealants and gaskets. 3. Samples of sheet metal materials.

METAL DUCTS 233113 - 1


B. LEED Submittals:

1. Product Data for Prerequisite EQ 1: Documentation indicating that duct systems comply with ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment."

2. Product Data for Prerequisite EA 2: Documentation indicating that duct systems comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004, Section 6.4.4 - "HVAC System Construction and Insulation."

3. Leakage Test Report for Prerequisite EA 2: Documentation of work performed for compliance with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004, Section 6.4.4.2.2 - "Duct Leakage Tests."

4. Duct-Cleaning Test Report for Prerequisite EQ 1: Documentation of work performed for compliance with ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 7.2.4 - "Ventilation System Start-Up."


C. Shop Drawings:

1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components, and attachments to other work.

2. Factory- and shop-fabricated ducts and fittings. 3. Duct layout indicating sizes, configuration, liner material, and static-pressure classes. 4. Elevation of top of ducts. 5. Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines. 6. Fittings. 7. Reinforcement and spacing. 8. Seam and joint construction. 9. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions, roof and exteriors walls. 10. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project. 11. Locations for duct accessories, including dampers, turning vanes, and access doors and

panels. 12. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment.

D. Coordination Drawings: Plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Duct installation in congested spaces, indicating coordination with general construction, building components, and other building services. Indicate proposed changes to duct layout.

2. Suspended ceiling components. 3. Structural members to which duct will be attached. 4. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 5. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following:

a. Lighting fixtures. b. Air outlets and inlets. c. Speakers. d. Access panels. e. Fire alarm devices.



A. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-Up."

B. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004, Section 6.4.4 - "HVAC System Construction and Insulation."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SINGLE-WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.

B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-4, "Transverse (Girth) Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-5, "Longitudinal Seams - Rectangular Ducts," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

D. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 2, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

2.2 SINGLE-WALL ROUND DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.


a. Lindab Inc. b. McGill AirFlow LLC. c. SEMCO Incorporated. d. Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc.



e. Spiral Manufacturing Co., Inc.

B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Transverse Joints - Round Duct," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Seams - Round Duct and Fittings," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

D. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-5, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

2.3 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90. 2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized.

C. Stainless-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480, Type 316, cold rolled, annealed, sheet. Exposed surface finish shall be , No. 2D.

D. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; galvanized.

E. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inchesor less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.

2.4 PRESSURE CLASSIFICATION

A. See schedule on drawing M-8.


VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 2.5 SEALANT AND GASKETS

A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.

B. Two-Part Tape Sealing System:

1. Tape: Woven cotton fiber impregnated with mineral gypsum and modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable, airtight seal.

2. Tape Width: 3 inches. 3. Sealant: Modified styrene acrylic. 4. Water resistant. 5. Mold and mildew resistant. 6. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative. 7. Service: Indoor and outdoor. 8. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F. 9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless

steel, or aluminum. 10. For indoor applications, use sealant that has a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when


C. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:

1. Application Method: Brush on. 2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent. 3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20. 4. Water resistant. 5. Mold and mildew resistant. 6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water). 7. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative. 8. Service: Indoor or outdoor. 9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless

steel, or aluminum sheets.

D. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920.

1. General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric. 2. Type: S. 3. Grade: NS. 4. Class: 25. 5. Use: O. 6. For indoor applications, use sealant that has a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when


E. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.

F. Round Duct Joint O-Ring Seals:



1. Seal shall provide maximum leakage class of 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg and shall be rated for 10-inch wg static-pressure class, positive or negative.

2. EPDM O-ring to seal in concave bead in coupling or fitting spigot. 3. Double-lipped, EPDM O-ring seal, mechanically fastened to factory-fabricated couplings

and fitting spigots.

2.6 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation.

B. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 4-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 4-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct."

C. Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603.

D. Steel Cables for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless steel complying with ASTM A 492.

E. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials.

F. Trapeze and Riser Supports:

1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates. 2. Supports for Stainless Steel Ducts: Stainless steel shapes and plates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations. Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings.

B. Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install round ducts in maximum practical lengths.

D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.

E. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for branch connections.



F. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and perpendicular to building lines.

G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building.

H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.

I. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and enclosures.

J. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches.

K. Where ducts pass through fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls, install fire dampers. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers.

L. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials. Comply with SMACNA's "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines."

M. Install stainless steel ductwork for wet exhaust application.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK

A. Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged.

B. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not use two-part tape sealing system.

C. Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter. When welding stainless steel with a No. 3 or 4 finish, grind the welds flush, polish the exposed welds, and treat the welds to remove discoloration caused by welding.

D. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in the arrangement and fabrication of fittings, hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets.

E. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these requirements.

3.3 DUCT SEALING

A. Seal ducts as indicated on duct seal class schedule show on drawing M-8.


VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 3.4 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 4, "Hangers and Supports."

B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.

1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete. 2. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured. 3. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for

slabs more than 4 inchesthick. 4. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for

slabs less than 4 inchesthick.

C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 4-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 4-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection.

D. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.

E. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds, bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 16 feet.

F. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

3.5 CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories."

B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.


A. Duct System Cleanliness Tests:

1. Visually inspect duct system to ensure that no visible contaminants are present. 2. Test sections of metal duct system, chosen randomly by Owner, for cleanliness according

to "Vacuum Test" in NADCA ACR, "Assessment, Cleaning and Restoration of HVAC Systems."

a. Acceptable Cleanliness Level: Net weight of debris collected on the filter media shall not exceed 0.75 mg/100 sq. cm.



B. Duct system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


D. Protect ducts from rain, dust and debris: Cap-off open end to protect before duct installation.

3.7 DUCT CLEANING

A. Clean duct system(s) before testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Use service openings for entry and inspection.

1. Create new openings and install access panels appropriate for duct static-pressure class if required for cleaning access. Comply with Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for access panels and doors.

2. Remove and reinstall ceiling to gain access during the cleaning process.

C. Particulate Collection and Odor Control:

1. When venting vacuuming system inside the building, use HEPA filtration with 99.97 percent collection efficiency for 0.3-micron-size (or larger) particles.

2. When venting vacuuming system to outdoors, use filter to collect debris removed from HVAC system, and locate exhaust downwind and away from air intakes and other points of entry into building.

D. Clean the following components by removing surface contaminants and deposits:

1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers). 2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums, scrolls, blades or

vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive assemblies. 3. Air handling unit internal surfaces and components including, coil section, condensate

drain pans, and filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains. 4. Coils and related components. 5. Exhaust air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes. 6. Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes. 7. Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components.

E. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology:

1. Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contaminants from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building.

2. Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Connect vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned are under negative pressure.

3. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without damaging integrity of metal ducts, or duct accessories.

4. Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA 1992. Keep drain pan operational. Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning materials; comb and straighten fins.



5. Provide drainage and cleanup for wash-down procedures. 6. Antimicrobial Agents and Coatings: Apply EPA-registered antimicrobial agents to

interior surface of all ducts. Apply antimicrobial agents according to manufacturer's written instructions after removal of surface deposits and debris.

3.8 START UP

A. Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC."




SECTION 233300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Manual volume dampers. 2. Fire dampers. 3. Sound attenuators. 4. Turning vanes. 5. Duct-mounted access doors. 6. Flexible connectors. 7. Duct accessory hardware.

B. Related Sections: 1. Division 28 Section "Fire Detection and Alarm" for duct-mounted smoke detectors.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


1. For sound attenuators, include pressure drop and dynamic insertion loss data. Include breakout noise calculations for high transmission loss casings.

B. Shop Drawings: For duct accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details and attachments to other work.

1. Detail duct accessories fabrication and installation in ducts and other construction. Include dimensions, weights, loads, and required clearances; and method of field assembly into duct systems and other construction. Include the following:

a. Special fittings. b. Manual volume damper installations. c. Control damper installations. d. Fire-damper, installations, including sleeves; and duct-mounted access doors. e. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Source quality-control reports.

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 1


D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air duct accessories to include in operation and maintenance manuals.


A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."

B. Comply with AMCA 500-D testing for damper rating.

1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS


1. Fusible Links: Furnish quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90. 2. Exposed-Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized.

C. Stainless-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480, Type 304, and having a No. 2D finish for concealed ducts and No. 3B finish for exposed ducts.

D. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.

E. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.

2.2 BACKDRAFT AND PRESSURE RELIEF DAMPERS




1. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc. 2. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc. 3. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc. 4. Duro Dyne Inc. 5. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 6. Nailor Industries Inc. 7. Ruskin Company.

B. Description: Gravity balanced.

C. Maximum Air Velocity: 3000 fpm.

D. Maximum System Pressure: 2-inch wg.

E. Frame: 0.052-inchthick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.052-inchthick stainless steel, with welded corners and mounting flange.

F. Blades: Multiple single-piece blades, center-pivoted, maximum 6-inch width, galvanized or stainless steel with sealed edges.

G. Blade Action: Parallel.

H. Blade Seals: Neoprene, mechanically locked.

I. Blade Axles:

1. Material: Galvanized steel or Stainless steel. 2. Diameter: 0.20 inch.

J. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel or stainless steel.

K. Return Spring: Adjustable tension.

L. Bearings: Steel ball or synthetic pivot bushings.

M. Accessories:

1. Adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure. 2. Counterweights and spring-assist kits for vertical airflow installations.

2.3 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS

A. Standard, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers:


a. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc. b. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.



c. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. d. McGill AirFlow LLC. e. METALAIRE, Inc. f. Nailor Industries Inc. g. Ruskin Company. h. Vent Products Company, Inc.

2. Standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream. 3. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. 4. Frames:

a. Hat-shaped, galvanized and/or stainless-steel channels, 0.064-inch minimum thickness.

b. Mitered and welded corners. c. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.

5. Blades:

a. Multiple or single blade. b. Parallel- or opposed-blade design. c. Stiffen damper blades for stability. d. Galvanized and/or Stainless-steel, 0.064 inch thick.

6. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel and/or Stainless steel. 7. Bearings:

a. Oil-impregnated bronze . b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full

length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.

8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel and/or Stainless steel.

2.4 FIRE DAMPERS


1. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc. 2. Arrow United Industries; a division of Mestek, Inc. 3. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc. 4. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 5. McGill AirFlow LLC. 6. METALAIRE, Inc. 7. Nailor Industries Inc.

B. Type: Static ; rated and labeled according to UL 555 by an NRTL.

C. Closing rating in ducts up to 4-inch wg static pressure class and minimum 4000-fpm velocity.



D. Fire Rating: 1-1/2 hours.

E. Frame: Curtain type with blades outside airstream ; fabricated with roll-formed, 0.034-inchthick galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners.

F. Mounting Sleeve: Factory- or field-installed, galvanized sheet steel.

1. Minimum Thickness: 0.052 or 0.138 inch thick, as indicated, and of length to suit application.

2. Exception: Omit sleeve where damper-frame width permits direct attachment of perimeter mounting angles on each side of wall or floor; thickness of damper frame must comply with sleeve requirements.

G. Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated.

H. Blades: Roll-formed, interlocking, 0.034-inchthick, galvanized sheet steel. In place of interlocking blades, use full-length, 0.034-inchthick, galvanized-steel blade connectors.

I. Horizontal Dampers: Include blade lock and stainless-steel closure spring.

J. Heat-Responsive Device: Replaceable, 165 deg F rated, fusible links.

2.5 FLANGE CONNECTORS


1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2. Nexus PDQ; Division of Shilco Holdings Inc. 3. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.

B. Description: Add-on or roll-formed, factory-fabricated, slide-on transverse flange connectors, gaskets, and components.

C. Material: Galvanized steel and/or stainless steel.

D. Gage and Shape: Match connecting ductwork.

2.6 SOUND ATTENUATORS


1. Vibro-Acoustics. 2. Industrial Noise Control, Inc. 3. McGill AirFlow LLC.



4. Ruskin Company. 5. Industrial Acoustic Company.

B. General Requirements:

1. Factory fabricated. 2. Fire-Performance Characteristics: Adhesives, sealants, packing materials, and accessory

materials shall have flame-spread index not exceeding 25 and smoke-developed index not exceeding 50 when tested according to ASTM E 84, NFPA 255 or UL 723.

3. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2007.

C. Shape:

1. Rectangular straight with splitters or baffles. 2. Rectangular elbow with splitters or baffles.

D. Rectangular Silencer Outer Casing: ASTM A 653, G90, galvanized sheet steel, 0.040 inch thick.

E. Inner Casing and Baffles: ASTM A 653, G90 galvanized sheet metal 0.022 inch thick for rectangular sound attenuators and, 0.034 inch thick, for rectangular elbow sound attenuators and with 1/8-inch- diameter perforations.

F. Connection Sizes: Match connecting ductwork unless otherwise indicated.

G. Principal Sound-Absorbing Mechanism:

1. Controlled impedance membranes and broadly tuned resonators without absorptive media.

2. Film-lined type with fill material.

a. Fill Material: Inert and vermin-proof fibrous material, packed under not less than 15 percent compression.

b. Erosion Barrier: Polymer bag enclosing fill, and heat sealed before assembly.

3. Lining: Tedlar and/or Fiber film. The acoustical media shall be completely wrapped with tedlar film and or vibar film to help prevent shedding, erosion and impregnation. The wrapped acoustic media shall be separated from the perforated metal by a factory installed ½” thick acoustically transparent spacer. The spacer shall be flame retardant and erosion resistant.

H. Fabricate silencers to form rigid units that will not pulsate, vibrate, rattle, or otherwise react to system pressure variations. Do not use mechanical fasteners for unit assemblies.

1. Lock form and seal or continuously weld joints. 2. Suspended Units: Factory-installed suspension hooks or lugs attached to frame in

quantities and spaced to prevent deflection or distortion. 3. Reinforcement: Cross or trapeze angles for rigid suspension.



I. Accessories: 1. Factory-installed end caps to prevent contamination during shipping.

J. Source Quality Control: Test according to ASTM E 477.-06a.

1. Testing to be witnessed by Architect. 2. Record acoustic ratings, including dynamic insertion loss and generated-noise power

levels with an airflow of at least 2000-fpm face velocity. 3. Leak Test: Test units for airtightness at 200 percent of associated fan static pressure or 6-

inch wg static pressure, whichever is greater.

K. Capacities and Characteristics: See Schedule on Drawings

2.7 TURNING VANES


1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2. Duro Dyne Inc. 3. METALAIRE, Inc. 4. SEMCO Incorporated.

B. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel and/or stainless steel support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.

1. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated faces and fibrous-glass fill.

C. General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 2-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and 2-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."

D. Vane Construction: Single or Double wall.

E. Vane Construction: Single wall for ducts up to 48 inches wide and double wall for larger dimensions.

2.8 DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS


1. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc. 2. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc. 3. Ductmate Industries, Inc.



4. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. 5. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 6. McGill AirFlow LLC. 7. Nailor Industries Inc. 8. Ventfabrics, Inc.

B. Duct-Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 2-10, "Duct Access Doors and Panels," and 2-11, "Access Panels - Round Duct."

1. Door:

a. Double wall, rectangular. b. Galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct

pressure class. c. Vision panel. d. Hinges and Latches: 1-by-1-inch butt or piano hinge and cam latches. e. Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.

2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets. 3. Number of Hinges and Locks:

a. Access Doors Less Than 12 Inches Square: No hinges and two sash locks. b. Access Doors up to 18 Inches Square: Two hinges and two sash locks. c. Access Doors up to 24 by 48 Inches: Three hinges and two compression

latches with outside and inside handles. d. Access Doors Larger Than 24 by 48 Inches: Four hinges and two compression

latches with outside and inside handles.

2.9 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS


1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2. Duro Dyne Inc. 3. Ventfabrics, Inc. 4. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.

B. Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics.

C. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.

D. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-1/2 inches wide attached to 2 strips of 2-3/4-inch- wide, 0.028-inchthick, galvanized sheet steel. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts.


VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 2.10 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE

A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to suit duct-insulation thickness.

B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and grease.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts.

B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.

C. Install backdraft dampers at inlet of exhaust fans or exhaust ducts as close as possible to exhaust fan unless otherwise indicated.

D. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches extend from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers with hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel.

1. Install steel volume dampers in steel ducts. 2. Install stainless steel volume dampers in stainless steel ducts.

E. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing.

F. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.

G. Install fire dampers according to UL listing.

H. Connect ducts to duct silencers rigidly.

I. Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories and equipment at the following locations:

1. On both sides of duct coils. 2. At outdoor-air intakes and mixed-air plenums. 3. At drain pans and seals. 4. Downstream from manual volume dampers, control dampers, backdraft dampers, and

equipment.



5. Adjacent to and close enough to fire dampers, to reset or reinstall fusible links. Access doors for access to fire having fusible links shall be pressure relief access doors and shall be outward operation for access doors installed upstream from dampers and inward operation for access doors installed downstream from dampers.

6. At each change in direction and at maximum 50-foot spacing. 7. Upstream or downstream from duct silencers. 8. Control devices requiring inspection. 9. Elsewhere as indicated.

J. Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure.

K. Access Door Sizes:

1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches. 2. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches. 3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches. 4. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches. 5. Body Access: 25 by 14 inches. 6. Body plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches.

L. Label access doors according to Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" to indicate the purpose of access door.

M. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment.

N. Connect terminal units to supply and exhaust ducts directly.

O. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes.

P. Install thrust limits at centerline of thrust, symmetrical on both sides of equipment. Attach thrust limits at centerline of thrust and adjust to a maximum of 1/4-inch movement during start and stop of fans.


A. Tests and Inspections:

1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement. 2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be

performed. 3. Operate fire, dampers to verify full range of movement and verify that proper heat-

response device is installed. 4. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation. 5. Operate remote damper operators to verify full range of movement of operator and

damper.




SECTION 233416 - CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Backward-inclined or flat blade centrifugal fans.


A. Project Altitude: Base fan performance ratings on actual Project site elevations above sea level.

B. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each type of product indicated and include the following:

1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated. 2. Certified fan sound-power ratings. 3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories. 4. Material thickness and finishes, including color charts. 5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.


1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. 2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic

restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases. 3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication, including anchorages and

attachments to structure and to supported equipment.

C. Coordination Drawings: Plans and others details, draw to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinate with each other, using input from installers of the item involved:

1. Structural members to which centrifugal fan will be attached.

CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS 233416 - 1


2. Roof openings. 3. Flashings.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For centrifugal fans to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.



B. AMCA Compliance: Products shall comply with performance requirements and shall be licensed to use the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal. Product shall comply with AMCA Class II Classification.

C. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA 1.


A. Deliver fans as factory-assembled units, to the extent allowable by shipping limitations, with protective crating and covering.

B. Disassemble and reassemble units, as required for moving to the final location, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Lift and support units with manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of structural-steel support members.

B. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.

C. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories."

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS


1. Belts: One set for each belt-driven unit.



2.1 BACKWARD-INCLINED OR FLAT BLADE CENTRIFUGAL FANS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work with representative in Puerto Rico.

1. Loren Cook Company. 2. Greenheck. 3. Chicago Blower Corporation. 4. New York Blower Company (The). 5. Aerovent; a Twin City Fan Company.

B. Description: Factory-fabricated, -assembled, -tested, and -finished, belt-driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor, drive assembly, and support structure.

C. Housings: Formed panels to make curved-scroll housings with shaped cutoff; with doors or panels to allow access to internal parts and components.

1. Panel Bracing: Steel angle- or channel-iron member supports for mounting and supporting fan scroll, wheel, motor, and accessories.

2. Horizontally split, bolted-flange housing. 3. Spun inlet cone with flange. 4. Outlet flange.

D. Backward-Inclined or flat blades Wheels: Single-width-single-inlet and double-width-double-inlet construction with curved inlet flange, backplate, backward-inclined blades or flat blades welded or riveted to flange and backplate; cast-iron or cast-steel hub riveted to backplate and fastened to shaft with set screws.

E. Shafts: Statically and dynamically balanced and selected for continuous operation at maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after installation.

1. Turned, ground, and polished hot-rolled steel with keyway. Ship with a protective coating of lubricating oil.

2. Designed to operate at no more than 70 percent of first critical speed at top of fan's speed range.

F. Grease-Lubricated Shaft Bearings: Self-aligning, pillow-block-type, ball or roller bearings with adapter mount and two-piece, cast-iron housing.

1. Ball-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 9, Ll0 at 200.000 hours>. 2. Roller-Bearing Rating Life: ABMA 11, Ll0 at 200.000<Insert hours>.

G. Belt Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after installation.

1. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor Size: 1.5.



2. Fan Pulleys: Cast iron or cast steel with split, tapered bushing; dynamically balanced at factory.

3. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 5 hp; fixed pitch for use with larger motors. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the middle of adjustment range at fan design conditions.

4. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; matched sets for multiple belt drives. 5. Belt Guards: Fabricate to comply with OSHA and SMACNA requirements of diamond-

mesh wire screen welded to steel angle frame or equivalent, prime coated. Secure to fan or fan supports without short circuiting vibration isolation. Include provisions for adjustment of belt tension, lubrication, and use of tachometer with guard in place.

6. Motor Mount: Adjustable for belt tensioning.

H. Accessories:

1. Scroll Access Doors: Shaped to conform to scroll, with quick-opening latches and gaskets.

2. Cleanout Door: Quick-opening, latch-type gasketed door allowing access to fan scroll, of same material as housing.

3. Scroll Drain Connection: NPS 1 steel pipe coupling welded to low point of fan scroll. 4. Companion Flanges: Rolled flanges for duct connections of same material as housing. 5. Discharge Dampers: Assembly with parallel blades constructed of two plates formed

around and to shaft, channel frame, and sealed ball bearings; with blades linked outside of airstream to single control lever of same material as housing.

6. Shaft Seals: Airtight seals installed around shaft on drive side of single-width fans. 7. Weather Cover: Enameled-steel sheet with ventilation slots, bolted to housing.

I. Motors: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

1. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled.

J. Capacities and Characteristics: As indicated on drawings.

K. Power Coating: Electrostatically applied baked expoxy power coating for all fan assembly.

L. Vibration Isolators: Spring isolation rail with restrained isolators having a static reflection of 1 inch.


A. Sound-Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.

B. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation, and efficiency by factory tests and ratings according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating."



3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install centrifugal fans level and plumb.

B. Support roof-mounting units using isolation base rail with restrained spring isolators having a static deflection of 1 inch

1. Secure vibration and seismic controls to concrete bases using anchor bolts cast in concrete base.

C. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.

D. Label fans according to requirements specified in Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories."

B. Install ducts adjacent to fans to allow service and maintenance.

C. Install line-sized piping from scroll drain connection, with trap with seal equal to 1.5 times specified static pressure, to nearest floor drain.

D. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

E. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."


A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed. 2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to

ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches.

3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete. 4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan

wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards.



5. Adjust belt tension. 6. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. 7. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts. 8. Verify that manual and automatic volume control dampers in connected ductwork

systems are in fully open position. 9. Refer to Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing,

adjusting, and balancing procedures. 10. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

B. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain centrifugal fans. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."




SECTION 233423 - HVAC POWER VENTILATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Centrifugal roof ventilators. 2. Centrifugal wall ventilators. 3. Propeller fans.


A. Project Altitude: Base fan-performance ratings on sea level.

B. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. Also include the following:

1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated. 2. Certified fan sound-power ratings. 3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories. 4. Material thickness and finishes, including color charts. 5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators. 6. Roof curbs. 7. Fan speed controllers.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.



C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For power ventilators to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

HVAC POWER VENTILATORS 233423 - 1



B. AMCA Compliance: Fans shall have AMCA-Certified performance ratings and shall bear the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.

C. UL Standards: Power ventilators shall comply with UL 705. Power ventilators for use for restaurant kitchen exhaust shall also comply with UL 762.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of structural-steel support members.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.

C. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with actual equipment provided.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS


1. Belts: One set(s) for each belt-driven unit.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CENTRIFUGAL ROOF VENTILATORS


1. Loren Cook Company. 2. Acme Engineering & Manufacturing Corporation. 3. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 4. JencoFan. 5. PennBarry.

B. Housing: Removable, spun-aluminum, dome top and outlet baffle; square, one-piece, aluminum base with venturi inlet cone.

1. Upblast Units: Provide spun-aluminum discharge baffle to direct discharge air upward, with rain and snow drains.

C. Fan Wheels: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward-inclined blades.



D. Belt Drives:

1. Resiliently mounted to housing. 2. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub. 3. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning ball bearings. 4. Pulleys: Cast-iron, adjustable-pitch motor pulley. 5. Fan and motor isolated from exhaust airstream.

E. Accessories:

1. Variable-Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 to less than 50 percent.

2. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-overload protection mounted inside fan housing, factory wired through an internal aluminum conduit.

3. Bird Screens: Removable, 1/2-inch mesh, aluminum or brass wire. 4. Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel-blade, backdraft dampers mounted in curb base;

factory set to close when fan stops. 5. Motorized Dampers: Parallel-blade dampers mounted in curb base with electric actuator;

wired to close when fan stops.

F. Roof Curbs: Galvanized steel; mitered and welded corners; 1-1/2-inchthick, rigid, fiberglass insulation adhered to inside walls; and 1-1/2-inch wood nailer. Size as required to suit roof opening and fan base.

1. Configuration: Built-in raised cant and mounting flange. 2. Overall Height: 12 inches . 3. Sound Curb: Curb with sound-absorbing insulation. 4. Pitch Mounting: Manufacture curb for roof slope. 5. Metal Liner: Galvanized steel.

G. Capacities and Characteristics: As indicated on schedule drawings.

2.2 CENTRIFUGAL WALL VENTILATORS


1. Loren Cook Company. 2. Acme Engineering & Manufacturing Corporation. 3. Carnes Company. 4. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 5. JencoFan. 6. PennBarry.

B. Housing: Heavy-gage, removable, spun-aluminum, dome top and outlet baffle; venturi inlet cone.

C. Fan Wheel: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward-inclined blades.



D. Belt Drives:

1. Resiliently mounted to housing. 2. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub. 3. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning ball bearings. 4. Pulleys: Cast-iron, adjustable-pitch motor pulley. 5. Fan and motor isolated from exhaust airstream.

E. Accessories: 1. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-overload protection mounted inside

fan housing, factory wired through internal aluminum conduit. 2. Bird Screens: Removable, 1/2-inch mesh, aluminum or brass wire. 3. Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel-blade, backdraft dampers mounted in wall sleeve;

factory set to close when fan stops.

F. Capacities and Characteristics: As indicated on schedule drawings.

2.3 PROPELLER FANS


1. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 2. Acme Engineering & Manufacturing Corporation. 3. Chicago Blower Corporation. 4. Cincinnati Fan. 5. JencoFan. 6. Loren Cook Company. 7. New York Blower Company (The). 8. PennBarry.

B. Housing: Galvanized-steel sheet with flanged edges and integral orifice ring with baked-enamel finish coat applied after assembly.

C. Steel Fan Wheels: Formed-steel blades riveted to heavy-gage steel spider bolted to cast-iron hub.

D. Fan Wheel: Replaceable, cast -aluminum, airfoil blades fastened to cast-aluminum hub; factory set pitch angle of blades.

E. Fan Drive: Motor mounted in airstream, factory wired to disconnect switch located on outside of fan housing.

F. Accessories:

1. Gravity Shutters: Aluminum blades in aluminum frame; interlocked blades with nylon bearings.



2. Motor-Side Back Guard: Galvanized steel, complying with OSHA specifications, removable for maintenance.

3. Wall Sleeve: Galvanized steel to match fan and accessory size. 4. Weathershield Hood: Aluminum construction to match fan and accessory size.

G. Capacities and Characteristics: As indicated on the schedule drawings.

2.4 MOTORS

A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."



B. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled.


A. Certify sound-power level ratings according to AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.

B. Certify fan performance ratings, including flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation, and efficiency by factory tests according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install power ventilators level and plumb.

B. Secure roof-mounted fans to roof curbs with cadmium-plated hardware. See Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories" for installation of roof curbs.

C. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.

D. Label units according to requirements specified in Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

E. Secure wall mounted fans to wall with cadmium-plated hardware.


VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

B. Adjust belt tension.

C. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures.

D. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design airflow.

E. Lubricate bearings.




SECTION 233713 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Louver face diffusers. 2. Fixed face registers and grilles.


1. Division 08 Section "Louvers and Vents" for fixed and adjustable louvers and wall vents, whether or not they are connected to ducts.

2. Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for fire dampers and volume-control dampers not integral to diffusers, registers, and grilles.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include the following:

1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CEILING DIFFUSERS

A. Louver Face Diffuser :


a. Titus b. Anemostat Products; a Mestek company. c. Krueger. d. METALAIRE, Inc. e. Tuttle & Bailey.

DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 233713 - 1


5. Frame: 1-1/4 inches wide. 6. Mounting Frame: Filter, as indicated on drawings. 7. Mounting: Countersunk screw, as indicated on drawings. 8. Damper Type: Adjustable opposed blade. 9. Accessory: Filter, as indicated on drawings.

C. Fixed Face Grille:


a. Titus. b. Anemostat Products; a Mestek company. c. Krueger. d.


a. Titus. b. Anemostat Products; a Mestek company. c. Krueger.

2. Material: Aluminum. 3. Finish: Baked enamel, white. 4. Face Blade Arrangement: Perforated removable, with retainer cable. 5. Frame: 1-1/4 inches wide. 6. Internal Baffles to distribute air. 7. Damper Type: Adjustable.


A. Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers, registers, and grilles according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of equipment.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb.

B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practical. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location.

C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air balancing.


VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO END OF SECTION 233713



SECTION 236423 - SCROLL WATER CHILLERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Packaged, air-cooled, electric-motor-driven, scroll water chillers. 2. Circulating pumps.


1. Division 28 Section "Refrigerant Detection and Alarm" for refrigerant monitors, alarms, supplemental breathing apparatus, and ventilation equipment interlocks.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. COP: Coefficient of performance. The ratio of the rate of heat removal to the rate of energy input using consistent units for any given set of rating conditions.

B. EER: Energy-efficiency ratio. The ratio of the cooling capacity given in terms of Btu/h to the total power input given in terms of watts at any given set of rating conditions.

C. IPLV: Integrated part-load value. A single number part-load efficiency figure of merit calculated per the method defined by ARI 550/590 and referenced to ARI standard rating conditions.

D. kW/Ton: The ratio of total power input of the chiller in kilowatts to the net refrigerating capacity in tons at any given set of rating conditions.

E. NPLV: Nonstandard part-load value. A single number part-load efficiency figure of merit calculated per the method defined by ARI 550/590 and intended for operating conditions other than the ARI standard rating conditions.


A. Seismic Performance: Scroll water chillers shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7 .

SCROLL WATER CHILLERS 236423 - 1



1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include refrigerant, rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

1. Performance at ARI standard conditions and at conditions indicated. 2. Performance at ARI standard unloading conditions. 3. Minimum evaporator flow rate. 4. Refrigerant capacity of water chiller. 5. Oil capacity of water chiller. 6. Fluid capacity of evaporator. 7. Fluid capacity of condenser. 8. Characteristics of safety relief valves. 9. Minimum entering condenser-water temperature. 10. Performance at varying capacity with constant design condenser-water temperature.

Repeat performance at varying capacity for different condenser-water temperatures from design to minimum in 5 deg F increments.

11. Minimum entering condenser-air temperature 12. Performance at varying capacity with constant design entering condenser-air temperature.

Repeat performance at varying capacity for different entering condenser-air temperatures from design to minimum in 10 deg F> increments.

B. LEED Submittal:

1. Product Data for Credit EA 4: All documentation required by Credit EA 4 indicating that equipment and refrigerants comply.

C. Shop Drawings: Complete set of manufacturer's prints of water chiller assemblies, control panels, sections and elevations, and unit isolation. Include the following:

1. Assembled unit dimensions. 2. Weight and load distribution. 3. Required clearances for maintenance and operation. 4. Size and location of piping and wiring connections. 5. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

D. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Structural supports. 2. Piping roughing-in requirements. 3. Wiring roughing-in requirements, including spaces reserved for electrical equipment. 4. Access requirements, including working clearances for mechanical controls and electrical

equipment, and tube pull and service clearances.



E. Certificates: For certification required in "Quality Assurance" Article.

F. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For water chillers, accessories, and components from manufacturers.




G. Source quality-control test reports.

H. Startup service reports.

I. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each water chiller to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

J. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. ARI Certification: Certify chiller according to ARI 590 certification program.

B. ARI Rating: Rate water chiller performance according to requirements in ARI 550/590, "Water Chilling Packages Using the Vapor Compression Cycle."

C. ASHRAE Compliance: ASHRAE 15 for safety code for mechanical refrigeration.

D. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."

E. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and stamp water chiller heat exchangers to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

F. Comply with NFPA 70.


A. Ship water chillers from the factory fully charged with refrigerant and filled with oil.

B. Package water chiller for export shipping.

1.8 COORDINATION




B. Coordinate sizes, locations, and anchoring attachments of structural-steel support structures.


1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of water chillers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified period.

1. Compressor Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PACKAGED AIR-COOLED WATER CHILLERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Carrier Corporation; a United Technologies company. 2. Trane.

B. Description: Factory-assembled and run-tested water chiller complete with base and frame, condenser casing, compressors, compressor motors and motor controllers, evaporator, condenser coils, condenser fans and motors, electrical power, controls, and accessories.

C. Fabricate base, frame, and attachment to water chiller components strong enough to resist movement during a seismic event when water chiller base is anchored to field support structure.

D. Cabinet:

1. Base: Galvanized-steel base extending the perimeter of water chiller. Secure frame, compressors, and evaporator to base to provide a single-piece unit.

2. Frame: Rigid galvanized-steel frame secured to base and designed to support cabinet, condenser, control panel, and other chiller components not directly supported from base.

3. Casing: Galvanized steel. 4. Finish: Coat base, frame, and casing with a corrosion-resistant coating capable of

withstanding a 500-hour salt-spray test according to ASTM B 117. 5. Sound-reduction package consisting of the following:

a. Acoustic enclosure around compressors. b. Reduced-speed fans with acoustic treatment. c. Designed to reduce sound level without affecting performance.



6. Security Package: Provide security grilles with fasteners for additional protection of compressors, evaporator, and condenser coils. Grilles shall be coated for corrosion resistance and shall be removable for service access.

E. Compressors:

1. Description: Positive-displacement direct drive with hermetically sealed casing. 2. Each compressor provided with suction and discharge service valves, crankcase oil

heater, and suction strainer. 3. Operating Speed: Nominal 3600 rpm for 60-Hz applications. 4. Capacity Control: On-off compressor cycling[, plus hot-gas bypass]. 5. Oil Lubrication System: Automatic pump with strainer, sight glass, filling connection,

filter with magnetic plug, and initial oil charge. 6. Vibration Isolation: Mount individual compressors on vibration isolators.

F. Compressor Motors:

1. Hermetically sealed and cooled by refrigerant suction gas. 2. High-torque, two-pole induction type with inherent thermal-overload protection on each

phase.

G. Compressor Motor Controllers:

1. Across the Line: NEMA ICS 2, Class A, full voltage, nonreversing.

H. Refrigeration:

1. Refrigerant: R-410a. Classified as Safety Group A1 according to ASHRAE 34. 2. Refrigerant Compatibility: Parts exposed to refrigerants shall be fully compatible with

refrigerants, and pressure components shall be rated for refrigerant pressures. 3. Refrigerant Circuit: Each circuit shall include a thermal-expansion valve, refrigerant

charging connections, a hot-gas muffler, compressor suction and discharge shutoff valves, a liquid-line shutoff valve, a replaceable-core filter-dryer, a sight glass with moisture indicator, a liquid-line solenoid valve, and an insulated suction line.

4. Refrigerant Isolation: Factory install positive shutoff isolation valves in the compressor discharge line and the refrigerant liquid-line to allow the isolation and storage of the refrigerant charge in the chiller condenser.

I. Evaporator:

1. Brazed-plate or shell-and-tube design, as indicated. 2. Shell and Tube:

a. Description: Direct-expansion, shell-and-tube design with fluid flowing through the shell and refrigerant flowing through the tubes within the shell.

b. Code Compliance: Tested and stamped according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

c. Shell Material: Carbon steel. d. Shell Heads: Removable carbon-steel heads with multipass baffles designed to

ensure positive oil return and located at each end of the tube bundle.



e. Shell Nozzles: Fluid nozzles located along the side of the shell and terminated with mechanical-coupling end connections for connection to field piping.

f. Tube Construction: Individually replaceable copper tubes with enhanced fin design, expanded into tube sheets.

3. Brazed Plate:

a. Direct-expansion, single-pass, brazed-plate design. b. Type 316 stainless-steel construction. c. Code Compliance: Tested and stamped according to ASME Boiler and Pressure

Vessel Code. d. Fluid Nozzles: Terminate with mechanical-coupling end connections for

connection to field piping.

4. Heater: Factory-installed and -wired electric heater with integral controls designed to protect the evaporator to minus 20 deg F.

5. Remote Mounting: Designed for remote field mounting where indicated. Provide kit for field installation.

J. Air-Cooled Condenser:

1. Plate-fin coil with integral subcooling on each circuit, rated at 450 psig.

a. Construct coils of copper tubes mechanically bonded to aluminum with factory applied epoxy-polymercoating fins. (E-Coated aluminum-finscoil).

b. Hail Protection: Provide condenser coils with louvers, baffles, or hoods to protect against hail damage.

2. Fans: Direct-drive propeller type with statically and dynamically balanced fan blades, arranged for vertical air discharge.

3. Fan Motors: Totally enclosed nonventilating (TENV) or totally enclosed air over (TEAO) enclosure, with permanently lubricated bearings, and having built-in overcurrent- and thermal-overload protection.

4. Fan Guards: Steel safety guards with corrosion-resistant coating.

K. Electrical Power:

1. Factory-installed and -wired switches, motor controllers, transformers, and other electrical devices necessary shall provide a single-point field power connection to water chiller.

2. House in a unit-mounted, NEMA 250, Type 3R enclosure with hinged access door with lock and key or padlock and key.

3. Wiring shall be numbered and color-coded to match wiring diagram. 4. Install factory wiring outside of an enclosure in a raceway. 5. Field power interface shall be to wire lugsNEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, nonfused disconnect

switch]. 6. Provide branch power circuit to each motor and to controls with one of the following

disconnecting means:



a. NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, fusible switch with rejection-type fuse clips rated for fuses. Select and size fuses to provide Type 2 protection according to IEC 60947-4-1.

b. NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, nonfusible switch. c. NEMA AB 1, motor-circuit protector (circuit breaker) with field-adjustable, short-

circuit trip coordinated with motor locked-rotor amperes.

7. Provide each motor with overcurrent protection. 8. Overload relay sized according to UL 1995, or an integral component of water chiller

control microprocessor. 9. Phase-Failure and Undervoltage: Solid-state sensing with adjustable settings. 10. Transformer: Unit-mounted transformer with primary and secondary fuses and sized

with enough capacity to operate electrical load plus spare capacity.

a. Power unit-mounted controls where indicated. b. Power unit-mounted, ground fault interrupt (GFI) duplex receptacle.

11. Control Relays: Auxiliary and adjustable time-delay relays. 12. Indicate the following for water chiller electrical power supply:

a. Current, phase to phase, for all three phases. b. Voltage, phase to phase and phase to neutral for all three phases. c. Three-phase real power (kilowatts). d. Three-phase reactive power (kilovolt amperes reactive). e. Power factor. f. Running log of total power versus time (kilowatt hours). g. Fault log, with time and date of each.

L. Controls:

1. Stand-alone, microprocessor based. 2. Enclosure: Share enclosure with electrical power devices or provide a separate enclosure

of matching construction. 3. Operator Interface: Keypad or pressure-sensitive touch screen. Multiple-character,

backlit, liquid-crystal display or light-emitting diodes. Display the following:

a. Date and time. b. Operating or alarm status. c. Operating hours. d. Outside-air temperature if required for chilled-water reset. e. Temperature and pressure of operating set points. f. Entering and leaving temperatures of chilled water. g. Refrigerant pressures in evaporator and condenser. h. Saturation temperature in evaporator and condenser. i. No cooling load condition. j. Elapsed time meter (compressor run status). k. Pump status. l. Antirecycling timer status. m. Percent of maximum motor amperage. n. Current-limit set point.



o. Number of compressor starts.

4. Control Functions:

a. Manual or automatic startup and shutdown time schedule. b. Entering and leaving chilled-water temperatures, control set points, and motor load

limit. Chilled-water leaving temperature shall be reset based on return-water temperature.

c. Current limit and demand limit. d. External water chiller emergency stop. e. Antirecycling timer. f. Automatic lead-lag switching.

5. Manual-Reset Safety Controls: The following conditions shall shut down water chiller and require manual reset:

a. Low evaporator pressure or high condenser pressure. b. Low chilled-water temperature. c. Refrigerant high pressure. d. High or low oil pressure. e. High oil temperature. f. Loss of chilled-water flow. g. Control device failure.

6. Building Automation System Interface: Factory-installed hardware and software to enable building automation system to monitor, control, and display water chiller status and alarms.

a. ASHRAE 135 (BACnet) and/or LonTalk communication interface with building automation system shall enable building automation system operator to remotely control and monitor the water chiller from an operator workstation. Control features and monitoring points displayed locally at water chiller control panel shall be available through building automation system.

b. Provide communication to building automation system required by the control contractor. See requirements on control drawing M-9.

M. Insulation:

1. Material: Closed-cell, flexible elastomeric, thermal insulation complying with ASTM C 534, Type I, for tubular materials and Type II, for sheet materials.

2. Thickness: 3/4 inch. 3. Factory-applied insulation over cold surfaces of water chiller components.

a. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer and applied to 100 percent of insulation contact surface. Seal seams and joints.

4. Apply protective coating to exposed surfaces of insulation.

N. Accessories:



1. Factory-furnished, chilled-water flow switches for field installation. 2. Individual compressor suction and discharge pressure gages with shutoff valves for each

refrigeration circuit.

O. Capacities and Characteristics: See Schedule on Drawings

2.2 FACTORY MOUNTED HYDRONIC MODULE

A. Field pipe connections shall be black steel and shall be extended to the outside of the air cooled chiller unit chassis.

B. Primary operation pump system. Pump system shall have pump discharge check valve.

C. Pump shall be single stage design, for installation in vertical or horizontal position and capable of being serviced without disturbing piping connections.

1. Pump casing shall be of class 30 cast iron. 2. The impeller shall be of cast bronze, closed type, dynamically balanced, keyed to

the shaft and secured by locking cap screw. 3. The liquid cavity shall be sealed off at the motor shaft by an internally flushed

mechanical seal with ceramic seal seat and carbon seal ring. 4. Pump shall be rated for 150 psig working pressure. 5. The pump case shall have gauge tappings at the suction and discharge nozzles and

include drain ports. 6. Motors shall totally enclosed 3-phase type with grease lubricated ball bearings. 7. Pump shall be factory tested per Hydraulic Institute Standards.

D. Water pressure gages (2) shall be factory installed across the cooler and rated for 150 psig.

E. Proof-of-flow switch shall be factory installed and rated for 150 psig.

F. Balancing valve shall be factory installed to set flow gauge ports shall be factory installed and rated for 300 psig.

G. Piping shall be type-L seamless copper tubing and/or schedule 40 black steel ASTM-A-53.

H. Copper body strainer with 20 mesh screen and ball type blow down.


A. Perform functional test of water chillers before shipping.

B. Factory test and inspect evaporator according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1. Stamp with ASME label.


C. For water chillers located outdoors, rate sound power level according to ARI 370 procedure.


A. Perform functional test of water chillers before shipping.

B. Factory performance test water chillers, before shipping, according to ARI 550/590, "Water Chilling Packages Using the Vapor Compression Cycle."

1. Allow Owneraccess to place where water chillers are being tested. Notify Owner 14 days in advance of testing.

C. Factory test and inspect evaporator according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1. Stamp with ASME label.

D. For water chillers located outdoors, rate sound power level according to ARI 370 procedure.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Before water chiller installation, examine roughing-in for equipment support, anchor-bolt sizes and locations, piping, and electrical connections to verify actual locations, sizes, and other conditions affecting water chiller performance, maintenance, and operations.

1. Water chiller locations indicated on Drawings are approximate. Determine exact locations before roughing-in for piping and electrical connections.


3.2 WATER CHILLER INSTALLATION

A. Install water chillers on support structure indicated.

B. Equipment Mounting: Install water chiller on concrete bases. Comply with requirements in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base.

2. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor.





C. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for service and maintenance.

D. Charge water chiller with refrigerant if not factory charged and fill with oil if not factory installed.

E. Install separate devices furnished by manufacturer and not factory installed.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Hydronic Piping" Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to chiller to allow service and maintenance.

C. Evaporator Fluid Connections: Connect to evaporator inlet with shutoff valve, strainer, flexible connector, thermometer, and plugged tee with pressure gage. Connect to evaporator outlet with shutoff valve, balancing valve, flexible connector, flow switch, thermometer, plugged tee with pressure gage, and drain connection with valve. Make connections to water chiller with a flange.

D. Connect each drain connection with a union and drain pipe and extend pipe, full size of connection, to floor drain. Provide a shutoff valve at each connection if required.

3.4 STARTUP SERVICE


B. Inspect field-assembled components, equipment installation, and piping and electrical connections for proper assemblies, installations, and connections.

C. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions and perform the following:

1. Verify that refrigerant charge is sufficient and water chiller has been leak tested. 2. Verify that pumps are installed and functional. 3. Verify that thermometers and gages are installed. 4. Operate water chiller for run-in period. 5. Check bearing lubrication and oil levels. 6. Verify that refrigerant pressure relief device for chillers installed indoors is vented

outside. 7. Verify proper motor rotation. 8. Verify static deflection of vibration isolators, including deflection during water chiller

startup and shutdown. 9. Verify and record performance of chilled-water flow and low-temperature interlocks. 10. Verify and record performance of water chiller protection devices. 11. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and

equipment.



D. Prepare a written startup report that records results of tests and inspections.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain water chillers.




SECTION 237313 - MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Constant-air-volume, single-zone air-handling units.


A. Delegated Design: Design vibration isolation and seismic-restraint details, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Structural Performance: Casing panels shall be self-supporting and capable of withstanding 133 percent of internal static pressures indicated, without panel joints exceeding a deflection of L/200 where "L" is the unsupported span length within completed casings.

C. Seismic Performance: Air-handling units shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7 and IBC 2006/Seismic Zone # 3.


1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each air-handling unit indicated.

1. Unit dimensions and weight. 2. Cabinet material, metal thickness, finishes, insulation, and accessories. 3. Fans:

a. Certified fan-performance curves with system operating conditions indicated. b. Certified fan-sound power ratings. c. Fan construction and accessories. d. Motor ratings, electrical characteristics, and motor accessories.

MODULAR INDOOR CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS 237313 - 1


4. Certified coil-performance ratings with system operating conditions indicated. 5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators. 6. Filters with performance characteristics.

B. LEED Submittal:

1. Product Data for Prerequisite EQ 1: Documentation indicating that units comply with ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment."

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For vibration isolation and seismic restraints indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable motor bases, rails, and frames for equipment mounting.

2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases.

D. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

1. Mechanical-room layout and relationships between components and adjacent structural and mechanical elements.

2. Support location, type, and weight. 3. Field measurements.

E. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For air-handling units, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.




F. Source quality-control reports.

G. Field quality-control reports.

H. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air-handling units to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.





B. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A for design, fabrication, and installation of air-handling units and components.

C. ARI Certification: Air-handling units and their components shall be factory tested according to ARI 430, "Central-Station Air-Handling Units," and shall be listed and labeled by ARI.

D. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."

E. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."


1.6 COORDINATION


B. Coordinate sizes and locations of structural-steel support members, if any, with actual equipment provided.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS


1. Filters: Two set(s) for each air-handling unit. 2. Gaskets: Two set(s) for each access door. 3. Fan Belts: Two set(s) for each air-handling unit fan.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following with representative in Puerto Rico. 1. Carrier Corporation; a member of the United Technologies Corporation Family. 2. Trane; American Standard Inc. 3. YORK International Corporation. 4. Buffalo Air Handling. 5. Mammoth Inc.

2.2 UNIT CASINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements for Casings: Double wall type.



1. Forming: Form walls, roofs, and floors with at least two breaks at each joint. 2. Casing Joints: Sheet metal screws or pop rivets. 3. Sealing: Seal all joints with water-resistant sealant. 4. Factory Finish for 16 gage or heavier G-90 Galvanized-Steel Casings: Apply

manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating. 5. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with

requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004, and remarks notes specified on the schedules drawings.

6. Perimeter: 10 gage G-90 Galvanized steel or heavier lifting lugs for overhead lifting shall be provided on each section.

B. Casing Insulation and Adhesive:

1. Materials: ASTM C 1071, Type I. 2. Location and Application: Factory applied with adhesive and mechanical fasteners to the

internal surface of section panels downstream from, and including, the cooling-coil section.

a. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I. b. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel, suitable for adhesive attachment,

mechanical attachment, or welding attachment to duct without damaging liner when applied as recommended by manufacturer and without causing leakage in cabinet.

c. Liner materials applied in this location shall have air-stream surface coated with a temperature-resistant coating or faced with a plain or coated fibrous mat or fabric depending on service-air velocity.

3. Location and Application: Encased between outside and inside casing.

4. Unit shall be thermally broken to minimize the conduction path from the inside of the casing to outside.

C. Inspection and Access Panels and Access Doors:

1. Panel and Door Fabrication: Formed and reinforced, double-wall and insulated panels of same materials and thicknesses as casing.

2. Inspection and Access Panels:

a. Fasteners: Two or more camlock type for panel lift-out operation. Arrangement shall allow panels to be opened against air-pressure differential.

b. Gasket: Neoprene, applied around entire perimeters of panel frames. c. Size: Large enough to allow inspection and maintenance of air-handling unit's

internal components.

3. Access Doors:

a. Hinges: A minimum of two ball-bearing hinges or stainless-steel piano hinge and two wedge-lever-type latches, operable from inside and outside. Arrange doors to be opened against air-pressure differential.

b. Gasket: Neoprene, applied around entire perimeters of panel frames.



c. Size: At least 24 inches wide by full height of unit casing up to a maximum height of 60 inches .

4. Locations and Applications:

a. Fan Section: Doors. b. Access Section: Doors. c. Coil Section: Inspection and access panel. d. Damper Section: Inspection and access panels. e. Filter Section: Doors large enough to allow periodic removal and installation of

filters.

D. Condensate Drain Pans:

1. Fabricated with two percent slope in at least two planes to collect condensate from cooling coils including coil piping connections, coil headers, and return bend and to direct water toward drain connection.

a. Length: Extend drain pan downstream from leaving face to comply with ASHRAE 62.1-2004.

b. Depth: A minimum of 2 inches deep.

2. Integral part of floor plating. 3. Double-wall, stainless-steel sheet with space between walls filled with foam insulation

and moisture-tight seal. 4. Drain Connection: Located at lowest point of pan and sized to prevent overflow.

Terminate with threaded nipple on both ends of pan.

a. Minimum Connection Size: NPS 1 ½ .

5. Pan-Top Surface Coating: Asphaltic waterproofing compound. 6. Units with stacked coils shall have an intermediate drain pan to collect condensate from

top coil.

E. Air-Handling-Unit Mounting Frame: Formed galvanized-steel channel or structural channel supports, designed for low deflection, welded with integral lifting lugs.

1. Seismic Fabrication Requirements: Fabricate mounting base and attachment to air-handling unit sections, accessories, and components with reinforcement strong enough to withstand seismic forces defined in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment" when air-handling unit frame is anchored to building structure.

2.3 FAN, DRIVE, AND MOTOR SECTION

A. Fan and Drive Assemblies: Statically and dynamically balanced and designed for continuous operation at maximum-rated fan speed and motor horsepower.



1. Shafts: Designed for continuous operation at maximum-rated fan speed and motor horsepower, and with field-adjustable alignment.

a. Turned, ground, and polished hot-rolled steel with keyway. Ship with a protective coating of lubricating oil.

b. Designed to operate at no more than 70 percent of first critical speed at top of fan's speed range.

B. Centrifugal Fan Housings: Formed- and reinforced-steel panels to form curved scroll housings with shaped cutoff and spun-metal inlet bell.

1. Bracing: Steel angle or channel supports for mounting and supporting fan scroll, wheel, motor, and accessories.

2. Horizontal-Flanged, Split Housing: Bolted construction. 3. Housing for Supply Fan: Attach housing to fan-section casing with metal-edged flexible

duct connector. 4. Flexible Connector: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-1/2 inches wide attached to

2 strips of 2-3/4-inch- wide, 0.028-inchthick, galvanized-steel sheet or 0.032-inchthick aluminum sheets; select metal compatible with casing.

a. Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric, double coated with neoprene. Fabrics, coatings, and adhesives shall comply with UL 181, Class 1.

1) Fabric Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd.. 2) Fabric Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the

filling. 3) Fabric Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.

C. Airfoil, Centrifugal Fan Wheels: DWDI Smooth-curved inlet flange, backplate, and hollow die-formed airfoil-shaped blades continuously welded at tip flange and backplate; cast-iron or cast-steel hub riveted to backplate and fastened to shaft with set screws.

D. Fan Shaft Bearings:

1. Grease-Lubricated, Tapered-Roller Bearings: Self-aligning, heavy duty pillow-block type with double-locking collars and 2-piece, cast-iron housing with grease lines extended to outside unit and a rated life of 120,000 hours according to ABMA 11.

E. Belt Drives: Factory mounted, with adjustable alignment and belt tensioning, and with 1.5 service factor based on fan motor.

1. Pulleys: Cast iron or cast steel with split, tapered bushing; dynamically balanced at factory.

2. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with 15-hp motors and smaller; fixed pitch for use with motors larger than 15 hp. Select pulley size so pitch adjustment is at the middle of adjustment range at fan design conditions.

3. Belts: Oil resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic; in matched sets for multiple-belt drives. 4. Belt Guards: Comply with requirements specified by OSHA and fabricate according to

SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards"; 0.1046-inchthick, 3/4-inch diamond-mesh wire screen, welded to steel angle frame; prime coated.



F. Discharge Plenum: Heavy-duty 16 gage, G-90 galvanized steel casing assembly with channel frame.

G. Internal Vibration Isolation and Seismic Control: Fans shall be factory mounted with manufacturer's standard[ restrained] vibration isolation mounting devices having a minimum static deflection of 1 inch .

1. Seismic Fabrication Requirements: Fabricate fan section, internal mounting frame and attachment to fans, fan housings, motors, casings, accessories, and other fan section components with reinforcement strong enough to withstand seismic forces defined in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment" when fan-mounting frame and air-handling-unit mounting frame are anchored to building structure.

H. Motor: Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

1. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled, or open drip-proof 2. NEMA Premium (TM) efficient motors as defined in NEMA MG 1. Table 12-12. 3. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. 4. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical

devices and connections specified in Division 26 Sections.

I. Variable Frequency Motor Controllers:

1. As specified in Section 262923, Variable-Frequency Motor Controllers.

2.4 COIL SECTION

A. General Requirements for Coil Section:

1. Comply with ARI 410. 2. Fabricate coil section to allow removal and replacement of coil for maintenance and to

allow in-place access for service and maintenance of coil(s). 3. Coils shall not act as structural component of unit. 4. Seismic Fabrication Requirements: Fabricate coil section, internal mounting frame and

attachment to coils, and other coil section components with reinforcement strong enough to withstand seismic forces defined in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment" when coil-mounting frame and air-handling-unit mounting frame are anchored to building structure.

2.5 AIR FILTRATION SECTION

A. General Requirements for Air Filtration Section:

1. Comply with NFPA 90A.



2. Provide minimum arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.1, and a minimum efficiency reporting value (MERV) according to ASHRAE 52.2.

3. Provide filter holding frames arranged for flat or angular orientation, with access doors on both sides of unit. Filters shall be removable from one side or lifted out from access plenum.

B. Extended-Surface, Nonsupported-Media Filters:

1. Factory-fabricated, dry, extended-surface, self-supporting type. 2. Initial Resistance: As indicated on schedule drawings. 3. Recommended Final Resistance: As indicated on schedule drawings. 4. Arrestance (ASHRAE 52.1): 95. 5. Merv (ASHRAE 52.2): 8. 6. Media: Fibrous material with antimicrobial agent constructed so individual pleats are

maintained in tapered form by flexible internal supports under rated-airflow conditions. 7. Filter-Media Frame: Hard polyurethane foam.

C. High-Efficiency Filters:

1. Factory-fabricated, dry, extended-surface, mini-pleat, self-supporting type. 2. Initial Resistance: As indicated on schedule drawings. 3. Recommended Final Resistance: As indicated on schedule drawings. 4. Arrestance (ASHRAE 52.1): 95 DOP. 5. Merv (ASHRAE 52.2): 15 6. Media: UL 586 Fibrous material with antimicrobial agent constructed of continuous

sheets with closely pleats with vinyl coated aluminum separators. 7. Filter-Media Frame: Galvanized steel. 8. Media to frame side bond: Fiber glass mat packing. 9. Face gasket: Neoprene expanded rubber.

D. Filter Gage:

1. 3-1/2-inch- diameter, diaphragm-actuated dial in metal case. 2. Vent valves. 3. Black figures on white background. 4. Front recalibration adjustment. 5. 2 percent of full-scale accuracy. 6. Range: 0- to 4.0-inch wg. 7. Accessories: Static-pressure tips with integral compression fittings, 1/4-inch aluminum

tubing, and 2- or 3-way vent valves. 8. Provide individual filter gage at each filter section.

2.6 DAMPERS

A. As specified in Section 230900 “Instrumentation and Control for HVAC”.

B. Damper Operators: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC."


VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 2.7 CAPACITIES AND CHARACTERISTICS

A. Casing:

1. Outside Casing: G-90 Galvanized steel, minimum 0.064 inch thick. 2. Inside Casing: G-90 Galvanized steel, solid, minimum 0.052 inch thick. 3. Floor Plate: Galvanized steel, minimum 0.064 inch thick. 4. Insulation Thickness: As required to comply with R-Value of less than 13. 5. Static-Pressure Classifications for Unit Sections before Fans: 6-inch wg . 6. Static-Pressure Classifications for Unit Sections after Fans: 6-inch wg .

B. Supply Fan:

1. Class II: AMCA 99-2408. 2. Drive: V-belt. 3. Type: Galvanized-steel, airfoil centrifugal or Aluminum, airfoil centrifugal. 4. Number of Fan Wheels: One. 5. Fan Diameter : As required to comply supply air performance. 6. Fan Housing and Wheel Coating: See requirements on schedule drawings. 7. Airflow: As indicated on schedule drawings. 8. External Static Pressure: As indicated on schedule drawings. 9. Motor Size: As indicated on schedule drawings. 10. Motor Speed: As indicated on schedule drawings. 11. Electrical Characteristics: As indicated on schedule drawings.

12. Fan Discharge Sound Power:

Discharge Inlet Casing

a. 1st Octave: 102 94 93 b. 2nd Octave: 99 92 90 c. 3rd Octave: 101 86 85 d. 4th Octave: 98 82 82 e. 5th Octave: 95 81 79 f. 6th Octave: 91 77 75 g. 7th Octave: 88 75 63 h. 8th Octave: 86 70 61

C. Cooling Coil:

1. Sensible Heat-Transfer Rate: As indicated on the schedule drawings. 2. Total Heat-Transfer Rate: As indicated on the schedule drawings. 3. Entering-Air, Dry-Bulb Temperature: As indicated on the schedule drawings. 4. Entering-Air, Wet-Bulb Temperature: As indicated on the schedule drawings. 5. Leaving-Air, Dry-Bulb Temperature: As indicated on the schedule drawings. 6. Leaving-Air, Wet-Bulb Temperature: As indicated on the schedule drawings. 7. Face Area: As indicated on the schedule drawings. 8. Maximum Face Velocity: As indicated on the schedule drawings. 9. Maximum Air-Side, Static-Pressure Drop: As indicated on the schedule drawings. 10. Coil Type: Cleanable.



11. Piping Connections: Threaded or Flanged. 12. Tube Material: Copper. 13. Tube Thickness: 0.016 inches. 14. Fin Type: Plate. 15. Fin Material: Aluminum. 16. Fin and Tube Joint: Mechanical bond. 17. Headers:

a. Fabricated steel with cleaning plugs and drain and air vent tappings extended to exterior of unit.

18. Frames: Channel frame, 0.064-inchthick galvanized steel . 19. Number of Rows: As indicated on schedule drawings. 20. Coil Working-Pressure Ratings: 300 psig, 200 deg F. 21. Water: As indicated on the schedule drawings. 22. Coating: As indicated on the schedule drawings.


A. Fan Sound-Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Fans shall bear AMCA-certified sound ratings seal.

B. Fan Performance Rating: Factory test fan performance for airflow, pressure, power, air density, rotation speed, and efficiency. Rate performance according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating."

C. Water Coils: Factory tested to 300 psig according to ARI 410 and ASHRAE 33.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine casing insulation materials and filter media before air-handling unit installation. Reject insulation materials and filter media that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

C. Examine roughing-in for hydronic, and condensate drainage piping systems and electrical services to verify actual locations of connections before installation.




A. Equipment Mounting: Install air-handling units on concrete bases using restrained spring. Secure units to anchor bolts installed in concrete bases. Comply with requirements for concrete bases specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

1. Minimum Deflection: 2 inch . 2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated,

install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base. 3. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into

structural concrete floor. 4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,

instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.

B. Arrange installation of units to provide access space around air-handling units for service and maintenance.

C. AHU”s system shall be operated with temporary filters MERV-8 and MERV-15 during construction and testing. Replace temporary filters used during construction and testing with new clean filters MERV-8 and MERV-15.

D. Install filter-gage, static-pressure taps upstream and downstream of filters. Mount filter gages on outside of filter housing or filter plenum in accessible position. Provide filter gages on filter banks, installed with separate static-pressure taps upstream and downstream of filters.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to air-handling unit to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect piping to air-handling units mounted on vibration isolators with flexible connectors.

D. Connect condensate drain pans using NPS 1-1/2 , ASTM B 88, Type M copper tubing. Extend to nearest equipment or floor drain. Construct deep trap at connection to drain pan and install cleanouts at changes in direction.

E. Chilled-Water Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 23 Section "Hydronic Piping." Install shutoff valve and union or flange at each coil supply connection. Install balancing valve and union or flange at each coil return connection.

F. Connect duct to air-handling units with flexible connections. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories."







1. Leak Test: After installation, fill water coils with water, and test coils and connections for leaks.

2. Charge refrigerant coils with refrigerant and test for leaks. 3. Fan Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm

proper motor rotation and unit operation. 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment.

D. Air-handling unit or components will be considered defective if unit or components do not pass tests and inspections.


3.5 STARTUP SERVICE


1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed. 3. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connection to

piping, ducts, and electrical systems are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, controllers, and switches.

4. Verify proper motor rotation direction, free fan wheel rotation, and smooth bearing operations. Reconnect fan drive system, align belts, and install belt guards.

5. Verify that bearings, pulleys, belts, and other moving parts are lubricated with factory-recommended lubricants.

6. Verify that outdoor- dampers open and close, and maintain minimum outdoor-air setting. 7. Comb coil fins for parallel orientation. 8. Install new, clean filters. 9. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire dampers in connected duct

systems are in fully open position.

B. Starting procedures for air-handling units include the following:

1. Energize motor; verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan wheel. Adjust fan to indicated rpm.



2. Measure and record motor electrical values for voltage and amperage. 3. Manually operate dampers from fully closed to fully open position and record fan

performance.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

B. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for air-handling system testing, adjusting, and balancing.

3.7 CLEANING

A. After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing air-handling unit and air-distribution systems and after completing startup service, clean air-handling units internally to remove foreign material and construction dirt and dust. Clean fan wheels, cabinets, dampers, coils, and filter housings, and install new, clean filters.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain air-handling units.




SECTION 238216 - AIR COILS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following types of air coils that are not an integral part of air-handling units:

1. Electric.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each air coil. Include rated capacity and pressure drop for each air coil.

B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which coil location and ceiling-mounted access panels are shown and coordinated with each other.


E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air coils to include in operation and maintenance manuals.



B. ASHRAE Compliance:

1. Comply with ASHRAE 33 for methods of testing cooling and heating coils.

AIR COILS 238216 - 1


A. Altitude above Mean Sea Level: Sea level .

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ELECTRIC COILS


1. Brasch Manufacturing Co., Inc. 2. Chromalox, Inc., Wiegand Industrial Division; Emerson Electric Company. 3. Dunham-Bush, Inc. 4. INDEECO.

B. Coil Assembly: Comply with UL 1995.

C. Heating Elements: Open-coil resistance wire of 80 percent nickel and 20 percent chromium, supported and insulated by floating ceramic bushings recessed into casing openings, and fastened to supporting brackets, and mounted in galvanized-steel frame.

D. High-Temperature Coil Protection: Disk-type, automatically reset, thermal-cutout, safety device; serviceable through terminal box without removing heater from duct or casing.

1. Secondary Protection: Load-carrying, manually reset or manually replaceable, thermal cutouts; factory wired in series with each heater stage.

E. Frames: Galvanized-steel channel frame, minimum 0.052 inchthick for slip-in mounting.

F. Control Panel: Unit mounted with disconnecting means and overcurrent protection. Include the following controls:

1. Magnetic contactor. 2. Low voltage transformer with built-in primary fuses. 3. Manual reset thermal cutout. 4. 0-10VDC input electronic proportional controller 5. Airflow proving switch with pilot light. 6. Fail off protection.

G. Room sensor

1. As specified on Divison 23: “ Instrumentation and control for HVAC”.

H. Capacities and Characteristics: As indicated on the schedule on drawings.



3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine ducts, plenums, and casings to receive air coils for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting coil performance.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install coils level and plumb.

B. Install coils in metal ducts and casings constructed according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible."

C. Straighten bent fins on air coils.

D. Clean coils using materials and methods recommended in writing by manufacturers, and clean inside of casings and enclosures to remove dust and debris.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

B. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."



1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, operate electric coils to confirm proper unit operation.





SECTION 260500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Electrical equipment coordination and installation. 2. Sleeves for raceways and cables. 3. Sleeve seals. 4. Common electrical installation requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS


1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For sleeve seals.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of electrical equipment:

1. To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that reduce headroom are indicated.

2. To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to other installations.

3. To allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope. 4. So connecting raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways will be clear of

obstructions and of the working and access space of other equipment.

B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed.

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 260500 - 1


C. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are behind finished surfaces or otherwise concealed. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames."

D. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS AND CABLES

A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.

B. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel.

1. Minimum Metal Thickness:

a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and no side more than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch.

b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or more than, 50 inches and 1 or more sides equal to, or more than, 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch.

2.2 SLEEVE SEALS

A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable.


a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. c. Metraflex Co. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit. Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable.

3. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. Include two for each sealing element. 4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length

required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.



3.1 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit for wall-mounting items.

C. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom consistent with these requirements.

D. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components of both electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity.

E. Right of Way: Give to piping systems installed at a required slope.

3.2 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. Electrical penetrations occur when raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, or busways penetrate concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls, or fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.

B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.

C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

D. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall.

E. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.

F. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level.

G. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable, unless indicated otherwise.

H. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry

1. Promptly pack grout solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect grout while curing.

I. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants.".



J. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at raceway and cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal raceway and cable penetration sleeves with firestop materials. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

K. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.

L. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

M. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION

A. Install to seal exterior wall penetrations.

B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.4 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies for electrical installations to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."




SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less. 2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Qualification Data: For testing agency.



A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Person currently certified by the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies to supervise on-site testing specified in Part 3.


C. Comply with NFPA 70.

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519 - 1


B. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

D. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

E. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

F. Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.

G. Class 2 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.

H. Branch circuits in operating rooms: XHNW # 10 AWG conductors.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.

D. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible.

E. Support cables according to Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

F. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

B. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.

1. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice and tap conductor for aluminum conductors.

C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack.




A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.


1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements.

2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

D. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:

1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve

compliance with requirements.

E. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.




SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Grounding systems and equipment.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency and testing agency's field supervisor.

C. Field quality-control reports.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member Company of NETA or an NRTL.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS

A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Bare Copper Conductors: 1. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260526 - 1


2. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter. 3. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor. 4. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8

inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.

2.2 CONNECTORS

A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected.

B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, pressure type with at least two bolts.

1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe.

C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions.

2.3 GROUNDING ELECTRODES

A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel, 3/4 inch by 10 feet in diameter.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATIONS

A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.

B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare copper conductor, No. 2/0 AWG minimum.

1. Bury at least 24 inches below grade. 2. Duct-Bank Grounding Conductor: Bury 12 inches above duct bank when indicated as

part of duct-bank installation.

C. Conductor Terminations and Connections:

1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as otherwise

indicated. 3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors. 4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.



3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.

B. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those required by NFPA 70:

1. Feeders and branch circuits. 2. Lighting circuits. 3. Receptacle circuits. 4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. 6. Flexible raceway runs. 7. X-Ray Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor in circuits

supplying x-ray equipment.

C. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct and connected metallic piping.

D. Water Heater: Install a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat-tracing cable. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

B. Ground Bonding Common with Lightning Protection System: Comply with NFPA 780 and UL 96 when interconnecting with lightning protection system. Bond electrical power system ground directly to lightning protection system grounding conductor at closest point to electrical service grounding electrode. Use bonding conductor sized same as system grounding electrode conductor, and install in conduit.

C. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final grade unless otherwise indicated.

1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating if any.

2. For grounding electrode system, install at least three rods spaced at least one-rod length from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes, and connect to the service grounding electrode conductor.

D. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance except where routed through short lengths of conduit.



1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts.

2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.

3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type connection is required, use a bolted clamp.

E. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:

1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes; use a bolted clamp connector or bolt a lug-type connector to a pipe flange by using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end.

2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.

F. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install [tinned ]bonding jumper to bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity.

G. Grounding for Steel Building Structure: Install a driven ground rod at base of each corner column and at intermediate exterior columns at distances not more than 60 feet apart.

H. Ground Ring: Install a grounding conductor, electrically connected to each building structure ground rod and to each steel column, extending around the perimeter of building.

1. Install tinned-copper conductor not less than No. 2/0 AWG for ground ring and for taps to building steel.

2. Bury ground ring not less than 24 inches from building's foundation.

3.4 LABELING

A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems" Article for instruction signs. The label or its text shall be green.









1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements.

2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, and at individual ground rods. Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are connected.

a. Measure ground resistance no fewer than two full days after last trace of precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance.

b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.

E. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.

G. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values:

1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 kVA and Less: 10

H. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.




SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.

C. RMC: Rigid metal conduit.


A. Delegated Design: Design supports for multiple raceways, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents.

C. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components.

D. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated or imposed for this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the applied force.

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260529 - 1


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly.


a. Allied Tube & Conduit. b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. c. ERICO International Corporation. d. GS Metals Corp. e. Thomas & Betts Corporation. f. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. g. Wesanco, Inc.

2. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4.

3. Channel Dimensions: Selected for load criteria.

B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.

C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.

D. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.

E. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

F. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following:

1. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used.

a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc.



3) Hilti Inc. 4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. 5) MKT Fastening, LLC.

2. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.

3. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element.

4. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325.

5. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. 6. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.

2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES

A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment.

B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes and plates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.

B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter.

C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits.

1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps Retain paragraph below for projects where seismic design requirements do not apply. Consider retaining for light-commercial projects only.

D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-1/2-inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.



3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article.

B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.

C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb.

D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code: 1. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 2. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor

fasteners on solid masonry units. 3. To Steel: Spring-tension clamps. 4. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 5. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,

panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate.

E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS

A. Comply with installation requirements in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for site-fabricated metal supports.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.

3.4 PAINTING

A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.





SECTION 260533 - RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.

B. FMC: Flexible metal conduit.

C. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets.



B. Comply with NFPA 70.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING


1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.

RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533 - 1


2. Alflex Inc. 3. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co. 4. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose. 5. Electri-Flex Co. 6. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex. 7. Maverick Tube Corporation. 8. O-Z Gedney; a unit of General Signal. 9. Wheatland Tube Company.

B. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.

C. EMT: ANSI C80.3.

D. FMC: Zinc-coated steel.

E. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.

F. Fittings for Conduit (Including all Types and Flexible and Liquidtight), EMT, and Cable: NEMA FB 1; listed for type and size raceway with which used, and for application and environment in which installed. 1. Fittings for EMT: compression type.

G. Joint Compound for Rigid Steel Conduit or IMC: Listed for use in cable connector assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded raceway joints from corrosion and enhance their conductivity.

2.2 METAL WIREWAYS


1. Cooper B-Line, Inc. 2. Hoffman. 3. Square D; Schneider Electric.

B. Description: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 250, Type 3R, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

D. Wireway Covers: Hinged type.

E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.



5. Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid steel conduit. 6. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4, stainless

steel in damp or wet locations.

C. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size. 1” for telephone system.

D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.

1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless otherwise indicated.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements applicable to products specified in Part 2 except where requirements on Drawings or in this Article are stricter.

B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

C. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.

D. Support raceways as specified in Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

E. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab.

F. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for communications conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed.

G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.

H. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions.

I. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors, including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.

J. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire.

K. Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them with listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points:

1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces.



2. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

3. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of length of straight run per deg F of temperature change.

4. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at the time of installation.

L. Flexible Conduit Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.

1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT

A. Direct-Buried Conduit:

1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench bottom as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for pipe less than 6 inches in nominal diameter.

2. Install backfill as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." 3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end

of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction as specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."

4. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through the floor.

a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase coupling with 3 inches of concrete.

b. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches from edge of equipment pad or foundation. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.

5. Warning Planks: Bury warning planks approximately 12 inches above direct-buried conduits, placing them 24 inches o.c. Align planks along the width and along the centerline of conduit.

3.4 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."


VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 3.5 PROTECTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.




SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Identification for raceways. 2. Identification of power and control cables. 3. Identification for conductors. 4. Warning labels and signs. 5. Instruction signs. 6. Equipment identification labels.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated.


A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 and IEEE C2.

B. Comply with NFPA 70.

C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.

E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260553 - 1


wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual; and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.

D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 POWER RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway size.

B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less:

1. Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type.

C. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

2.2 ARMORED AND METAL-CLAD CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size.

B. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V and Less:

1. Black letters on an orange field. 2. Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type.

C. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

2.3 POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size.



B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

2.4 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1 to 2 inches wide.

B. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.

2.5 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS

A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

B. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless otherwise indicated.

C. Baked-Enamel Warning Signs:

1. Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size required for application.

2. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting. 3. Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches.

D. Metal-Backed, Butyrate Warning Signs:

1. Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs with 0.0396-inch galvanized-steel backing; and with colors, legend, and size required for application.

2. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting. 3. Nominal size, 10 by 14 inches.

E. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:

1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."

2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES."

2.6 INSTRUCTION SIGNS

A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch thick for signs up to 20 sq. inches and 1/8 inch thick for larger sizes.



1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face. 2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners. 3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable

equipment.

2.7 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS

A. Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with white letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.

2.8 CABLE TIES

A. General-Purpose Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6 nylon.

1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch. 2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F. 4. Color: Black except where used for color-coding.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.

B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.

D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.

E. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate.

F. System Identification Color-Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each color-coding band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot maximum intervals in congested areas.



3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE

A. Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch Circuits More Than 30 A, and 120 V to ground: Identify with self-adhesive vinyl label. Install labels at 10 foot maximum intervals.

B. Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and pull box of the following systems with self-adhesive vinyl labels with the wiring system legend and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows:

1. Emergency Power. 2. Power.

C. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase.

1. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for ungrounded feeder and branch-circuit conductors.

a. Color shall be factory applied. b. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:

1) Phase A: Black. 2) Phase B: Red. 3) Phase C: Blue.

D. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and signal connections.

1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.

2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections.

3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual.

E. Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the direction of access to live parts. Workspace shall be as required by NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush-mounted panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces.

F. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Self-adhesive warning labels .

1. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145. 2. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. 3. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.



G. Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation.

H. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification.

1. Labeling Instructions:

a. Indoor Equipment: Self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- high letters on 1-1/2-inch- high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high.

b. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor.

c. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure.

2. Equipment to Be Labeled:

a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.

b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets. c. Enclosed switches.




SECTION 260923 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following lighting control devices:

1. Time switches. 2. Indoor occupancy sensors. 3. Outdoor ocuppancy sensors.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. PIR: Passive infrared.

1.4 SUBMITTALS




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TIME SWITCHES


1. TORK. 2. Watt Stopper (The).

LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 260923 - 1


B. Electromechanical-Dial Time Switches: Type complying with UL 917.

1. Contact Configuration: DPST . 2. Contact Rating: 20-A ballast load, 120/240-V ac. 3. Astronomic time dial. 4. Eight-Day Program: Uniquely programmable for each weekday and holidays. 5. Wound-spring reserve carryover mechanism to keep time during power failures,

minimum of 16 hours.

2.2 INDOOR OCCUPANCY SENSORS


1. Hubbell Lighting. 2. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. 3. Novitas, Inc. 4. TORK. 5. Watt Stopper (The).

B. General Description: Dual technology, wall- or ceiling-mounting, solid-state units with a separate relay unit.

1. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when covered area is occupied and off when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes.

2. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay, complying with UL 773A. Sensor shall be powered from the relay unit.

3. Relay Unit: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast load at 120- and 277-V ac, for 13-A tungsten at 120-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Power supply to sensor shall be 24-V dc, 150-mA, Class 2 power source as defined by NFPA 70.

4. Mounting:

a. Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box. b. Relay: Externally mounted through a 1/2-inch knockout in a standard electrical

enclosure. c. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged

door.

5. Indicator: LED, to show when motion is being detected during testing and normal operation of the sensor.

6. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 fc; keep lighting off when selected lighting level is present.

2.3 OUTDOOR OCCUPANCY SENSORS




1. Levinton: OS 120. 2. Watt Stopper (THE) EW-100-120.

B. Description:: Passive infrared type, 120V, adjustable time delay up to 16 minutes, adjustable light level, 180° coverage, weather proof.

2.4 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Power Wiring to Supply Side of Remote-Control Power Sources: Not smaller than No. 12 AWG. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."




1. After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, adjust and test for compliance with requirements.

2. Operational Test: Verify operation of each lighting control device, and adjust time delays.

B. Lighting control devices that fail tests and inspections are defective work.




SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Distribution panelboards. 2. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of panelboard, switching and overcurrent protective device, transient voltage suppression device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment.

1. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings.

2. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 3. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. 4. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices. 5. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices. 6. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices and auxiliary components. 7. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 8. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent

protective device included in panelboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.

C. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.

D. Field Quality-Control Reports:

1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements.

PANELBOARDS 262416 - 1


3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with requirements.

E. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards. Submit final versions after load balancing.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices.

2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device that allows adjustments.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL.


B. Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for panelboards including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.


1. Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above panelboards is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

2. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:

a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding 23 deg F to plus 104 deg F. b. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS


1. Keys: Two spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock. 2. Circuit Breakers Including GFCI and Ground Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Types:

Two spares for each panelboard.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS

A. Enclosures: Flush- and surface-mounted cabinets.

1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.

a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.



2. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box.

3. Finishes:

a. Panels and Trim: Steel , factory finished immediately after cleaning and pretreating with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat.

b. Back Boxes: Same finish as panels and trim.

4. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in transparent card holder.

B. Incoming Mains Location: Top and bottom.

C. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses:

1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. 2. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding

conductors; bonded to box.

D. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.

1. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. 2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Compression type. 3. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Compression type.

E. Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards or load centers with one or more main service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices.

F. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices.

G. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current available at terminals.

2.2 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS


1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type.

C. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

1. For doors more than 36 inches high, provide two latches, keyed alike.



2. Doors for panels rated 400A and above, shall be equipped with full-length piano hinges.

D. Mains: Circuit breaker .

E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller: bolt-on circuit breakers.

F. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A: Bolt-on circuit breakers; plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device requires mechanical release for removal.

2.3 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS



B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.

C. Mains: Circuit breaker or lugs only.

D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units.

E. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.

2.4 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES



B. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents. 1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level

overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Retain one or more of first four subparagraphs below and coordinate required adjustable settings with Division 26 Section "Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study." See "Electronic rms Trip versus MCCBs" Paragraph in "Disconnecting and Overcurrent



Protective Devices" Article in the Evaluations for additional guidance on specifying full- or standard-function features.

2. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault protection (6-mA trip).

3. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories:

a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. b. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor

materials. c. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching

fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge (HID) lighting circuits.

d. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.

e. Multipole units enclosed in a single housing or factory assembled to operate as a single unit.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NEMA PB 1.1.

B. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted or have been subjected to water saturation.

C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1.

B. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from panelboards.

C. Mount top of trim 90 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.

D. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.

E. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.

1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges.



F. Install filler plates in unused spaces.

G. Comply with NECA 1.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads; incorporate Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable.

C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."






D. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.

2. Test continuity of each circuit.

E. Tests and Inspections:


2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

F. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.



G. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.

B. Load Balancing: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, measure load balancing and make circuit changes.

1. Measure as directed during period of normal system loading. 2. Perform load-balancing circuit changes outside normal occupancy/working schedule of

the facility and at time directed. Avoid disrupting critical 24-hour services such as fax machines and on-line data processing, computing, transmitting, and receiving equipment.

3. After circuit changes, recheck loads during normal load period. Record all load readings before and after changes and submit test records.

4. Tolerance: Difference exceeding 20 percent between phase loads, within a panelboard, is not acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as necessary to meet this minimum requirement.




SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates. 2. Twist-locking receptacles. 3. Snap switches and wall-box dimmers. 4. Wall-switch and exterior occupancy sensors.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking wall plates.


D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate through one source from a single manufacturer. Insofar as they are available, obtain all wiring devices and associated wall plates from a single manufacturer and one source.


WIRING DEVICES 262726 - 1



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles:

1. Cooper Wiring Devices; a division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper). 2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell). 3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton). 4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories (Pass & Seymour).

2.2 STRAIGHT BLADE RECEPTACLES

A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, and UL 498.

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Cooper; 5351 (single), 5352 (duplex). b. Hubbell; HBL5351 (single), CR5352 (duplex). c. Leviton; 5891 (single), 5352 (duplex). d. Pass & Seymour; 5381 (single), 5352 (duplex).

2.3 GFCI RECEPTACLES

A. General Description: Straight blade, feed -through type. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, and UL 943, Class A, and include indicator light that is lighted when device is tripped.

B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A:


a. Cooper; GF20. b. Pass & Seymour; 2084.

2.4 TWIST-LOCKING RECEPTACLES

A. Single Convenience Receptacles, 250 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration L6-20R, and UL 498.




a. Cooper; L620R. b. Hubbell; HBL2320. c. Leviton; 2320. d. Pass & Seymour; L620-R.

2.5 SNAP SWITCHES

A. Comply with NEMA WD 1 and UL 20.

B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:


a. Cooper; 2221 (single pole), 2222 (two pole), 2223 (three way), 2224 (four way). b. Hubbell; CS1221 (single pole), CS1222 (two pole), CS1223 (three way), CS1224

(four way). c. Leviton; 1221-2 (single pole), 1222-2 (two pole), 1223-2 (three way), 1224-2 (four

way). d. Pass & Seymour; 20AC1 (single pole), 20AC2 (two pole), 20AC3 (three way),

20AC4 (four way).

2.6 WALL-BOX DIMMERS

A. Dimmer Switches: Modular, full-wave, solid-state units with integral, quiet on-off switches, with audible frequency and EMI/RFI suppression filters.

B. Control: Continuously adjustable slider ; with single-pole or three-way switching. Comply with UL 1472.

C. Fluorescent Lamp Dimmer Switches: Modular; compatible with dimmer ballasts; trim potentiometer to adjust low-end dimming; dimmer-ballast combination capable of consistent dimming with low end not greater than 20 percent of full brightness.

2.7 WALL PLATES

A. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices.

1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Finished Spaces: 0.035-inchthick, satin-finished stainless steel .

B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with type 3R weather-resistant, die-cast aluminum with lockable cover.


VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 2.8 FINISHES

A. Color: Wiring device catalog numbers in Section Text do not designate device color.

1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: Ivory , unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1, including the mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise noted.

B. Coordination with Other Trades:

1. Take steps to insure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of the boxes.

2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables.

3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.

4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.

C. Conductors:

1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated on devices.

2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.

3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails.

D. Device Installation:

1. Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction or that show signs that they were installed before building finishing operations were complete.

2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors.

3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment.

4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length. 5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid

conductor tightly clockwise, 2/3 to 3/4 of the way around terminal screw. 6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the manufacturer.



7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.

8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. 9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device

mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.

E. Receptacle Orientation:

1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles down, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the right.

F. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.

G. Dimmers:

1. Install dimmers within terms of their listing. 2. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to

manufacturers' device listing conditions in the written instructions.

H. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Receptacles: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served. Use hot, stamped or engraved machine printing with black -filled lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes.


A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

1. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436. 2. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital

readout or illuminated LED indicators of measurement.

B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles:

1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V. 2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is not acceptable. 3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. 4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943. 5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted.



6. The tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above.




SECTION 262816 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Nonfusible switches. 2. Enclosures.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes.

1. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Current and voltage ratings. 3. Short-circuit current ratings (interrupting and withstand, as appropriate). 4. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent

protective devices, accessories, and auxiliary components. 5. Include time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of

overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.

B. Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.




1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with

requirements.

ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 262816 - 1


E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and circuit breakers.

2. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.




B. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories, within same product category, from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

E. Comply with NFPA 70.


A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F. 2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipment served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FUSIBLE SWITCHES



B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 240 -V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate indicated fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

C. Accessories:

1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors.

2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.

2.2 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES



B. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 240 -V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.

2.3 ENCLOSURES

A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.

1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated.

B. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

C. Install fuses in fusible devices.

D. Comply with NECA 1.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs.

2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate.






D. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.




E. Tests and Inspections:


2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.

3. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

F. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

G. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed switches and circuit breakers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer.




SECTION 262913 - ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes the following enclosed controllers rated 600 V and less:

1. Full-voltage magnetic.

B. Related Section:

1. Division 26 Section "Variable-Frequency Motor Controllers" for general-purpose, ac, adjustable-frequency, pulse-width-modulated controllers for use on variable torque loads in ranges up to 200 hp.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CPT: Control power transformer.

B. MCCB: Molded-case circuit breaker.

C. MCP: Motor circuit protector.

D. N.C.: Normally closed.

E. N.O.: Normally open.

F. OCPD: Overcurrent protective device.

G. SCR: Silicon-controlled rectifier.


A. Seismic Performance: Enclosed controllers shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.


ENCLOSED CONTROLLERS 262913 - 1


A. Product Data: For each type of enclosed controller. Include manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and enclosure types and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For each enclosed controller. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, details, and required clearances and service spaces around controller enclosures.

1. Show tabulations of the following:

a. Each installed unit's type and details. b. Factory-installed devices. c. Nameplate legends. d. Short-circuit current rating of integrated unit. e. Listed and labeled for integrated short-circuit current (withstand) rating of OCPDs

in combination controllers by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

f. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual OCPDs in combination controllers.



D. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosed controllers, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.





F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed controllers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Routine maintenance requirements for enclosed controllers and installed components. 2. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting circuit breaker and MCP trip

settings. 3. Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field-adjustable overload relays. 4. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing, adjusting, and reprogramming reduced-

voltage solid-state controllers.

G. Load-Current and Overload-Relay Heater List: Compile after motors have been installed, and arrange to demonstrate that selection of heaters suits actual motor nameplate full-load currents.



H. Load-Current and List of Settings of Adjustable Overload Relays: Compile after motors have been installed, and arrange to demonstrate that switch settings for motor running overload protection suit actual motors to be protected.






D. IEEE Compliance: Fabricate and test enclosed controllers according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."


A. Store enclosed controllers indoors in clean, dry space with uniform temperature to prevent condensation. Protect enclosed controllers from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive substances, and physical damage.

B. If stored in areas subject to weather, cover enclosed controllers to protect them from weather, dirt, dust, corrosive substances, and physical damage. Remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside controllers; .


A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F. 2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.

B. Interruption of Existing Electrical Systems: Do not interrupt electrical systems in facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Construction Manager no fewer than 5 days in advance of proposed interruption of electrical systems.

2. Indicate method of providing temporary utilities. 3. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical systems without Construction Manager's

written permission.



4. Comply with NFPA 70E.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of enclosed controllers with other construction including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.



1. Fuses for Fused Switches: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.

2. Control Power Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than two of each size and type.

3. Indicating Lights: Two of each type and color installed. 4. Auxiliary Contacts: Furnish one spare(s) for each size and type of magnetic controller

installed. 5. Power Contacts: Furnish three spares for each size and type of magnetic contactor

installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FULL-VOLTAGE CONTROLLERS

A. General Requirements for Full-Voltage Controllers: Comply with NEMA ICS 2, general purpose, Class A.

B. Magnetic Controllers: Full voltage, across the line, electrically held.


a. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. b. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. c. Rockwell Automation, Inc.; Allen-Bradley brand. d. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. e. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.

2. Configuration: Nonreversing. 3. Contactor Coils: Pressure-encapsulated type with coil transient suppressors.



a. Operating Voltage: Depending on contactor NEMA size and line-voltage rating, manufacturer's standard matching control power or line voltage.

4. Power Contacts: Totally enclosed, double-break, silver-cadmium oxide; assembled to allow inspection and replacement without disturbing line or load wiring.

5. Control Circuits: 24 -V ac; obtained from integral CPT, with primary and secondary fuses, with CPT of sufficient capacity to operate integral devices and remotely located pilot, indicating, and control devices.

a. CPT Spare Capacity: 50 VA.

6. Bimetallic Overload Relays:

a. Inverse-time-current characteristic. b. Class 10 tripping characteristic. c. Heaters in each phase matched to nameplate full-load current of actual protected

motor and with appropriate adjustment for duty cycle. d. Ambient compensated. e. Automatic resetting.

7. [N.C., isolated overload alarm contact. 8. External overload reset push button.

2.2 ENCLOSURES

A. Enclosed Controllers: NEMA ICS 6, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.

1. Dry and Clean Indoor Locations: Type 1. 2. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R .

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. General Requirements for Control Circuit and Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 5; factory installed in controller enclosure cover unless otherwise indicated.

1. Push Buttons, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: Heavy -duty, type.

a. Push Buttons: Shrouded types; momentary as indicated. b. Pilot Lights: LED types; colors as indicated. c. Selector Switches: Rotary type.

B. Reversible N.C./N.O. auxiliary contact(s).

C. Control Relays: Auxiliary and adjustable solid-state time-delay relays.

D. Cover gaskets for Type 1 enclosures.



3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and surfaces to receive enclosed controllers, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine enclosed controllers before installation. Reject enclosed controllers that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Wall-Mounted Controllers: Install enclosed controllers on walls with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated, and by bolting units to wall or mounting on lightweight structural-steel channels bolted to wall. For controllers not at walls, provide freestanding racks complying with Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

B. Seismic Bracing: Comply with requirements specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

C. Install fuses in control circuits if not factory installed. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Fuses."

D. Install heaters in thermal overload relays. Select heaters based on actual nameplate full-load amperes after motors have been installed.

E. Comply with NECA 1.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify enclosed controllers, components, and control wiring. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."


2. Label each enclosure with engraved nameplate. 3. Label each enclosure-mounted control and pilot device.

3.4 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Install wiring between enclosed controllers and remote devices. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Control-Voltage Electrical Power Cables."

B. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.



C. Connect selector switches and other automatic-control selection devices where applicable.

1. Connect selector switches to bypass only those manual- and automatic-control devices that have no safety functions when switch is in manual-control position.

2. Connect selector switches with enclosed-controller circuit in both manual and automatic positions for safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high-temperature cutouts, and motor overload protectors.



B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed controller, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.



1. Inspect controllers, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation. Test and adjust controllers, components, and equipment.

2. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed-controller element, component, connecting motor supply, feeder, and control circuits.

3. Test continuity of each circuit. 4. Verify that voltages at controller locations are within plus or minus 10 percent of motor

nameplate rated voltages. If outside this range for any motor, notify Construction Manager Owner before starting the motor(s).

5. Test each motor for proper phase rotation. 6. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in

NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 7. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate

compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. 8. Perform the following infrared (thermographic) scan tests and inspections and prepare

reports:

a. Initial Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each multi-pole enclosed controller. Remove front panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

b. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each multi-pole enclosed controller 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

c. Instruments and Equipment: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.




D. Enclosed controllers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports including a certified report that identifies enclosed controllers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable switches, auxiliary relays, time-delay relays, timers, and overload-relay pickup and trip ranges.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions until enclosed controllers are ready to be energized and placed into service.

B. Replace controllers whose interiors have been exposed to water or other liquids prior to Substantial Completion.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain enclosed controllers.




SECTION 262923 - VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes separately enclosed, pre-assembled, combination VFCs, rated 600 V and less, for speed control of three-phase, squirrel-cage induction motors.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. BAS: Building automation system.

B. CE: Conformite Europeene (European Compliance).

C. CPT: Control power transformer.

D. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

E. IGBT: Insulated-gate bipolar transistor.

F. LAN: Local area network.

G. LED: Light-emitting diode.

H. MCP: Motor-circuit protector.

I. NC: Normally closed.

J. NO: Normally open.

K. OCPD: Overcurrent protective device.

L. PCC: Point of common coupling.

M. PID: Control action, proportional plus integral plus derivative.

N. PWM: Pulse-width modulated.

O. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.

VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS 262923 - 1


P. TDD: Total demand (harmonic current) distortion.

Q. THD(V): Total harmonic voltage demand.

R. VFC: Variable-frequency motor controller.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type and rating of VFC indicated. Include features, performance, electrical ratings, operating characteristics, shipping and operating weights, and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. LEED Submittals:

1. Product Data for Credit EA 5: For continuous metering equipment for energy consumption.

C. Shop Drawings: For each VFC indicated. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, and sections; and conduit entry locations and sizes, mounting arrangements, and details, including required clearances and service space around equipment.

1. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. Include the following:

a. Each installed unit's type and details. b. Factory-installed devices. c. Enclosure types and details. d. Nameplate legends. e. Short-circuit current (withstand) rating of enclosed unit. f. Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of each VFC and installed

devices. g. Specified modifications.

2. Schematic and Connection Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

D. Harmonic Analysis Study and Report: Comply with IEEE 399 and NETA Acceptance Testing Specification; identify the effects of nonlinear loads and their associated harmonic contributions on the voltages and currents throughout the electrical system. Analyze designated operating scenarios, including recommendations for VFC input filtering to limit TDD and THD(V) at each VFC to specified levels.

E. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, drawn to scale, showing dimensioned layout, required working clearances, and required area above and around VFCs. Show VFC layout and relationships between electrical components and adjacent structural and mechanical elements. Show support locations, type of support, and weight on each support. Indicate field measurements.

F. Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency.



G. Product Certificates: For each VFC, from manufacturer.

H. Source quality-control reports.

I. Field quality-control reports.

J. Operation and Maintenance Data: For VFCs to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting thermal-magnetic circuit breaker and MCP trip settings.

2. Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field-adjustable overload relays. 3. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing, adjusting, and reprogramming

microprocessor control modules. 4. Manufacturer's written instructions for setting field-adjustable timers, controls, and status

and alarm points.

K. Load-Current and Overload-Relay Heater List: Compile after motors have been installed, and arrange to demonstrate that selection of heaters suits actual motor nameplate, full-load currents.







A. If stored in space that is not permanently enclosed and air conditioned, remove loose packing and flammable materials from inside controllers and install temporary electric heating, with at least 250 W per controller.


A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation, capable of driving full load without derating, under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:

1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than 14 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F. 2. Ambient Storage Temperature: Not less than minus 4 deg F and not exceeding 140 deg F 3. Humidity: Less than 95 percent (noncondensing).



4. Altitude: Not exceeding 3300 feet.

B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for VFCs, including clearances between VFCs, and adjacent surfaces and other items.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate features of motors, load characteristics, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the following:

1. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load. 2. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence. 3. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.

B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.


1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace VFCs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.



1. Power Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.

2. Control Power Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than two of each size and type.

3. Indicating Lights: Two of each type and color installed. 4. Auxiliary Contacts: Furnish one spare(s) for each size and type of magnetic controller

installed. 5. Power Contacts: Furnish three spares for each size and type of magnetic contactor

installed.



2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following available manufacturers:

1. ABB. 2. Baldor Electric Company. 3. Danfoss Inc.; Danfoss Drives Div. 4. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. 5. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. 6. Rockwell Automation, Inc.; Allen-Bradley Brand. 7. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 8. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. 9. Toshiba International Corporation. 10. Yaskawa Electric America, Inc; Drives Division.

B. General Requirements for VFCs: Comply with NEMA ICS 7, NEMA ICS 61800-2, and UL 508C.

C. Application: Variable torque.

D. VFC Description: Variable-frequency power converter (rectifier, dc bus, and IGBT, PWM inverter) factory packaged in an enclosure, with integral disconnecting means and overcurrent and overload protection; listed and labeled by an NRTL as a complete unit; arranged to provide self-protection, protection, and variable-speed control of one or more three-phase induction motors by adjusting output voltage and frequency. 1. Units suitable for operation of inverter-duty motors as defined by NEMA MG 1,

Section IV, Part 31, "Definite-Purpose Inverter-Fed Polyphase Motors." 2. Listed and labeled for integrated short-circuit current (withstand) rating by an NRTL

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

E. Design and Rating: Match load type, such as fans, blowers, and pumps; and type of connection used between motor and load such as direct or through a power-transmission connection.

F. Output Rating: Three-phase; 10 to 60 Hz, with voltage proportional to frequency throughout voltage range; maximum voltage equals input voltage.

G. Unit Operating Requirements:

1. Input AC Voltage Tolerance: Plus 10 and minus 10 percent of VFC input voltage rating. 2. Input AC Voltage Unbalance: Not exceeding 3 percent. 3. Input Frequency Tolerance: Plus or minus 3 percent of VFC frequency rating. 4. Minimum Efficiency: 96 percent at 60 Hz, full load. 5. Minimum Displacement Primary-Side Power Factor: 98 percent under any load or speed

condition. 6. Minimum Short-Circuit Current (Withstand) Rating: 65 kA. 7. Ambient Temperature Rating: Not less than 14 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F.



8. Ambient Storage Temperature Rating: Not less than minus 4 deg F and not exceeding 140 deg F

9. Humidity Rating: Less than 95 percent (noncondensing). 10. Altitude Rating: Not exceeding 3300 feet. 11. Vibration Withstand: Comply with IEC 60068-2-6. 12. Overload Capability: 1.5 times the base load current for 60 seconds; minimum of 1.8

times the base load current for three seconds. 13. Starting Torque: Minimum 100 percent of rated torque from 3 to 60 Hz. 14. Speed Regulation: Plus or minus 1 percent. 15. Output Carrier Frequency: Selectable; 0.5 to 1 kHz. 16. Stop Modes: Programmable; includes fast, free-wheel, and dc injection braking. 17. Limit voltage THD to 5% at Full load operation. 18. Limit current THD to 5% at Full load operation. 19. Maximum individual harmonic 3% at full long operation.

H. Inverter Logic: Microprocessor based, 16 bit, isolated from all power circuits.

I. Isolated Control Interface: Allows VFCs to follow remote-control signal over a minimum 40:1 speed range.

1. Signal: Electrical.

J. Internal Adjustability Capabilities:

1. Minimum Speed: 5 to 25 percent of maximum rpm. 2. Maximum Speed: 80 to 100 percent of maximum rpm. 3. Acceleration: 0.1 to 999.9 seconds. 4. Deceleration: 0.1 to 999.9 seconds. 5. Current Limit: 30 to minimum of 150 percent of maximum rating.

K. Self-Protection and Reliability Features:

1. Input transient protection by means of surge suppressors to provide three-phase protection against damage from supply voltage surges 10 percent or more above nominal line voltage.

2. Loss of Input Signal Protection: Selectable response strategy, including speed default to a percent of the most recent speed, a preset speed, or stop; with alarm.

3. Under- and overvoltage trips. 4. Inverter overcurrent trips. 5. VFC and Motor Overload/Overtemperature Protection: Microprocessor-based thermal

protection system for monitoring VFCs and motor thermal characteristics, and for providing VFC overtemperature and motor overload alarm and trip; settings selectable via the keypad; NRTL approved.

6. Critical frequency rejection, with three selectable, adjustable deadbands. 7. Instantaneous line-to-line and line-to-ground overcurrent trips. 8. Loss-of-phase protection. 9. Reverse-phase protection. 10. Short-circuit protection. 11. Motor overtemperature fault. 12. Ground fault protection.



13. Over/under torque.

L. Automatic Reset/Restart: Attempt three restarts after drive fault or on return of power after an interruption and before shutting down for manual reset or fault correction; adjustable delay time between restart attempts.

M. Power-Interruption Protection: To prevent motor from re-energizing after a power interruption until motor has stopped, unless "Bidirectional Autospeed Search" feature is available and engaged.

N. Bidirectional Autospeed Search: Capable of starting VFC into rotating loads spinning in either direction and returning motor to set speed in proper direction, without causing damage to drive, motor, or load.

O. Torque Boost: Automatically varies starting and continuous torque to at least 1.5 times the minimum torque to ensure high-starting torque and increased torque at slow speeds.

P. Motor Temperature Compensation at Slow Speeds: Adjustable current fall-back based on output frequency for temperature protection of self-cooled, fan-ventilated motors at slow speeds.

Q. Integral Input Disconnecting Means and OCPD: NEMA KS 1, nonfusible switch, with power fuse block and current-limiting fuses with pad-lockable, door-mounted handle mechanism. 1. Disconnect Rating: Not less than 115 percent of NFPA 70 motor full-load current rating

or VFC input current rating, whichever is larger. 2. Auxiliary Contacts: NO/NC, arranged to activate before switch blades open.

2.2 CONTROLS AND INDICATION

A. Status Lights: Door-mounted LED indicators displaying the following conditions:

1. Power on. 2. Run. 3. Overvoltage. 4. Line fault. 5. Overcurrent. 6. External fault.

B. Panel-Mounted Operator Station: Manufacturer's standard front-accessible, sealed keypad and plain-English language digital display; allows complete programming, program copying, operating, monitoring, and diagnostic capability.

1. Keypad: In addition to required programming and control keys, include keys for HAND, OFF, and AUTO modes.

2. Security Access: Provide electronic security access to controls through identification and password with at least three levels of access: View only; view and operate; and view, operate, and service.



a. Control Authority: Supports at least four conditions: Off, local manual control at VFC, local automatic control at VFC, and automatic control through a remote source.

C. Historical Logging Information and Displays:

1. Real-time clock with current time and date. 2. Running log of total power versus time. 3. Total run time. 4. Fault log, maintaining last four faults with time and date stamp for each.

D. Indicating Devices: Digital displayand additional readout devices as required, mounted flush in VFC door and connected to display VFC parameters including, but not limited to:

1. Output frequency (Hz). 2. Motor speed (rpm). 3. Motor status (running, stop, fault). 4. Motor current (amperes). 5. Motor torque (percent). 6. Fault or alarming status (code). 7. PID feedback signal (percent). 8. DC-link voltage (V dc). 9. Set point frequency (Hz). 10. Motor output voltage (V ac).

E. BAS Interface: Factory-installed hardware and software to enable the BAS to monitor, control, and display VFC status and alarmsand energy usage. Allows VFC to be used with an external system within a multidrop LAN configuration; settings retained within VFC's nonvolatile memory.

1. Network Communications Ports: Ethernet and RS-422/485. 2. Embedded BAS Protocols for Network Communications: ASHRAE 135 BACnet

Echelon LonWorks ; protocols accessible via the communications ports.

2.3 ENCLOSURES

A. VFC Enclosures: NEMA 250, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.

1. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids: Type 12.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. General Requirements for Control-Circuit and Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 5; factory installed in VFC enclosure cover unless otherwise indicated.

1. Push Buttons, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: Standard-duty, type.



a. Push Buttons: Shrouded types; momentary. b. Pilot Lights: LED types; red and green; push to test. c. Selector Switches: Rotary type. d. Stop and Lockout Push-Button Station: Momentary-break, push-button station

with a factory-applied hasp arranged so padlock can be used to lock push button in depressed position with control circuit open.

B. Reversible NC/NO bypass contactor auxiliary contact(s).

C. Phase-Failure, Phase-Reversal, and Undervoltage and Overvoltage Relays: Solid-state sensing circuit with isolated output contacts for hard-wired connections. Provide adjustable undervoltage, overvoltage, and time-delay settings.

1. Current Transformers: Continuous current rating, basic impulse insulating level (BIL) rating, burden, and accuracy class suitable for connected circuitry. Comply with IEEE C57.13.

D. Breather and drain assemblies, to maintain interior pressure and release condensation in NEMA 250, Type 12 enclosures installed outdoors or in unconditioned interior spaces subject to humidity and temperature swings.


A. Testing: Test and inspect VFCs according to requirements in NEMA ICS 61800-2.

1. Test each VFC while connected to its specified motor. 2. Verification of Performance: Rate VFCs according to operation of functions and features

specified.

B. VFCs will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, surfaces, and substrates to receive VFCs, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine VFC before installation. Reject VFCs that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

C. Examine roughing-in for conduit systems to verify actual locations of conduit connections before VFC installation.




A. Coordinate layout and installation of VFCs with other construction including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.

B. Wall-Mounting Controllers: Install VFCs on walls with tops at uniform height and with disconnect operating handles not higher than 79 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated, and by bolting units to wall or mounting on lightweight structural-steel channels bolted to wall.

C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.

D. Install fuses in each fusible-switch VFC.

E. Install fuses in control circuits if not factory installed. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Fuses."

F. Install heaters in thermal-overload relays. Select heaters based on actual nameplate full-load amperes after motors have been installed.

G. Install, connect, and fuse thermal-protector monitoring relays furnished with motor-driven equipment.

H. Comply with NECA 1.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify VFCs, components, and control wiring. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."


2. Label each VFC with engraved nameplate. 3. Label each enclosure-mounted control and pilot device.

B. Operating Instructions: Frame printed operating instructions for VFCs, including control sequences and emergency procedures. Fabricate frame of finished metal, and cover instructions with clear acrylic plastic. Mount on front of VFC units.

3.4 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Install wiring between VFCs and remote devices and facility's central-control system. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Cables."

B. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.



C. Connect selector switches and other automatic control devices where applicable.

1. Connect selector switches to bypass only those manual- and automatic control devices that have no safety functions when switches are in manual-control position.

2. Connect selector switches with control circuit in both manual and automatic positions for safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high-temperature cutouts, and motor overload protectors.





C. Acceptance Testing Preparation:

1. Test insulation resistance for each VFC element, bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.



1. Inspect VFC, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation. Test and adjust controllers, components, and equipment.

2. Test insulation resistance for each VFC element, component, connecting motor supply, feeder, and control circuits.

3. Test continuity of each circuit. 4. Verify that voltages at VFC locations are within 10 percent of motor nameplate rated

voltages. If outside this range for any motor, notify Owner representative before starting the motor(s).

5. Test each motor for proper phase rotation. 6. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in

NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. 7. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate

compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.


E. VFCs will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies the VFC and describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations made after remedial action.


VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 3.6 STARTUP SERVICE



3.7 ADJUSTING

A. Program microprocessors for required operational sequences, status indications, alarms, event recording, and display features. Clear events memory after final acceptance testing and prior to Substantial Completion.

B. Set field-adjustable switches, auxiliary relays, time-delay relays, timers, and overload-relay pickup and trip ranges.

C. Adjust the trip settings of MCPs and thermal-magnetic circuit breakers with adjustable, instantaneous trip elements. Initially adjust to six times the motor nameplate full-load amperes and attempt to start motors several times, allowing for motor cool-down between starts. If tripping occurs on motor inrush, adjust settings in increments until motors start without tripping. Do not exceed eight times the motor full-load amperes (or 11 times for NEMA Premium Efficient motors if required). Where these maximum settings do not allow starting of a motor, notify Owner representative before increasing settings.

3.8 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat to maintain temperature according to manufacturer's written instructions until controllers are ready to be energized and placed into service.

B. Replace VFCs whose interiors have been exposed to water or other liquids prior to Substantial Completion.

3.9 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, reprogram, and maintain VFCs.




SECTION 263213 - ENGINE GENERATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes packaged engine-generator sets for standby power supply with the following features:

1. Diesel engine. 2. Unit-mounted cooling system. 3. Unit-mounted control and monitoring. 4. Load banks. 5. Outdoor enclosure.


1. Division 26 Section "Transfer Switches" for transfer switches including sensors and relays to initiate automatic-starting and -stopping signals for engine-generator sets.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Operational Bandwidth: The total variation from the lowest to highest value of a parameter over the range of conditions indicated, expressed as a percentage of the nominal value of the parameter.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of packaged engine generator indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. In addition, include the following:

1. Thermal damage curve for generator. 2. Time-current characteristic curves for generator protective device.


ENGINE GENERATORS 263213 - 1


1. Dimensioned outline plan and elevation drawings of engine-generator set and other components specified.

2. Design Calculations: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases.

3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Detail fabrication, including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include base weights.

4. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that day tank, engine-generator set, batteries, battery racks, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following:





D. Qualification Data: For installer manufacturer and testing agency.

E. Source quality-control test reports.

1. Certified summary of prototype-unit test report. 2. Certified Test Reports: For components and accessories that are equivalent, but not

identical, to those tested on prototype unit. 3. Certified Summary of Performance Tests: Certify compliance with specified requirement

to meet performance criteria for sensitive loads. 4. Report of factory test on units to be shipped for this Project, showing evidence of

compliance with specified requirements. 5. Report of sound generation. 6. Report of exhaust emissions showing compliance with applicable regulations. 7. Certified Torsional Vibration Compatibility: Comply with NFPA 110.

F. Field quality-control test reports.

G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For packaged engine generators to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. List of tools and replacement items recommended to be stored at Project for ready access. Include part and drawing numbers, current unit prices, and source of supply.



H. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.

1. Maintenance Proximity: Not more than four hours' normal travel time from Installer's place of business to Project site.

2. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for vibration isolators and seismic restraints of engine skid mounts, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer. Maintain, within 200 miles of Project site, a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance repairs.

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL), and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.


D. Source Limitations: Obtain packaged generator sets and auxiliary components through one source from a single manufacturer.

E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

F. Comply with ASME B15.1.

G. Comply with NFPA 37.

H. Comply with NFPA 70.

I. Comply with NFPA 99.

J. Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 2 emergency power supply system.

K. Comply with UL 2200.

L. Engine Exhaust Emissions: Comply with applicable state and local government requirements.

M. Noise Emission: Comply with applicable state and local government requirements for maximum noise level at adjacent property boundaries due to sound emitted by generator set


VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS


1. Fuses: One for every 10 of each type and rating, but no fewer than one of each. 2. Indicator Lamps: Two for every six of each type used, but no fewer than two of each. 3. Filters: One set each of lubricating oil, fuel, and combustion-air filters.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Onan/Cummins Power Generation DQ HAA (275KW/344KVA) or a comparable product by one of the following:

1. Caterpillar; Engine Div. 2. Spectrum Detroit Diesel.

2.2 ENGINE-GENERATOR SET

A. Factory-assembled and -tested, engine-generator set.

B. Mounting Frame: Maintain alignment of mounted components without depending on concrete foundation; and have lifting attachments.

1. Rigging Diagram: Inscribed on metal plate permanently attached to mounting frame to indicate location and lifting capacity of each lifting attachment and generator-set center of gravity.

C. Capacities and Characteristics:

1. Power Output Ratings: 275KW stand by rating at 120/208V, with capacity as required to operate as a unit as evidenced by records of prototype testing.

2. Output Connections: Three-phase, four wire. 3. Nameplates: For each major system component to identify manufacturer's name and

address, and model and serial number of component.

D. Generator-Set Performance:

1. Steady-State Voltage Operational Bandwidth: 3 percent of rated output voltage from no load to full load.

2. Transient Voltage Performance: Not more than 20 percent variation for 50 percent step-load increase or decrease. Voltage shall recover and remain within the steady-state operating band within three seconds.



3. Steady-State Frequency Operational Bandwidth: 0.5 percent of rated frequency from no load to full load.

4. Steady-State Frequency Stability: When system is operating at any constant load within the rated load, there shall be no random speed variations outside the steady-state operational band and no hunting or surging of speed.

5. Transient Frequency Performance: Less than 5 percent variation for 50 percent step-load increase or decrease. Frequency shall recover and remain within the steady-state operating band within five seconds.

6. Output Waveform: At no load, harmonic content measured line to line or line to neutral shall not exceed 5 percent total and 3 percent for single harmonics. Telephone influence factor, determined according to NEMA MG 1, shall not exceed 50 percent.

7. Sustained Short-Circuit Current: For a 3-phase, bolted short circuit at system output terminals, system shall supply a minimum of 250 percent of rated full-load current for not less than 10 seconds and then clear the fault automatically, without damage to generator system components.

8. Start Time: Comply with NFPA 110, Type 10, system requirements.

2.3 ENGINE

A. Fuel: Fuel oil, Grade DF-2 .

B. Rated Engine Speed: 1800 rpm.

C. Maximum Piston Speed for Four-Cycle Engines: 2250 fpm.

D. Lubrication System: The following items are mounted on engine or skid:

1. Filter and Strainer: Rated to remove 90 percent of particles 5 micrometers and smaller while passing full flow.

2. Thermostatic Control Valve: Control flow in system to maintain optimum oil temperature. Unit shall be capable of full flow and is designed to be fail-safe.

3. Crankcase Drain: Arranged for complete gravity drainage to an easily removable container with no disassembly and without use of pumps, siphons, special tools, or appliances.

E. Engine Fuel System:

1. Main Fuel Pump: Mounted on engine. Pump ensures adequate primary fuel flow under starting and load conditions.

2. Relief-Bypass Valve: Automatically regulates pressure in fuel line and returns excess fuel to source.

F. Coolant Jacket Heater: Electric-immersion type, factory installed in coolant jacket system. Comply with NFPA 110 requirements for Level 1 equipment for heater capacity.

G. Governor: Adjustable isochronous, with speed sensing.

H. Cooling System: Closed loop, liquid cooled, with radiator factory mounted on engine-generator-set mounting frame and integral engine-driven coolant pump.



1. Coolant: Solution of 50 percent ethylene-glycol-based antifreeze and 50 percent water, with anticorrosion additives as recommended by engine manufacturer.

2. Size of Radiator: Adequate to contain expansion of total system coolant from cold start to 110 percent load condition.

3. Expansion Tank: Constructed of welded steel plate and rated to withstand maximum closed-loop coolant system pressure for engine used. Equip with gage glass and petcock.

4. Temperature Control: Self-contained, thermostatic-control valve modulates coolant flow automatically to maintain optimum constant coolant temperature as recommended by engine manufacturer.

5. Coolant Hose: Flexible assembly with inside surface of nonporous rubber and outer covering of aging-, ultraviolet-, and abrasion-resistant fabric.

a. Rating: 50-psig maximum working pressure with coolant at 180 deg F, and noncollapsible under vacuum.

b. End Fittings: Flanges or steel pipe nipples with clamps to suit piping and equipment connections.

I. Muffler/Silencer: Critical type, sized as recommended by engine manufacturer and selected with exhaust piping system to not exceed engine manufacturer's engine backpressure requirements.

1. Minimum sound attenuation of 25 dB at 500 Hz. 2. Sound level measured at a distance of 10 feet from exhaust discharge after installation is

complete shall be 85 dBA or less.

J. Air-Intake Filter: Heavy-duty, engine-mounted air cleaner with replaceable dry-filter element and "blocked filter" indicator.

K. Starting System: 24-V electric, with negative ground.

1. Components: Sized so they will not be damaged during a full engine-cranking cycle with ambient temperature at maximum specified in Part 1 "Project Conditions" Article.

2. Cranking Motor: Heavy-duty unit that automatically engages and releases from engine flywheel without binding.

3. Cranking Cycle: As required by NFPA 110 for system level specified. 4. Battery: Adequate capacity within ambient temperature range specified in Part 1 "Project

Conditions" Article to provide specified cranking cycle at least three times without recharging.

5. Battery Cable: Size as recommended by engine manufacturer for cable length indicated. Include required interconnecting conductors and connection accessories.

6. Battery Compartment: Factory fabricated of metal with acid-resistant finish and thermal insulation. Thermostatically controlled heater shall be arranged to maintain battery above 10 deg C regardless of external ambient temperature within range specified in Part 1 "Project Conditions" Article. Include accessories required to support and fasten batteries in place.

7. Battery-Charging Alternator: Factory mounted on engine with solid-state voltage regulation and 35-A minimum continuous rating.

8. Battery Charger: Current-limiting, automatic-equalizing and float-charging type. Unit shall comply with UL 1236 and include the following features:



a. Operation: Equalizing-charging rate of 10 A shall be initiated automatically after battery has lost charge until an adjustable equalizing voltage is achieved at battery terminals. Unit shall then be automatically switched to a lower float-charging mode and shall continue to operate in that mode until battery is discharged again.

b. Automatic Temperature Compensation: Adjust float and equalize voltages for variations in ambient temperature from minus 40 deg F to plus 140 deg F to prevent overcharging at high temperatures and undercharging at low temperatures.

c. Automatic Voltage Regulation: Maintain constant output voltage regardless of input voltage variations up to plus or minus 10 percent.

d. Ammeter and Voltmeter: Flush mounted in door. Meters shall indicate charging rates.

e. Safety Functions: Sense abnormally low battery voltage and close contacts providing low battery voltage indication on control and monitoring panel. Sense high battery voltage and loss of ac input or dc output of battery charger. Either condition shall close contacts that provide a battery-charger malfunction indication at system control and monitoring panel.

f. Enclosure and Mounting: NEMA 250, Type 1, wall-mounted cabinet.

2.4 FUEL OIL STORAGE

A. Comply with NFPA 30.

B. Day Tank: Comply with UL 142, freestanding, factory-fabricated fuel tank assembly, with integral, float-controlled transfer pump and the following features:

1. Containment: Integral rupture basin with a capacity of 150 percent of nominal capacity of day tank.

a. Leak Detector: Locate in rupture basin and connect to provide audible and visual alarm in the event of day-tank leak.

2. Tank Capacity: As recommended by engine manufacturer for an uninterrupted period of 4 hours' operation at 100 percent of rated power output of engine-generator system without being refilled.

3. Pump Capacity: Exceeds maximum flow of fuel drawn by engine-mounted fuel supply pump at 110 percent of rated capacity, including fuel returned from engine.

4. Low-Level Alarm Sensor: Liquid-level device operates alarm contacts at 25 percent of normal fuel level.

5. High-Level Alarm Sensor: Liquid-level device operates alarm and redundant fuel shutoff contacts at midpoint between overflow level and 100 percent of normal fuel level.

6. Piping Connections: Factory-installed fuel supply and return lines from tank to engine; local fuel fill, vent line, overflow line; and tank drain line with shutoff valve.

7. Redundant High-Level Fuel Shutoff: Actuated by high-level alarm sensor in day tank to operate a separate motor device that disconnects day-tank pump motor. Sensor shall signal solenoid valve, located in fuel suction line between fuel storage tank and day tank, to close. Both actions shall remain in shutoff state until manually reset. Shutoff action shall initiate an alarm signal to control panel but shall not shut down engine-generator set.


VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 2.5 CONTROL AND MONITORING

A. Automatic Starting System Sequence of Operation: When mode-selector switch on the control and monitoring panel is in the automatic position, remote-control contacts in one or more separate automatic transfer switches initiate starting and stopping of generator set. When mode-selector switch is switched to the on position, generator set starts. The off position of same switch initiates generator-set shutdown. When generator set is running, specified system or equipment failures or derangements automatically shut down generator set and initiate alarms. Operation of a remote emergency-stop switch also shuts down generator set.

B. Manual Starting System Sequence of Operation: Switching on-off switch on the generator control panel to the on position starts generator set. The off position of same switch initiates generator-set shutdown. When generator set is running, specified system or equipment failures or derangements automatically shut down generator set and initiate alarms. Operation of a remote emergency-stop switch also shuts down generator set.

C. Configuration: Operating and safety indications, protective devices, basic system controls, and engine gages shall be grouped in a common control and monitoring panel mounted on the generator set. Mounting method shall isolate the control panel from generator-set vibration.

D. Configuration: Operating and safety indications, protective devices, basic system controls, and engine gages shall be grouped in a common wall-mounted control and monitoring panel.

E. Configuration: Operating and safety indications, protective devices, basic system controls, engine gages, instrument transformers, generator disconnect switch or circuit breaker, and other indicated components shall be grouped in a combination control and power panel. Control and monitoring section of panel shall be isolated from power sections by steel barriers. Panel features shall include the following:

1. Wall-Mounting Cabinet Construction: Rigid, self-supporting steel unit complying with NEMA ICS 6. Power bus shall be copper. Bus, bus supports, control wiring, and temperature rise shall comply with UL 891.

2. Switchboard Construction: Freestanding unit complying with Division 26 Section "Switchboards."

3. Switchgear Construction: Freestanding unit complying with Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Switchgear."

4. Current and Potential Transformers: Instrument accuracy class.

F. Indicating and Protective Devices and Controls: As required by NFPA 110 for Level 2 system, and the following:

1. AC voltmeter. 2. AC ammeter. 3. AC frequency meter. 4. DC voltmeter (alternator battery charging). 5. Engine-coolant temperature gage. 6. Engine lubricating-oil pressure gage. 7. Running-time meter. 8. Ammeter-voltmeter, phase-selector switch(es). 9. Generator-voltage adjusting rheostat.



10. Fuel tank derangement alarm. 11. Fuel tank high-level shutdown of fuel supply alarm. 12. Generator overload.

G. Indicating and Protective Devices and Controls:

1. AC voltmeter. 2. AC ammeter. 3. AC frequency meter. 4. DC voltmeter (alternator battery charging). 5. Engine-coolant temperature gage. 6. Engine lubricating-oil pressure gage. 7. Running-time meter. 8. Ammeter-voltmeter, phase-selector switch(es). 9. Generator-voltage adjusting rheostat. 10. Start-stop switch. 11. Overspeed shutdown device. 12. Coolant high-temperature shutdown device. 13. Coolant low-level shutdown device. 14. Oil low-pressure shutdown device. 15. Fuel tank derangement alarm. 16. Fuel tank high-level shutdown of fuel supply alarm. 17. Generator overload.

H. Supporting Items: Include sensors, transducers, terminals, relays, and other devices and include wiring required to support specified items. Locate sensors and other supporting items on engine or generator, unless otherwise indicated.

I. Common Remote Audible Alarm: Signal the occurrence of any events listed below without differentiating between event types. Connect so that after an alarm is silenced, clearing of initiating condition will reactivate alarm until silencing switch is reset.

1. Engine high-temperature shutdown. 2. Lube-oil, low-pressure shutdown. 3. Overspeed shutdown. 4. Remote emergency-stop shutdown. 5. Engine high-temperature prealarm. 6. Lube-oil, low-pressure prealarm. 7. Fuel tank, low-fuel level. 8. Low coolant level.

J. Remote Alarm Annunciator: Comply with NFPA 99. An LED labeled with proper alarm conditions shall identify each alarm event and a common audible signal shall sound for each alarm condition. Silencing switch in face of panel shall silence signal without altering visual indication. Connect so that after an alarm is silenced, clearing of initiating condition will reactivate alarm until silencing switch is reset. Cabinet and faceplate are surface- or flush-mounting type to suit mounting conditions indicated.

K. Remote Emergency-Stop Switch: Flush; wall mounted, unless otherwise indicated; and labeled. Push button shall be protected from accidental operation.


VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 2.6 GENERATOR OVERCURRENT AND FAULT PROTECTION

A. Generator Circuit Breaker: Molded-case, thermal-magnetic type; 100 percent rated; complying with NEMA AB 1 and UL 489.

1. Tripping Characteristic: Designed specifically for generator protection. 2. Trip Rating: Matched to generator rating. 3. Shunt Trip: Connected to trip breaker when generator set is shut down by other

protective devices. 4. Mounting: Adjacent to or integrated with control and monitoring panel.

B. Generator Circuit Breaker: Molded-case, electronic-trip type; 100 percent rated; complying with UL 489.

1. Tripping Characteristics: Adjustable long-time and short-time delay and instantaneous. 2. Trip Settings: Selected to coordinate with generator thermal damage curve. 3. Shunt Trip: Connected to trip breaker when generator set is shut down by other

protective devices. 4. Mounting: Adjacent to or integrated with control and monitoring panel.

C. Generator Protector: Microprocessor-based unit shall continuously monitor current level in each phase of generator output, integrate generator heating effect over time, and predict when thermal damage of alternator will occur. When signaled by generator protector or other generator-set protective devices, a shunt-trip device in the generator disconnect switch shall open the switch to disconnect the generator from load circuits. Protector shall perform the following functions:

1. Initiates a generator overload alarm when generator has operated at an overload equivalent to 110 percent of full-rated load for 60 seconds. Indication for this alarm is integrated with other generator-set malfunction alarms.

2. Under single or three-phase fault conditions, regulates generator to 300 percent of rated full-load current for up to 10 seconds.

3. As overcurrent heating effect on the generator approaches the thermal damage point of the unit, protector switches the excitation system off, opens the generator disconnect device, and shuts down the generator set.

4. Senses clearing of a fault by other overcurrent devices and controls recovery of rated voltage to avoid overshoot.

2.7 GENERATOR, EXCITER, AND VOLTAGE REGULATOR

A. Comply with NEMA MG 1.

B. Drive: Generator shaft shall be directly connected to engine shaft. Exciter shall be rotated integrally with generator rotor.

C. Electrical Insulation: Class H or Class F.

D. Stator-Winding Leads: Brought out to terminal box to permit future reconnection for other voltages if required.



E. Construction shall prevent mechanical, electrical, and thermal damage due to vibration, overspeed up to 125 percent of rating, and heat during operation at 110 percent of rated capacity.

F. Enclosure: Dripproof.

G. Instrument Transformers: Mounted within generator enclosure.

H. Voltage Regulator: Solid-state type, separate from exciter, providing performance as specified.

1. Adjusting rheostat on control and monitoring panel shall provide plus or minus 5 percent adjustment of output-voltage operating band.

I. Strip Heater: Thermostatically controlled unit arranged to maintain stator windings above dew point.

J. Windings: Two-thirds pitch stator winding and fully linked amortisseur winding.

K. Subtransient Reactance: 12 percent, maximum.

2.8 LOAD BANK

A. Description: Temporary (for acceptance test) outdoor, weatherproof, remote-controlled, forced-air-cooled, resistive and reactive unit capable of providing a balanced 3-phase, delta-connected load to generator set at 110 percent rated-system capacity, at 80 percent power factor, lagging. Unit may be composed of separate resistive and reactive load banks controlled by a common control panel. Unit shall be capable of selective control of load in 25 percent steps and with minimum step changes of approximately 5 and 10 percent available.

B. Resistive Load Elements: Corrosion-resistant chromium alloy with ceramic and steel supports. Elements shall be double insulated and designed for repetitive on-off cycling. Elements shall be mounted in removable aluminized-steel heater cases.

C. Reactive Load Elements: Epoxy-encapsulated reactor coils.

D. Load-Bank Heat Dissipation: Integral fan with totally enclosed motor shall provide uniform cooling airflow through load elements. Airflow and coil operating current shall be such that, at maximum load, with ambient temperature at the upper end of specified range, load-bank elements operate at not more than 50 percent of maximum continuous temperature rating of resistance elements.

E. Load Element Switching: Remote-controlled contactors switch groups of load elements. Contactor coils are rated 120 V. Contactors shall be located in a separate NEMA 250, Type 3R enclosure within load-bank enclosure, accessible from exterior through hinged doors with tumbler locks.

F. Contactor Enclosures: Heated by thermostatically controlled strip heaters to prevent condensation.



G. Load-Bank Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 3R, complying with NEMA ICS 6. Louvers at cooling-air intake and discharge openings shall prevent entry of rain and snow. Openings for airflow shall be screened with 1/2-inch- square, galvanized-steel mesh. Reactive load bank shall include automatic shutters at air intake and discharge.

H. Protective Devices: Power input circuits to load banks shall be fused, and fuses shall be selected to coordinate with generator circuit breaker. Fuse blocks shall be located in contactor enclosure. Cooling airflow and overtemperature sensors shall automatically shut down and lock out load bank until manually reset. Safety interlocks on access panels and doors shall disconnect load power, control, and heater circuits. Fan motor shall be separately protected by overload and short-circuit devices. Short-circuit devices shall be noninterchangeable fuses with 200,000-A interrupting capacity.

I. Remote-Control Panel: Separate from load bank in NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosure with a control power switch and pilot light, and switches controlling groups of load elements.

J. Control Sequence: Control panel may be preset for adjustable single-step loading of generator during automatic exercising.

2.9 OUTDOOR GENERATOR-SET ENCLOSURE

A. Description: Vandal-resistant, weatherproof sound attenuating steel housing, wind resistant up to 145 mph. Multiple panels shall be lockable and provide adequate access to components requiring maintenance. Panels shall be removable by one person without tools. Instruments and control shall be mounted within enclosure.

B. Description: Prefabricated or preengineered walk-in enclosure with the following features:

1. Construction: Galvanized-steel, metal-clad, integral structural-steel-framed building erected on concrete foundation.

2. Structural Design and Anchorage: Comply with ASCE 7 for wind loads. 3. Space Heater: Thermostatically controlled and sized to prevent condensation. 4. Louvers: Equipped with bird screen and filter arranged to permit air circulation when

engine is not running while excluding exterior dust, birds, and rodents. 5. Hinged Doors: With padlocking provisions. 6. Ventilation: Louvers equipped with bird screen and filter arranged to permit air

circulation while excluding exterior dust, birds, and rodents. 7. Thermal Insulation: Manufacturer's standard materials and thickness selected in

coordination with space heater to maintain winter interior temperature within operating limits required by engine-generator-set components.

8. Muffler Location: External to enclosure.

C. Engine Cooling Airflow through Enclosure: Maintain temperature rise of system components within required limits when unit operates at 110 percent of rated load for 2 hours with ambient temperature at top of range specified in system service conditions.

1. Louvers: Fixed-engine, cooling-air inlet and discharge. Storm-proof and drainable louvers prevent entry of rain and snow.



2. Automatic Dampers: At engine cooling-air inlet and discharge. Dampers shall be closed to reduce enclosure heat loss in cold weather when unit is not operating.

D. Interior Lights with Switch: Factory-wired, vaporproof-type fixtures within housing; arranged to illuminate controls and accessible interior. Arrange for external electrical connection.

1. AC lighting system and connection point for operation when remote source is available. 2. DC lighting system for operation when remote source and generator are both unavailable.

E. Convenience Outlets: Factory wired, GFCI. Arrange for external electrical connection.

2.10 MOTORS

A. General requirements for motors are specified in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."


2. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Electrical devices and connections are specified in Division 26 Sections.

2.11 VIBRATION ISOLATION DEVICES

A. Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators with seismic restraint.

1. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due to wind loads or if weight is removed; factory-drilled baseplate bonded to 1/4-inchthick, elastomeric isolator pad attached to baseplate underside; and adjustable equipment mounting and leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation.

2. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of compressed height of the spring at rated load.

3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of required deflection at rated load. 4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without

deformation or failure.

2.12 FINISHES

A. Indoor and Outdoor Enclosures and Components: Manufacturer's standard finish over corrosion-resistant pretreatment and compatible primer.


A. Prototype Testing: Factory test engine-generator set using same engine model, constructed of identical or equivalent components and equipped with identical or equivalent accessories.



1. Tests: Comply with NFPA 110, Level 1 Energy Converters and with IEEE 115.

B. Project-Specific Equipment Tests: Before shipment, factory test engine-generator set and other system components and accessories manufactured specifically for this Project. Perform tests at rated load and power factor. Include the following tests:

1. Test components and accessories furnished with installed unit that are not identical to those on tested prototype to demonstrate compatibility and reliability.

2. Full load run. 3. Maximum power. 4. Voltage regulation. 5. Transient and steady-state governing. 6. Single-step load pickup. 7. Safety shutdown. 8. Provide 14 days' advance notice of tests and opportunity for observation of tests by

Owner's representative. 9. Report factory test results within 10 days of completion of test.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, equipment bases, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting packaged engine-generator performance.

B. Examine roughing-in of piping systems and electrical connections. Verify actual locations of connections before packaged engine-generator installation.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with packaged engine-generator manufacturers' written installation and alignment instructions and with NFPA 110.

B. Install packaged engine generator to provide access, without removing connections or accessories, for periodic maintenance.

C. Install packaged engine generator with restrained spring isolators having a minimum deflection of 1 inch on 4-inch- high concrete base. Secure sets to anchor bolts installed in concrete bases. Concrete base construction is specified in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

D. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by equipment manufacturers but not specified to be factory mounted.


VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties.

B. Connect fuel, cooling-system, and exhaust-system piping adjacent to packaged engine generator to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect engine exhaust pipe to engine with flexible connector.

D. Connect fuel piping to engines with a gate valve and union and flexible connector.

1. Diesel storage tanks, tank accessories, piping, valves, and specialties for fuel systems are specified in Division 23 Section "Facility Fuel-Oil Piping."

E. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

F. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components according to Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" and Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. Report results in writing.

C. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.



1. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection for "AC Generators and for Emergency Systems" specified in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.

2. NFPA 110 Acceptance Tests: Perform tests required by NFPA 110 that are additional to those specified here including, but not limited to, single-step full-load pickup test.



3. Battery Tests: Equalize charging of battery cells according to manufacturer's written instructions. Record individual cell voltages.

a. Measure charging voltage and voltages between available battery terminals for full-charging and float-charging conditions. Check electrolyte level and specific gravity under both conditions.

b. Test for contact integrity of all connectors. Perform an integrity load test and a capacity load test for the battery.

c. Verify acceptance of charge for each element of the battery after discharge. d. Verify that measurements are within manufacturer's specifications.

4. Battery-Charger Tests: Verify specified rates of charge for both equalizing and float-charging conditions.

5. System Integrity Tests: Methodically verify proper installation, connection, and integrity of each element of engine-generator system before and during system operation. Check for air, exhaust, and fluid leaks.

6. Exhaust-System Back-Pressure Test: Use a manometer with a scale exceeding 40-inch wg. Connect to exhaust line close to engine exhaust manifold. Verify that back pressure at full-rated load is within manufacturer's written allowable limits for the engine.

7. Exhaust Emissions Test: Comply with applicable government test criteria. 8. Voltage and Frequency Transient Stability Tests: Use recording oscilloscope to measure

voltage and frequency transients for 50 and 100 percent step-load increases and decreases, and verify that performance is as specified.

9. Harmonic-Content Tests: Measure harmonic content of output voltage under 25 percent and at 100 percent of rated linear load. Verify that harmonic content is within specified limits.

10. Noise Level Tests: Measure A-weighted level of noise emanating from generator-set installation, including engine exhaust and cooling-air intake and discharge, at four locations in a 30 Ft diameter circle, and compare measured levels with required values.

E. Coordinate tests with tests for transfer switches and run them concurrently.

F. Test instruments shall have been calibrated within the last 12 months, traceable to standards of NIST, and adequate for making positive observation of test results. Make calibration records available for examination on request.

G. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

H. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.

I. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

J. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

K. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until specified requirements are met.



L. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and measured insulation resistances, time delays, and other values and observations. Attach a label or tag to each tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests.

M. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each power wiring termination and each bus connection. Remove all access panels so terminations and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

1. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

2. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

3. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies terminations and connections checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain packaged engine generators. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."




SECTION 263600 - TRANSFER SWITCHES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes transfer switches rated 600 V and less, including the following:

1. Automatic transfer switches. 2. By-pass isolation switches.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, weights, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details showing minimum clearances, conductor entry provisions, gutter space, installed features and devices, and material lists for each switch specified.

1. Single-Line Diagram: Show connections between transfer switch, bypass/isolation switch, power sources, and load; and show interlocking provisions for each combined transfer switch and bypass/isolation switch.

C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that transfer switches accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems." Include the following:


a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."

b. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."



TRANSFER SWITCHES 263600 - 1


D. Qualification Data: For manufacturer and testing agency.


F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Features and operating sequences, both automatic and manual. 2. List of all factory settings of relays; provide relay-setting and calibration instructions,

including software, where applicable.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Maintain a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance repairs within a response period of less than eight hours from time of notification.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a member company of the InterNational Electrical Testing Association or is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.


C. Source Limitations: Obtain bypass/isolation switches and remote annunciator panel through one source from a single manufacturer.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

E. Comply with NEMA ICS 1.


G. Comply with NFPA 99.

H. Comply with NFPA 110.

I. Comply with UL 1008 unless requirements of these Specifications are stricter.



A. Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electrical service:

1. Notify Resident Engineer no fewer than five days in advance of proposed interruption of electrical service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without Resident Engineer’s written permission.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Contactor Transfer Switches:

a. AC Data Systems, Inc. b. Caterpillar; Engine Div. c. Emerson; ASCO Power Technologies, LP. d. Generac Power Systems, Inc. e. GE Zenith Controls. f. Kohler Power Systems; Generator Division. g. Onan/Cummins Power Generation; Industrial Business Group. h. Russelectric, Inc. i. Spectrum Detroit Diesel.

2.2 GENERAL TRANSFER-SWITCH PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

A. Indicated Current Ratings: Apply as defined in UL 1008 for continuous loading and total system transfer, including tungsten filament lamp loads not exceeding 30 percent of switch ampere rating, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Tested Fault-Current Closing and Withstand Ratings: Adequate for duty imposed by protective devices at installation locations in Project under the fault conditions indicated, based on testing according to UL 1008.

1. Where transfer switch includes internal fault-current protection, rating of switch and trip unit combination shall exceed indicated fault-current value at installation location.



C. Solid-State Controls: Repetitive accuracy of all settings shall be plus or minus 2 percent or better over an operating temperature range of minus 20 to plus 70 deg C.

D. Resistance to Damage by Voltage Transients: Components shall meet or exceed voltage-surge withstand capability requirements when tested according to IEEE C62.41. Components shall meet or exceed voltage-impulse withstand test of NEMA ICS 1.

E. Electrical Operation: Accomplish by a nonfused, momentarily energized solenoid or electric-motor-operated mechanism, mechanically and electrically interlocked in both directions.

F. Switch Characteristics: Designed for continuous-duty repetitive transfer of full-rated current between active power sources.

1. Limitation: Switches using molded-case switches or circuit breakers or insulated-case circuit-breaker components are not acceptable.

2. Switch Action: Double throw; mechanically held in both directions. 3. Contacts: Silver composition or silver alloy for load-current switching. Conventional

automatic transfer-switch units, rated 225 A and higher, shall have separate arcing contacts.

G. Neutral Terminal: Solid and fully rated, unless otherwise indicated.

H. Heater: Equip switches exposed to outdoor temperatures and humidity, and other units indicated, with an internal heater. Provide thermostat within enclosure to control heater.

I. Annunciation, Interface Components: Devices at transfer switches for communicating with remote annunciators, panels shall have communication capability matched with remote device.

J. Factory Wiring: Train and bundle factory wiring and label, consistent with Shop Drawings, either by color-code or by numbered or lettered wire and cable tape markers at terminations. Color-coding and wire and cable tape markers are specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Designated Terminals: Pressure type, suitable for types and sizes of field wiring indicated.

2. Power-Terminal Arrangement and Field-Wiring Space: Suitable for top, side, or bottom entrance of feeder conductors as indicated.

3. Control Wiring: Equipped with lugs suitable for connection to terminal strips.

K. Enclosures: General-purpose NEMA 250, Type 3R, complying with NEMA ICS 6 and UL 508, unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES

A. Comply with Level 2 equipment according to NFPA 110.

B. Switching Arrangement: Double-throw type, incapable of pauses or intermediate position stops during normal functioning, unless otherwise indicated.



C. Manual Switch Operation: Under load, with door closed and with either or both sources energized. Transfer time is same as for electrical operation. Control circuit automatically disconnects from electrical operator during manual operation.

D. Manual Switch Operation: Unloaded. Control circuit automatically disconnects from electrical operator during manual operation.

E. Signal-Before-Transfer Contacts: A set of normally open/normally closed dry contacts operates in advance of retransfer to normal source. Interval is adjustable from 1 to 30 seconds.

F. Digital Communication Interface: Matched to capability of remote annunciator or annunciator and control panel.

G. Transfer Switches Based on Molded-Case-Switch Components: Comply with NEMA AB 1, UL 489, and UL 869A.

H. Automatic Closed-Transition Transfer Switches: Include the following functions and characteristics:

1. Fully automatic make-before-break operation. 2. Load transfer without interruption, through momentary interconnection of both power

sources not exceeding 100 ms. 3. Initiation of No-Interruption Transfer: Controlled by in-phase monitor and sensors

confirming both sources are present and acceptable.

a. Initiation occurs without active control of generator. b. Controls ensure that closed-transition load transfer closure occurs only when the 2

sources are within plus or minus 5 electrical degrees maximum, and plus or minus 5 percent maximum voltage difference.

4. Failure of power source serving load initiates automatic break-before-make transfer.

I. In-Phase Monitor: Factory-wired, internal relay controls transfer so it occurs only when the two sources are synchronized in phase. Relay compares phase relationship and frequency difference between normal and emergency sources and initiates transfer when both sources are within 15 electrical degrees, and only if transfer can be completed within 60 electrical degrees. Transfer is initiated only if both sources are within 2 Hz of nominal frequency and 70 percent or more of nominal voltage.

J. Motor Disconnect and Timing Relay: Controls designate starters so they disconnect motors before transfer and reconnect them selectively at an adjustable time interval after transfer. Control connection to motor starters is through wiring external to automatic transfer switch. Time delay for reconnecting individual motor loads is adjustable between 1 and 60 seconds, and settings are as indicated. Relay contacts handling motor-control circuit inrush and seal currents are rated for actual currents to be encountered.

K. Programmed Neutral Switch Position: Switch operator has a programmed neutral position arranged to provide a midpoint between the two working switch positions, with an intentional, time-controlled pause at midpoint during transfer. Pause is adjustable from 0.5 to 30 seconds



minimum and factory set for 0.5 second, unless otherwise indicated. Time delay occurs for both transfer directions. Pause is disabled unless both sources are live.

L. Automatic Transfer-Switch Features:

1. Undervoltage Sensing for Each Phase of Normal Source: Sense low phase-to-ground voltage on each phase. Pickup voltage shall be adjustable from 85 to 100 percent of nominal, and dropout voltage is adjustable from 75 to 98 percent of pickup value. Factory set for pickup at 90 percent and dropout at 85 percent.

2. Adjustable Time Delay: For override of normal-source voltage sensing to delay transfer and engine start signals. Adjustable from zero to six seconds, and factory set for one second.

3. Voltage/Frequency Lockout Relay: Prevent premature transfer to generator. Pickup voltage shall be adjustable from 85 to 100 percent of nominal. Factory set for pickup at 90 percent. Pickup frequency shall be adjustable from 90 to 100 percent of nominal. Factory set for pickup at 95 percent.

4. Time Delay for Retransfer to Normal Source: Adjustable from 0 to 30 minutes, and factory set for 10 minutes to automatically defeat delay on loss of voltage or sustained undervoltage of emergency source, provided normal supply has been restored.

5. Test Switch: Simulate normal-source failure. 6. Switch-Position Pilot Lights: Indicate source to which load is connected. 7. Source-Available Indicating Lights: Supervise sources via transfer-switch normal- and

emergency-source sensing circuits.

a. Normal Power Supervision: Green light with nameplate engraved "Normal Source Available."

b. Emergency Power Supervision: Red light with nameplate engraved "Emergency Source Available."

8. Unassigned Auxiliary Contacts: Two normally open, single-pole, double-throw contacts for each switch position, rated 10 A at 240-V ac.

9. Transfer Override Switch: Overrides automatic retransfer control so automatic transfer switch will remain connected to emergency power source regardless of condition of normal source. Pilot light indicates override status.

10. Engine Starting Contacts: One isolated and normally closed, and one isolated and normally open; rated 10 A at 32-V dc minimum.

11. Engine Shutdown Contacts: Time delay adjustable from zero to five minutes, and factory set for five minutes. Contacts shall initiate shutdown at remote engine-generator controls after retransfer of load to normal source.

12. Engine-Generator Exerciser: Solid-state, programmable-time switch starts engine generator and transfers load to it from normal source for a preset time, then retransfers and shuts down engine after a preset cool-down period. Initiates exercise cycle at preset intervals adjustable from 7 to 30 days. Running periods are adjustable from 10 to 30 minutes. Factory settings are for 7-day exercise cycle, 20-minute running period, and 5-minute cool-down period. Exerciser features include the following:

a. Exerciser Transfer Selector Switch: Permits selection of exercise with and without load transfer.

b. Push-button programming control with digital display of settings.



c. Integral battery operation of time switch when normal control power is not available.

2.4 BYPASS/ISOLATION SWITCHES

A. Comply with requirements for Level 1 equipment according to NFPA 110.

B. Description: Manual type, arranged to select and connect either source of power directly to load, isolating transfer switch from load and from both power sources. Include the following features for each combined automatic transfer switch and bypass/isolation switch:

1. Means to lock bypass/isolation switch in the position that isolates transfer switch with an arrangement that permits complete electrical testing of transfer switch while isolated. While isolated, interlocks prevent transfer-switch operation, except for testing or maintenance.

2. Drawout Arrangement for Transfer Switch: Provide physical separation from live parts and accessibility for testing and maintenance operations.

3. Bypass/Isolation Switch Current, Voltage, Closing, and Short-Circuit Withstand Ratings: Equal to or greater than those of associated automatic transfer switch, and with same phase arrangement and number of poles.

4. Contact temperatures of bypass/isolation switches shall not exceed those of automatic transfer-switch contacts when they are carrying rated load.

5. Operability: Constructed so load bypass and transfer-switch isolation can be performed by 1 person in no more than 2 operations in 15 seconds or less.

6. Legend: Manufacturer's standard legend for control labels and instruction signs shall describe operating instructions.

7. Maintainability: Fabricate to allow convenient removal of major components from front without removing other parts or main power conductors.

C. Interconnection of Bypass/Isolation Switches with Automatic Transfer Switches: Factory-installed copper bus bars; plated at connection points and braced for the indicated available short-circuit current.

2.5 REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR SYSTEM

A. Functional Description: Remote annunciator panel shall annunciate conditions for indicated transfer switches. Annunciation shall include the following:

1. Sources available, as defined by actual pickup and dropout settings of transfer-switch controls.

2. Switch position. 3. Switch in test mode. 4. Failure of communication link.

B. Annunciator Panel: LED-lamp type with audible signal and silencing switch.

1. Indicating Lights: Grouped for each transfer switch monitored.



2. Label each group, indicating transfer switch it monitors, location of switch, and identity of load it serves.

3. Mounting: Flush, modular, steel cabinet, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Lamp Test: Push-to-test or lamp-test switch on front panel.

C. Malfunction of annunciation panel or communication link shall not affect functions of automatic transfer switch. In the event of failure of communication link, automatic transfer switch automatically reverts to stand-alone, self-contained operation.

D. Remote Annunciation Panel: Solid-state components. Include the following features:

1. Controls and indicating lights grouped together for each transfer switch. 2. Digital Communication Capability: Matched to that of transfer switches supervised. 3. Mounting: Surface, modular, steel cabinet, unless otherwise indicated.


A. Factory test and inspect components, assembled switches, and associated equipment. Ensure proper operation. Check transfer time and voltage, frequency, and time-delay settings for compliance with specified requirements. Perform dielectric strength test complying with NEMA ICS 1.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Design each fastener and support to carry load indicated by seismic requirements and according to seismic-restraint details. See Division 26 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."

B. Floor-Mounting Switch: Anchor to floor by bolting.

1. Concrete Bases: 4 inches high, reinforced, with chamfered edges. Extend base no more than 4 inches in all directions beyond the maximum dimensions of switch, unless otherwise indicated or unless required for seismic support. Construct concrete bases according to Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."

C. Annunciator Panel Mounting: Surface on wall, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Identify components according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

E. Set field-adjustable intervals and delays, relays, and engine exerciser clock.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Wiring to Remote Components: Match type and number of cables and conductors to control and communication requirements of transfer switches as recommended by manufacturer.



Increase raceway sizes at no additional cost to Owner if necessary to accommodate required wiring.

B. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

C. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. Report results in writing.

C. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in testing.

2. After installing equipment and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements.


4. Measure insulation resistance phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with insulation-resistance tester. Include external annunciation and control circuits. Use test voltages and procedure recommended by manufacturer. Comply with manufacturer's specified minimum resistance.

a. Check for electrical continuity of circuits and for short circuits. b. Inspect for physical damage, proper installation and connection, and integrity of

barriers, covers, and safety features. c. Verify that manual transfer warnings are properly placed. d. Perform manual transfer operation.

5. After energizing circuits, demonstrate interlocking sequence and operational function for each switch at least three times.

a. Simulate power failures of normal source to automatic transfer switches and of emergency source with normal source available.

b. Simulate loss of phase-to-ground voltage for each phase of normal source. c. Verify time-delay settings. d. Verify pickup and dropout voltages by data readout or inspection of control

settings. e. Test bypass/isolation unit functional modes and related automatic transfer-switch

operations.



f. Perform contact-resistance test across main contacts and correct values exceeding 500 microhms and values for 1 pole deviating by more than 50 percent from other poles.

g. Verify proper sequence and correct timing of automatic engine starting, transfer time delay, retransfer time delay on restoration of normal power, and engine cool-down and shutdown.

6. Ground-Fault Tests: Coordinate with testing of ground-fault protective devices for power delivery from both sources.

a. Verify grounding connections and locations and ratings of sensors.

D. Testing Agency's Tests and Inspections:

1. After installing equipment and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements.


3. Measure insulation resistance phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground with insulation-resistance tester. Include external annunciation and control circuits. Use test voltages and procedure recommended by manufacturer. Comply with manufacturer's specified minimum resistance.

a. Check for electrical continuity of circuits and for short circuits. b. Inspect for physical damage, proper installation and connection, and integrity of

barriers, covers, and safety features. c. Verify that manual transfer warnings are properly placed. d. Perform manual transfer operation.

4. After energizing circuits, demonstrate interlocking sequence and operational function for each switch at least three times.

a. Simulate power failures of normal source to automatic transfer switches and of emergency source with normal source available.

b. Simulate loss of phase-to-ground voltage for each phase of normal source. c. Verify time-delay settings. d. Verify pickup and dropout voltages by data readout or inspection of control

settings. e. Test bypass/isolation unit functional modes and related automatic transfer-switch

operations. f. Perform contact-resistance test across main contacts and correct values exceeding

500 microhms and values for 1 pole deviating by more than 50 percent from other poles.

g. Verify proper sequence and correct timing of automatic engine starting, transfer time delay, retransfer time delay on restoration of normal power, and engine cool-down and shutdown.

5. Ground-Fault Tests: Coordinate with testing of ground-fault protective devices for power delivery from both sources.



a. Verify grounding connections and locations and ratings of sensors.

E. Coordinate tests with tests of generator and run them concurrently.

F. Report results of tests and inspections in writing. Record adjustable relay settings and measured insulation and contact resistances and time delays. Attach a label or tag to each tested component indicating satisfactory completion of tests.

G. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

H. Infrared Scanning: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, perform an infrared scan of each switch. Remove all access panels so joints and connections are accessible to portable scanner.

1. Follow-up Infrared Scanning: Perform an additional follow-up infrared scan of each switch 11 months after date of Substantial Completion.

2. Instrument: Use an infrared scanning device designed to measure temperature or to detect significant deviations from normal values. Provide calibration record for device.

3. Record of Infrared Scanning: Prepare a certified report that identifies switches checked and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain transfer switches and related equipment as specified below. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."

B. Coordinate this training with that for generator equipment.




SECTION 264113 - LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR STRUCTURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes lightning protection for structures .

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: For air terminals and mounting accessories.

1. Layout of the lightning protection system, along with details of the components to be used in the installation.

2. Include indications for use of raceway, data on how concealment requirements will be met, and calculations required by NFPA 780 for bonding of grounded and isolated metal bodies.

C. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and manufacturer. Include data on listing or certification by UL.

D. Certification, signed by Contractor, that roof adhesive is approved by manufacturer of roofing material.


F. Comply with recommendations in NFPA 780, Annex D, "Inspection and Maintenance of Lightning Protection Systems," for maintenance of the lightning protection system.

G. Other Informational Submittals: Plans showing dimensioned as-built locations of grounding features, including the following:

1. Ground rods. 2. Ground loop conductor.

LIGHTNING PROTECTION FOR STRUCTURES 264113 - 1


A. Installer Qualifications: Certified by UL LPI as a Master Installer/Designer, trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.

B. System Certificate:

1. UL Master Label. 2. LPI System Certificate. 3. UL Master Label Recertification.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 780, "Definitions" Article.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of lightning protection with installation of other building systems and components, including electrical wiring, supporting structures and building materials, metal bodies requiring bonding to lightning protection components, and building finishes.

B. Coordinate installation of air terminals attached to roof systems with roofing manufacturer and Installer.

C. Flashings of through-roof assemblies shall comply with roofing manufacturers' specifications.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. Comply with UL 96 and NFPA 780.

B. Roof-Mounted Air Terminals: NFPA 780, Class I, copper unless otherwise indicated.


a. East Coast Lightning Equipment Inc. b. ERICO International Corporation. c. Harger. d. Heary Bros. Lightning Protection Co. Inc. e. Independent Protection Co. f. Preferred Lightning Protection. g. Robbins Lightning, Inc. h. Thompson Lightning Protection, Inc.



2. Air Terminals More than 24 Inches Long: With brace attached to the terminal at not less than half the height of the terminal.

3. Single-Membrane, Roof-Mounted Air Terminals: Designed specifically for single-membrane roof system materials. Comply with requirements in Division 07 roofing Sections.

C. Main and Bonding Conductors: Copper.

D. Ground Loop Conductor: The same size and type as the main conductor except tinned.

E. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel; 3/4 inch in diameter by 10 feet long.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install lightning protection components and systems according to UL 96A and NFPA 780.

B. Install conductors with direct paths from air terminals to ground connections. Avoid sharp bends.

C. Conceal the following conductors:

1. System conductors. 2. Down conductors. 3. Interior conductors. 4. Conductors within normal view of exterior locations at grade within 200 feet of building.

D. Cable Connections: Use crimped or bolted connections for all conductor splices and connections between conductors and other components. Use exothermic-welded connections in underground portions of the system.

E. Air Terminals on Single-Ply Membrane Roofing: Comply with roofing membrane and adhesive manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Bond extremities of vertical metal bodies exceeding 60 feet in length to lightning protection components.

G. Ground Loop: Install ground-level, potential equalization conductor and extend around the perimeter of structure.

1. Bury ground ring not less than 24 inches from building foundation. 2. Bond ground terminals to the ground loop. 3. Bond grounded building systems to the ground loop conductor within 12 feet of grade

level.

H. Bond lightning protection components with intermediate-level interconnection loop conductors to grounded metal bodies of building at 60-foot intervals.


VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 3.2 CORROSION PROTECTION

A. Do not combine materials that can form an electrolytic couple that will accelerate corrosion in the presence of moisture unless moisture is permanently excluded from junction of such materials.

B. Use conductors with protective coatings where conditions cause deterioration or corrosion of conductors.


A. Notify Architect at least 48 hours in advance of inspection before concealing lightning protection components.

B. UL Inspection: Meet requirements to obtain a UL Master Label for system.

C. LPI System Inspection: Meet requirements to obtain an LPI System Certificate.




SECTION 265100 - INTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Interior lighting fixtures, lamps, and ballasts. 2. Emergency lighting units. 3. Exit signs. 4. Lighting fixture supports.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. BF: Ballast factor.

B. CCT: Correlated color temperature.

C. CRI: Color-rendering index.

D. LER: Luminaire efficacy rating.

E. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.

F. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:

1. Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions. 2. Emergency lighting units including battery and charger. 3. Ballast, including BF. 4. Energy-efficiency data. 5. Life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy-efficiency data for lamps. 6. Photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests, complying with

IESNA Lighting Measurements Testing & Calculation Guides, of each lighting fixture

INTERIOR LIGHTING 265100 - 1


type. The adjustment factors shall be for lamps, ballasts, and accessories identical to those indicated for the lighting fixture as applied in this Project.

a. Testing Agency Certified Data: For indicated fixtures, photometric data shall be certified by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining fixtures shall be certified by manufacturer.

b. Manufacturer Certified Data: Photometric data shall be certified by a manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.

B. Qualification Data: For qualified agencies providing photometric data for lighting fixtures.

C. Product Certificates: For each type of ballast for bi-level and dimmer-controlled fixtures, from manufacturer.


E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1. Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project; use ANSI and manufacturers' codes.

F. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by manufacturers' laboratories that are accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.



1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty for Emergency Lighting Batteries: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer of battery-powered emergency lighting unit agrees to repair or replace components of rechargeable batteries that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period for Emergency Lighting Unit Batteries: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for the remaining nine years.



2. Warranty Period for Emergency Fluorescent Ballast and Self-Powered Exit Sign Batteries: Seven years from date of Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for the remaining six years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings .

2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS

A. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures.

B. Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5 and NEMA LE 5A as applicable.

C. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.

D. Sheet Metal Components: Steel unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging.

E. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position.

F. Diffusers and Globes:

1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.

a. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch minimum unless otherwise indicated. b. UV stabilized.

G. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps and ballasts. Labels shall be located where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place.

1. Label shall include the following lamp and ballast characteristics:

a. "USE ONLY" and include specific lamp type. b. Lamp diameter code (T-4, T-5, T-8, T-12, etc.), tube configuration (twin, quad,

triple, etc.), base type, and nominal wattage for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires.

c. Start type (preheat, rapid start, instant start, etc.) for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires.



d. CCT and CRI for all luminaires.

2.3 BALLASTS FOR LINEAR FLUORESCENT LAMPS

A. General Requirements for Electronic Ballasts:

1. Comply with UL 935 and with ANSI C82.11. 2. Designed for type and quantity of lamps served. 3. Ballasts shall be designed for full light output unless another BF, dimmer, or bi-level

control is indicated. 4. Sound Rating: Class A. 5. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent. 6. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A or better. 7. Operating Frequency: 42 kHz or higher. 8. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less. 9. BF: 0.88 or higher. 10. Power Factor: 0.95 or higher. 11. Parallel Lamp Circuits: Multiple lamp ballasts shall comply with ANSI C82.11 and shall

be connected to maintain full light output on surviving lamps if one or more lamps fail.

B. luminaires controlled by occupancy sensors shall have programmed-start ballasts.

C. Ballasts for Dimmer-Controlled Lighting Fixtures: Electronic type.

1. Dimming Range: 100 to 5 percent of rated lamp lumens. 2. Ballast Input Watts: Can be reduced to 20 percent of normal. 3. Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific dimming control system

and lamp type indicated. 4. Control: Coordinate wiring from ballast to control device to ensure that the ballast,

controller, and connecting wiring are compatible.

2.4 BALLASTS FOR COMPACT FLUORESCENT LAMPS

A. Description: Electronic-programmed rapid-start type, complying with UL 935 and with ANSI C 82.11, designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated. Ballast shall be designed for full light output unless dimmer or bi-level control is indicated:

1. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit. 2. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement. 3. Sound Rating: Class A. 4. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent. 5. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A or better. 6. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher. 7. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less. 8. BF: 0.95 or higher unless otherwise indicated. 9. Power Factor: 0.98 or higher.



2.5 EMERGENCY FLUORESCENT POWER UNIT

A. Internal Type: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit, factory mounted within lighting fixture body and compatible with ballast. Comply with UL 924.

1. Emergency Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp(s) continuously at an output of 1100 lumens each. Connect unswitched circuit to battery-inverter unit and switched circuit to fixture ballast.

2. Nightlight Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp continuously. 3. Test Push Button and Indicator Light: Visible and accessible without opening fixture or

entering ceiling space.

a. Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability.

b. Indicator Light: LED indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.

4. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type. 5. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type with sealed power transfer

relay. 6. Integral Self-Test: Factory-installed electronic device automatically initiates code-

required test of unit emergency operation at required intervals. Test failure is annunciated by an integral audible alarm and a flashing red LED.

2.6 EXIT SIGNS

A. General Requirements for Exit Signs: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Internally Lighted Signs: 1. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 50,000 hours minimum rated lamp life. 2. Self-Powered Exit Signs (Battery Type): Integral automatic charger in a self-contained

power pack.

a. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type. b. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay. c. Operation: Relay automatically energizes lamp from battery when circuit voltage

drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger.

d. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability.

e. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.



2.7 FLUORESCENT LAMPS

A. T8 rapid-start lamps, rated 32 W maximum, nominal length of 48 inches, 2800 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 77 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, and average rated life 20,000 hours unless otherwise indicated.

B. T8 rapid-start lamps, rated 17 W maximum, nominal length of 24 inches, 1300 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 77 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, and average rated life of 20,000 hours unless otherwise indicated.

C. Compact Fluorescent Lamps: 4-Pin, CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, average rated life of 10,000 hours at three hours operation per start, and suitable for use with dimming ballasts unless otherwise indicated. 1. 26 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 1800 initial lumens (minimum). 2. 42 W: T4, triple tube, rated 3200 initial lumens (minimum).

2.8 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS

A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel- and angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.

B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish same as fixture.

C. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount a single fixture. Finish same as fixture.

D. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage.

E. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Lighting fixtures:

1. Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install lamps in each luminaire.

B. Temporary Lighting: If it is necessary, and approved by Architect, to use permanent luminaires for temporary lighting, install and energize the minimum number of luminaires necessary. When construction is sufficiently complete, remove the temporary luminaires, disassemble, clean thoroughly, install new lamps, and reinstall.

C. Lay-in Ceiling Lighting Fixtures Supports: Use grid as a support element.



1. Install ceiling support system rods or wires, independent of the ceiling suspension devices, for each fixture. Locate not more than 6 inches from lighting fixture corners.

2. Support Clips: Fasten to lighting fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each fixture corner with clips that are UL listed for the application.

3. Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceiling plans or center in acoustical panel, and support fixtures independently with at least two 3/4-inch metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees.

4. Install at least one independent support rod or wire from structure to a tab on lighting fixture. Wire or rod shall have breaking strength of the weight of fixture at a safety factor of 3.

D. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install labels with panel and circuit numbers on concealed junction and outlet boxes. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."


A. Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery and retransfer to normal.

B. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards.

3.4 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Burn-in all lamps that require specific aging period to operate properly, prior to occupancy by Owner. Burn-in fluorescent and compact fluorescent lamps intended to be dimmed, for at least 100 hours at full voltage.




SECTION 265200 - COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes commissioning process requirements for electrical systems, assemblies, and equipment.

1.3 DEFINITIONS



C. Electrical Systems: Power conductors and cables, identification, transformers, switchboards, panels, power distribution units, circuit breakers, emergency generator, transfers switches and lighting.





C. Attend testing, adjusting, and operation review and coordination meeting.

D. Participate in electrical systems, assemblies, equipment, and component maintenance orientation and inspection as directed by the CxA.



COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 265200 - 1

VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 1.5 CxA'S RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Provide Project-specific construction checklists and commissioning process test procedures for actual electrical systems, assemblies, equipment, and components to be furnished and installed as part of the construction contract.


C. Verify testing, adjusting, and balancing of electrical load are complete.






3. Process and schedule for completing construction checklists and manufacturer's pre-testing and startup checklists for electrical systems, assemblies, equipment, and components to be verified and tested.

4. Certificate of completion certifying that installation, pre-testing checks, and testing procedures have been completed.

5. Certificate of readiness certifying that electrical systems, subsystems, equipment, and associated controls are ready for testing.

6. Test and inspection reports and certificates. 7. Corrective action documents. 8. Verification of performance testing, adjusting, and test and inspection reports.

1.7 SUBMITTALS


B. Certificates of completion of installation, pre-testing, and test and inspection activities.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Certify that electrical systems, subsystems, and equipment have been installed, inspected, calibrated, and tested and are operating according to the Owner’s Project Requirements.



B. Certify that electrical instrumentation and control systems have been completed and calibrated, that they are operating according to the Owner’s Project Requirements.

C. Certify that testing, adjusting, and electrical load balancing procedures have been completed and that testing, adjusting, and balancing reports have been submitted, discrepancies corrected, and corrective work approved.

D. Set systems, subsystems, and equipment into operating mode to be tested (e.g., normal shutdown, normal auto position, normal manual position, emergency power, and alarm conditions).

E. Inspect and verify the position of each device and interlock identified on checklists.

F. Check safety cutouts, alarms, and interlocks with smoke control and life-safety systems during each mode of operation.

G. Testing Instrumentation: Install measuring instruments and logging devices to record test data as directed by the CxA.

3.2 TESTING AND FIELD VERIFICATION

A. Prior to performance or testing and verification work, provide copies of reports, sample forms, checklists, and certificates to the CxA.

B. Notify the CxA at least 7 days in advance of testing and load balancing Work, and provide access for the CxA to witness testing and balancing Work.

C. Provide technicians, instrumentation, and tools to verify testing and balancing of electrical systems at the direction of the CxA.

1. The testing agency and Contractor shall use the same instruments (by model and serial number) that were used when original data were collected.

2. Perform test and inspections specified for the following electrical systems components:

a. Electrical power cables. b. Grounding and bonding. c. Emergency generator. d. Low voltage transformer. e. Switchboards and panel boards. f. Convenience receptacles. g. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers. h. Transfers switches. i. Interior lighting.

3. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identified equipment included and that describes scanning results where this test is specified.

4. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken and observations after remedial action.


VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 3.3 GENERAL TESTING REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide technicians, instrumentation, and tools to perform commissioning test at the direction of the CxA. See requirements on drawing E-0.

B. Scope of electrical system testing shall include entire electrical system installation. Testing shall include measuring capacities and effectiveness of operational and control functions.

C. Test all operating modes, interlocks, control responses, and responses to abnormal or emergency conditions, and verify proper response of building automation system controllers and sensors.

D. The CxA along with the electrical Contractor, testing agencies, and factory authorized service representatives shall prepare detailed testing plans, procedures, and checklists for electrical systems, subsystems, and equipment.

E. Tests will be performed using design conditions whenever possible.

F. Simulated conditions may need to be imposed using an artificial load when it is not practical to test under design conditions. Before simulating conditions, calibrate testing instruments. Provide equipment to simulate loads. Set simulated conditions as directed by the CxA and document simulated conditions and methods of simulation. After tests, return settings to normal operating conditions.

G. The CxA may direct that set points be altered when simulating conditions is not practical.

H. The CxA may direct that sensor values be altered with a signal generator when design or simulating conditions and altering set points are not practical.

I. If tests cannot be completed because of a deficiency outside the scope of the electrical system, document the deficiency and report it to the Owner. After deficiencies are resolved, reschedule tests.

3.4 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS, SUBSYSTEMS, AND EQUIPMENT TESTING PROCEDURES

A. Electrical Instrumentation and Control System Testing: Field testing plans and testing requirements are specified along Division 26 Specification Sections.

B. Conduct performance test specified on drawing E-0.




SECTION 270500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Communications equipment coordination and installation. 2. Sleeves for pathways and cables. 3. Sleeve seals. 4. Grout. 5. Common communications installation requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS


B. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For sleeve seals.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of communications equipment:

1. To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that reduce headroom are indicated.

2. To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to other installations.

3. To allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope. 4. So connecting pathways, cables, wireways, cable trays, and busways will be clear of

obstructions and of the working and access space of other equipment.

B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed.

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS 270500 - 1


2.1 SLEEVES FOR PATHWAYS AND CABLES

A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.

B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel.

1. Minimum Metal Thickness:

a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and no side more than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch.

b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or more than, 50 inches and 1 or more sides equal to, or more than, 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch.

2.2 SLEEVE SEALS

A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and pathway or cable.


a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. c. Metraflex Co. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit. Include type and number required for material and size of pathway or cable.

3. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel. Include two for each sealing element. 4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to

sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.

2.3 GROUT

A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.



3.1 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit for wall-mounting items.

C. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom consistent with these requirements.

D. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components of both communications equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity.

E. Right of Way: Give to piping systems installed at a required slope.

3.2 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS PENETRATIONS

A. Communications penetrations occur when pathways, cables, wireways, or cable trays penetrate concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls, or fire-rated floor and wall assemblies.

B. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls.

C. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.

D. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall.

E. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls.

F. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level.

G. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and pathway or cable, unless indicated otherwise.

H. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry

1. Promptly pack grout solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect grout while curing.

I. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and pathway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants.".



J. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

K. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pathway or cable and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION

A. Install to seal exterior wall penetrations.

B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for pathway or cable material and size. Position pathway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pathway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.4 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies for communications installations to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."




SECTION 283111 - DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Fire-alarm control unit. 2. Manual fire-alarm boxes. 3. System smoke detectors. 4. Heat detectors. 5. Notification appliances.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. LED: Light-emitting diode.

B. NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Noncoded, UL-certified addressable system, with multiplexed signal transmission, dedicated to fire-alarm service only.

B. Noncoded addressable system, with automatic sensitivity control of certain smoke detectors and multiplexed signal transmission, dedicated to fire-alarm service only.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. General Submittal Requirements:

1. Submittals shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction prior to submitting them to Architect.

2. Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications:

a. Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire-alarm system design. b. NICET-certified fire-alarm technician, Level III minimum.

DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM 283111 - 1


c. Licensed or certified by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

C. Shop Drawings: For fire-alarm system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Comply with recommendations in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter in NFPA 72.

2. Include voltage drop calculations for notification appliance circuits. 3. Include battery-size calculations. 4. Include performance parameters and installation details for each detector, verifying that

each detector is listed for complete range of air velocity, temperature, and humidity possible when air-handling system is operating.

5. Include plans, sections, and elevations of heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning ducts, drawn to scale and coordinating installation of duct smoke detectors and access to them. Show critical dimensions that relate to placement and support of sampling tubes, detector housing, and remote status and alarm indicators. Locate detectors according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

6. Include floor plans to indicate final outlet locations showing address of each addressable device. Show size and route of cable and conduits.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For smoke and heat detectors indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Drawings showing the location of each smoke and heat detector, ratings of each, and installation details as needed to comply with listing conditions of the detector.

2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting the spacing and sensitivity of detection, complying with NFPA 72.

E. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.


G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire-alarm systems and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Comply with the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72.

2. Provide "Record of Completion Documents" according to NFPA 72 article "Permanent Records" in the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter.

3. Record copy of site-specific software. 4. Provide "Maintenance, Inspection and Testing Records" according to NFPA 72 article of

the same name and include the following:

a. Frequency of testing of installed components. b. Frequency of inspection of installed components. c. Requirements and recommendations related to results of maintenance.



d. Manufacturer's user training manuals.

5. Manufacturer's required maintenance related to system warranty requirements. 6. Abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at fire-alarm control unit. 7. Copy of NFPA 25.

H. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation:

1. Software operating and upgrade manuals. 2. Program Software Backup: On magnetic media or compact disk, complete with data

files. 3. Device address list. 4. Printout of software application and graphic screens.


A. Installer Qualifications: Personnel shall be trained and certified by manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project.

B. Source Limitations for Fire-Alarm System and Components: Obtain fire-alarm system from single source from single manufacturer. Components shall be compatible with, and operate as, an extension of existing system.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

D. NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to NFPA 72 by a UL-listed alarm company.

1.7 SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT

A. Comply with UL 864.

B. Technical Support: Beginning with Substantial Completion, provide software support for two years.

C. Upgrade Service: Update software to latest version at Project completion. Install and program software upgrades that become available within two years from date of Substantial Completion. Upgrading software shall include operating system. Upgrade shall include new or revised licenses for use of software.

1. Provide 30 days' notice to Owner to allow scheduling and access to system and to allow Owner to upgrade computer equipment if necessary.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Amseco - a Potter brand; Potter Electric Signal Company. 2. Faraday; Siemens Building Technologies, Inc. 3. Fire Control Instruments, Inc.; a Honeywell company. 4. Fire Lite Alarms; a Honeywell company. 5. Gamewell; a Honeywell company. 6. GE Infrastructure; a unit of General Electric Company. 7. Gentex Corporation. 8. NOTIFIER; a Honeywell company. 9. Siemens Building Technologies, Inc.; Fire Safety Division. 10. Silent Knight; a Honeywell company. 11. SimplexGrinnell LP; a Tyco International company.

2.2 SYSTEMS OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION

A. Fire-alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices[ and systems]:

1. Manual stations. 2. Heat detectors. 3. Smoke detectors.

B. Fire-alarm signal shall initiate the following actions:

1. Continuously operate alarm notification appliances. 2. Identify alarm at fire-alarm control unit.

C. System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions:

1. Open circuits, shorts, and grounds in designated circuits. 2. Opening, tampering with, or removing alarm-initiating and supervisory signal-initiating

devices. 3. Loss of primary power at fire-alarm control unit. 4. Ground or a single break in fire-alarm control unit internal circuits. 5. Abnormal ac voltage at fire-alarm control unit. 6. Break in standby battery circuitry. 7. Failure of battery charging. 8. Abnormal position of any switch at fire-alarm control unit or annunciator.

D. System Trouble and Supervisory Signal Actions: Initiate notification appliance and annunciate at fire-alarm control unit. Record the event on system printer.



2.3 FIRE-ALARM CONTROL UNIT

A. General Requirements for Fire-Alarm Control Unit:

1. Field-programmable, microprocessor-based, modular, power-limited design with electronic modules, complying with UL 864 and listed and labeled by an NRTL.

a. System software and programs shall be held in flash electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), retaining the information through failure of primary and secondary power supplies.

b. Include a real-time clock for time annotation of events on the event recorder and printer.

2. Addressable initiation devices that communicate device identity and status.

a. Smoke sensors shall additionally communicate sensitivity setting and allow for adjustment of sensitivity at fire-alarm control unit.

b. Temperature sensors shall additionally test for and communicate the sensitivity range of the device.

B. Alphanumeric Display and System Controls: Arranged for interface between human operator at fire-alarm control unit and addressable system components including annunciation and supervision. Display alarm, supervisory, and component status messages and the programming and control menu.

1. Annunciator and Display: Liquid-crystal type, 1 line(s) of 40 characters, minimum. 2. Keypad: Arranged to permit entry and execution of programming, display, and control

commands and to indicate control commands to be entered into the system for control of smoke-detector sensitivity and other parameters.

C. Circuits:

1. Initiating Device, Notification Appliance, and Signaling Line Circuits: NFPA 72, Class A.

a. Initiating Device Circuits: Style D. b. Notification Appliance Circuits: Style Z. c. Signaling Line Circuits: Style 6. d. Install no more than 50 addressable devices on each signaling line circuit.

D. Notification Appliance Circuit: Operation shall sound in a temporal pattern.

E. Primary Power: 24-V dc obtained from 120-V ac service and a power-supply module. Initiating devices, notification appliances, signaling lines, trouble signals, supervisory signals shall be powered by 24-V dc source.

1. Alarm current draw of entire fire-alarm system shall not exceed 80 percent of the power-supply module rating.



F. Secondary Power: 24-V dc supply system with batteries, automatic battery charger, and automatic transfer switch.

1. Batteries: Sealed lead calcium .

2.4 MANUAL FIRE-ALARM BOXES

A. General Requirements for Manual Fire-Alarm Boxes: Comply with UL 38. Boxes shall be finished in red with molded, raised-letter operating instructions in contrasting color; shall show visible indication of operation; and shall be mounted on recessed outlet box. If indicated as surface mounted, provide manufacturer's surface back box.

1. Single-action mechanism, breaking-glass or plastic-rod type; with integral addressable module arranged to communicate manual-station status (normal, alarm, or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.

2. Station Reset: Key- or wrench-operated switch.

2.5 SYSTEM SMOKE DETECTORS

A. General Requirements for System Smoke Detectors:

1. Comply with UL 268; operating at 24-V dc, nominal. 2. Detectors shall be four -wire type. 3. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm,

or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit. 4. Base Mounting: Detector and associated electronic components shall be mounted in a

twist-lock module that connects to a fixed base. Provide terminals in the fixed base for connection to building wiring.

5. Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to restore them to normal operation.

6. Integral Visual-Indicating Light: LED type indicating detector has operated and power-on status.

B. Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:

1. Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be able to identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting.

2. An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to manually access the following for each detector:

a. Primary status. b. Device type. c. Present average value. d. Present sensitivity selected. e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).

C. Ionization Smoke Detector:



1. Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be able to identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting.

2. An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to manually access the following for each detector:

a. Primary status. b. Device type. c. Present average value. d. Present sensitivity selected. e. Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).

2.6 HEAT DETECTORS

A. General Requirements for Heat Detectors: Comply with UL 521.

B. Heat Detector, Fixed-Temperature Type: Actuated by temperature that exceeds a fixed temperature of 190 deg F.

1. Mounting: Adapter plate for outlet box mounting. 2. Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm,

or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.

2.7 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES

A. General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Individually addressed, connected to a signaling line circuit, equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system connections.

1. Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a single-mounting assembly, equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for system connections.

B. Chimes, High-Level Output: Vibrating type, 81-dBA minimum rated output.

C. Visible Notification Appliances: Xenon strobe lights comply with UL 1971, with clear or nominal white polycarbonate lens mounted on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is engraved in minimum 1-inch- high letters on the lens.

1. Rated Light Output: a. 15/30/75/110 cd, selectable in the field.

2. Mounting: Wall mounted unless otherwise indicated. 3. For units with guards to prevent physical damage, light output ratings shall be determined

with guards in place. 4. Flashing shall be in a temporal pattern, synchronized with other units. 5. Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals. 6. Mounting Faceplate: Factory finished, red.



2.8 DIGITAL ALARM COMMUNICATOR TRANSMITTER

A. Digital alarm communicator transmitter shall be acceptable to the remote central station and shall comply with UL 632 and be listed and labeled by an NRTL.

B. Functional Performance: Unit shall receive an alarm, supervisory, or trouble signal from fire-alarm control unit and automatically capture one telephone line(s) and dial a preset number for a remote 24 Hr manned guard station. When contact is made with guard station, signals shall be transmitted. If service on line is interrupted for longer than 45 seconds, transmitter shall initiate a local trouble signal and transmit the signal indicating loss of telephone line to the remote alarm receiving station over the remaining line. Transmitter shall automatically report telephone service restoration to the guard stattion. If service is lost on both telephone lines, transmitter shall initiate the local trouble signal.

C. Local functions and display at the digital alarm communicator transmitter shall include the following:

1. Verification that both telephone lines are available. 2. Programming device. 3. LED display. 4. Manual test report function and manual transmission clear indication. 5. Communications failure with the central station or fire-alarm control unit.

D. Digital data transmission shall include the following:

1. Address of the alarm-initiating device. 2. Address of the supervisory signal. 3. Address of the trouble-initiating device. 4. Loss of ac supply or loss of power. 5. Low battery. 6. Abnormal test signal. 7. Communication bus failure.

E. Secondary Power: Integral rechargeable battery and automatic charger.

F. Self-Test: Conducted automatically every 24 hours with report transmitted to central station.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NFPA 72 for installation of fire-alarm equipment.

B. Equipment Mounting: Install fire-alarm control unit on finished floor with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches above the finished floor.

C. Smoke- or Heat-Detector Spacing:



1. Comply with NFPA 72, "Smoke-Sensing Fire Detectors" Section in the "Initiating Devices" Chapter, for smoke-detector spacing.

2. Comply with NFPA 72, "Heat-Sensing Fire Detectors" Section in the "Initiating Devices" Chapter, for heat-detector spacing.

3. Smooth ceiling spacing shall not exceed 30 feet. 4. Spacing of detectors for irregular areas, for irregular ceiling construction, and for high

ceiling areas shall be determined according to Appendix A in NFPA 72. 5. HVAC: Locate detectors not closer than 3 feet from air-supply diffuser or return-air

opening. 6. Lighting Fixtures: Locate detectors not closer than 12 inches from any part of a lighting

fixture.

D. Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install not less than 6 inches below the ceiling. Install bells and horns on flush-mounted back boxes with the device-operating mechanism concealed behind a grille.

E. Visible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install adjacent to each alarm bell or alarm horn and at least 6 inches below the ceiling.

F. Fire-Alarm Control Unit: Surface mounted, with tops of cabinets not more than 72 inches above the finished floor.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Install framed instructions in a location visible from fire-alarm control unit.

3.3 GROUNDING

A. Ground fire-alarm control unit and associated circuits; comply with IEEE 1100. Install a ground wire from main service ground to fire-alarm control unit.


A. Field tests shall be witnessed by authorities having jurisdiction.







1. Visual Inspection: Conduct visual inspection prior to testing.

a. Inspection shall be based on completed Record Drawings and system documentation that is required by NFPA 72 in its "Completion Documents, Preparation" Table in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter.

b. Comply with "Visual Inspection Frequencies" Table in the "Inspection" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72; retain the "Initial/Reacceptance" column and list only the installed components.

2. System Testing: Comply with "Test Methods" Table in the "Testing" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72.

3. Test audible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions. Perform the test using a portable sound-level meter complying with Type 2 requirements in ANSI S1.4.

4. Test audible appliances for the private operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions.

5. Test visible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written instructions.

6. Factory-authorized service representative shall prepare the "Fire Alarm System Record of Completion" in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter in NFPA 72 and the "Inspection and Testing Form" in the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72.

E. Reacceptance Testing: Perform reacceptance testing to verify the proper operation of added or replaced devices and appliances.

F. Fire-alarm system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

G. Prepare test and inspection reports.

H. Maintenance Test and Inspection: Perform tests and inspections listed for weekly, monthly, quarterly, and semiannual periods. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.

I. Annual Test and Inspection: One year after date of Substantial Completion, test fire-alarm system complying with visual and testing inspection requirements in NFPA 72. Use forms developed for initial tests and inspections.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fire-alarm system.




SECTION 311000 - SITE CLEARING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Protecting existing vegetation to remain. 2. Removing existing vegetation. 3. Clearing and grubbing. 4. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil. 5. Removing above- and below-grade site improvements. 6. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and abandoning site utilities in place. 7. Temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures.


1. Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary utility services, construction and support facilities, security and protection facilities, and temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures.

2. Division 01 Section "Execution" for field engineering and surveying.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic matter and soil organisms.

B. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile at the Project site. In undisturbed areas, the surface soil is typically topsoil; but in disturbed areas such as urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil.

C. Topsoil: Top layer of the soil profile consisting of existing native surface topsoil or existing in-place surface soil and is the zone where plant roots grow.

D. Tree-Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees or groups of trees to be protected during construction, and defined by a circle concentric with each tree with a radius 1.5 times the diameter of the drip line unless otherwise indicated.

E. Vegetation: Trees, shrubs, groundcovers, grass, and other plants.

SITE CLEARING 311000 - 1

VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 1.4 MATERIAL GOVERNMENTSHIP

A. Except for stripped topsoil and other materials indicated to be stockpiled or otherwise remain Owner's property, cleared materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Existing Conditions: Documentation of existing trees and plantings, adjoining construction, and site improvements that establishes preconstruction conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by site clearing.

1. Use sufficiently detailed photographs or videotape. 2. Include plans and notations to indicate specific wounds and damage conditions of each

tree or other plants designated to remain.

B. Record Drawings: Identifying and accurately showing locations of capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, and mechanical conditions.


A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during site-clearing operations.

1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by Owner or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before site clearing.

C. Do not commence site clearing operations until temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control and plant-protection measures are in place.

D. The following practices are prohibited within protection zones:

1. Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material. 2. Parking vehicles or equipment. 3. Foot traffic. 4. Erection of sheds or structures. 5. Impoundment of water. 6. Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated. 7. Attachment of signs to or wrapping materials around trees or plants unless otherwise

indicated.

E. Do not direct vehicle or equipment exhaust towards protection zones.



F. Prohibit heat sources, flames, ignition sources, and smoking within or near protection zones.

G. Soil Stripping, Handling, and Stockpiling: Perform only when the topsoil is dry or slightly moist.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Satisfactory Soil Material: Requirements for satisfactory soil material are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."

1. Obtain approved borrow soil material off-site when satisfactory soil material is not available on-site.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during construction.

B. Locate and clearly identify trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to remain. Wrap a 1-inch blue vinyl tie tape flag around each tree trunk at 54 inches above the ground.

C. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction.

1. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner.

3.2 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL

A. Provide temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways, according to erosion- and sedimentation-control Drawings and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by construction activity do not enter or cross protection zones.

C. Inspect, maintain, and repair erosion- and sedimentation-control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established.

D. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during removal.


VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 3.3 TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION

A. General: Protect trees and plants remaining on-site according to requirements in Division 01 Section "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection."

B. Repair or replace trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or be relocated that are damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by Owner.

3.4 EXISTING UTILITIES

A. Owner will arrange for disconnecting and sealing indicated utilities that serve existing structures before site clearing, when requested by Contractor.

1. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before proceeding with site clearing.

B. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap utilities indicated to be removed or abandoned in place.

1. Arrange with utility companies to shut off indicated utilities. 2. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated utilities when requested by Contractor.

C. Locate, identify, and disconnect utilities indicated to be abandoned in place.

D. Interrupting Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner not less than five days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner's written permission.

E. Excavate for and remove underground utilities indicated to be removed.

3.5 CLEARING AND GRUBBING

A. Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to permit installation of new construction.

1. Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain. 2. Grind down stumps and remove roots, obstructions, and debris to a depth of 24 inches

below exposed subgrade. 3. Use only hand methods for grubbing within protection zones. 4. Chip removed tree branches and stockpile in areas approved by Owner.

B. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated.



1. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding a loose depth of 8 inches, and compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground.

3.6 TOPSOIL STRIPPING

A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil.

B. Strip topsoil to depth of 6 inches in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other waste materials.

1. Remove subsoil and nonsoil materials from topsoil, including clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than 2 inches in diameter; trash, debris, weeds, roots, and other waste materials.

C. Stockpile topsoil away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil. Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust and erosion by water.

1. Limit height of topsoil stockpiles to 72 inches. 2. Do not stockpile topsoil within protection zones. 3. Dispose of surplus topsoil. Surplus topsoil is that which exceeds quantity indicated to be

stockpiled or reused. 4. Stockpile surplus topsoil to allow for respreading deeper topsoil.

3.7 SITE IMPROVEMENTS

A. Remove existing above- and below-grade improvements as indicated and necessary to facilitate new construction.

B. Remove slabs, paving, curbs, gutters, and aggregate base as indicated.

1. Unless existing full-depth joints coincide with line of demolition, neatly saw-cut along line of existing pavement to remain before removing adjacent existing pavement. Saw-cut faces 45° off vertical.

2. Paint cut ends of steel reinforcement in concrete to remain with two coats of antirust coating, following coating manufacturer's written instructions. Keep paint off surfaces that will remain exposed.

3.8 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS

A. Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and waste materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

B. Separate recyclable materials produced during site clearing from other nonrecyclable materials. Store or stockpile without intermixing with other materials and transport them to recycling facilities. Do not interfere with other Project work.


VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO END OF SECTION 311000



SECTION 312000 - EARTH MOVING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-grade, walks, pavements and turf and grasses. 2. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures. 3. Drainage course for concrete slabs-on-grade. 4. Subbase course for concrete walks and pavements. 5. Subbase course and base course for asphalt paving. 6. Subsurface drainage backfill for walls and trenches. 7. Excavating and backfilling trenches for utilities and pits for buried utility structures.


1. Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation " for recording preexcavation and earth moving progress.

2. Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary controls, utilities, and support facilities; also for temporary site fencing if not in another Section.

3. Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for granular course if placed over vapor retarder and beneath the slab-on-grade.

4. Divisions 21, 22, 23, 26, 27, 28, and 33 Sections for installing underground mechanical and electrical utilities and buried mechanical and electrical structures.

5. Division 31 Section "Site Clearing" for site stripping, grubbing, stripping and stockpiling topsoil, and removal of above- and below-grade improvements and utilities.

6. Division 32 Section "Turf and Grasses" for finish grading in turf and grass areas, including preparing and placing planting soil for turf areas.

1.3 UNIT PRICES

A. Work of this Section is affected by unit prices for earth moving specified in Division 01 Section "Unit Prices."

B. Quantity allowances for earth moving are included in Division 01 Section "Allowances."

EARTH MOVING 312000 - 1

VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Backfill: Soil material or controlled low-strength material used to fill an excavation.

1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to support sides of pipe.

2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.

B. Base Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subbase course and hot-mix asphalt paving.

C. Bedding Course: Aggregate layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe.

D. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.

E. Drainage Course: Aggregate layer supporting the slab-on-grade that also minimizes upward capillary flow of pore water.

F. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and dimensions indicated.

1. Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions as directed by Architect. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for unit prices.

2. Bulk Excavation: Excavation more than 10 feet in width and more than 30 feet in length. 3. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated

lines and dimensions without direction by Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Architect, shall be without additional compensation.

G. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.

H. Rock: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, conglomerate deposits, and boulders of rock material that exceed 1 cu. Yd. for bulk excavation or 3/4 cu. yd. for footing, trench, and pit excavation that cannot be removed by rock excavating equipment equivalent to the following in size and performance ratings, without systematic drilling, ram hammering, ripping, or blasting, when permitted:

1. Excavation of Footings, Trenches, and Pits: Late-model, track-mounted hydraulic excavator; equipped with a 42-inch- wide, maximum, short-tip-radius rock bucket; rated at not less than 138-hp flywheel power with bucket-curling force of not less than 28,700 lbf and stick-crowd force of not less than 18,400 lbf with extra-long reach boom; measured according to SAE J-1179.

2. Bulk Excavation: Late-model, track-mounted loader; rated at not less than 230-hp flywheel power and developing a minimum of 47,992-lbf breakout force with a general-purpose bare bucket; measured according to SAE J-732.

I. Rock: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, conglomerate deposits, and boulders of rock material 3/4 cu. yd. or more in volume that exceed a standard penetration resistance of 100 blows/2 inches when tested by a geotechnical testing agency, according to ASTM D 1586.



J. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface.

K. Subbase Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and base course for hot-mix asphalt pavement, or aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and a cement concrete pavement or a cement concrete or hot-mix asphalt walk.

L. Subgrade: Uppermost surface of an excavation or the top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, drainage course, or topsoil materials.

M. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services within buildings.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of the following manufactured products required:

1. Warning tapes.

B. Samples for Verification: For the following products, in sizes indicated below:

1. Warning Tape: 12 inches long; of each color.


D. Material Test Reports: For each on-site and borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill as follows:

1. Classification according to ASTM D 2487. 2. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 698.

E. Preexcavation Photographs or Videotape: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces, that might be misconstrued as damage caused by earth moving operations. Submit before earth moving begins.


A. Geotechnical Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 and ASTM D 3740 for testing indicated.

B. Preexcavation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during earth moving operations.



1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by Owner or authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before beginning earth moving operations.

C. Do not commence earth moving operations until temporary erosion- and sedimentation-control measures, specified in Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls," are in place.

D. Do not commence earth moving operations until plant-protection measures specified in Division 01 Section "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection" are in place.

E. The following practices are prohibited within protection zones:

1. Storage of construction materials, debris, or excavated material. 2. Parking vehicles or equipment. 3. Foot traffic. 4. Erection of sheds or structures. 5. Impoundment of water. 6. Excavation or other digging unless otherwise indicated. 7. Attachment of signs to or wrapping materials around trees or plants unless otherwise

indicated.

F. Do not direct vehicle or equipment exhaust towards protection zones.

G. Prohibit heat sources, flames, ignition sources, and smoking within or near protection zones.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL MATERIALS

A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations.

B. Satisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM according to ASTM D 2487, or a combination of these groups; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter.

C. Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GC, SC, CL, ML, OL, CH, MH, OH, and PT according to ASTM D 2487, or a combination of these groups.

1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of optimum moisture content at time of compaction.



D. Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.

E. Base Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 95 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.

F. Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.

G. Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing a 1-inch sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.

H. Drainage Course: Narrowly graded mixture of washed crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 sieve.

I. Sand: ASTM C 33; fine aggregate.

J. Impervious Fill: Clayey gravel and sand mixture capable of compacting to a dense state.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility; colored as follows:

1. Red: Electric. 2. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials. 3. Orange: Telephone and other communications. 4. Blue: Water systems. 5. Green: Sewer systems.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earth moving operations.

B. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls during earth moving operations.


VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 3.2 DEWATERING

A. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area.

B. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water accumulation.

1. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches.

3.3 EXPLOSIVES

A. Explosives: Do not use explosives.

3.4 EXCAVATION, GENERAL

A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include rock, soil materials, and obstructions. No changes in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time will be authorized for rock excavation or removal of obstructions.

1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials.

2. Remove rock to lines and grades indicated to permit installation of permanent construction without exceeding the following dimensions:

a. 24 inches outside of concrete forms other than at footings. b. 12 inches outside of concrete forms at footings. c. 6 inches outside of minimum required dimensions of concrete cast against grade. d. Outside dimensions of concrete walls indicated to be cast against rock without

forms or exterior waterproofing treatments. e. 6 inches beneath bottom of concrete slabs-on-grade. f. 6 inches beneath pipe in trenches, and 24 inches wider than pipe.

B. Classified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations. Material to be excavated will be classified as earth and rock. Do not excavate rock until it has been classified and cross sectioned by Architect. The Contract Sum will be adjusted for rock excavation according to unit prices included in the Contract Documents. Changes in the Contract Time may be authorized for rock excavation.

1. Earth excavation includes excavating pavements and obstructions visible on surface; underground structures, utilities, and other items indicated to be removed; together with soil, boulders, and other materials not classified as rock or unauthorized excavation.

a. Intermittent drilling; ram hammering; or ripping of material not classified as rock excavation is earth excavation.



2. Rock excavation includes removal and disposal of rock. Remove rock to lines and subgrade elevations indicated to permit installation of permanent construction without exceeding the following dimensions:

a. 24 inches outside of concrete forms other than at footings. b. 12 inches outside of concrete forms at footings. c. 6 inches outside of minimum required dimensions of concrete cast against grade. d. Outside dimensions of concrete walls indicated to be cast against rock without

forms or exterior waterproofing treatments. e. 6 inches beneath bottom of concrete slabs-on-grade. f. 6 inches beneath pipe in trenches, and the greater of 24 inches .

3.5 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES

A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch. If applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections.

1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work.

2. Excavation for Electrical Utility Structures: Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch. Do not disturb bottom of excavations intended as bearing surfaces.

B. Excavations at Edges of Tree- and Plant-Protection Zones:

1. Excavate by hand to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades. Use narrow-tine spading forks to comb soil and expose roots. Do not break, tear, or chop exposed roots. Do not use mechanical equipment that rips, tears, or pulls roots.

2. Cut and protect roots according to requirements in Division 01 Section "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection."

3.6 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS

A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades.

3.7 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES

A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations.

1. Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top of pipe below frost line.



B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide the following clearance on each side of pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches higher than top of pipe or conduit unless otherwise indicated.

1. Clearance: 12 inches each side of pipe or conduit as indicated. 2. For pipes and conduit less than 6 inches in nominal diameter, hand-excavate trench

bottoms and support pipe and conduit on an undisturbed subgrade.

C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate trenches 4 inches deeper than bottom of pipe and conduit elevations to allow for bedding course. Hand-excavate deeper for bells of pipe.

1. Excavate trenches 6 inches deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding bearing material to allow for bedding course.

D. Trenches in Tree- and Plant-Protection Zones:

1. Hand-excavate to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades. Use narrow-tine spading forks to comb soil and expose roots. Do not break, tear, or chop exposed roots. Do not use mechanical equipment that rips, tears, or pulls roots.

2. Do not cut main lateral roots or taproots; cut only smaller roots that interfere with installation of utilities.

3. Cut and protect roots according to requirements in Division 01 Section "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection."

3.8 SUBGRADE INSPECTION

A. Notify Architect when excavations have reached required subgrade.

B. If Architect determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed.

C. Proof-roll subgrade below the building slabs and pavements with a pneumatic-tired and loaded 10-wheel, tandem-axle dump truck weighing not less than 15 tons to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades.

1. Completely proof-roll subgrade in one direction, repeating proof-rolling in direction perpendicular to first direction. Limit vehicle speed to 3 mph.

2. Excavate soft spots, unsatisfactory soils, and areas of excessive pumping or rutting, as determined by Architect, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed.

D. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for unit prices.

E. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by Architect, without additional compensation.


VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 3.9 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION

A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill, with 28-day compressive strength of 2500 psi, may be used when approved by Architect.

1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction, pipe, or conduit as directed by Architect.

3.10 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS

A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.

1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees.

3.11 BACKFILL

A. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following:

1. Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, subdrainage, dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation.

2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for Record Documents. 3. Testing and inspecting underground utilities. 4. Removing concrete formwork. 5. Removing trash and debris. 6. Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting. 7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls.

B. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud.

3.12 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL

A. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud.

B. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits.

C. Trenches under Footings: Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 18 inches of bottom of footings with satisfactory soil; fill with concrete to elevation of bottom of footings. Concrete is specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

D. Trenches under Roadways: Provide 4-inch thick, concrete-base slab support for piping or conduit less than 30 inches below surface of roadways. After installing and testing, completely



encase piping or conduit in a minimum of 4 inches of concrete before backfilling or placing roadway subbase course. Concrete is specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

E. Backfill voids with satisfactory soil while removing shoring and bracing.

F. Place and compact initial backfill of satisfactory soil, free of particles larger than 1 inch in any dimension, to a height of 12 inches over the pipe or conduit.

1. Carefully compact initial backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly up on both sides and along the full length of piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of piping or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.

G. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil to final subgrade elevation.

H. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches below subgrade under pavements and slabs.

3.13 SOIL FILL

A. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material will bond with existing material.

B. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows:

1. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material. 2. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material. 3. Under steps and ramps, use engineered fill. 4. Under building slabs, use engineered fill. 5. Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill.

C. Place soil fill on subgrades free of mud.

3.14 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL

A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content.

1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy. 2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that

exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight.


VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 3.15 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS

A. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.

B. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and uniformly along the full length of each structure.

C. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698:

1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12 inches of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95percent.

2. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 92 percent.

3. Under turf or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 85 percent.

4. For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material at 85percent.

3.16 GRADING

A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated.

1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades. 2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface

tolerances.

B. Site Rough Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances:

1. Turf or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch. 2. Walks: Plus or minus 1 inch. 3. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch.

C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch when tested with a 10-foot straightedge.

3.17 SUBSURFACE DRAINAGE

A. Subdrainage Pipe: Specified in Division 33 Section "Subdrainage."

B. Subsurface Drain: Place subsurface drainage geotextile around perimeter of subdrainage trench. Place a 6-inch course of filter material on subsurface drainage geotextile to support subdrainage pipe. Encase subdrainage pipe in a minimum of 12 inches of filter material, placed in



compacted layers 6 inches thick, and wrap in subsurface drainage geotextile, overlapping sides and ends at least 6 inches.

1. Compact each filter material layer to 85 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698 with a minimum of two passes of a plate-type vibratory compactor.

C. Drainage Backfill: Place and compact filter material over subsurface drain, in width indicated, to within 12 inches of final subgrade, in compacted layers 6 inches thick. Overlay drainage backfill with one layer of subsurface drainage geotextile, overlapping sides and ends at least 6 inches.

1. Compact each filter material layer to 85 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698 with a minimum of two passes of a plate-type vibratory compactor.

2. Place and compact impervious fill over drainage backfill in 6-inchthick compacted layers to final subgrade.

3.18 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES UNDER PAVEMENTS AND WALKS

A. Place subbase course and base course on subgrades free of mud.

B. On prepared subgrade, place subbase course and base course under pavements and walks as follows:

1. Place base course material over subbase course under hot-mix asphalt pavement. 2. Shape subbase course and base course to required crown elevations and cross-slope

grades. 3. Place subbase course and base course 6 inches or less in compacted thickness in a single

layer. 4. Compact subbase course and base course at optimum moisture content to required grades,

lines, cross sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.

C. Pavement Shoulders: Place shoulders along edges of subbase course and base course to prevent lateral movement. Construct shoulders, at least 12 inches wide, of satisfactory soil materials and compact simultaneously with each subbase and base layer to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.

3.19 DRAINAGE COURSE UNDER CONCRETE SLABS-ON-GRADE

A. Place drainage course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

B. On prepared subgrade, place and compact drainage course under cast-in-place concrete slabs-on-grade as follows:

1. Install subdrainage geotextile on prepared subgrade according to manufacturer's written instructions, overlapping sides and ends.

2. Place drainage course 6 inches or less in compacted thickness in a single layer.



3. Place drainage course that exceeds 6 inches in compacted thickness in layers of equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick.

4. Compact each layer of drainage course to required cross sections and thicknesses to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.


A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections:

1. Determine prior to placement of fill that site has been prepared in compliance with requirements.

2. Determine that fill material and maximum lift thickness comply with requirements. 3. Determine, at the required frequency, that in-place density of compacted fill complies

with requirements.

B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified geotechnical engineering testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

C. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent earth moving only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements.

D. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when approved by Architect.

E. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. Tests will be performed at the following locations and frequencies:

1. Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, at least one test for every 2000 sq. ft. or less of building slab, but in no case fewer than three tests.

2. Foundation Wall Backfill: At each compacted backfill layer, at least one test for every 100 feet or less of wall length, but no fewer than two tests.

3. Trench Backfill: At each compacted initial and final backfill layer, at least one test for every 150 feet or less of trench length, but no fewer than two tests.

F. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil materials to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.

3.21 PROTECTION

A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris.



B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions.

1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Architect; reshape and recompact.

C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.

1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.

3.22 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS

A. Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste materials, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

B. Transport surplus satisfactory soil to designated storage areas on Owner's property. Stockpile or spread soil as directed by Architect.

1. Remove waste materials, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.



VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSIDAD OF PUERTO RICO

SECTION 321216 - ASPHALT PAVING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Cold milling of existing hot-mix asphalt pavement. 2. Hot-mix asphalt patching. 3. Pavement-marking paint.


1. Division 02 Section "Structure Demolition" for demolition, removal, and recycling of existing asphalt pavements, and for geotextiles that are not embedded within courses of asphalt paving.

2. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for aggregate subbase and base courses and for aggregate pavement shoulders.

3. Division 32 Section "Concrete Paving Joint Sealants" for joint sealants and fillers at paving terminations.

1.3 DEFINITION

A. Hot-Mix Asphalt Paving Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 8 for definitions of terms.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include technical data and tested physical and performance properties.

1. Job-Mix Designs: Certification, by authorities having jurisdiction, of approval of each job mix proposed for the Work.

B. Qualification Data: For qualified manufacturer and Installer.

C. Material Certificates: For each paving material, from manufacturer.

D. Material Test Reports: For each paving material.

ASPHALT PAVING 321216 - 1

VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSIDAD OF PUERTO RICO 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A paving-mix manufacturer registered with and approved by authorities having jurisdiction or the DOT of state in which Project is located.

B. Installer Qualifications: asphalt manufacturer's authorized installer who is trained and approved for installation of asphalt required for this Project.

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM D 3666 for testing indicated.

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Review methods and procedures related to hot-mix asphalt paving including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Review proposed sources of paving materials, including capabilities and location of plant that will manufacture hot-mix asphalt.

b. Review condition of subgrade and preparatory work. c. Review requirements for protecting paving work, including restriction of traffic

during installation period and for remainder of construction period. d. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials,

Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.


A. Deliver pavement-marking materials to Project site in original packages with seals unbroken and bearing manufacturer's labels containing brand name and type of material, date of manufacture, and directions for storage.

B. Store pavement-marking materials in a clean, dry, protected location within temperature range required by manufacturer. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply asphalt materials if subgrade is wet or excessively damp, if rain is imminent or expected before time required for adequate cure, or if the following conditions are not met:

1. Prime Coat: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F. 2. Tack Coat: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F. 3. Slurry Coat: Comply with weather limitations in ASTM D 3910. 4. Asphalt Base Course: Minimum surface temperature of 40 deg F and rising at time of

placement. 5. Asphalt Surface Course: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F at time of placement.



B. Pavement-Marking Paint: Proceed with pavement marking only on clean, dry surfaces and at a minimum ambient or surface temperature of 40 deg F for oil-based materials or 55 deg F for water-based materials, and not exceeding 95 deg F.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 AGGREGATES

A. General: Use materials and gradations that have performed satisfactorily in previous installations.

B. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM D 692, sound; angular crushed stone, crushed gravel, or cured, crushed blast-furnace slag.

C. Fine Aggregate: ASTM D 1073, sharp-edged natural sand or sand prepared from stone, gravel, cured blast-furnace slag, or combinations thereof.

1. For hot-mix asphalt, limit natural sand to a maximum of 20 percent by weight of the total aggregate mass.

D. Mineral Filler: ASTM D 242, rock or slag dust, hydraulic cement, or other inert material.

2.2 ASPHALT MATERIALS

A. Asphalt Binder: AASHTO M 320 or AASHTO MP 1a, PG 64-22.

B. Asphalt Cement: ASTM D 3381 for viscosity-graded material.

C. Prime Coat: ASTM D 2027, medium-curing cutback asphalt, MC-30 or MC-70.

D. Tack Coat: ASTM D 977 emulsified asphalt, or ASTM D 2397 [or] [AASHTO M 208] cationic emulsified asphalt, slow setting, diluted in water, of suitable grade and consistency for application.

E. Fog Seal: ASTM D 977 emulsified asphalt, or ASTM D 2397 cationic emulsified asphalt, slow setting, factory diluted in water, of suitable grade and consistency for application.

F. Water: Potable.

G. Undersealing Asphalt: ASTM D 3141, pumping consistency.

2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. Herbicide: Commercial chemical for weed control, registered by the EPA. Provide in granular, liquid, or wettable powder form.

B. Sand: ASTM D 1073, Grade Nos. 2 or 3.



C. Joint Sealant: ASTM D 6690 Type I, hot-applied, single-component, polymer-modified bituminous sealant.

D. Pavement-Marking Paint: MPI #32 Alkyd Traffic Marking Paint.

1. Color: Yellow.

E. Glass Beads: AASHTO M 247, Type 1.

2.4 MIXES

A. Hot-Mix Asphalt: Dense, hot-laid, hot-mix asphalt plant mixes approved by authorities having jurisdiction and designed according to procedures in AI MS-2, "Mix Design Methods for Asphalt Concrete and Other Hot-Mix Types."

1. Provide mixes with a history of satisfactory performance in geographical area where Project is located.

2. Provide mixes complying with composition, grading, and tolerance requirements in ASTM D 3515 for the following nominal, maximum aggregate sizes:

a. Base Course: 1 inch. b. Surface Course: 1/2 inch.

B. Emulsified-Asphalt Slurry: ASTM D 3910, Type 1.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that subgrade is dry and in suitable condition to begin paving.

1. Determined by Architect, and replace with compacted backfill or fill as directed.

B. Proceed with paving only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

C. Verify that utilities, and other items requiring a cut and installation beneath the asphalt surface have been completed and that asphalt surface has been repaired flush with adjacent asphalt prior to beginning installation of imprinted asphalt.

3.2 PATCHING

A. Hot-Mix Asphalt Pavement: Saw cut perimeter of patch and excavate existing pavement section to sound base. Excavate rectangular or trapezoidal patches, extending 12 inches into adjacent sound pavement, unless otherwise indicated. Cut excavation faces at 45° from vertical. Remove excavated material. Recompact existing unbound-aggregate base course to form new subgrade.



B. Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to vertical surfaces abutting or projecting into new, hot-mix asphalt paving at a rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal./sq. yd..

1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot-mix asphalt paving. 2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings.

Remove spillages and clean affected surfaces.

C. Patching: Fill excavated pavements with hot-mix asphalt base mix for full thickness of patch and, while still hot, compact flush with adjacent surface.

D. Patching: Partially fill excavated pavements with hot-mix asphalt base mix and, while still hot, compact. Cover asphalt base course with compacted, hot-mix surface layer finished flush with adjacent surfaces.

3.3 REPAIRS

A. Leveling Course: Install and compact leveling course consisting of hot-mix asphalt surface course to level sags and fill depressions deeper than 1 inch in existing pavements.

1. Install leveling wedges in compacted lifts not exceeding 3 inches thick.

B. Crack and Joint Filling: Remove existing joint filler material from cracks or joints to a depth of 1/4 inch.

1. Clean cracks and joints in existing hot-mix asphalt pavement. 2. Use emulsified-asphalt slurry to seal cracks and joints less than 1/4 inch wide. Fill flush

with surface of existing pavement and remove excess. 3. Use hot-applied joint sealant to seal cracks and joints more than 1/4 inch wide. Fill flush

with surface of existing pavement and remove excess.

3.4 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. General: Immediately before placing asphalt materials, remove loose and deleterious material from substrate surfaces. Ensure that prepared subgrade is ready to receive paving.

B. Herbicide Treatment: Apply herbicide according to manufacturer's recommended rates and written application instructions. Apply to dry, prepared subgrade or surface of compacted-aggregate base before applying paving materials.

1. Mix herbicide with prime coat if formulated by manufacturer for that purpose.

C. Prime Coat: Apply uniformly over surface of compacted unbound-aggregate base course at a rate of 0.15 to 0.50 gal./sq. yd.. Apply enough material to penetrate and seal but not flood surface. Allow prime coat to cure.

1. If prime coat is not entirely absorbed within 24 hours after application, spread sand over surface to blot excess asphalt. Use enough sand to prevent pickup under traffic. Remove loose sand by sweeping before pavement is placed and after volatiles have evaporated.



2. Protect primed substrate from damage until ready to receive paving.

D. Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to surfaces of existing pavement at a rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal./sq. yd..

1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot-mix asphalt paving. 2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings.

Remove spillages and clean affected surfaces.

3.5 HOT-MIX ASPHALT PLACING

A. Machine place hot-mix asphalt on prepared surface, spread uniformly, and strike off. Place asphalt mix by hand to areas inaccessible to equipment in a manner that prevents segregation of mix. Place each course to required grade, cross section, and thickness when compacted.

1. Place hot-mix asphalt base course in number of lifts and thicknesses indicated. 2. Place hot-mix asphalt surface course in single lift. 3. Spread mix at minimum temperature of 250 deg F. 4. Begin applying mix along centerline of crown for crowned sections and on high side of

one-way slopes unless otherwise indicated. 5. Regulate paver machine speed to obtain smooth, continuous surface free of pulls and

tears in asphalt-paving mat.

B. Place paving in consecutive strips not less than 10 feet wide unless infill edge strips of a lesser width are required.

1. After first strip has been placed and rolled, place succeeding strips and extend rolling to overlap previous strips. Complete a section of asphalt base course before placing asphalt surface course.

C. Promptly correct surface irregularities in paving course behind paver. Use suitable hand tools to remove excess material forming high spots. Fill depressions with hot-mix asphalt to prevent segregation of mix; use suitable hand tools to smooth surface.

3.6 COMPACTION

A. General: Begin compaction as soon as placed hot-mix paving will bear roller weight without excessive displacement. Compact hot-mix paving with hot, hand tampers or with vibratory-plate compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers.

1. Complete compaction before mix temperature cools to 185 deg F.

B. Breakdown Rolling: Complete breakdown or initial rolling immediately after rolling joints and outside edge. Examine surface immediately after breakdown rolling for indicated crown, grade, and smoothness. Correct laydown and rolling operations to comply with requirements.



C. Intermediate Rolling: Begin intermediate rolling immediately after breakdown rolling while hot-mix asphalt is still hot enough to achieve specified density. Continue rolling until hot-mix asphalt course has been uniformly compacted to the following density:

1. Average Density: 92 percent of reference maximum theoretical density according to ASTM D 2041, but not less than 90 percent nor greater than 96 percent.

D. Finish Rolling: Finish roll paved surfaces to remove roller marks while hot-mix asphalt is still warm.

E. Edge Shaping: While surface is being compacted and finished, trim edges of pavement to proper alignment. Bevel edges while asphalt is still hot; compact thoroughly.

F. Repairs: Remove paved areas that are defective or contaminated with foreign materials and replace with fresh, hot-mix asphalt. Compact by rolling to specified density and surface smoothness.

G. Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled and hardened.

H. Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to become marked.

3.7 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

A. Pavement Thickness: Compact each course to produce the thickness indicated within the following tolerances:

1. Base Course: Plus or minus 1/2 inch. 2. Surface Course: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus.

B. Pavement Surface Smoothness: Compact each course to produce a surface smoothness within the following tolerances as determined by using a 10-foot straightedge applied transversely or longitudinally to paved areas:

1. Base Course: 1/4 inch. 2. Surface Course: 1/8 inch. 3. Crowned Surfaces: Test with crowned template centered and at right angle to crown.

Maximum allowable variance from template is 1/4 inch.

3.8 PAVEMENT MARKING

A. Do not apply pavement-marking paint until layout, colors, and placement have been verified with Architect.

B. Allow paving to age for 30 days before starting pavement marking.

C. Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust.



D. Apply paint with mechanical equipment to produce pavement markings, of dimensions indicated, with uniform, straight edges. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rates to provide a minimum wet film thickness of 15 mils.

1. Broadcast glass beads uniformly into wet pavement markings at a rate of 6 lb/gal..



B. Thickness: In-place compacted thickness of hot-mix asphalt courses will be determined according to ASTM D 3549.

C. Surface Smoothness: Finished surface of each hot-mix asphalt course will be tested for compliance with smoothness tolerances.

D. In-Place Density: Testing agency will take samples of uncompacted paving mixtures and compacted pavement according to ASTM D 979.

1. Reference maximum theoretical density will be determined by averaging results from four samples of hot-mix asphalt-paving mixture delivered daily to site, prepared according to ASTM D 2041, and compacted according to job-mix specifications.

2. In-place density of compacted pavement will be determined by testing core samples according to ASTM D 1188 or ASTM D 2726.

a. One core sample will be taken for every 1000 sq. yd. or less of installed pavement, with no fewer than 3 cores taken.

b. Field density of in-place compacted pavement may also be determined by nuclear method according to ASTM D 2950 and correlated with ASTM D 1188 or ASTM D 2726.

E. Replace and compact hot-mix asphalt where core tests were taken.

F. Remove and replace or install additional hot-mix asphalt where test results or measurements indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.

3.10 DISPOSAL

A. Except for material indicated to be recycled, remove excavated materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.

1. Do not allow milled materials to accumulate on-site.




SECTION 321313 - CONCRETE PAVING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Driveways. 2. Walks.


1. Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete for general building applications of concrete.

2. Division 32 Section "Concrete Paving " for joint fillers in expansion and contraction joints within concrete paving and in joints between concrete paving and asphalt paving or adjacent construction.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, and ground granulated blast-furnace slag.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. LEED Submittals:

1. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.

2. Design Mixtures for Credit ID 1.1: For each concrete mixture containing fly ash as a replacement for portland cement or other portland cement replacements. For each design mixture submitted, include an equivalent concrete mixture that does not contain portland cement replacements, to determine amount of portland cement replaced.

C. Other Action Submittals:

CONCRETE PAVING 321313 - 1


1. Design Mixtures: For each concrete paving mixture. Include alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.

D. Qualification Data: For qualified ready-mix concrete manufacturer and testing agency.

E. Material Certificates: For the following, from manufacturer:

1. Cementitious materials. 2. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories. 3. Admixtures. 4. Curing compounds. 5. Applied finish materials. 6. Bonding agent or epoxy adhesive. 7. Joint fillers.



A. Ready-Mix-Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.

1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities" (Quality Control Manual - Section 3, "Plant Certification Checklist").

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.

1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program.

C. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.

D. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301 unless otherwise indicated.


A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities.



2.1 FORMS

A. Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood, or other approved panel-type materials to provide full-depth, continuous, straight, and smooth exposed surfaces.

1. Use flexible or uniformly curved forms for curves with a radius of 100 feet or less. Do not use notched and bent forms.

B. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and that will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.

2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Recycled Content: Provide steel reinforcement with an average recycled content of steel so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent.

B. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, fabricated from galvanized-steel wire into flat sheets.

C. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497/A 497M, flat sheet.

D. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60; deformed.

E. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 plain-steel bars; zinc coated (galvanized) after fabrication according to ASTM A 767/A 767M, Class I coating. Cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs.

F. Tie Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.

G. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars, welded wire reinforcement, and dowels in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete specified, and as follows:

1. Equip wire bar supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will not support chair legs.

H. Zinc Repair Material: ASTM A 780.

2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of same type, brand, and source throughout Project:



1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, white portland cement Type I. Supplement with the following:

a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C. b. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120.

2. Blended Hydraulic Cement: ASTM C 595, Type IS, portland blast-furnace slag] cement.

B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 4S, uniformly graded. Provide aggregates from a single source[ with documented service-record data of at least 10 years' satisfactory service in similar paving applications and service conditions using similar aggregates and cementitious materials.

1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch nominal. 2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.

C. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94/C 94M.

D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.

a. LANXESS Corporation. b. QC Construction Products. c. Scofield, L. M. Company. d. Solomon Colors, Inc. e. Stampcrete International, Ltd. f. SureCrete Design Products.

2.4 CURING MATERIALS

A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 3, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. dry.

B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

C. Water: Potable.

D. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular, film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete.


a. Axim Italcementi Group, Inc.; Caltexol CIMFILM. b. BASF Construction Chemicals, LLC; Confilm. c. ChemMasters; Spray-Film. d. Dayton Superior Corporation; Sure Film (J-74). e. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Eucobar.



f. Kaufman Products, Inc.; VaporAid. g. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; E-CON. h. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; EVAPRE. i. Metalcrete Industries; Waterhold. j. Sika Corporation, Inc.; SikaFilm. k. TK Products, Division of Sierra Corporation; TK-2120 TRI-FILM. l. Unitex; PRO-FILM.

E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, dissipating.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:

a. Anti-Hydro International, Inc.; A-H Curing Compound #2 DR WB. b. ChemMasters; Safe-Cure Clear. c. Dayton Superior Corporation; Day-Chem Rez Cure (J-11-W). d. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; L&M CURE R. e. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; 1100-CLEAR SERIES.

2.5 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Joint Fillers: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber in preformed strips.

B. Slip-Resistive Aggregate Finish: Factory-graded, packaged, rustproof, nonglazing, abrasive aggregate of fused aluminum-oxide granules or crushed emery aggregate containing not less than 50 percent aluminum oxide and not less than 20 percent ferric oxide; unaffected by freezing, moisture, and cleaning materials.

C. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059, Type II, non-redispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene.

2.6 PAVEMENT MARKINGS

A. Pavement-Marking Paint: MPI #32 Alkyd Traffic Marking Paint.

1. Color: Yellow.

B. Glass Beads: AASHTO M 247, Type 1.

2.7 CONCRETE MIXTURES

A. Prepare design mixtures, proportioned according to ACI 301, for each type and strength of normal-weight concrete, and as determined by either laboratory trial mixtures or field experience.



1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed concrete design mixtures for the trial batch method.

2. When automatic machine placement is used, determine design mixtures and obtain laboratory test results that meet or exceed requirements.

B. Proportion mixtures to provide normal-weight concrete with the following properties:

1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 3000 psi. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio at Point of Placement: 0.45 . 3. Slump Limit: 5 inches, plus or minus 1 inch.

C. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in normal-weight concrete at point of placement having an air content as follows:

1. Air Content: 3-1/2 percent plus or minus 1.5 percent for 3/4-inch nominal maximum aggregate size.

D. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight of cement.

E. Chemical Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.

F. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage by weight of cementitious materials other than portland cement according to ACI 301 requirements as follows:

1. Fly Ash or Pozzolan: 25 percent. 2. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 50 percent. 3. Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolan, and Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 50 percent,

with fly ash or pozzolan not exceeding 25 percent.

2.8 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M[ and ASTM C 1116/C 1116M]. Furnish batch certificates for each batch discharged and used in the Work.

1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

B. Project-Site Mixing: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M. Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum-type batch machine mixer.


VETERINARY CLINIC, CARIBBEAN PRIMATE RESEARCH CENTER UNIVERSITY OF PUERTO RICO 3.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, or other bond-reducing materials.

C. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement.

D. Install welded wire reinforcement in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh, and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction.

E. Zinc-Coated Reinforcement: Use galvanized-steel wire ties to fasten zinc-coated reinforcement. Repair cut and damaged zinc coatings with zinc repair material.

3.5 JOINTS

A. General: Form construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edges true to line, with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to centerline unless otherwise indicated.

1. When joining existing paving, place transverse joints to align with previously placed joints unless otherwise indicated.

B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of paving and at locations where paving operations are stopped for more than one-half hour unless paving terminates at isolation joints.

1. Continue steel reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of paving strips unless otherwise indicated.

2. Provide tie bars at sides of paving strips where indicated. 3. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated.

Lubricate or coat with asphalt one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.

C. Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint-filler strips abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, other fixed objects, and where indicated.

1. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint. 2. Terminate joint filler not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch below finished surface if

joint sealant is indicated. 3. Place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface if joint sealant is not

indicated. 4. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths. Where more than one length is required, lace or

clip joint-filler sections together.



5. During concrete placement, protect top edge of joint filler with metal, plastic, or other temporary preformed cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has been placed on both sides of joint.

D. Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of the concrete thickness, as follows:

1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing each edge of joint with grooving tool to a 1/4-inch radius. Repeat grooving of contraction joints after applying surface finishes.

a. Tolerance: Ensure that grooved joints are within 2 inches either way from centers of dowels.

2. Doweled Contraction Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or coat with asphalt one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.

E. Edging: After initial floating, tool edges of paving, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete with an edging tool to a 1/4-inch radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface finishes.

3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, steel reinforcement, and items to be embedded or cast-in.

B. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at required finish elevation and alignment.

C. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing concrete.

D. Do not add water to concrete during delivery or at Project site. Do not add water to fresh concrete after testing.

E. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place.

F. Consolidate concrete according to ACI 301 by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand spading, rodding, or tamping.

1. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or side forms. Use only square-faced shovels for hand spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocating reinforcement, dowels and joint devices.

G. Screed paving surface with a straightedge and strike off.



H. Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to impart an open-textured and uniform surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or spreading surface treatments.

I. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows when hot-weather conditions exist:

1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated in total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Cover steel reinforcement with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.

3. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

3.7 FLOAT FINISHING

A. General: Do not add water to concrete surfaces during finishing operations.

B. Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleed-water sheen has disappeared and concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true planes. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to uniform granular texture.

1. Medium-to-Fine-Textured Broom Finish: Draw a soft-bristle broom across float-finished concrete surface perpendicular to line of traffic to provide a uniform, fine-line texture.

3.8 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures.

B. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection.

C. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete but before float finishing.

D. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface.

E. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moisture curing moisture-retaining-cover curing or a combination of these as follows:



2. Broadcast glass beads uniformly into wet markings at a rate of 6 lb/gal..



B. Testing Services: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements:

1. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. or fraction thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day.

a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.

2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.

3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.

4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below and when it is 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample.

5. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M; cast and laboratory cure one set of three standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample.

6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one specimen at seven days and two specimens at 28 days.

a. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at 28 days.

C. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi.

D. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.

E. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete.



F. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect.

G. Concrete paving will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

H. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

I. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.12 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Remove and replace concrete paving that is broken, damaged, or defective or that does not comply with requirements in this Section. Remove work in complete sections from joint to joint unless otherwise approved by Architect.

B. Drill test cores, where directed by Architect, when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory paving areas with portland cement concrete bonded to paving with epoxy adhesive.

C. Protect concrete paving from damage. Exclude traffic from paving for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain paving as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.

D. Maintain concrete paving free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep paving not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections.




SECTION 329200 - TURF AND GRASSES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Sodding. 2. Erosion-control material(s).


1. Division 31 Section "Site Clearing" for topsoil stripping and stockpiling. 2. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavation, filling and backfilling, and rough

grading.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Duff Layer: The surface layer of native topsoil that is composed of mostly decayed leaves, twigs, and detritus.

B. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil.

C. Manufactured Topsoil: Soil produced off-site by homogeneously blending mineral soils or sand with stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil or planting soil.

D. Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating a pest. This includes insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides, rodenticides, and molluscicides. It also includes substances or mixtures intended for use as a plant regulator, defoliant, or desiccant.

E. Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired or that cause damage to plants, animals, or people. These include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and slugs), rodents (gophers, moles, and mice), unwanted plants (weeds), fungi, bacteria, and viruses.

F. Planting Soil: Standardized topsoil; existing, native surface topsoil; existing, in-place surface soil; imported topsoil; or manufactured topsoil that is modified with soil amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth.

TURF AND GRASSES 329200 - 1


G. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or top surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed.

H. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic matter and soil organisms.

I. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile at the Project site. In undisturbed areas, the surface soil is typically topsoil, but in disturbed areas such as urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Certification of Grass Seed: From seed vendor for each grass-seed monostand or mixture stating the botanical and common name, percentage by weight of each species and variety, and percentage of purity, germination, and weed seed. Include the year of production and date of packaging.

1. Certification of each seed mixture for turfgrass sod. Include identification of source and name and telephone number of supplier.

B. Qualification Data: For qualified landscape Installer.

C. Material Test Reports: For existing native surface topsoil.

D. Maintenance Instructions: Recommended procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of turf during a calendar year. Submit before expiration of required initial maintenance periods.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape Installer whose work has resulted in successful turf establishment.

1. Professional Membership: Installer shall be a member in good standing of either the Professional Landcare Network or the American Nursery and Landscape Association.

2. Experience: Three years' experience in turf installation in addition to requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements."

3. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on Project site when work is in progress.

4. Personnel Certifications: Installer's field supervisor shall have certification in one of the following categories from the Professional Landcare Network:

a. Certified Landscape Technician - Exterior, with installation specialty area(s), designated CLT-Exterior.

b. Certified Turfgrass Professional, designated CTP. c. Certified Turfgrass Professional of Cool Season Lawns, designated CTP-CSL.



B. Newly Graded Subgrades: Loosen subgrade to a minimum depth of 4 inches. Remove stones larger than 1 inch in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

1. Thoroughly blend planting soil off-site before spreading.

2. Spread planting soil to a depth of 4 inches but not less than required to meet finish grades after light rolling and natural settlement. Do not spread if planting soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet.

a. Spread approximately 1/2 the thickness of planting soil over loosened subgrade. Mix thoroughly into top 2 inches of subgrade. Spread remainder of planting soil.

b. Reduce elevation of planting soil to allow for soil thickness of sod.

C. Unchanged Subgrades: If turf is to be planted in areas unaltered or undisturbed by excavating, grading, or surface-soil stripping operations, prepare surface soil as follows:

1. Remove existing grass, vegetation, and turf. Do not mix into surface soil.

2. Loosen surface soil to a depth of at least 6 inches.

3. Remove stones larger than 1 inch in any dimension and sticks, roots, trash, and other extraneous matter.

4. Legally dispose of waste material, including grass, vegetation, and turf, off Owner's property.

D. Finish Grading: Grade planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Grade to within plus or minus 1/2 inch of finish elevation. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades. Limit finish grading to areas that can be planted in the immediate future.

E. Moisten prepared area before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface to dry before planting. Do not create muddy soil.

F. Before planting, obtain Architect's acceptance of finish grading; restore planting areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading.

3.4 PREPARATION FOR EROSION-CONTROL MATERIALS

A. Prepare area as specified in "Turf Area Preparation" Article.

B. For erosion-control mats, install planting soil in two lifts, with second lift equal to thickness of erosion-control mats. Install erosion-control mat and fasten as recommended by material manufacturer.

C. Fill cells of erosion-control mat with planting soil and compact before planting.



G. Remove waste and foreign materials, including weeds, soil cores, grass, vegetation, and turf, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

H. Till stripped, bare, and compacted areas thoroughly to a soil depth of 6 inches.

I. Apply soil amendments and initial fertilizers required for establishing new turf and mix thoroughly into top 4 inches of existing soil. Install new planting soil to fill low spots and meet finish grades.

J. Apply sod as required for new turf.

K. Water newly planted areas and keep moist until new turf is established.

3.7 TURF MAINTENANCE

A. Maintain and establish turf by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming, replanting, and performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable turf. Roll, regrade, and replant bare or eroded areas and remulch to produce a uniformly smooth turf. Provide materials and installation the same as those used in the original installation.

1. Fill in as necessary soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other processes. Replace materials and turf damaged or lost in areas of subsidence.

2. In areas where mulch has been disturbed by wind or maintenance operations, add new mulch and anchor as required to prevent displacement.

3. Apply treatments as required to keep turf and soil free of pests and pathogens or disease. Use integrated pest management practices whenever possible to minimize the use of pesticides and reduce hazards.

B. Watering: Install and maintain temporary piping, hoses, and turf-watering equipment to convey water from sources and to keep turf uniformly moist to a depth of 4 inches.

1. Schedule watering to prevent wilting, puddling, erosion, and displacement of seed or mulch. Lay out temporary watering system to avoid walking over muddy or newly planted areas.

2. Water turf with fine spray at a minimum rate of 1 inch per week unless rainfall precipitation is adequate.

C. Mow turf as soon as top growth is tall enough to cut. Repeat mowing to maintain specified height without cutting more than 1/3 of grass height. Remove no more than 1/3 of grass-leaf growth in initial or subsequent mowings. Do not delay mowing until grass blades bend over and become matted. Do not mow when grass is wet. Schedule initial and subsequent mowings to maintain the following grass height:

1. Mow bermudagrass to a height of 1/2 to 1 inch.

3.8 SATISFACTORY TURF

A. Turf installations shall meet the following criteria as determined by Architect:



1. Satisfactory Sodded Turf: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, well-rooted, even-colored, viable turf has been established, free of weeds, open joints, bare areas, and surface irregularities.

B. Use specified materials to reestablish turf that does not comply with requirements and continue maintenance until(ly)- Td[s satisfactory.

C.

3.9 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION

A.